Home

Inter-Tel CS-5400 User's Manual

Contents

1. PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 379 Your fax is scheduled to be delivered at N A 380 Please enter a document number Please say or enter the document number 381 When you have finished importing documents When you are done importing documents say press star Finished or press star 382 Document number N A 383 is currently in use N A 384 already exists N A 385 To replace this document press pound To replace this document say Replace or press pound 386 Document received N A 387 Press pound to continue Say Continue or press pound to continue 388 To import a fax document press four To import a fax document say Import Fax or press four 389 If this is an international call enter 011 fol If this is an international call say or enter 011 lowed by the country code and fax number followed by the country code and fax number Then press pound Then say or press pound 390 I m sorry I m not allowed to dial that number N A 391 To receive your documents please hang up N A and call from your fax machine 392 The system does not have enough disk space N A to import your document 393 The system is unable to import your document N A because it will exceed the Maximum Fax Library Size 394 For recording options press three For recording options say Options or press three 395 There are N A 396 calls ahead of you N A 397 Your call should be
2. PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 085 To save this message press seven To save this message say Save or press seven 086 To delete this message press nine To delete this message say Delete Message or press nine 087 To skip to the end of your message or record To skip to the end of your message or record ing press pound ing say Skip or press pound 088 To return to the main menu press star To return to the main menu say Cancel or press star 089 To reply to this message press two To reply to this message say Reply or press two 090 To forward a copy of this message to another To forward a copy of this message to another destination press three destination say Forward or press three 091 To replay the previous message press four To replay the previous message say Previ ous or press four 092 To replay the message envelope press five To replay the message envelope say Enve lope or press five 093 To listen to your next message press six To listen to your next message say Next or press six 094 There are no previous messages N A 095 Message saved N A 096 Message deleted N A 097 There are no further messages N A 098 Message received N A 099 at N A 100 from N A 101 totaling N A 102 minutes N A 103 minute N A 104 Seconds N A 105 Second N A Page 317 Voice Processing Pro
3. ES ne LOGIN LOGIN LOGIN ALL LOGIN ALL NODE NODE DISPLAY RESULT DISPLAY RESULT Yes Yes AGENT Agent AGENT Agent logged LOGGED logged into LOGGED INTO into all local and INTO HUNT hunt group ALL ACDS remote groups GROUP XXXX Yes No CANNOT Agent not AGENT Agent logged ACCESS logged into LOGGED INTO into all local RESERVED group ALL ACDS hunt groups but FEATURE not remote where feature disabled No Yes CANNOT Agent not AGENT Agent logged ACCESS logged into LOGGED INTO into all local but RESERVED group ALL ACDS no remote FEATURE groups No No CANNOT Agent not AGENT Agent logged ACCESS logged into LOGGED INTO into all local but RESERVED group ALL ACDS no remote FEATURE groups Database Programming e ACD hunt groups have options allowing the addition of endpoint off node devices sin gle line off node devices and hunt group member extension lists containing local or off node endpoints or both ACD Hunt Groups Span Nodes Page 149 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 e Ifthe Remote Call Distribution Hunt Groups premium feature is not included in the node s software license the off node options will not appear in the list when program ming members for ACD hunt groups Operational Changes e The Station Monitor feature remains limited to a single node Members who are logged in to a remote node or who are logged in t
4. FUNCTION NUMBER Attendant 0 Endpoints 1000 1999 Hunt groups 1 75 2000 2074 or 2000 2299 Voice Processing System Applications 2500 2999 Page Zones 9600 9609 or 9600 9649 Used only for program ming a feature button to select a page zone External Page Ports 91000 91003 Individual Trunks 94000 95999 Determined by the bay and device number Used for programming and troubleshoot ing Extension Numbers Page 131 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Attendant Phones An Attendant phone can be called by dialing 0 from any of the phones served by them Typi cally an attendant phone is programmed to provide the following services e Central operator for incoming calls e Message center e Recall endpoint for unanswered calls Any phone can be designated as an Attendant phone during database programming Attendant stations should be equipped with display phones so the Attendant can see the source names and numbers of Recall calls Model 8520 and 8560 phones support the Mini DSS which provides 16 user programmable buttons A hunt group can be assigned to serve as an Attendant However the individual stations in the hunt group are not required to be programmed as Attendant phones and the database will not reflect that the individual phones serve as an Attendant for any other phones The feature that separates functions is especially useful when a Voic
5. 18 and 21 35 endpoint extension or System Speed Dial bin CNF Programmable Button 7 Conference 5 HOLD Programmable Button 8 Individual Hold 336 TRANSFER Programmable Button 9 Transfer to Ring 345 SYS SPD Programmable Button 10 System Speed Dial 381 REDIAL Programmable Button 11 Redial 380 PAGE Programmable Button 12 Page 7 QUEUE Programmable Button 13 Queue Request 6 MUSIC Programmable Button 17 Background Music 313 PAGE ZONE 1 Programmable Button 19 Selects Page Zone 1 for making a page STN SPEED DIAL Programmable Button 20 Station Speed Dial 382 FWD Call Forward All Calls 355 Also used for canceling Call Forward SPECIAL Signals the system to expect a feature code ANSWER Answer 351 OUTGOING Selects a trunk for placing an outgoing call using the phone s Outgo ing Call feature 8 SPEAKER Speakerphone On Off MSG Message 365 Also retrieves messages when the flashing MSG button is pressed MUTE Microphone Mute On Off 314 This is a fixed function button on digital phones DATA Data 340 STATION SPEED DIAL BUTTONS 0 9 Used for storing and dialing one Station Speed Dial number each UNDEFINED Some phones may have several undefined buttons that can be pro grammed as desired A keymap group determines the layout of the buttons for all the phones assigned to that group If any of the buttons in the keymap grou
6. PROMPT ID CONTENT 299 For Saturday press 7 300 For Monday through Friday service press 1 301 For all the days of the week press 2 302 Thousand 303 The hard disk is 304 percent full 305 I m sorry Voice mail is full and cannot re cord any messages 306 Zero 307 POUND 308 STAR 309 Group list number 310 Please speak louder 311 You have recorded for the maximum time permitted 312 Not used 313 Resuming playback 314 You have one priority message 315 Use 2 digits for the hour and 2 digits for the minutes 316 317 Not used 318 You have chosen not to have a password 319 I m sorry This mailbox is currently in use and cannot be accessed Please try again later 320 Not used 321 If you are calling from a rotary type phone please stay on the line and your call will be answered 322 You cannot reply to a system sent message 323 Zero is not a valid entry To spell a name please press one number on the phone dialpad for each letter of the person s name you are entering For the letter A press the number 2 button one time and for the letter F press the number 3 button one time When you are finished press POUND Page 305 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 306 Table 42 Voice Prompts BVM EM and VPU Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT 324 Ze
7. 2 When the OHVA Screening timer expires and if the endpoint s secondary voice path is available you are automatically connected to the called party s speakerphone To place an immediate off hook voice announce call Inter Tel phones with Mini DSS buttons only This method can only be used if the database has been programmed to allow Inter Tel phones with Mini DSS buttons to bypass the Camp On and OHVA Screening timers NOTE 1 When an intercom call is placed using a Mini DSS button to a busy OHVA enabled Inter Tel endpoint do not hang up 2 Press the Mini DSS button for that endpoint again If the endpoint s secondary voice path is available you are immediately connected and may speak To receive an OHVA call OHVA enabled Inter Tel phones only 1 While on a call using the handset you hear a camp on tone The display shows CALL ANNOUNCE FROM username Do nothing When the OHVA Screening timer expires you hear a double tone You are connected with the intercom caller via the speakerphone Your original call remains connected on the handset The system provides the following language options American English British English Spanish and Japanese prompts and displays Adminis trators must know which languages are considered Primary and Second ary for the system NOTE If you press while speaking to the caller on the speakerphone the handset microphone will be muted and the caller on the handset will
8. PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 274 Eighteen N A 275 Nineteen N A 276 Twenty N A 277 Thirty N A 278 Forty N A 279 Fifty N A 280 Sixty N A 281 Seventy N A 282 Eighty N A 283 Ninety N A 284 Hundred N A 285 This mailbox is currently full and cannot N A receive new messages 286 Oh N A 287 of which are priority N A 288 Priority message received N A 289 Otherwise press star Otherwise say No or press star 290 When you are finished entering mailbox num N A bers press pound 291 Otherwise press pound Otherwise say Send or press pound 292 For PM press two For PM say PM or press two 293 For Sunday press one For Sunday say Sunday or press one 294 For Monday press two For Monday say Monday or press two 295 For Tuesday press three For Tuesday say Tuesday or press three Page 326 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 296 For Wednesday press four For Wednesday say Wednesday or press four 297 For Thursday press five For Thursday say Thursday or press five 298 For Friday press six For Friday say Friday or press six 299 For Saturday press seven For Saturday say Saturday or press seven 3
9. eese 82 TAN A A P P P 82 AudioCodes MP 104 MGCP Gateway lseeeee e 82 AudioCodes MP 104 SIP Gateway seeeeeeee eA 82 IP Single Line Adapters 2 220 8e4 pape x RE CHER aveet RO X x eR a qr XR 83 ITP and SIP Supported Pesiutes usa ces pF SERERE Re RESR REA ERR Lu rag 83 ITP and SIP Feature Exceptions 22secudna bp LR RE AERA RR ER ER 86 IP Phone Flashing Light Indicators 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee ee 87 ITP and SIP Connectivity oo exe a RE E RREYCR E ERE E keen REX YR HONE KOR ESS 90 IP and SIP Endpoint Ports and Connectors lseeeeeleeeeeeee 90 Battery Packs and Chargers xod Gen Sete EREREPCRRPERROUeE ES RA ER ERE 91 Power SUDBIBE S iore ous oe cree E SEE Tru Ee bp T px FP QN eure P pda rg pid 9 IP Phone Limitations seeeeeeee RR RR s 91 Peer to Peer Audio for IP and SIP Phones n 91 Automated Boot Code Update l llleeeeeeeeee eA 92 Page 75 Hardware and Endpoints INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 CONTENTS PAGE Features Common to IP and Digital Inter Tel Endpoints 93 Model 8614 Mini Direct Station Select Unit llle 93 Phone Display SCIENS suse kt ape REESE UR 2G oy E ene du tee eee on E ERE E da 93 Six Line Display sea Secedee testae ee Seed eur Gee eeeee Sees IE end 93 Ivo Lmne Display pesca deed cree Eoi ae ebd act e Eqs dC cd faa 94 LCD Contrast Adjust
10. Page 346 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 717 one saved voice mail N A 718 one saved e mail N A 719 one saved fax N A 720 one saved message N A 721 unheard voice mails N A 722 heard voice mails N A 723 Not Used Not Used 724 Not Used Not Used 725 Not Used Not Used 726 Not Used Not Used 727 one heard voice mail N A 728 Not Used Not Used 729 Not Used Not Used 730 Not Used Not Used 731 I m sorry didn t understand your response N A 732 The system prompt you have selected has two N A formats 733 To select the standard format press one To select the standard format say Standard or press one 734 To select the speech recognition format press To select the speech recognition format say two Speech Recognition or press two 735 To replace the standard format press one To replace the standard format say Standard or press one 736 To replace the speech recognition format To replace the speech recognition format say press one Speech Recognition or press one 737 Not Used Not Used Page 347 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non
11. Say or enter the fax document number If the document number does not already exist say Yes or press EM if the number is correct or say Re enter or press J and re renter the number If the document number already exists say Yes or press EM to replace the document or say Re enter or press E to enter another number If you did not enter a valid number enter a new number When prompted press START on the fax machine When the fax transmission is complete say Continue or press Ej to con tinue importing documents or press Egi to exit Quick Reference Guide To System Voice Mail and Diagnostics Administrator Features These are the basic instructions for the most frequently used system administra tor and voice mail administrator features For detailed information on these fea tures refer to the Administrator Guide System Administrator Features To Place the System in Night or Day Mode While on hook enter EB A g Hl To Place a Single Node in Day or Night Mode While on hook enter IK E IGE E Enable Network Night Mode OR enter KB Ki Kl Ell Enable Network Day Mode Then enter the desired node number To Set System or Network Date and Time While on hook enter KB ES I Kl System Date Time or enter EB E EB KJl Network Date Time Use the dialpad buttons to enter the month day and year For example press 010305 for January 3 2005 Or press EM to skip ahe
12. Optional 390 Allows the endpoint user to enter an optional account code for SMDR reports during an out side call ACD Agent Login 326 These feature codes allow an ACD hunt group ACD Agent Logout 327 member agent to log into and out of the ACD ACD Agent Login Logout Toggle 328 hunt group s The agent will only receive calls through the ACD hunt group s while logged in ACD Agent Wrap Up Terminate 329 When an ACD agent completes a call no other ACD hunt group call will ring at the end point until the ACD Wrap Up Timer expires or the agent enters this feature code to terminate the wrap up session Trunk Access Codes Page 119 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 19 Endpoint Feature Code Definitions Continued FEATURE NAME CODE DEFINITION Agent Help 375 The Agent Help feature allows a endpoint user to request help from a designated Agent Help Extension during a two or three party call Agent Help Reject 376 When a request for help call rings the Agent Help Extension can choose to join the call or enter this feature code to reject the request Answer Ringing Call 351 Answers the call that has been ringing or holding the longest at that endpoint Refer to page 155 for the priority list Inter Tel end points use the ANSWER button Audio Diagnostics 320 When initiated users are prompted to answer questions about the audio problems
13. Page 35 Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Delayed Reset Press HJ or the DELAYED menu button to delay the reset The display shows DELAYED RESET SCHEDULED The system will be reset at the pre programmed time Immediate Reset Press Kl or the IMMEDIATE menu button to reset the sys tem now NOTE A system reset will drop all calls in progress Page 36 System Programming Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Figure 2 System Database Programming Flowchart Enter Program Database feature code 9932 Press 2 or SYSTEM menu button 74 ENTER SYSTEM OPTION menu button v Press 1 or Press 2 or Press 3 or DND MESSAGES PASSWORD REMINDER MSGS menu button menu button Press 4 or STN EXTENSIONS menu button If desired select i E 0 T SELECT F Press 2 or SELECT DND l CHANGE SELECT Press 1 or MESSAGE PASSWORD REMINDER MSG _ CHANGE EXT SWAP EXTS ied SS ee never ee Goh la an sash a OE ot RY di is d menu button menu button Y y r a F ME Patar masrana pi Enter 0 8 digit Ear ENTER ENDPOINT ENTER ENDPOINT OND message lo password and message to program a EXTENSION EXTENSION program by scrolling press by scrolling Hs
14. e Sent Contains the date and time that the Voice Mail was received by the mailbox e Priority Messages If the message is marked Priority the subject line will be pre ceded by an exclamation mark and in the Options tab the Importance field is High Outlook Client Based Solution Voice Processing Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 e Private Messages If the message is marked Private the Sensitivity field in the Options tab will be set to Private Certified Messages If the voice mail message is marked for certified delivery the Track Option on the Options tab is checked For complete instructions about using UM Outlook Client based solution refer to the Unified Messaging User Guide part number 550 8111 Outlook Client Based Solution Installation Example Page 291 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Voice Processing Prompts CONTENTS PAGE Default Voice Processing Prompts eeeeeeeeeee rh nnt 294 BVM EM and VPU Voice Prompts 0 0 0 cece eee eh 294 BENI Noise Prompts 21032405 aye easels gee DENS ded E RM E P ESI Sa DX I 312 Page 293 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Default Voice Processing Prompts This section contains the default voice prompts for the voice processing systems supported by the Inter Te
15. 77 Chassis Interfaces Connections eeeeeeeeeeeee rrr nn 77 Front of the Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 Chassis llle 77 Back of the Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 Chassis llle 78 Digital Expansion Inieriaee u su saepe Pet RP E REL AN IAE A ERI E ESAME UA 78 Digital Expansion Interface Wail 22a EP y Rey sape Rec PD Rs 78 Digital Endpoint Module 05 4 s464 ese 9 e RE E EE Rs 78 M d les 2242x233 ERe D EAERXGPeXEEREXRPRXYXXRRREPSECERRAEPETYEERXRERX E RXRE REGE 79 IP Operating Modes ns rr rr eR PER ER ER RR eee EER ee eRe ERs 79 Inter Tel Protocol Mode slseeeeeeee RR RIRRRIRRRRRIII 80 Session Initiation Protocol Mode 0000 eee eee 80 IP and SIP Emergency Calls From A Remote Site 0 0 00 eee eee 80 IPEudpoinis visa aa ik b ies eee E REF ess a3bkddareses 81 Hard Multi Protocol Phones 0 0 0 0 cc ccc eee e 81 Model 8600 eaaa ha dees ek heed a wehbe Rc ER E beds 81 Model 8620 8622 4 yoy os uetaues boca de op DEPO AGERE ceed eens e acl 81 Model 8662 2 55 tete e t quater bee qe SE qi eS e qt aS 81 Model S690 raster amp aes Anew Fens dub dE vede idunt bev a een 81 Hard IP Phones serenate nan ee eee hr 82 Model 8660 5 Role RE Roe Eel Pade ee E a Res bh Sa wa 82 JP PhonePlus e aser ebRIEHDRO ERE D des ween eed bee Sues 82 Model 8601 SoftPhone for Pocket PC 00 00 00000000 0000000 eee eee 82 Models 8664 8665 and 8668 Wireless Phones
16. No Answer If the call is not answered at the principal station before the System Forwarding Initiate timer expires the system sends the call to the forwarding path Busy If the principal station is busy the system immediately sends the call to the forwarding path Both No Answer and Busy can be selected together to form a Not Available status Do Not Disturb If the principal station is in Do Not Disturb the system immedi ately sends the call to the forwarding path Immediate The system immediately sends the call to the forwarding path The principal station user cannot answer an immediately forwarded call but can reverse transfer it from the forwarding point e Day mode night mode status The system day night mode is used to determine if a forwarding path is taken Either day mode night mode or both may be specified For an example refer to the diagram below In the example the principal station user wants direct ring in or transferred calls to ring at his or her endpoint during day mode The principal station has a forwarding path with two forwarding points a hunt group and Voice Mail If the principal does not answer the call it follows the forwarding path to forwarding point 1 a hunt group If the hunt group does not answer the call it would continue on the forwarding path and go to the principal station Voice Mailbox forwarding point 2 If the principal station is an Inter Tel end point t
17. TRUNK BUSY y MARKTRUNKBUSY YOUR INPUT menu button Ex Y Y pom SET CALLER ID Press 3 or VALID POLARITY menu button Press 1 or ON menu button HYBRID BALANCE OPTION Press 2 or OFF menu button Press 1 or NORMAL menu button menu button Press 2 or SHORT RNC ENTER SIGNALING OPTION i L 4 Y Y AT ANY LEVEL Press or the Speaker but ton to cancel any unsaved changes and back up to Press 1 or DTMF Press 2 or PULSE menu button menu button exit programming Press or ACCEPT to Press 1 or ON menu button Press 2 or OFF menu button re Se eee ee eee 4 Trunk Database Programming Flowchart Page 43 Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Trunk Database Programming Flowchart Continued CONTINUED FROM PREVIOUS PAGE Enter the number of the trunk group to be programmed TRUNK GROUP OPTION Press 1 or ANS ACCESS DAY menu button Press 2 or ANS ACCESS NIGHT menu button Press 3 or RING IN DAY menu button Enter the desired extension number r Extension number YES NO L Ls Press 4 or v Press 1 or YES menu button v Press 2 or NO menu button RING IN NIGHT
18. 001 To leave a message please enter a mailbox To leave a message please say or enter a number mailbox number 002 For the directory press pound For the directory say Directory or press pound 003 To reach an operator press zero To reach an operator say Operator or press zero 004 l m sorry N A 005 is not available N A 006 The number entered is not valid N A 007 Using the keys on your telephone please spell Please say the name of the person you are the name of the person then press pound For trying to reach Otherwise using the keys on the letter Q press seven For the letter Z your telephone please spell the last name of press nine To advance to the next character the person then press pound For the letter Q please wait for two seconds or press another press seven For the letter Z press nine To key To exit the directory press star advance to the next character please wait for two seconds or press another key To exit the directory press star 008 To exit the directory press star To exit the directory say Cancel or press star Page 312 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 009 Mailbox number N A 010 If this is correct press pound If this is correct say Yes or pres
19. 414 Not used N A 415 Not used N A 416 Not used N A 417 Not used N A 418 Not used N A 419 Not used N A Page 332 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 420 Not used N A 421 Not used N A 422 Not used N A 423 Not used N A 424 Not used N A 425 Not used N A 426 Not used N A 427 Not used N A 428 Not used N A 429 Not used N A 430 Not used N A 431 Not used N A 432 Not used N A 433 Not used N A 434 Not used N A 435 Not used N A 436 Not used N A 437 Not used N A 438 Not used N A 439 Not used N A 440 Not used N A 441 Not used N A Page 333 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 442 Not used N A 443 Not used N A 444 Not used N A 445 Not used N A 446 Not used N A 447 Not used N A 448 Not used N A 449 Not used N A 450 Not used N A 451 Not used N A 452 Not used N A 453 Not used N A 454 Not used N A 455 Not used N A 456 Not used N A 457 Not used N A 458 Not used N A 459 Not used N A 460 Not used N A 461 Not used N A 462 Not used N A 463 Not used N A Page
20. Lift the handset and or press the button again To exit the conference and leave the other parties connected any inside party with a sin gle line endpoint During the conference hookflash and hang up If the Hold timer expires while you are out of the conference the parties recall your endpoint When the recall rings at your endpoint lift the handset to answer the recall If the recall is not answered before the Recall timer expires it will recall the Attendant NOTE To return to the conference Lift the handset and or enter the Conference feature code 5 Ending the Conference and Placing All Parties on Hold To end the conference and put all parties on hold any inside party with an Inter Tel endpoint During the conference press the button and hang up The button and a Call button flutters The parties are still connected in a conference To place the parties on individual hold Press the Hold button or enter the Individual Hold feature code 336 You can then return to each party individually by pressing the associated Call or button To end the conference and put all parties on hold any inside party with a single line end point During the conference hookflash and hang up The parties are still connected in a con ference To place the parties on individual hold Lift the handset and enter the Individual Hold feature code 336 You can then return to each party individually by entering the Individual Hol
21. MONITOR STEAL STOP RECORDING 4 To terminate any of the features Zf off hook hang up or enter the specific feature code of the BARGE IN feature you want to terminate f on hook press TERMINATED the Speaker button or enter the specific feature code of the feature you want to terminate On OR display endpoints the display shows BARGE SILENT MONITOR TERMINATED if you are silent monitoring at the time of termination ACD Hunt Groups ACD Hunt Groups The Automatic Call Distribution Hunt Groups premium feature is required to use Nons ACD hunt group features Automatic Call Distribution ACD can be programmed to distribute hunt group calls to equal ize call time or call count among the available members If the System OAI Events premium feature is included in your software license ACD hunt groups can also be programmed to send call information records that can be processed by an external device connected to a system serial port such as Call Center Suite ACD hunt groups can use the standard hunt group features described on page 134 and or the UCD features described on page 137 Page 143 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 144 ACD Call Distribution When an intercom or outside call is transferred or rings in to the ACD hunt group it can circu late in linear or distributed order as described on page 134 or using one of
22. Nodes do not have to use the same Primary and Secondary languages because the Voice Mail system installs all existing language prompts not just prompts for the languages designated as Primary or Secondary Therefore for calls across network nodes if the language does not match between the two nodes the called Voice Mail system searches for the designated lan guage in its system in the following order Primary language Secondary language American English British English Japanese and Spanish and uses the designated language If the desig nated language does not exist in the Voice Mail system the system uses the default Primary language instead Page 174 Voice Processing System Directories System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 If Multilingual Support is enabled directory users will be able to enter English Spanish and Japanese Katakana characters as needed Procedures for using the directories are given on page 227 In directories the English characters are alphabetized before the Japanese characters There fore Japanese names will be at the end of the list after the English names Change Language Feature Code Intercom Calls A user can change the assigned language for the endpoint by entering the Change Language feature code only when the endpoint is idle To change the endpoint language Inter Tel endpoints Enter the Change Language feature code 301 to change your
23. Q EJ for Z and E for punctuation marks Page 273 Voice Processing Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 E mail Reader When the caller accepts the directory name from voice mail the caller is transferred to the cor responding mailbox After the transfer the caller either hears the subscriber s recorded greet ing their recorded directory name or if no recording has been made the mailbox number XXX is not available prompt The caller can then record a message When the caller accepts the directory name from the Automated Attendant the caller is trans ferred to the selected destination endpoint or mailbox if it is available If the destination is not available the caller is transferred to the associated mailbox if one exists The EM voice processing system supports E mail Reader which if enabled provides access to voice mail e mail and fax messages that are located in an advanced mailbox E mail Reader uses Text to Speech TTS capabilities to convert the text in an e mail message to a wav file When the user accesses an e mail message E Mail Reader announces the e mail according to the envelope options that the user set Then after the envelope is played E mail Reader reads the text in the body of the message Additional options for e mail messages include reply for ward save and delete E mail Reader is supported only on EM voice processing systems When the us
24. Requires a programmable button Page 89 IP Phone Flashing Light Indicators Hardware and Endpoints INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 ITP and SIP Connectivity Phones using ITP mode and SIP mode allow users to communicate using the Local Area Net work LAN and the public telephone system IP and SIP calls can be routed through the Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 or they can be configured as members of the same Network Group If the phones are configured as members of a Network Group they can use the Peer to Peer P2P audio feature which is explained on page 91 Possible Delay in Local Emergency Response to Remote Sites IP and SIP phone users should be alerted to the following hazardous situations If an Emergency Call phone number is dialed from an IP or SIP phone located at a remote site that is not equipped with a correctly configured gateway the call will be placed from the location where system chassis is installed rather than from the location where the emergency call is made In this situation emergency responders may be dispatched to the wrong location To minimize the risk of remote site users misdirecting emergency responders Inter Tel recommends regular testing of MGCP SIP gateway trunk s for dial tone If uninterruptible power supply UPS protection has not been installed as part of the Inter Tel 5000 system IP and SIP endpoints will not operate when electrical power fails either at
25. Voice Processing Features on page 257 Digital signal processors DSP enable Conferencing Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF detection tone generation modem operation and Automatic Number Identification ANI ANI is the technical term for Caller ID Inter Tel Network Capability Page 12 Two or more Inter Tel advanced communication platforms Axxess or Inter Tel 5000 can be connected with T1 E1 PRI network spans to form a network To the user the network appears as one integrated system With few exceptions the user can perform all of the functions across the network that can be performed within a single system or node In an Inter Tel IP private network environment IP endpoints can be programmed to traverse or bypass the Network Address Translation NAT tables The Inter Tel 5000 may be placed behind the firewall using a static NAT assignment For details contact you Inter Tel equipment provider Either communication server can operate as a stand alone system or as a node in a network of up to 63 Inter Tel Axxess or Inter Tel 5000 nodes For network connectivity Inter Tel Axxess Converged Communications Platforms require software v7 0 or later for T1 point to point pro tocol PPP networking IP networking requires v8 231 or later system software IP Resources Card IPRC firmware v9 0 0 or later and applicable licensing Introduction Product Description INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 Aug
26. play shows AGENT LOGGED INTO ALL ACDS You are logged into only the ACD hunt group s that you requested in step 2 that use the Agent ID that you entered in this step If another Agent ID is already logged in at this endpoint you hear reorder tones and the display shows DIFFERENT AGENT ID ALREADY USED You must have the other agent log out before you can use that endpoint To log in to ACD hunt group s that do not use Agent IDs Press EM The dis play shows AGENT LOGGED INTO ALL ACDS You are logged into only the ACD hunt group s that you requested in step 2 that do not use Agent IDs If you are already logged in the display shows ALREADY LOGGED INTO xxxxx If you are not a member of the entered hunt group the display shows NOT AN AGENT IN THIS HUNT GROUP and you hear reorder tones Start over If off hook hang up Repeat the procedure to log in to additional ACD groups To log out of an ACD hunt group 1 While on or off hook enter the ACD Agent Logout feature code 327 One of the fol lowing will occur If you were logged in to only one hunt group you hear a confirmation tone and the display shows AGENT LOGGED OUT OF hunt group The procedure is complete Hang up if you were off hook If you were logged in to more than one hunt group you hear a confirmation tone and the display shows AGENT LOGOUT ACD NUMBER Go to the next step If you were not logged in to any hunt group the display shows NOT LOGGED INTO
27. vides these options in addition to the currently available options which allow the station user to redirect calls to Voice Mail or Do Not Disturb The Redirect Ringing Call feature does not require premium features Some specific aspects of this feature are described below If the user has an Executive Display Professional Display or Model 8560 endpoint the display will show a call menu option which reads SEND TO DEST The user may choose this option or enter feature code 331 The display then prompts the user to enter the destination number directly or by scrolling through the IC directory For non display endpoints calls are redirected using the feature code 331 This code is entered followed by the desired destination number If the endpoint receiving the redirected call is a display endpoint it will show EXT XXXX FWD FROM EXT XXXX just as it does for a manually forwarded call Calls may not be redirected back to the originating station This will result in a message on the display saying CALL FORWARDED TO SOURCE For non display endpoints the call will simply ring back at the station Calls may not be redirected to restricted outside numbers to stations in Do Not Disturb mode or to stations that are forwarded Redirected calls will not follow call forwarding Agent Help Request calls queue callbacks and recalls cannot be redirected these types of calls do not follow call forwarding Calls cannot be redirected to another s
28. 370 The On Off feature code cannot be used in remote programming If you entered an invalid feature code you will hear reorder tones and can try again If the station you are programming is not allowed to use DND you hear reorder tones and the display shows CANNOT ACCESS RESERVED FEATURE Outside callers are returned to dial tone and stations return to the idle state NOTE b Enter the desired Do Not Disturb message number 01 20 If you entered an invalid message number you will hear reorder tones and can try again c Enter the optional second line message text if desired using any combination of the following methods Remain in numeric mode Press the dialpad buttons to enter the desired number Use the pound button EJ for a hyphen and the asterisk button E for a colon Inter Tel endpoint users can press the button once to leave a space or press the button to backspace Change to alphanumeric mode Inter Tel endpoints only Press the ISTIS vvt ton the button lights or the USE ALPHA MODE menu button then enter the desired characters Refer to the chart and instructions in your user guide Inter Tel endpoint users can press the button once to advance or twice to leave a space or press the button to backspace Use Speed Dial and or redial numbers Inter Tel endpoints only In either numeric or alphanumeric mode you can speed dial a number using the Speed Dial button or feature code In numeric mo
29. 537 Not used N A 538 For system prompt replacement or reinstate For system prompt replacement or reinstate ment press six ment say Replacement or press six 539 Please enter the number of the system Please say or enter the number of the system prompt prompt 540 The system prompt has been replaced by the N A following custom prompt 541 The original system prompt is N A 542 To replace this system prompt with a custom To replace this system prompt with a custom prompt press three prompt say Custom or press three 543 is not a valid system prompt number N A 544 To delete the custom prompt and reinstate the To delete the custom prompt and reinstate the System prompt press nine system prompt say System or press nine 545 To replace this custom prompt with a new cus To replace this custom prompt with a new cus tom prompt press three tom prompt say New Prompt or press three 546 You have no deleted messages N A Page 338 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 547 You have one deleted message N A 548 deleted messages N A 549 To recover deleted messages press two To recover deleted messages say Recover or press two 550 To recover this message press seven To r
30. 580 8001 System Manager Installation and Maintenance Manual part no 835 2743 Message Print Diagnostics Manual part no 550 8018 Voice Processing Diagnostics Manual part no 550 8019 Voice Processing Unit Installation Manual part no 835 2890 The programming planning sheets that appear in this guide are included on the product CD ROM and they can be obtained in the following soft file format Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 Program Planning Sheets DOC part no 835 2882 Phone User Guides Page 6 Technical details and instructions for using the digital phones supported by the Inter Tel 5000 appear in the following user guides Model 8500 User Guide part no 550 8114 Model 8520 User Guide part no 550 8112 Model 8560 and 8660 User Guide part no 550 8113 Associate Display and Basic Digital Endpoint User Guide part no 560 8003 Executive Display and IP PhonePlus Endpoint User Guide part no 550 8108 Standard Display and Basic Digital Endpoint User Guide part no 550 8109 Professional Display and IP PhonePlus Endpoint User Guide part no 560 8002 Single Line Endpoint User amp Quick Reference Guide part no 550 8107 Inter Tel Reference Documents Document Overview INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Hazard Identification and Supplemental Information This guide uses standardized graphic conventions to promote safe practices to prevent or mini mize damage to equipment to avoid the corru
31. Account codes are 3 to 12 digit codes that can be used in conjunction with the Station Mes sage Detail Recording SMDR feature to aid record keeping Account codes can be assigned to measure endpoint use and or to identify calls for customer billing There are Standard Forced and Optional types of account codes The account code when used is recorded in the SMDR report as soon as the call is completed If more than one account code is entered during a call the last account code that was entered is recorded Database Programmed Account Codes Any endpoint can be assigned a standard account code or one of six types of forced account codes four are ARS dependent Or if desired the endpoint can lack an associated account code There can be up to 512 standard and 512 forced account codes in the database The account code types are e Standard Standard account codes automatically appear in the SMDR printout to iden tify calls from this endpoint The user is not required to enter any digits during the call e Forced All Calls Validated If this type of account code is enabled the user must enter a forced account code before an outside call can be placed If the code matches one of the pre programmed forced account codes in the database the call is allowed If the code does not match the call is blocked Endpoints with this account code type can not forward calls to outside phone numbers e Forced All Calls Non Validated With thi
32. All system fax ports are busy Hang up and try again later The system already contains the maximum number of fax documents allowed Until one or more fax documents are deleted from the system there is no room for additional documents The system does not have enough disk space to import any more documents Until one or more fax documents are deleted from the system there is no room for additional documents The system currently is at or above the Maximum Fax Library Size Until one or more fax documents are deleted from the system there is no room for additional documents By default the Maximum Fax Library Size field is set to 0 in DB Programming Changing A Group List Name Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 4 When prompted say or enter the fax document number One of the following occurs when you enter the number If the document number does not already exist the system asks you to verify the num ber Say Yes or press EB if the number is correct and go to the next step Or say Re enter or press EN if you want to re renter the number If the document number already exists the system asks if you want to replace it Say Yes or press EM if you want to replace the document and go to the next step Or say Re enter or press EJ if you want to re enter the number If you did not enter a valid number you are prompted to enter a new number 5 Whe
33. Caller ID Caller ID information gives the caller s phone number and or name Automatic Number Identification ANI ANI information identifies the caller s phone number The system receives a specified number of digits ANI This is a form of ANI that does not have a specified number of digits The sys tem receives a star before the ANI digits to signal the beginning of the caller s phone number Then there is another star after the digits to signal the end of the ANI information Dialed Number Identification Service DNIS DNIS identifies the number that was dialed to reach your location The system receives a base number and a specified num ber of digits that identify the dialed number DNIS This is a form of DNIS that does not have a specified number of digits The system receives a star before the DNIS digits to signal the beginning of the dialed number Then there is another star after the digits to signal the end of the DNIS infor mation ANI DNIS This is a two stage address service that provides both the caller s phone number and the dialed number It combines the ANI and the DNIS features described above Inter Tel Endpoint Displays Whether call information appears on the Inter Tel endpoint display and what information appears is determined by endpoint flags in the database The flags include Page 152 Expanded CO Call Information on Displays This flag determines whether call infor mation trunk na
34. Documents are stored in the fax library using the System Administrator s mailbox To do so a fax machine places a call to the System Administrator s mailbox and sends the document For instructions refer to Importing Fax Documents on page 64 Fax On Demand Page 275 Voice Processing Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Record A Call Page 276 Fax On Demand transmits a cover sheet with each faxed document that includes the recipient s extension number your company name as programmed in the database the date the number of pages to be sent and a list of included documents If you want you can store a company logo to be used on the cover sheet The logo can be up to 5 5 inches high if it is larger the sys tem automatically cuts it off at 5 5 inches The logo document is stored like other fax docu ments using the System Administrator mailbox If you have several fax documents you may want to create and store a catalog document that callers can request before continuing their selections For example the catalog can include the document number title description of the contents number of pages and last revision date for each document Fax documents can be saved and restored using the Voice Processing Save And Restore data base program The system Save And Restore operation has no effect on fax documents How ever if the system database is defaulted all fax documents are dele
35. Endpoints with Forced Local Toll Call and Forced Long Distance Toll Call account codes can not forward calls to outside numbers If a trunk group is assigned direct ring in to multiple endpoints and one of those endpoints is forwarded to an outside number incoming calls on that trunk group are not forwarded to the outside number Depending on central office trunk quality some reduction in voice volume may NOTE occur when an outside call is forwarded to an outside phone number Manual Forwarding to Public Network If disabled the endpoint flag called Manual Forwarding to Public Network prevents the end point from manually forwarding calls to the public network This prevents users from calling in to a local endpoint and reaching toll numbers by way of the Call Forward feature Forward to the Message Center Endpoint users can forward calls to their message centers Inter Tel endpoint users can forward calls to their designated message center by pressing the button and then the WEJ button or MESSAGE CENTER menu button Single line users must use the Call Forward pro cedure and dial the extension number of the message center Forward to an Attendant Endpoint users can forward calls to their Attendant by pressing the button and then Kl or by entering a Call Forwarding feature code and dialing K Forward to Voice Mail If an endpoint is forwarded to Voice Mail or if the message center is a Voice Mail hunt group the user s mailbox
36. For additional information about multi protocol endpoints not covered in this guide refer to the Multi Protocol Endpoints Supported Features Buttons and LED Indications document part no 835 2840 For detailed troubleshooting information including troubleshooting tables for SIP and IP endpoints refer to the latest version of the Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 Communica tion Servers Installation and Maintenance Manual part no 580 8001 Additional Information and Troubleshooting Page 109 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 System Features CONTENTS PAGE Inbroductl 65 2055 Khok eho hce ethene enw hs ieee REOR REA INPYXQUOERPTEA GARE P E YE 117 Access to the EeatlPeS u ica ORO ER C IRSE IRR E CR TCR RNC UR TR GO ICQ RR ER UN 117 Special Button and Hookflash llseeeeeeeeeeeee nh 117 Message Latt ssqassacesxea ced es babe ier n E E sees phere be EP p pet 117 Speaker BUMGIIB o SERERE ERE eee eae MR PV PEER ee RI ERU ERE RENS 118 Hold Buttons oe e pvo pc emer ee bte dw es o des Rue 118 Dialpad Hot Buttons vs SPCL Key Required for Feature Code Entry Flag 118 Feature Odes o ede ida 6rd uod ede aed HOE EON cau ddtdr a dede ers dera 118 Trunk ACCESS CodeS oc ios epe eo PE RR a FEES qos Qa S CR DR 119 Endpoint Feature Codes us eeu x eee ERR Eae Re EX ERERT EST DESEE RachE 119 Administrator Feature Codes 0 0 eee eee n nen eee 125 Diagnostics Feature Codes qussse cr
37. ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Voice Mail 20 279 alternate message source 183 as message center 180 custom recordings 68 directory 268 fax destination number 62 mailbox and extension ID personal options 62 mailbox password 62 mailbox personal greetings 62 mailboxes 280 maintaining mailboxes and Group Lists 61 Message Envelope Settings 62 message retrieval order 62 recording a broadcast message 61 Remote Messaging 62 subscribers 280 284 system administrator 280 system prompts 70 Transfer Method personal option 62 transfer to 50 198 user s directory name 62 Voice Processor 279 Voice Mail amp Message Notification Retrieval 279 Voice Mail Administrator Features 60 Voice Mail Administrator Procedures 60 Voice Mail Flowchart 373 Voice Mail Networking 21 Voice Mailbox Directory 271 Voice mailbox personal options 62 Voice Processing Features 1 11 23 77 111 257 294 Voice Processing Systems 17 Page 372 Voice Processor 109 174 279 alarms 51 as announcement or overflow stations 138 as forwarding point 213 auto attendant recall destination 260 automated attendant 259 260 Automated Attendant recordings 261 call routing announcement 265 communication to system 139 218 dial O destination 260 279 digit translation 266 directory 260 262 268 extensionID 262 fax on demand 274 features 1 11 23 77 111 257 in hunt groups 138 message notification retrieval 279 operator destination 260 279 Record A
38. If there is still another endpoint in the conference the parties remain connected ADD PARTY This button appears only if you have not reached the maximum number of allowed parties Press this button to leave the conference parties con nected while you place another call to be added to the conference MUTE Press this button to switch the microphone on or off during the confer ence TRANSFER CNF Press this button and enter an extension number to transfer the conference to another endpoint or the Voice Mail application To connect all waiting parties in the conference with another type of Inter Tel endpoint Press the button again Or press the Special button and enter Ell again All parties are connected Display endpoints show CNF IN PROGRESS The button and a Call button flash slowly Placing a Conference Call Page 203 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 To connect all waiting parties in the conference with a single line endpoint When all par ties are on conference wait hold hookflash and enter the Conference feature code 5 All par ties are connected If the number of parties in your conference exceeds the capacities of the system resources you will hear reorder tone and see a display that tells you MAX NUM BER OF PARTIES EXCEEDED To complete the conference setup return to the NOTE parties on conference wait hold one by one Inter Tel endpoint users press the
39. Japanese is programmed as a Primary or Secondary Language and the Administrator s phone is set for Japanese Use the following table to guide you as you program alphanumeric information NUMBER OF TIMES BUTTON IS PRESSED BUTTON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ENGLISH SPANISH CHARACTERS KATAKANA CHARACTERS 1 amp 1 A U E O a 2 A B C 2 KA KI KU KE KO i 3 D E F 3 SA SHI SU SE SO u 4 G H l 4 TA CHI TSU TE TO e 5 J K L 5 NA NI NU NE NO o 6 M N O N 6 HA HI FU HE HO tsu 7 P Q R S 7 MA M MU ME MO ya 8 T U V 8 YA YU YO yu 9 W X Y Z 9 RA RI RU RE RO yo 0 0 WA WO N pa ba long The Japanese characters are only available if the Multilingual feature is enabled and Japanese is installed as the secondary language Station Programming You can use your Administrator phone to program the following endpoint information Create or delete Administrator phones You can program any non single line Inter Tel phone as an additional Administrator phone or you can delete the designation of a phone as an Administrator phones Create or delete Attendant phones You can program any phone to be an Attendant phone or you can delete the designation of a phone as an Attendant phone Create or delete House Phones You can program any phone to be a House Phone or you can delete House Phones Assign phones
40. N A 120 Your message envelope is currently set to N A return 121 all information N A 122 time and date N A 123 mMessage source N A 124 and N A 125 message length N A Page 318 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 126 To turn on all envelope options press four To turn on all envelope options say All Options or press four 127 For message source press two For message source say Source or press two 128 For message length press three For message length say Length or press three 129 This option is now off N A 130 This option is now on N A 131 For time and date press one For time and date say Time Date or press one 132 Your message envelope will play all options N A 133 is turned on to call you at N A 134 AM N A 135 PM N A 136 Extension ID number N A 137 Every day N A 138 Monday through Friday N A 139 Sunday N A 140 Monday N A 141 Tuesday N A 142 Wednesday N A 143 Thursday N A 144 Friday N A 145 Saturday N A 146 To turn this number on or off press one To turn this number on or off say Change or press one Page 319 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
41. Outlook Client Based Solution 290 Outside Calls 186 account codes 191 automatic answer 170 callback queue 190 Camp On 190 header 186 on hook dialing monitoring 189 placing 186 receiving 188 remote message notification 283 Outside Party Call Information 153 Overflow Stations 137 138 ANN P2P Peer to Peer 92 Page Zone Buttons 99 Page Zone Keys 98 Pager Notification 281 Paging 125 234 235 358 Passwords 62 endpoint 239 extension ID 262 mailbox 62 280 programming 34 PC Data Port Module PCDPM 184 PCDPM lt Emphasis gt See Personal Computer Data Port Mod ule 107 for OHVA functionality on digital phones 184 Peer to Peer P2P Audio 92 Personal Computer Data Port Module description 107 Personal Greeting 62 Personal Number 281 Phantom Devices 255 Phone User Guides 6 Phones circuit number display 96 Mini DSS buttons 98 LEDs 106 Pilot Numbers 134 Placing calls on hold 193 entire conference on hold 206 intercom calls 177 nodes in day or night mode 25 outside calls 186 system in night mode 25 the system in Night Mode 25 Placing a conference call 203 Playback Device 109 announcement station 138 call routing announcement 265 overflow station 138 Polarity Reversal 40 Power Failure Capabilities 252 Power Failure Transfer 252 Power interruption during boot code download 93 Premium Features System OAI 143 Previous Button 98 Previous Key 99 Primary and Alternate Notification 282 Primary Attendant 132 133 Pr
42. PM 1 five IP endpoint licenses three IP networking resources and the Com pactFlash USB and equipment interface ports on the chassis If the three IP networking resources are used sufficient IP resources are available for installing 25 IP endpoints All told with required interface hardware and licensing the Inter Tel CS 5200 supports a mix of up to 28 IP endpoints IP private networking trunks and or IP gateway trunks For system configuration programming and installation details contact your authorized Inter Tel equipment provider Inter Tel CS 5400 Adding a Processor Expansion Card PEC 1 to the PM 1 and applicable licensing to the base platform creates the Inter Tel CS 5400 The default configuration of the larger capacity system includes six IP networking resources in addition to the five IP endpoint licenses and platform interface ports on the chassis If the six IP networking resources are used sufficient IP resources are available for installating 110 IP endpoints With required interface hardware and licensing the Inter Tel CS 5400 supports a mix of up to 116 IP endpoints IP network trunks and or IP gateway trunks Digital Expansion Interface To provide Inter Tel digital phone capability one or two Digital Expansion Interface DEI units can be added to the system chassis Each DEI provides three bays that accept Digital Endpoint Modules DEM 16 Each DEM 16 supports 16 digital Inter Tel phones or Single Line Adapt
43. Phone User Guides on page 6 The Unified Messaging UM feature links the voice processing system with e mail and or pro vides outgoing fax capabilities The Voice Processing Unit VPU uses Unified Messaging ver sion 2 2 The Enterprise Messaging EM voice processing system uses UM version 2 3 The following sections provide information on each version NOTE Unified Messaging is not supported in Basic Voice Mail BVM Version 2 2 Description Page 284 The following three levels of Unified Messaging features are included in v2 2 Level 1 Voice Mail As E mail Attachments This provides users the ability to receive a Voice Mail message as an e mail message with a voice attachment The voice attach ment will be in the form of a wave wav file that can be played on any computer equipped with a sound card speakers and multimedia software such as Sound Recorder Users can choose to receive the messages as Voice Mail and e mail Copy amp Forward or as e mail only Forward Only The e mail server can use SMTP POP3 Subscriber Features Level 1 Voice Processing Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 VIM MAPI protocol The number of users with Level 1 is limited by a security button attached to the voice processing system PC Level 2 with Microsoft Outlook Exchange To use this voice processing system level the mailbox E mail Gateway field must be programmed for Unifie
44. Pressing the Speaker button connects or disconnects calls when the headset is attached Some headsets are equipped with a power saver mode that disables the headset after a period of silence To prevent these headsets from missing portions of incoming calls the Headset Connect Tone endpoint flag must be enabled in DB Programming Enabling this flag allows the phone to generate a tone that activates the headset before connecting to an incoming call In the default state the flag is disabled Models 8620 and 8660 IP phones and Models 8520 and 8560 digital phones are equipped with headset jacks on the back Plugging into the jack allows you to have the headset and the hand set connected at the same time You must still however enable disable the headset using the Headset Mode feature code If enabled in DB Programming the Send Alert Burst To Headset flag sends a single tone to a headset instead of normal phone ring tones when a call is ringing at the phone nonhandsfree intercom call outside call queue callback or reminder message The tone is sent only once when IMPORTANT the call is received and does not repeat even if the call continues to ring unanswered It is intended as a wake up tone for headsets that have a power saving function that allows the endpoint to sleep if idle for a set period The flag is programmed on a endpoint by endpoint basis By default the flag is disabled Connecting a Headset The f
45. To answer a transfer recall Inter Tel endpoints When the recall rings at your endpoint the display shows user name RECALLING FROM username Lift the handset and or press the button Press the medium flashing Call button or individual trunk button or press the button if the call is not automatically connected Single line endpoints If you hear a repeating signal of four tones and a pause lift the handset You are immediately connected Page 199 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Call Screening Page 200 Calls transferred from the Automated Attendant or a Call Routing Announcement application can be screened announced or unannounced Separate programming flags in the database determine the methods used for transferring calls to endpoints with mailboxes endpoints with extension IDs and extensions without mailboxes or IDs When a call is received by Automated Attendant or Call Routing Announcement and the caller enters an extension number the programmed Transfer Method determines how the call will be transferred The Transfer Method flags can be programmed in the database If allowed in mail box programming they can also be programmed by the mailbox user The available Transfer Methods are as follows e Announce Only The caller is asked to state his or her name Then the call is trans ferred to the associated extension number When the user answers the transfer t
46. Use the following table as a guide for your entries using the keypad buttons Table 30 Using the Dialpad to Locate Extension Numbers in the System Directory NUMBER OF TIMES BUTTON IS PRESSED BUTTON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ENGLISH SPANISH CHARACTERS KATAKANA CHARACTERS 1 amp 1 A U E O a 2 A B C i 2 KA KI KU KE KO i 3 D E F 3 SA SHI SU SE SO u 4 G H l r 4 TA CHI TSU TE TO e 5 J K L 5 NA NI NU NE NO o 6 M N O 6 HA HI FU HE HO tsu 7 P Q R S 7 MA MI MU ME MO ya 8 T U V 8 YA YU YO yu 9 W X Y Z 9 RA RI RU RE RO yo 0 0 WA WO N pa ba long The Japanese characters are only available if the Multilingual feature is enabled and Japanese is installed as the secondary language Intercom Speed Dial and Feature Code Directories System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 To perform a directory search 1 While on or off hook enter the Directory feature code 307 The WEJ button lights and the Speaker button lights if on hook and the display shows DIR TYPE IC 1 OUT 2 FEAT 23 2 Press one of the following e For Intercom Directory Press Hf or the IC DIRECTORY menu button to select the intercom directory The display shows INTERCOM NAME e For Outside Directory Press Ell or the OUTSIDE DIR menu button to select the outside number directo
47. endpoint between the Primary and Secondary Language as desired The display changes to the current language Single line endpoints Lift the handset and enter the Change Language feature code 301 to change your endpoint between the Primary and Secondary Language as desired To verify the current language you can call a voice processing system appli cation that does not override the device language An Inter Tel endpoint user can assign the Change Language feature code to any user program mable button Changing an endpoint s language automatically changes any display For example if an end point changes from English to Spanish while in Do Not Disturb mode with message 02 the display would change from American English message 02 to Spanish message 02 NOTE Only digital display endpoints display Japanese prompts Other Inter Tel endpoints do not support Japanese prompts When the procedures tell you to hookflash quickly press and release the hook NOTE switch If you press the hookswitch to hang up hold it down for a couple of sec onds Otherwise the system recognizes it as a hookflash recall The intercom IC feature allows the user to place endpoint to endpoint calls that can be answered either in handsfree mode or in private or non handsfree mode A user that reaches a busy endpoint can camp on request callback queue or leave a message As described in this section other features that apply to both outside and IC
48. firewall is detected the system issues a Mes sage Print message Diagnostic Print Auxdata Diagnostics Feature Codes 9972 9172 Not Programmable Sends a report to a des ignated printer or file that shows system reset history information to be used for trouble shooting purposes Page 129 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 21 Diagnostics Feature Code Definitions Continued CODE FEATURE NAME US EUROPE DEFINITION Diagnostic Print 9975 9175 Not Programmable Sends a report to a des Message Log ignated printer or file that lists system error messages to be used for troubleshooting pur poses Diagnostic Print 9976 9176 This feature code prints the network log to Network Log message print This feature is useful in deter mining the system of a networked system Diagnostic Query Node 9978 9178 Using this feature code you can query the Traffic status of various devices on the system based on the status of the traffic flags in Data base Programming The output is sent to Message Print Diagnostic Show 9928 9128 To check the call processing software version Version at an administrator s endpoint you can enable diagnostics mode then enter this feature code to view the version and date of the call processing software However feature code 9928 displays the firm ware version of the endpoint if i
49. flag does not affect the endpoint s appearance on any other endpoint s call forwarding path The flag only determines whether the endpoint will have its own calls System Forwarded To enable or disable system forwarding e Inter Tel endpoints Enter the System Forward On 352 System Forward Off 353 or System Forward On Off 354 feature code The display shows SYSTEM FOR WARD ON or OFF If disabled the system ignores any System Forward paths pro grammed for this endpoint until System Forward is enabled e Single line endpoints Lift the handset and enter the System Forward On 352 System Forward Off 353 or System Forward On Off 354 feature code If disabled the sys tem ignores any System Forward paths programmed for this endpoint until System For ward is enabled Unanswered System Forward Calls If a call that is following a System Forward path is not answered or all forwarding points are in Do Not Disturb or busy its final destination depends on the type of call as shown in Table 28 Table 28 Final Destinations for Types of Calls TYPE OF CALL ALL FWD POINTS BUSY OR DO NOT ANSWER ALL FWD POINTS IN DO NOT DISTURB Intercom Rings at the last forwarding point until it is answered or the caller hangs up Call never leaves the principal end point Call routing ring in except DISA Rings at last forwarding point until it is answered or caller hangs up Rings at the principal endpoint until
50. hunt groups PRIORITY ORDER CALLS LEVEL ARE RECEIVED M HUNT GROUP Ext 2000 2 HUNT GROUP Lel Ext 2001 HUNT GROUP 3 Ext 2002 UCD Hunt Group Priority List Page 139 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 140 UCD Hunt Group Supervisors and Station Monitoring The Station Monitor feature allows hunt group supervisors to monitor the calls of anyone in a specified hunt group It can be useful in training or in evaluating the performance of hunt group members As a courtesy hunt group members should be notified in advance that their calls may be monitored In addition a programmable option can be enabled that sends a tone to the endpoint being monitored whenever the hunt group supervi NOTE sor joins an ongoing call Call monitoring may be illegal in some locations The end user is responsible for ensuring that use of this feature is in compliance with local law In Database Programming each hunt group can have one or more endpoints assigned as the hunt group supervisor s The supervisor must reside on the same node as the hunt group mem bers An extension list can be assigned as the supervisor to provide multiple supervisors The supervisor is usually not a member of the hunt group If the supervisor is a member of the hunt group the Hunt Group Remove Replace feature can be used at any time without affecting the Station Moni
51. ment must be powered from an isolated dedicated AC outlet e If necessary the user should consult the dealer or an experienced radio television tech nician for additional suggestions The user may find the following booklet prepared by the FCC helpful How to Identify and Resolve Radio TV Interference Problems This booklet is available from the U S Government Printing Office Washington D C 20402 Stock No 004 000 00398 5 If radio frequency interference RFI problems persist contact Inter Tel Customer Sup port The is now product safety certified by Canadian Standards Association CS A for use in both the United States and Canada Page xi Safety Regulations INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Safety Regulations IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS NOTICE The C US indicator adjacent to the Canadian Standards Association CSA mark on the product label signifies that the system has been evaluated to the applicable ANSI UL and CSA Standards for use in both the United States and Canada The CSA is a Nationally Rec ognized Testing Laboratory NRTL NRTL is a designation granted by the U S Occupa tional Health and Safety Administration OSHA to laboratories which have been accredited to certify products to U S Standards Before installation check the local electrical codes for important information concerning the installation of telephone and electronic equipment The followin
52. menu button Press 5 or TOLL RESTRICTION menu button Press 1 or COS DAY menu button Press 2 or COS NIGHT menu button TOLL RESTRICTION OPTION Press 3 or EXEMPT FROM ARS menu button Press 4 or SUBJECT TO TOLL menu button Emme E e a SUBJECT TO TOLL v Press 2 or NO menu button menu button Press 1 or YES Press 2 or NO menu button 4 4 2 HN __ E ie aes gt SET DAY NIGHT COS XX NI EXEMPT FROM ARS v If necessary select COS number Press 1 or YES to program by scrolling menu button A v Press 1 or ON Press 2 or OFF menu button menu button v v Press 6 or DE NOSE TRUNK LIST ENTER TRUNK EXTENSION menu button e SpA 7 Y Enter the desired trunk number Extension number YES NO Y Y Press 1 or YES Press 2 or NO menu button menu button Page 44 Trunk Database Programming Flowchart Continued Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Programming System Speed Dial Numbers System Speed Dial numbers and names can be programmed by the installer or at any Adminis trator phone The System Speed Dial numbers can contain up to 48 digits each and can include hookflashes and or pauses for dialing a series of num
53. on the node where the group resides or on a node where the logged in endpoint resides When changing an Agent ID on the node where the hunt group resides the remotely logged in endpoint using that Agent ID will be logged out even though the Agent ID still exists on the remote node The hunt group will then contain the new Agent ID in its removed list making the new Agent ID available for log in use When changing an Agent ID on the node on which the logged in endpoint resides a node remote from the hunt group the remote member will be logged out and the old Agent ID will no longer exist on that node The hunt group on the original node will contain the old Agent ID in its removed list because this ID still exists on that node e During a database restore on a node containing ACD hunt groups that use Agents IDs all Agents IDs are placed into each hunt group s removed list All endpoints will be logged out during the restore e When the extension number of a logged in endpoint is changed the new extension will be logged in with the same Agent ID and will not be disconnected This applies to end points logged in both remotely and locally Enabling the Send Camp On Notifications to Members in DND Flag The Send Camp On Notifications to Members in DND flag is located under System Devices and Feature Codes Hunt Groups Local lt Hunt Group This flag indicates whether or not camp on burst tones are sent to hunt group members that
54. placed from the location where the system chassis is installed rather than from the loca tion where the emergency call is made In this situation emergency responders may be dispatched to the wrong location To minimize the risk of remote site users misdirecting emergency responders Inter Tel recommends regular testing of MGCP SIP gateway trunk s for dial tone e If uninterruptible power supply UPS protection has not been installed as part of the Inter Tel 5000 system IP and SIP endpoints will not operate when electrical power fails either at remote sites or at the main system location To place calls during a power failure in this situation IP and SIP endpoint users can only use a single line endpoint connected to one of the power failure bypass circuits built in to the system chassis If an endpoint connected to a power failure bypass circuit is not available users should make emergency calls from a local phone not connected to the system Day and Night Modes Separate lists appear in the database for Class of Service Outgoing Access Allowed Answer and Ring In assignments for day and night modes When an Administrator enters the Night Ring feature code the system uses the night mode lists When the system is in day mode the day lists are used Active calls are not affected when the mode is changed System Administrators can place any or all remote nodes into night mode or day mode The default feature code for Enable Ne
55. you can visually monitor the status of the associated extension Mini DSS buttons are not available on single line phones NOTE You can program a DSS button for an off node device but not for wildcard off node extensions Together the lamps in the buttons create a busy lamp field that indicates the status of the resource e g endpoint trunk hunt group or feature assigned to the buttons The table shown below explains what Mini DSS lamps indicate about the associated resource Table 7 Mini DSS Lamp Meanings IF THE LAMP IS THEN Solidly Lit The associated resource is busy or all phones in the associated hunt group are unavailable in Do Not Disturb busy or with hunt group remove enabled Or the associated feature is enabled Slow Flash The associated resource is in Do Not Disturb Fast Flash The associated resource has a call ringing in or a call is camped on to the hunt group This option is programmable If DSS ring flash is disabled a call ringing in to a phone shows a solidly lit lamp Continuous The associated resource is causing an ENDPOINT OFF HOOK sys Flutter tem alarm In Database Programming Mini DSS buttons may also be programmed for direct access to other resources such as paging zones or they can be assigned feature codes Refer to End point Feature Codes on page 119 Busy lamp indication is provided to show the idle or busy status of the resource or feature Pro
56. 07 CALL ME AT MESSAGE 08 AT THE DOCTOR MESSAGE 09 ON A TRIP MESSAGE 10 ON BREAK MESSAGE 11 OUT OF TOWN TIL MESSAGE 12 OUT OF OFFICE MESSAGE 13 OUT UNTIL MESSAGE 14 WITH A CLIENT MESSAGE 15 WITH A GUEST MESSAGE 16 UNAVAILABLE MESSAGE 17 IN CONFERENCE MESSAGE 18 AWAY FROM DESk MESSAGE 19 GONE HOME MESSAGE 20 OUT TO LUNCH Page 70 Recording Custom Voice Mail Prompts Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Reminder Messages DEFAULT REMINDER MESSAGE PRIMARY LANGUAGE REMINDER MESSAGE SECONDARY LANGUAGE REMINDER MESSAGE MESSAGE 01 MEETING MESSAGE 02 STAFF MEETING MESSAGE 08 SALES MEETING MESSAGE 04 CANCEL MEETING MESSAGE 05 APPOINTMENT MESSAGE 06 PLACE CALL MESSAGE 07 CALL CLIENT MESSAGE 08 CALL CUSTOMER MESSAGE 09 CALL HOME MESSAGE 10 CALL CORPORATE MESSAGE 11 CALL ENGINEERING MESSAGE 12 CALL MARKETING MESSAGE 13 CALL ACCOUNTING MESSAGE 14 CANCEL DND MESSAGE 15 CANCEL CALL FWD MESSAGE 16 TAKE MEDICATION MESSAGE 17 MAKE RESERVATION MESSAGE 18 REVIEW SCHEDULE MESSAGE 19 LUNCH MESSAGE 20 REMINDER Recording Custom Voice Mail Prompts Page 71 Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTR
57. 1 August 2005 The Inter Tel 5000 Network Communications Solutions platform provides many user friendly features To describe the system features this chapter has been divided into the following sec tions e Access to the Features This section contains a list of the feature codes and their defi nitions e System Organization This section describes possible administrator assignments Attendant arrangements and hunt groups including UCD and ACD hunt groups e Trunk Features This section explains the trunk functions and programmable features including dual tone multi frequency DTMP or dial pulse signaling types of trunks loop start T1 E1 PRI Caller ID DNIS and ANI trunk groups outgoing access allowed answer and ring in assignments call routing tables day and night modes of operation automatic route selection ARS trunk and toll restriction area office code number plans emergency calls and direct inward system access DISA e Endpoints This section describes the endpoints supported by the system Available endpoints include IP phones operating in Inter Tel Protocol ITP mode IP Single Line Adapters IP SLA SIP phones digital phones and Mini DSS Direct Station Selec tion Units and single line endpoints such as single line phones answering machines and fax machines e Intercom Outside and General Call Processing Features Several sections explain the use of the endpoint features that are available t
58. 161 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 162 Emergency Outgoing Access Lists The Inter Tel 5000 supports two outgoing access lists called Emergency Day Outgoing Access and Emergency Night Outgoing Access These lists which are similar to the Day Night Outgo ing Access lists are programmable for CO Trunk Groups and Node IP Connection Groups These lists default to the Auto Extension List PP051 Auto All Endpoints Ten Emergency Numbers The system can store up to 10 emergency numbers that are dialed when the Emergency Call feature is used When the Emergency Call feature code is dialed the system selects a trunk from Trunk Group and automatically dials the number programmed in the database as Emergency Number 1 For systems operating in the US the default Emergency Number 1 is 911 For systems operat ing in the European market the default Emergency Number is 999 If a user accesses a trunk or ARS and dials Emergency Numbers 1 10 the dialed number will automatically override all toll restrictions and trunk access programming If the system is installed in an area where emergency responder services such as 911or 999 are not available Inter Tel recommends substituting the phone number for the local police or fire department or the telephone company operator This feature can be made inoperative by removing all trunk access and or by removing the dialed digit string
59. 175 October 176 November 177 December 178 First Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 42 Voice Prompts BVM EM and VPU Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT 179 Second 180 Third 181 Fourth 182 Fifth 183 Sixth 184 Seventh 185 Eighth 186 Ninth 187 Tenth 188 Eleventh 189 Twelfth 190 Thirteenth 191 Fourteenth 192 Fifteenth 193 Sixteenth 194 Seventeenth 195 Eighteenth 196 Nineteenth 197 Twentieth 198 Twenty first 199 Twenty second 200 Twenty third 201 Twenty fourth 202 Twenty fifth 203 Twenty sixth 204 Twenty seventh 205 Twenty eighth 206 Twenty ninth 207 Thirtieth Page 301 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 302 Table 42 Voice Prompts BVM EM and VPU Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT 208 Thirty first 209 the Voice Mail system 210 The system is set to notify you between 211 is turned off 212 is turned on to call your pager at 213 With all new messages 214 With all priority messages 215 Starting at 216 ending at 217 For mailbox and group list maintenance press 2 218 To send a message to all subscribers press 1 219 To make a custom recording press 1 2
60. 181 canceling a waiting message 183 indications 180 mailboxes 180 silent 181 viewing 182 Enhanced Speakerphone 104 digital endpoints 104 feature code 125 358 Enhanced Speakerphones for Digital Endpoints 104 Enterprise Messaging Automated Attendant Directory 271 Error Reporting 249 Exact Spell search for Directory name 269 Executive and Professional Display Endpoint Speaker phones 103 Executive Display Endpoint 95 Exiting a Conference 204 Exiting and Re Entering the Conference 205 ExtensionID 260 261 262 280 Extension ID personal options 62 Extension Lists in ACD hunt groups 144 in hunt groups 135 Index INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Extension Numbers directory 268 programming 34 External Music Source 109 171 External Paging 109 F Facility Groups 155 Facsimile fax Machine 109 Fault Code Message Record Field 251 Fax Card Required 263 Fax E Mail Message Format 263 Faxes importing 67 Fax On Demand 274 audiotex recordings 266 nodes 266 Fax on Demand importing faxes 67 Feature Buttons 98 117 endpoints 98 feature codes 125 358 initialized values 96 Feature Codes 197 directory 227 general 119 357 trunk access 118 Feature codes 118 Feature Codes Default 357 Features 118 Audio Diagnostics 252 Call Screening 200 Do Not Disturb 235 network group diagnostics 57 Paging 234 peer to peer P2P 92 Phantom Devices 255 Speed Dial 221 summary of system 12 Transfer Rec
61. ACD calls If the agent wants to terminate the Wrap Up Mode while an ACD call is on Hold the proce dure described in the preceding section can be used Restart ACD Idle Time Upon Login Flag Page 147 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 148 ACD Agent ID Automatic Connect Flag When the ACD Agent ID flag is enabled and the agent is using a headset ACD hunt group calls will automatically be connected following a short ring burst This feature will not work if the agent is not using a headset When the ACD agent logs in or removes the endpoint from Do Not Disturb mode the first call will ring until the ACD agent answers it However every time an ACD hunt group call is received after the first call the agent will hear the ring burst from the endpoint and the call will be automatically connected This flag overrides the endpoint s Transfer to Connect endpoint flag which is disabled by default Group Call Pick Up When the Group Call Pick Up feature is enabled a call ringing in to a hunt group or one of its endpoints can be picked up at any other endpoint Users can enter the Reverse Transfer feature code 4 and dial a hunt group s pilot number to pick up a call that is ringing in to the hunt group s pilot number or to any endpoint within that hunt group The system follows the priority list shown below to determine which call is picked up The system follows the hunt group
62. Adapter SMDR Station Message Detail Recording TCP Transmission Control Protocol TDM Time Division Multiplex TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol UCD Uniform Call Distribution UDP User Datagram Protocol UK United Kingdom US United States of America USB Universal Serial Bus VAD Voice Activity Detection VolP VPU Voice over Internet Protocol Voice Processing Unit WAN Wide Area Network Page 10 CAUTION without Triangle Product Description INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Product Description CONTENTS PAGE Introducti xo be a4 thpbehVREREREREEPRRPEPEREONOEPXUVEPRE EEEa CE odes 12 Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 Communication Servers snas s ananena nna 12 Inter Tel Network Capability os 2 cnecasecidecster RR RI ERR ERR REG 12 DROS ONL OB uer E Sae ideae don p odio eed pide dut i e e edo caca qu e oe a 13 Internet Protocol Resource Application 0 0 0 cece eee eee 13 Inter Tel 5000 IP Resource Usage iude ded max bees es eR R UR edad Ed as 13 Summary of Hardware and Software Features ssssssssesesesececesees 13 Lic nsinf ciu ua ap ro e FRE seasca Tasa sid erras oes see 3 4 a presas 14 USB Security Key iuoesewnacertex Ra kara ERA Ga exQ eese a E kpad a Xp E aec e ees 14 Inter Tel CS 5200 ios iach eA RARO RR Meth EAR UR RA RUE RR tech RR REA ROPA RR LAC 15 Inter Tel CS 5400
63. Alternate Transient Display Timer Endpoint Flag and Timer 168 Transient Call Indication On Call Answer Endpoint Flag lesse 168 Page 112 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 CONTENTS PAGE User Programmable Feature Buttons 0 0 0 eee eee ee 168 Standard Alternate Keymap Switching 0 0 0 cece eee eee nee 169 A tom tie Call ACCESS osecas ded osx EP ye Bebe SQ EDEN Dew EE A he edax es 170 Music On Hold and Background Music llleeeleeeeeese 171 Multilingual Capability amp iukx sun Ra REA RESCUE E ER eee RRGUR a RE ORCE eres A RORIS ACA 172 lud TTC PPP eer Eeee E E T EE rE e EaR ONEA 172 Language Selection 212oce dust bx RA G s WR RR ERG qu Gedeeas RE 172 Secondary Language Selection 0 0 0 cece cece eee 172 TRUUKS PPP C sete eee es 173 Do Not Disturb and Reminder Messages 0 00 cece eee eee eee eens 173 Voice Processing SUSIDI S qa re sunun SEAT ARA REATRSRRAEARCNGqGESESAGRAGqANEREES 174 Multi Language Feature on Network Operation 0 0 0 cece eee eee eee 174 DirectOri S MP 175 Change Language Feature t ode coss quare ska mr RENTA qu E SRI CREE ACER 175 Intercom Calls aso xax V ERE E Rx need RR SYL ex RR AREE RE REPRE ER UR RRERE ES 175 Programming for Private Intercom Calls 0 0 0 0 ee eee eee eee 175 Ring Interc
64. CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Station to Station Messages Page 180 Intercom callers may leave a message waiting indication if a called endpoint is busy if there is no answer if the endpoint is in Do Not Disturb or when they are connected to or placed on hold by another endpoint Users are allowed to leave message for and respond to messages from users on other nodes There are two messaging options e Have the called party return your call Display endpoints show the source and time of the message When the called party responds to the message indication a call is auto matically placed to your endpoint e Leave a message with the called party s message center Display endpoints show that a message was left with the endpoint user s assigned message center When the called party responds to the message indication a call is automatically placed to his or her message center To signal that a message is waiting a called Inter Tel endpoint s WRJ button flashes and the display shows the number of waiting messages Each time the IET button is pressed the display shows the message source for each of the waiting messages in the order they were received For messages from endpoints the display shows MSG endpoint and the date and time of the message For messages from Voice Mailboxes the display shows XX MESSAGES FROM MBOX XXXX to indicate the number of waiting messages in each mailbox that left a message Th
65. Call 276 SMDR buffering 246 system prompts 70 voice mail 279 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR 312 Volume Control endpoints 166 Volume Controls 107 M A Warning Messages 250 Wav File Attachment 286 Wrap Up Mode for ACD Calls 147 Voice Mail Flowchart NOTE At any menu level you can say Cancel or press to cancel or return to the previous menu or say Accept or press EM to accept ACCESSING THE SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR MAILBOX MENU ADMINISTRATOR S MAILBOX Broadcast Message KN i SENDING A MESSAGE EITHER Press the MSG button to respond to a message from voice Mailbox Maintenance EN During your message mail Recording Options i OR Call the voice mail extension N Pause Ea number say Login or press Erg Import Fax Erase and Re record EB and say or enter your mailbox y number System Prompt Replacement Continue Ei Enter your password press Edi After your message Say or press to access adminis Replay trator features CREATE CUSTOM RECORDING Append E If existing recording plays Erase Ell Replay play Accept E Append Hang up to cancel Enter Mailbox Number or Extension ID Enter Group Number Erase and Re Record Y Accept ASSIGN CUSTOM RECORDINGS If no recording exists Select Recording EN Panels cones see Makin
66. Conferences and Paging Collecting Audio Diagnostics Data If your Inter Tel service technician instructs you to collect this diagnostics data perform a System History Freeze using the instructions in page 56 Audio Problems Page 253 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Using the Audio Diagnostics Feature Page 254 Only endpoints with the Audio Diagnostics feature enabled can use the feature NOTE Only 6 line display endpoints have the menu buttons mentioned in these instruc tions Users who have endpoints with a 2 line display or no display must use the numeric entries to use the Audio Diagnostics feature To use the Audio Diagnostics feature 1 If the endpoint is idle while on hook enter the Audio Diagnostics feature code 320 If you are on an active call press ENIM then enter the Audio Diagnostics feature code 320 The display shows PLEASE SELECT AUDIO PROBLEM Do one of the following to select an audio problem EITHER Press the desired menu button OR Enter the two digit numeric code 01 12 that corresponds to the audio problem Refer to page 253 The display shows PLEASE SELECT AUDIO DIRECTION Select the direction of the audio problem EITHER Press the desired menu button OR Press the dialpad button that corresponds to one of the following responses e Press Kl for ONLY I HEAR IT e Press KM for ONLY OTHER PARTY e Pr
67. Ell or the SYSTEM menu button The display shows ENTER SYSTEM OPTION Select one of the following a b Do Not Disturb Messages This option allows you to program the DND messages used by the endpoints To select it press HJ or the DND MESSAGES menu button Then do the following 1 The display shows SELECT DND MESSAGE Enter a message number or scroll to the desired message To scroll to the correct message press the Vol ume button or the SCROLL plus NEXT and PREVIOUS menu buttons 2 When the display shows the desired DND message enter the new message as described on page 26 3 Press EM or ACCEPT to save the new message The display shows DATA BASE UPDATED and then returns to the SELECT DND MESSAGE prompt Or to cancel your entry press or CANCEL The display shows NO UPDATE PERFORMED 4 To program another message scroll to the desired message and repeat these steps 5 Press E again to exit to the ENTER SYSTEM OPTION prompt Password This option allows you to set a password that limits access to the Administrator programming feature To select it press Kl or the PASSWORD menu button Then do the following 1 The display shows CHANGE PASSWORD TO Enter a password of up to eight digits then press EM Or to erase the password and leave it blank just press El Page 33 Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 34 2 The displ
68. Fax Detection Call Routing Announce ment CRA applications and mailboxes can be programmed to automatically route incoming fax calls to a specified extension or to an e mail address For information about the Automatic Fax Detection refer to page 263 Automatic Speech Recognition ASR The EM system supports Automatic Speech Recognition ASR ASR can be enabled on many levels within the voice processing system Using EM subscribers can issue spoken commands to navigate the voice mail menus Subscribers and nonsubscribers can also use spoken commands to search the voice mail directory and to navigate Automated Attendant menus and CRA paths When ASR resources are not available subscribers and nonsubscribers can also per form these tasks by pressing the appropriate dialpad digits when prompted by the sys tem For information about ASR refer to page 264 Call Routing Announcement CRA This application can be used in place of a play back device and is useful for programming Hunt Group announcement and overflow stations When called the CRA application plays a recording and then hangs up The CRA application uses digit translation to help calling parties reach their intended destinations Digit translation allows the caller to press a single digit to access a mail box a Fax on Demand function a station or a Hunt Group Digit translation can be programmed for each digit from 0 through 9 and plus a Timeout option that applies if th
69. GROUP Ext 2000 a HUNT GROUP ANNOUNCEMENT STATION Ny OVERFLOW a STATION m NE ID 2370 Agent ID can be logged in or out RECALL STATION There are three feature codes that can be used for logging in to and out of the ACD hunt groups ACD Agent Login ACD Agent Logout and ACD Agent Login Logout The first two perform only one operation The third Login Logout is a toggle feature code that logs the endpoint in or out of all associated ACD hunt groups at once If the toggle feature code is pro grammed in a user programmable button with a lamp the lamp will be lit when the agent is logged in to an ACD hunt group and available to receive calls and it will be unlit when the agent is logged out To log out of all of your ACD hunt groups at once using the login logout feature code While on or off hook single line users must lift the handset enter the ACD Agent Login Logout feature code 328 The display shows AGENT LOGGED OUT OF ALL ACDS and you hear a confirmation tone Hang up if off hook ACD Agent Log In and Log Out Page 145 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 146 To log in to all of your ACD hunt groups at once using the login logout feature code 1 While on or off hook single line users must lift the handset enter the ACD Agent Login Logout feature code 328 If you were already logged in the display shows AGENT LOGGED OUT OF ALL AC
70. IE button will re light if you clear the message indication without saving or deleting the Voice Mail message 2 If message waiting indications continue there is another message Repeat this proce dure Canceling a Waiting Message Message indications from Voice Mail will only be cleared if you save or deletes NOTE the waiting Voice Mail message The IET button will re light if you clear the message indication without saving or deleting the Voice Mail message To cancel a displayed message without answering at an Inter Tel endpoint 1 When the message you want to cancel is displayed as described on the previous page remain on hook and press the asterisk Eg button or the DELETE menu button The message is canceled 2 Ifthe WEJ button continues to flash there is another message The display shows the next message Either respond to it or cancel it To cancel a message without answering at a single line endpoint or without displaying messages at an Inter Tel endpoint 1 If you receive message waiting indications enter the Cancel Current Message feature code 368 The message is canceled 2 f you continue to receive message waiting indications there is another message Either respond to it or cancel it Alternate Message Source The Alternate Message Source feature was developed to enable a voice mail unit to leave mes sages through an endpoint location or hunt group that is designated as its alternate message so
71. ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 LCD Contrast Adjustment The contrast of the LCD screens on IP and digital display phones is adjustable Eight different contrast levels are available Examples follow for a two line phone and a six line phone For instructions to adjust the contrast on a specific phone refer to the phone User Guide as identi fied in Phone User Guides on page 6 Examples To adjust the LCD contrast on the Model 8520 a two line display phone 1 While the phone is idle locate the contrast control wheel on the back upper right sec tion of the phone 2 Adjust the contrast of the LCD screen by turning the wheel clockwise lighter or coun terclockwise darker To adjust the LCD contrast on the Model 8560 a six line display phone 1 While the phone is idle press the Special button ESSI and enter the LCD Contrast feature code 303 2 EITHER Select LIGHTER or DARKER on the menu buttons OR Use the Volume button to make your selection OR Press the desired level 1 8 3 Press the Speaker button or ACCEPT to save your change The Model 8620 IP phone is equipped with a contrast control knob to adjust NOTE the contrast level This knob is located on the back of the phone and can be adjusted while viewing the display Node and Circuit Number on Power Up To aid in installation and troubleshooting procedures display phones show their identification for 5 seconds when power is turned on when the syste
72. ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 147 To change the telephone number press two To change the telephone number say Num ber or press two 148 To change times of day press two To change times of day say Time or press two 149 To change days of the week press three To change days of the week say Days or press three 150 For pager notification press one For pager notification say Pager or press one 151 For personal phone notification press two For personal phone notification say Personal or press two 152 For notification of all new messages press For notification of all new messages say All one Messages or press one 153 For priority only press two For priority only say Priority or press two 154 Please enter the destination telephone number Please say or enter the destination telephone and wait for further instructions number and wait for further instructions 155 The new number is N A 156 Please enter the start time Please say or enter the start time 157 Please enter the stop time Please say or enter the stop time 158 I m sorry You must program a telephone num N A ber first 159 Invalid time N A 160 For AM press one For AM say AM or press one 161 Please select the days of the week on which N A you wish to be notified 162 Not used N A
73. MM hours and minutes rounded up to the nearest minute The SMDR output report is printed as shown on the following page A page heading with the day of the week date month year and column headings is generated just after midnight to show the change in date A header is also printed after output from another system source alarm informative message etc using the same output device interrupts the SMDR output Figure 15 SMDR Report Format TYP EXT TRUNK DIALED DIGITS START ELAPSED COST ACCOUNT CODE XX XXXXXXXXXXX lt 28 characters HH MM HH MM SS XX XX XXXXXXXXXXXX TYP Call type abbreviations for Free Joo Local LOC TollLocal TC Toll Long Distance TLD Operator and International O l DISA DSA Conference CNF DID DNIS non DISA DID Incoming IN Network NET EXT TRUNK DIALED DIGITS Page 248 fthe Display O I for Operator and International Calls flag is disabled operator calls are displayed under OP and international calls are displayed under INT See page 5 305 for details about this flag The extension number XXXXX of the last endpoint to handle the call is shown For a CO to CO call this field shows the extension number of the second trunk involved For a confer ence call it shows the endpoint that initiated or answered the call For an unanswered ring in it shows An outgoing call that has been initiated by another trunk will show the ini
74. N A sheet is 366 You have chosen not to have your extension N A appear on your cover sheet 367 If you would like to have your fax delivered in If you would like to have your fax delivered in the future press pound the future say Delay or press pound 368 To re enter the number press three To re enter the number say Re enter or press three 369 If you wish to have your extension appear on If you wish to have your extension appear on your cover sheet enter the extension followed your cover sheet say or enter the extension by pound then say or press pound 370 If you are calling from your fax machine press If you are calling from your fax machine say one Yes or press one 371 Press the start button on your fax machine N A now 372 All of our fax lines are currently busy N A 373 Please try again later N A 374 Your fax will be delivered to N A 375 Your fax will be delivered shortly N A 376 am unable to communicate with your fax N A machine Please make sure it is operating properly and try again 377 Please enter the 10 digit telephone number of Please say or enter the 10 digit fax number your fax machine including area code including area code 378 The number you enter may be up to twenty N A digits in length Page 330 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued
75. Network Communications Solutions family of products The guide focuses on system hardware and software features and on the use of System Administrator and Voice Mail Administrator phone features to perform typical administrator tasks and activities Instructions for using non Administrator phones and the features other endpoints appear in the user guides that come with those devices This section describes the guide s content and organization the intended audience typographi cal conventions used to identify safety hazards and important information related Inter Tel Inc technical documents and a list of abbreviations used in the guide Endpoints and Phones As digital wireless and computerized communication methods have evolved the language of telecommunications has had to change to keep pace Not long ago voice and modem encoded text were communicated from one telephone instrument to another across a global network of copper wire optical fiber microwave antennas and satellites More recently however the development of the Internet and of World Wide Web www sites have introduced a multime dia dimension to information and made it all more readily accessible through computer net working As this evolution has occurred new words and meanings have been introduced to describe the new methods and equipment used for communicating Telephone systems that once provided only phone service to consumers have become commu nication plat
76. On Off 319 Not used on single line endpoints Disables enables the endpoint s handsfree intercom answering Incoming intercom calls ring as pri vate calls if handsfree answering is disabled Headset Enable Headset Disable Headset On Off 315 316 317 Not used on single line endpoints The enable code signals the system that a headset has been connected to the endpoint The dis able code returns the endpoint to normal oper ation The on off feature code can be used to toggle the feature on or off Hold Individual 336 Places a call on hold so that it can be picked up directly at that endpoint or through a reverse transfer from any other endpoint Inter Tel endpoints use the HOLD button Hold System 335 Places an outside call on system hold It can be picked up directly at any endpoint that has an individual trunk button and has allowed answer and or outgoing access for that trunk or by the endpoint that placed it on hold If used on conference or intercom calls the sys tem places the call on individual hold Hunt Group Remove Hunt Group Replace Hunt Group Remove Replace 322 323 324 Removes the endpoint from its assigned hunt group s or places it in again Does not affect non hunt group calls The remove replace fea ture code can be used to toggle the feature Endpoint Feature Codes System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE
77. Please make sure it is operating properly and try again Page 307 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 308 Table 42 Voice Prompts BVM EM and VPU Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT 377 Please enter the 10 digit area code and telephone number of your fax machine 378 The number you enter may be up to twenty digits in length 379 Your fax is scheduled to be delivered at 380 Please enter a document number 381 When you have finished importing documents press star 382 Document number 383 is currently in use 384 already exists 385 To replace this document press POUND 386 Document received 387 Press POUND to continue 388 To import a fax document press 4 389 If this is an international call enter 011 followed by your country code and your fax number Then press POUND 390 I m sorry I m not allowed to dial that number 391 To receive your documents please hang up and call from your fax machine 392 The system does not have enough disk space to import your document 393 The system is unable to import your document because it will exceed the Maximum Fax Library Size 394 For recording options press 3 395 There are 396 calls ahead of you 397 Your call should be answered within 398 You have selected 399 documents 4
78. Processing Unit VPU and the Basic Voice Mail BVM Page 294 Table 42 Voice Prompts BVM EM and VPU PROMPT ID CONTENT 001 To leave a message please enter a mailbox number 002 For the directory press pound 003 To reach an operator press 0 004 I m sorry 005 is not available 006 The number entered is not valid 007 Using the buttons on your phone please spell the last name of the person then press POUND For the letter Q press 7 For the letter Z press 9 008 To exit the directory press STAR 009 Mailbox number 010 If this is correct press POUND 011 For the previous name in the directory press 1 012 To hear additional information press 2 013 To hear the next directory name press 3 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 42 Voice Prompts BVM EM and VPU Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT 014 To spell a new name press 4 015 Extension number 017 is not a valid choice 018 Please try again 019 After the tone please record your message When finished you may hang up to deliver the message or press POUND for more options 020 Message delivered 021 To replay press 1 022 To erase and re record press 3 023 To append this recording press 2 024 To accept press POUND 025 Please record a
79. Programming Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 3 4 Press EJ or ACCEPT to exit to the ENTER ENDPOINT EXTENSION prompt The display shows UPDATING DATABASE for four seconds and then DATABASE UPDATED Or to cancel your entry press or CAN CEL The display shows NO UPDATE PERFORMED Although the system begins to update the database when you NOTE Press EB or ACCEPT it may take longer than the four second dis play to change the extension in the system especially in a large or busy system Press Ell or ACCEPT again to exit to the ENTER SYSTEM OPTION prompt If an extension number is displayed press to exit instead of EJ or ACCEPT If swapping endpoints 1 m Co 2 c1 IL Press Ell or SWAP EXTS The display shows ENTER ENDPOINT EXTEN SION Enter the first extension number to be swapped using one of the fol lowing methods If you enter an invalid extension number you hear reorder tones and must try again Enter a complete number Enter the extension number using your dialpad When a valid number is entered the circuit information is displayed Press EZ or ACCEPT to continue Enter a partial number Enter a partial extension number then press the EB button the high end of the Volume button or the ACCEPT menu button The display shows the extension number user name and circuit number of the end point that most closely matches the
80. Remote Message Notification llle 281 Primary and Alternate Notification 0 0 0 eee eee eee eee 282 Messive Plans si c2ccdeaie in Med Pie ee A RE dd RESP RU ERR EU ed 282 Retry Call Attempts o seiss ceu bie me baeionedbes dda Rd ER dined 282 Notification NUMbe ei2 2 22982ceneee hie Gh seen acute dee whee eu arak ies 283 Subscriber E eat r s sive sede enc cash teen AER E RRRR esas ASA ATMRRERC EG A EE 284 Unified Messaging usura n QU ROCE CROCI AO ORE AUR 44 DOORS OER RS LEE ACE RR CR I 284 Version 2 2 DOSCPIDUGH Cou o 3 39 4379 9 os 64 915 NUR Sede do AG dL de EO REN ded RE ALIO POR REOR 284 S s 285 Levels 2 and 3 4 ova sab ERRAT REA RES ad Pewee A Ke EE E Kd x Ed 287 Version 2 3 DSSCHIDHOR s essees dr deb cte hier edet cree kate dera s 287 Integrated Solution aa dni dess Re tine n RERRPe ipte ranie ber kaei Aetio rabie 287 Outlook Client Based Solution 0 0 00 cece eee eee 290 Page 258 Voice Processing Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Introduction This section describes the voice processing system features supported by Inter Tel voice pro cessing systems Features are dependent on the voice processing system the equipment used and the site s licensing Contact your local Inter Tel reseller to determine which voice process ing system features are supported on your system Automated Attendant I
81. Remove Replace 324 y X LCD Contrast Control 303 y Y Message 365 y y Message Cancel Message Left 366 y X AudioCodes MP 104 SIP Gateway Hardware and Endpoints INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 11 7P and SIP Features and Feature Codes Continued FEATURE NAME FEATURE ITP MODE SIP MODE CODE Message Cancel Message On End 368 N point Message Silent Message 367 y X Microphone Mute On Off 314 y Page 7 y x Page Receive On Off 325 y x Program Buttons 397 y x Program Station Password 392 y X Queue Callback Request 6 Y x Record A Call 385 y x Redial 380 V V Redirect Call 331 y Y Reminder Message 305 Y x Reminder Message Cancel 306 Y X Remote Programming 359 y X Reverse Transfer Call Pick Up 4 y Review Buttons 396 Y x Ring Intercom Always On Off 377 y Ring Tone Selection 398 y Routing Off 304 y x Station Speed Dial 382 y x Station Speed Dial Programming 383 Y X System Forward Enable 352 Y x System Forward Disable 353 Y X System Forward On Off 354 Y x System Speed Dial 381 Y x Switch Keymap 399 y x Transfer To Hold 346 Y X Transfer To Ring 345 y x NOTE Multi protocol phones operating in SIP mode use the feature codes that are pro grammed on the node AudioCodes MP 104 SIP Gateway Page 85 Hardware and Endpoints INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GU
82. SIP phones do not support OHVA To enable the OHVA the following must be completed e The OHVA system flag must be enabled When the system is in the default state this flag is enabled e Each OHVA equipped Inter Tel endpoint can be programmed for placing and or receiv ing OHVA calls By default OHVA is disabled at the station level e Other Inter Tel endpoints and single line endpoints can be programmed for placing OHVA calls as desired Inter Tel endpoints without PC Data Port Modules or second ary voice paths and single line endpoints cannot receive OHVA calls since they do not have secondary voice path circuitry By default OHVA is disabled at the station level e Mini DSS equipped digital display phones can be programmed to override the Camp On and OHVA Screening timers and make Immediate OHVA calls This is a useful option for Attendant stations Any combination of OHVA enabled and disabled stations is available through database pro gramming For example all Attendants may be programmed to make but not receive OHVA calls while other stations are allowed to receive but not place OHVA calls OHVA calls cannot be processed if the secondary voice path or the speakerphone of the called phone is not available This occurs when the endpoint has a different OHVA call in progress has an active data call in progress is on an active handsfree intercom or outside call has handsfree disabled has a call being changed from handset
83. SPEAKER station pro gramming is in progress Red LED Station is Station is in Station has Continuous busy or Do Not Dis a call ring flutter indi SPEED unplugged turb Red ing in Red cates that DIAL OR Red LED LED LED the station MINI DSS was left off hook Red LED Trunk is in Trunk is in Trunk is Trunk is Trunk is on use at an use at your recalling ringing in or hold Red other sta station from hold or camped on LED if on tion in a Green transfer waiting another sta confer LED Red LED Red LED if tion or green ence at on another if at your your sta station or station tion or is green if at TRUNK unplugged your sta Red LED tion Or busy trunk queue callback to your station Green LED The LED changing color condition only applies to Inter Tel digital phones equipped with LEDs that can light red or green in accordance with the way the buttons are programmed Red and Green LEDs Inter Tel Models 8500 8520 and 8560 digital phones Executive Professional Standard and Associate Display phones and Basic Digital phones have red and green LEDs in the button lamps When both colors are used a green lamp generally indicates that the call is active ring ing or holding at a station see below for a possible exception for direct ring in calls When the lamp is red the call is active ringing or holding at another station Trun
84. Spell Outside callers and endpoint users with nondisplay endpoints and single line endpoints use Quick Spell Display endpoints use the Exact Spell method e Quick Spell callers press a single digit or button from their endpoint dialpad for each letter or character entered For example dialpad button El shows ABC button EJ shows DEF etc To enter JONES you would press Ei E O EJ KM Some characters are not shown on the buttons for Q press KM for Z press EM for punctuation marks press the Ell button e Exact Spell callers press the dialpad buttons to enter the name The number of times a button is pressed determines which character is entered as shown on the chart below When adjoining characters are located under the same button press once to advance to the next character For example 5666 66337777 would enter JONES Table 39 Quick Spell and Exact Spell Dialpad Entries NUMBER OF TIMES BUTTON IS PRESSED BUTTON 1 2 3 4 5 1 amp 1 2 A B C i 2 3 D E F 3 4 G H l 3 4 5 J K L 5 6 M N O 6 7 P Q R S 7 8 T U V 8 9 Ww X Y Z 9 0 0 After the digits have been entered the caller presses EM to begin the search The Automated Attendant application plays the name that most closely matches the digit s that were entered If E is pressed without entering any digits the caller will hear the first name in the directory If a user presses Ell at any t
85. TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Networked systems containing nodes running Inter Tel Axxess v8 1 or earlier require special attention because those nodes do not have the Alarm Queue feature In networks that include these early version Axxess systems a broadcast message is sent only when the most recent network alarm is cleared When the message is sent that network alarm is cleared on all nodes in the system Once the alarm is cleared Axxess v8 1 or earlier nodes will not show any other alarms because they do not have a queue to store alarms Nodes that are running v8 2 and later however may still have additional alarms in the queue When this happens each v8 2 and later node must manually clear the other network alarms For example imagine a three node network with Node 1 running Axxess v8 0 Node 2 running Axxess v9 0 and Node 3 running Inter Tel 5000 v1 1 The following sequence of events could possibly occur Node 1 generates two network alarms one immediately after the other However Node 1 shows only the second alarm because it has no ability to queue alarms Nodes 2 and 3 show both network alarms E Node 1 clears the second alarm the only one it can recognize and a broadcast mes sage is sent to the other nodes Node 1 now shows no alarms but Nodes 2 and 3 still show the first alarm Node 2 then clears the first alarm but a broadcast message is NOT sent Now Nodes 1 and 2 show no
86. The individual trunk button also flashes on the endpoint that is being forwarded Calls cannot be forwarded to restricted outside phone numbers or to endpoints in Do Not Dis turb If the endpoint that is programmed to receive your forwarded calls is later placed in Do Page 217 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 FWD Button Not Disturb and you receive a call you will momentarily see a display showing that the desti nation endpoint is in Do Not Disturb the call will remain at your endpoint Direct ring in calls that are forwarded to an endpoint in DND will ring the DND E endpoint in accordance with the rules of DND If your endpoint is in Do Not Disturb and you have call forwarding programmed the call is still forwarded unless you enabled Forward No Answer With Forward No Answer intercom callers will see the programmed Do Not Disturb display and the call will not be forwarded If calls are forwarded to a voice processing system application and the system is unable to communicate with the voice processing system PC the call will not be forwarded It will remain at your endpoint Call Forward overrides System Call Forward at the principal endpoint If an endpoint is programmed for Forward No Answer or Forward No Answer Busy and receives a transferred call the Forward No Answer timer is started when the intercom call from the transferring endpoint begins ringing The For
87. This includes calls being served and waiting calls however all calls being served count as one call The estimated wait time is based on a programmed Average Connect Time Per Call multiplied by the number of calls ahead of the caller in the queue divided by the number of available hunt group members avg connect time per call x no of waiting calls available members For details refer to Call Routing Announcement on page 265 If a voice processing system application is used as an announcement or overflow endpoint or as the recall destination and the system is unable to communicate with the voice processing system outside calls will not be sent to the announcement or overflow application They will continue to camp on to the hunt group UCD Hunt Group Priority List Some endpoints may be members of more than one UCD hunt group For this reason hunt groups are assigned a priority level The priority level determines which hunt group s calls should be received first when calls ring in or camp on to several hunt groups at once UCD priority levels range from 0 low to 75 high If an endpoint is a member of multiple hunt groups that have the same priority level calls received by those hunt groups will be queued in the order they were received by the telephone system Non UCD hunt groups are treated as if they have a priority level of 0 Figure 7 UCD Hunt Group Priority Levels PRIORITY LEVELS Calls ring in or camp on to all
88. USERNAME Enter the new name as described on page 26 Or to cancel your entry press or CAN CEL The display shows NO UPDATE PERFORMED C Toll Restriction This option allows you to set the endpoint class of service for day and or night modes To select it press Kl or the TOLL RESTRICTION menu but ton Then do the following 1 6 The display shows TOLL RESTRICTION OPTION Press Kll or the COS DAY menu button to program day mode toll restriction Or press EM or the COS NIGHT menu button to program night mode toll restriction The display shows SET DAY or NIGHT COS XX If this is not the COS you want to program scroll to the correct COS by pressing the high end of the Volume button or NEXT to scroll forward or press the low end of the Vol ume button or PREVIOUS to scroll backward For more information about COS refer to page 158 The default COS numbers are provided in Table Table 5 Default Class of Service COS Numbers COS 02 Deny Area Office COS 06 Deny Equal Access COS 03 Deny Operator COS 07 Deny Local Calls COS 04 Deny Toll Access COS 08 Denied Numbers COS 05 Deny International COS 09 Allowed Numbers When the correct COS is displayed press Kl or the ON menu button to enable the toll restriction Or press El or the OFF menu button to disable it If desired repeat preceding step 2 and step 3 to program additional COS toll restrictions Press EM or ACCEPT to sa
89. a display endpoint the caller sees DO NOT DISTURB For detailed instructions about using Do Not Disturb refer to page 235 To receive an intercom call on a single line endpoint When you hear repeating double tones lift the handset To receive a transferred to hold intercom call NOTE If the endpoint does not have an button the call will appear under a Call button Inter Tel endpoints When the button or Call button is fluttering and the dis play shows lt calling endpoint gt TFR FROM lt transferring endpoint gt lift the handset and press the button or Call button Or while on hook press the but Page 176 Handsfree Enable Disable System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 ton or Call button to speak handsfree You are connected to the caller Executive Dis play Professional Display and Model 8560 phone users have the same menu button options as described for a ringing intercom call Single line endpoints When you hear a page announcing that a call is holding at your endpoint lift the handset at your endpoint and enter the Individual Hold feature code 336 You are connected to the caller Placing Intercom Calls When placing an intercom call begin dialing before the Dial Initiation timer expires If the timer expires the system drops the connection and sends reorder tones To place an intercom call In the procedure below if you want to place a priv
90. account code overrides standard or forced account codes The field is blank if no account code was used If an asterisk appears at the end of the record as shown in the sample it indi cates that the call was terminated because the system detected a disconnect signal from the trunk that is the caller hung up before the station user on the call NOTE System Error Message Print System Error Message Print The system has a self diagnostic feature that monitors the system When a system fault or other noteworthy condition is detected the software determines the impact of the condition and clas sifies it as a major or minor alarm or as other message type If the Message Print option is enabled the messages are sent to the designated output port For a complete list of Diagnostics codes refer to the Message Print Diagnostics Manual part number 550 8018 Page 249 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 250 The service technician may enable any combination of the error message types The available message types include the following e Information Messages These messages give information regarding system operation e Warning Messages The warnings in these messages indicate that a condition exists which may affect system performance e Alarm Messages Alarm messages indicate that a minor alarm has occurred but that general system operation was not affected e S
91. after the Aban doned Call timer expires If an invalid number is dialed the caller is prompted to enter another number If a caller fails to enter a number before the Inactivity Alarm timer expires the caller is prompted again The caller cannot access trunks or enter feature codes through the Automated Attendant applica tion Trunk access codes and feature codes are considered invalid numbers Automated Attendant Custom Audiotex Recordings Custom audiotex recordings are made using the Voice Mail Administrator s mailbox as described on Creating Audiotex Recordings on page 65 Each recording is associated with a recording number and assigned to the application s in DB Programming or using the System Administrator s mailbox Call Screening Options Calls transferred from the Automated Attendant or a Call Routing Announcement application can be screened announced or unannounced When an Automated Attendant or Call Routing Announcement application receives a call and the caller enters an extension number the phone programmed Transfer Method determines how the call is transferred Transfer Method flags can be programmed in the database by the service technician but if allowed in mailbox programming they can also be programmed by the mailbox user Transfer Method options include e Announce Only The caller is asked to state his or her name Then the call is trans ferred to the associated extension number When the endpoint user ans
92. and enter the Individual Hold feature code 336 The conferenced parties remain connected The call and buttons flutter To place the conference on hold any inside party during a conference call with a single line endpoint Hookflash and then enter the Individual Hold feature code 336 The conferenced parties remain connected If you do not return to the conference before the Hold timer expires the confer ence will recall your endpoint If the recall is not answered the conference will recall to your Attendant s endpoint At the Attendant the call will be terminated NOTE automatically after the Abandoned Recall timer if no inside parties are still in the conference and if it is not answered by the Attendant If the Attendant answers the call a conference is re established with the Attendant endpoint as one of the conference parties To return to the conference with an Inter Tel endpoint Press the Hold button button or the fluttering Call button To return to the conference with a single line endpoint Lift the handset and enter the Conference feature code 5 Placing the Entire Conference on Hold Record A Call Record A Call System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 If your system is programmed with a Record A Call application the endpoints can be pro grammed to use the Record A Call feature It allows users to enter a feature code whenever they want to record an
93. answered within N A 398 You have selected N A Page 331 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 399 documents N A 400 Hello you have reached the Inter Tel voice N A processing system 401 Hello you ve reached the Inter Tel automated N A call handling system 402 To change your message search order press To change your message search order say two Order or press two 403 Your current message search order is first in N A first out 404 Your current message search order is last in N A first out 405 To search for messages first in first out press To search for messages first in first out say one First In or press one 406 To search for messages last in first out press To search for messages last in first out say two Last In or press two 407 To change the search order for new mes To change the search order for new mes Sages press one sages say New or press one 408 To change the search order for saved mes To change the search order for saved mes Sages press two sages say Saved or press two 409 You have received a new message N A 410 You have received a new voice mail N A 411 You have received a new e mail N A 412 You have received a new fax N A 413 You have received N A
94. appear at the destination endpoint in the same manner as any other transferred call along with a CONFERENCE TFR FROM username display and may be answered by the endpoint user Transfer to a System Forward When a user transfers a call to the principal station of a system forwarding path the Handsfree Announce System Forward system wide flag determines what the caller will hear If enabled the caller will place a handsfree call to the principal station and can announce the transfer The call does not enter the forwarding path If the option is disabled the transferring user will hear ringing and can announce the call only if it is answered by the principal station or one of the forwarding points Transfers and Outside Calls Call Transfer If a user answers another call while a party is waiting on transfer hold the waiting party will be moved to individual hold at that endpoint If the Hold timer expires while a call is on transfer hold the call will recall the endpoint The user must return to the call on hold and begin the transfer process again There may be some reduction in voice volume when an outside call is transferred to an outside phone number depending on the quality of the trunks in use Page 197 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Transfer to Connect Endpoint Flag Transfer to Ring Page 198 If the Transfer To Connect Allowed endpoint flag is enabled an announce
95. are ahead and how long the wait will be If you use the Voice Mail Administrator s mailbox to record or assign a Creating Audiotex Recordings Page 65 Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 recording to an application with a list of several recordings your input will change only the first entry in the list You cannot change the other entries using the Voice Mail Administrator s mailbox NOTE The custom audiotex program planning sheet is designed to help you plan and record custom recordings Refer to Creating Audiotex Recordings on page 65 To make or change a custom audiotex recording 1 ar oN Access the Voice Mail Administrator s mailbox and menu Refer to page 58 Say Options or press Kl for recording options Say Custom or press Jf to make a recording When prompted say or enter the desired recording number 001 500 If no recording exists go to the next step If a standard non ASR recording already exists it is played You have the following options e Say Standard or press E to record a standard non ASR greeting e Say Copy or press Zl to copy the standard non ASR greeting e Say Speech Recognition or press Kl to record an ASR greeting When prompted record the greeting or message and then press EM While you are recording you can e Press EM to pause while recording Say Continue or press EM to continue e Pres
96. as a man agement tool to estimate call cost The Call Cost Accounting feature estimates the cost of outgoing and incoming calls displays it on the Inter Tel endpoints and prints it in the SMDR reports The cost is based on the type of call phone number dialed the elapsed time of the call the day of the week and the time of day A table in the database supplies the rates for all types of calls including multiplicative Record Keeping and Maintenance Features Page 245 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 factors for evening and weekend rate changes on outgoing calls The equation for calculating call cost is Daytime Rate X Multiplicative Factor X Connect Time Multicative Factor Adjustment The multiplicative factor adjusts the daytime per minute call cost for evening and weekend rates of outgoing calls For example the evening call cost multiplier is 0 65 if calls are 3596 less expensive after 5 00 PM The daytime rate D evening E multiplicative factor and night weekend N W multiplicative factors are used on the following schedule Table 36 Multiplicative Factor Cost Adjustments SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT 8 AM TO 5 PM N W D D D D D N W 5 PM TO 11 PM E E E E E E NW 11 PM TO 8 AM NAN NIW NAW N W _ NIW NW N W If call cost is set to zero call cost will not display during the call and the SMDR printout will
97. be programmed to use this feature e The endpoint can use its personal mailbox or any other mailbox as the assigned Record A Call mailbox No other mailbox can be selected This is the default pro gramming for all endpoints e The endpoint can be programmed with a default mailbox but with the option of select ing a different mailbox If the user chooses to not enter a mailbox number the system automatically selects the default mailbox When the requesting endpoint user hangs up all parties are automatically disconnected If all parties on the call hang up except the requesting endpoint user an intercom call will remain connected between the requesting endpoint and the Record A Call application This allows the user to make additional comments before ending the recording When the endpoint user turns off Record A Call or ends the call being recorded the voice pro cessing system delivers the message to the mailbox The endpoint associated with the mailbox will receive message waiting indications as usual For message retrieval instructions refer to the appropriate Inter Tel endpoint user guide Record A Call Voice Processing Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 The service technician can set a maximum length for Record A Call messages The Record A Call Maximum Message Length timer can be set at 0 600 minutes A 0 setting allows mes sages of any length limited only be the available
98. be used Table 21 Diagnostics Feature Code Definitions FEATURE NAME CODE US EUROPE DEFINITION Compression On Off 9982 9182 Compresses call processing messages sent to Database Programming speeding up transfers You should not disable this feature unless instructed to do so by Inter Tel person nel Compression Statistics 9981 9181 Dumps various statistics related to the Data base Programming compression algorithm This feature should be used only when directed to do so by Inter Tel personnel Diagnostic ASAI Snoop Off 9926 9126 This feature code turns off the ASAI output to Message Print ASAI is the protocol the sys tem uses to talk to Database Programming and the AVDAP Turning this feature on helps the Inter Tel Engineers debug the messaging between Call Processing and Database Pro gramming or Call Processing and the AVDAP Diagnostic ASAI Snoop On 9927 9127 This feature code turns on the ASAI output to Message Print ASAI is the protocol the sys tem uses to talk to Database Programming and the voice processing system Turning this feature on helps the Inter Tel Engineers debug the messaging between Call Process ing and Database Programming or Call Pro cessing and the AVDAP Diagnostic Dump Extension Diagnostics Feature Codes 9922 9122 Allows an Inter Tel field technician to dump a device or structure when debugging a prob lem The system
99. been directed to it The hard disk also stores prompts greetings and spe cial programming Each Subscriber member of the voice message system is assigned a unique mailbox number At system default the passwords are the same as the mailbox num bers For example the default password for mailbox 1001 is 1001 There are three types of mailboxes on the Voice Mail system Standard Receive Only and Sys tem Administrator There can also be Extension IDs which are endpoints that do not have mail boxes but that are included in the recorded directory e The Standard mailbox owner receives all of the available subscriber options as autho rized through database programming Standard mailbox features include Listening to new messages Recording and sending messages Deleting and restoring messages Saving messages Personal options greeting password etc Remote messaging if authorized through database programming e AReceive Only mailbox type may only listen to new messages save delete or recover them and access personal options This type of mailbox is restricted from recording and sending messages and has no access to remote messaging e There can be only one Voice Mail Administrator The Voice Mail Administrator has all of the options a Standard mailbox subscriber has plus these features Record and send broadcast messages to all subscribers of the Voice Mail system Provide mailbox and group list
100. blue hyperlinked references to other parts of the manual To use a hyperlink the user must move the pointer over the blue hyperlink When the pointer changes form the user clicks to go to the hyperlinked destination Voice Mail Administrator Page 5 Document Overview INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Header and Footer Guides Whether using the electronic PDF or the paper version users can identify the section of the guide they are viewing by looking at the header or footer of the page The first major document topic on a page appears both in the header next to the section title and in the footer opposite th page number Inter Tel Reference Documents The following documents provide detailed technical information about Inter Tel CS 5200 and Inter Tel CS 5400 Communication Servers peripheral equipment phones and other end points that are related to administrator activities Equipment Manuals Planning Sheets Technical details and equipment specific procedures appear in the following documents Enterprise Messaging Installation Manual part no 780 8006 Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 Communication Servers Installation and Maintenance Manual part no 580 8000 vl l Addendum Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 Communication Servers Installation and Maintenance Manual Issue 1 0 part no 580 8002 Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 Communication Server Administrator Guide amp Administrator Quick Reference Guide part no
101. button is pressed determines which character is entered For example 533266 would enter JEAN When adjoining characters are located under the same button press to advance to the next character For example 66 6667776 would enter NORM Refer to the following table to program information in alphanumeric mode Note that letters correspond to the letters printed on the dialpad buttons The Japanese characters are included in your standard software license and can be programmed as the Primary or Secondary Language Programming System Speed Dial Numbers Page 45 Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 46 Use the following table to guide you as you program alphanumeric information NUMBER OF TIMES BUTTON IS PRESSED BUTTON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ENGLISH SPANISH CHARACTERS KATAKANA CHARACTERS 1 amp 1 A l U E O a 2 A B C 2 KA KI KU KE KO i 3 D E F 3 SA SHI SU SE SO u 4 G H 4 TA CHI TSU TE TO e 5 J K L 5 NA NI NU NE NO o 6 M N Oo N 6 HA HI FU HE HO tsu 7 P Q R S 7 MA M MU ME MO ya 8 T U V 3 8 YA YU YO yu 9 Ww X Y Z 9 RA RI RU RE RO yo 0 0 WA WO N pa ba long The Japanese characters are only available if the Multilingual feature is enabled and Japanese is installed as the secondary lan
102. by press ing specific keypad buttons Automatic CO Access On Off 360 Not used on single line endpoints Allows the endpoint user to determine how ringing out side calls will be answered simply by lifting the handset or pressing the Speaker button automatic answer or by lifting the handset or pressing the Speaker button and pressing a Call button individual trunk button or the ANSWER button Automatic IC Access On Off 361 Not used on single line endpoints Allows the endpoint user to determine how ringing inter com calls will be answered simply by lifting the handset automatic answer or by lifting the handset and pressing the IC button or a Call button if there is no IC button Automatic Trunk Answer 350 Using this feature code endpoint users with allowed answer can pick up trunks that are ringing into the system but that are not actu ally ringing at their endpoints This feature does not pick up transferred calls or recalls that are ringing at the endpoint Background Music On Off 313 Not used on single line endpoints Turns on and off background music heard through the endpoint speaker Barge In 386 Allows the supervisor to barge in on a call to help the hunt group member agent Call Forward All Calls 355 Immediately forwards all calls to another end point or to an outside endpoint number Inter Tel endpoints use the FWD button Call Forward If Busy 357 Immediately forwards all calls t
103. call together one phone must be off hook to allow the other phone to enter enhanced speakerphone mode If both phones are on hook there is no benefit to having one phone in enhanced mode NOTE Executive and Professional Display Speakerphones Each Executive and Professional Display phone has a built in integrated speakerphone that allows on hook dialing and handsfree operation on outside calls and inside intercom calls The speakerphone can be used in standard mode or in enhanced mode which allows for full duplex operation over a limited volume range the range depends on trunk characteristics typi cally the range is 1 3 Enhanced speakerphones are explained on the following page The Executive and Professional Display phone s speakers can also provide background music if an external music source is installed and the speaker is used to receive pages Display and Nondisplay Digital Phones Hardware and Endpoints INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 A programming option can be used to disable the phone s speakerphone capabilities Or the user can disable the speakerphone for intercom calls using the Handsfree On Off and or Ring Intercom Always On Off feature code On certain handsfree to handsfree intercom calls voice volume levels may cause feedback to occur If this happens one station user should pick up the handset Two display phones cannot be in enhanced mode while on a call together on
104. calls include call waiting call transfer reverse transfer call forwarding and placing calls on hold The network allows handsfree intercom calls when calling from one node to another unless the call camps on to the node before being sent to the other node Programming for Private Intercom Calls Directories A user places private IC calls by pressing the pound EJ button before dialing the extension number Or the endpoint can be programmed to always send and or receive private calls using the Ring Intercom Always or Handsfree Disable features Ring Intercom Always An endpoint user can always place private calls by programming the endpoint with the Ring Intercom Always feature code While this feature is enabled the called party hears repeating double tones To answer the called party must lift the handset or press the Speaker button Page 175 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 button or button If the endpoint does not have an button the call will appear under a Call button In the default database all single line endpoints have this fea ture enabled To turn ring intercom always on or off Inter Tel endpoints While on hook enter the Ring Intercom Always On Off feature code 377 The display shows RING IC ALWAYS ON or OFF Single line endpoints Lift the handset Enter the Ring Intercom Always On Off fea ture code 377 Handsfree Enable Disable An Inter Te
105. can be programmed to override the device language and provide prompts in one language only Using this method you can program a Call Routing Announcement tree that offers callers a choice between languages For more information refer to Language Selection on page 172 Digit Translation Nodes Page 266 A digit translation node is a digit translation destination that allows further digit translation options Unlike extension and mailbox destinations a digit translation node does not move the call to a specific location Instead it offers additional dialing options A digit translation node can use any of the Actions including transfers to other digit translation nodes The use of digit translation nodes allows the programmer to create a Call Routing Announce ment with several layers to form a digit translation tree The tree can be made up of digits with destinations and or digit translation nodes with additional translations An example of a Call Routing Announcement application with a multi layered tree is shown on the next page Call Screening Voice Processing Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Figure 17 Sample Call Routing Announcement Tree press 4 EXT 2500 Thank you for calling X Company if you know the party s extension number you may dial it now For a company directory press For Sales information press 3 For technical support CALLER
106. codes 125 358 location codes 221 non display numbers 221 pause hookflash recall 223 Station Speed Dial programming 223 System 221 Speed Dial Buttons 98 99 168 Speed Dialing pauses hookflashes 47 PBX 47 programming 47 Standard Account Codes 191 Standard Display Endpoint LCD 95 Standard Keymap 97 169 Standard Speakerphone 104 Standard Alternate Keymap Switching 169 STAR see Scheduled Time based Application Routing Station Message Detail Recording account codes 191 call information storage feature 20 Error Message Recording Output Devices 109 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 246 buffering 246 display elapsed time in seconds 248 options 246 report format 248 suppressed digits 247 Station Monitor 140 Station Speed Dial feature code 125 feature codes 358 House Phone 230 Subscriber 280 Subscriber Features 284 Supervisors 139 Suppress Absorbed Digits 247 Suppress Equal Access Digits 247 Suppress Outside Party Number 247 Suppress Toll Digits 247 Suppress Trunk Number 247 Suppressed Digits 247 Surge Spike Protector 109 Page 369 Index INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Swap Extension 37 Switching Matrix on DKSC 81 Synchronize Network Time 27 Synchronizing Network Time 27 System 221 System Administrator 280 System Administrator Features 25 System Administrator Procedures 25 System Alarms 51 System and Network Alarm Reporting 51 System Error Reporting 249 System Error M
107. dis abled at the mailbox If the endpoint user does not answer the caller will be asked if he wants to leave a message if the operator s extension has an associated mailbox If the caller chooses not to leave a message the call returns to the main menu of the applica tion being used Call Routing Announcement Voice Mail or Automated Attendant e Application extension number If the operator destination is an application s exten sion number the call is transferred to that application s main menu e Operator If the operator destination is set to Operator the caller will be transferred to the operator destination programmed in the voice processing system database e None If the operator destination is set to None the Ell will be ignored Group Lists Group lists are programmed in the database They are lists of mailboxes that can be used by any Subscriber for sending messages to several mailboxes simultaneously The information that is programmed for group lists include the following e Group list description e Group list number e Mailboxes included in the list There can be up to 1000 group lists in the system and up to 1500 entries per group list Group Lists are not included in the Automated Attendant or Voice Mail directories Instructions for using group lists are provided in the appropriate endpoint user guides Message Notification to Endpoints Each mailbox has a programmed Message Notification Endpoint
108. display the current button entries 1 While on hook enter the Review Keys code 396 The display shows PRESS THE KEY TO REVIEW 2 Press the feature or Speed Dial button s to be displayed The display shows the feature username or speed dial location name and KEY VALUE feature code extension number or location code For a secondary extension button the display shows SEC ONDARY endpoint To return the buttons to default values While on or off hook enter the Feature Key Default feature code 395 If off hook hang up The display shows FEATURE KEYS DEFAULTED DKTS Alternate Transient Display Timer Endpoint Flag and Timer System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 To program a feature code in a user programmable button or assign a primary endpoint to a secondary extension button 1 While on hook enter the Program Keys feature code 397 Display phones show PRESS THE KEY TO PROGRAM 2 Press the desired feature or secondary extension button The display shows the current feature endpoint or Speed Dial location name and KEY VALUE feature extension or location code Enter the feature code or extension number to be stored under that button f programming the button only Call Forwarding feature codes 355 358 will be accepted You hear a sin gle progress tone when the programming is completed Display phones show the newly pro grammed feature If you at
109. enters his own name of dial 0 operator mailbox desired party Call is sent to selected mailbox MESSAGE IS LEFT IN A MAILBOX Y Voice mail leaves a message waiting indica tion at the endpoint designated as the mes sage notification endpoint for the mailbox Y Endpoint user responds to message indica tion presses MSG button or enters feature Y INTERCOM CALL IS PLACED TO MESSAGE NOTIFICATION RETRIEVAL APPLICATION Alternate Message Source Y Endpoint user is prompted for the password to his mailbox By being forwarded to the Voice Mail when a called endpoint is unavailable via the Call Forwarding or System Forwarding features By responding to Message Waiting indications Page 279 Voice Processing Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Mailboxes Page 280 Callers will hear the Voice Mail company greeting and recorded instructions that tell them what to do next Users simply listen to the prompts and press the dialpad button that corre sponds to the desired choice If the user does not respond immediately a second set of prompts is played Most prompts are interruptible and users can press the desired button at any time during the prompt The prompt will then stop and the system will act on the requested choice A mailbox is a storage location on the voice processing system PC hard disk that stores all messages that have
110. firewall functionality and audio quality To install and configure IP and SIP endpoints requires knowledge of appropriate network set tings and familiarity with the associated hardware and software Installation and configuration information for all IP and SIP endpoints should be referred an Inter Tel ceritfied service tech nician For further information contact your authorized Inter Tel equipment provider Automated Boot Code Update Page 92 Information about the automatic update of endpoint boot code is included in this guide for the following reasons e You may be unaware that the update is occurring e Interruption of power to the endpoint during the download causes the endpoint to be inoperable and unrecoverable A Model 8620 8622 or 8662 phone with v2 0 0 or later firmware uses a TFTP server to update a crucial internal boot code In any of the following situations the phone checks its configura tion file against a corresponding file on the TFTP server e On startup e Oncommand e On periodic timeout If the phone detects new parameters during this check it automatically initiates the boot update procedure to download new boot code However the download is delayed if a call is in progress or music on hold is enabled The phone display changes to alert you that the update is in progress Severe phone damage possible If during the boot code download electrical current to the phone is interrupted e g thr
111. for the area served by that page zone In a network all Inter Tel endpoints and trunks within a page zone must reside on the same node as the page zone However a page zone can contain external page ports on other nodes Because the external paging ports have intercom numbers 91000 and 91001 NOTE stations can place an intercom call to the external paging ports instead of using the Page feature to make a page over the external paging speakers Pages are not heard on Inter Tel endpoints that have been removed from paging using the fea ture code as described below are in Do Not Disturb are ringing or are in use Also back ground music on endpoints and on external speakers connected to endpoint speaker leads is interrupted for pages If a trunk in a paging zone is unplugged the page cannot be completed If desired Inter Tel endpoint users can program feature buttons to select the paging zones 0 9 or 0 49 using paging access codes 9600 9609 or 9600 9649 The Page timer limits the length of pages If it is set to 0 pages are unlimited in length To make a page 1 Lift the handset 2 Inter Tel endpoints Press the PAGE button or enter the Page feature code 7 The display shows SELECT PAGE ZONE 0 9 Single line endpoints Enter the Page feature code 7 3 Enter the zone code 0 9 or 0 49 for the desired zone 4 After the single progress tone make your page before the Page timer expires If
112. from the central office or wait for the Valid Call timer to expire Any outside call put on hold becomes valid immediately regardless of Answer Supervision or Valid Call timer status There are three options available under Answer Supervision type Polarity Reversal A loop reversal must be received to consider the call valid When the first loop reversal is received the call is made valid immediately and the Inter Tel phone display will begin call cost When a second loop reversal is received the system will terminate the call If a second loop reversal is not received the system will not terminate NOTE the call unless the inside party hangs up or loss of loop is received from the telephone company Valid Call Timer After the Valid Call Timer expires the call is validated All polarity reversals received before and after the Valid Call Timer are ignored Valid Call Timer with Polarity Reversal If a loop reversal is received before the Valid Call Timer expires the call will be made valid immediately and the Inter Tel phone display will begin call cost When a second loop reversal is received the system will terminate the call If a loop reversal is not received before the Valid Call Timer expires the call will be made valid by the timer If a loop reversal is received after the timer expires the loop reversal is ignored but the call cost is reset If a second loop reversal is then received the system will ter minate
113. group even if the endpoint does not have ring in assignment for that trunk group Endpoints cannot have allowed answer assign ment for trunk groups on other nodes On Inter Tel endpoints the individual trunk but ton flashes if one exists to indicate the ringing call If a endpoint is programmed with allowed answer access only no ring in for a trunk group direct ring in calls on that trunk group can be answered by entering the Automatic Trunk Answer feature code 350 or pressing the flashing individual trunk button e Ring in assignment for a particular trunk group can be assigned to one or more end points extension lists or voice processing system applications to a hunt group to DISA or to a call routing table A trunk can ring in to an endpoint or voice processing system application on another node The ring in destination s for the trunk group will receive direct ring in calls on trunks in that trunk group On Inter Tel endpoints with ring in the individual trunk or Call button flashes and the display indicates a ringing call Allowed answer for the trunk group is automatically assigned to an endpoint with ring in Page 154 Single Line Endpoint Displays System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 When Inter Tel endpoints have outgoing access or ring in assignments the associated individ ual trunk buttons show the status of their trunks Endpoints that do not appear on any of the
114. in Do Not Disturb The DISA caller hears music or ringing deter mined by a system wide option in Database Programming until the Transfer Available or Page 164 Day and Night Modes System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Transfer Busy timer expires Then if the call is not answered it recalls the called endpoint s Attendant If the called endpoint is forwarded the call follows the programmed forwarding path When a hunt group pilot number receives a call through DISA the call rings or circulates according to how the hunt group is programmed i e linear or distributed If a caller dials a valid hunt group pilot number that has no members assigned to it the call automatically rings at the primary Attendant endpoint until the Abandoned Call timer expires If the call is not answered before the Abandoned Call timer expires the call is disconnected Security Codes DISA trunks can be assigned security codes up to eight digits in length that are required for access to the system The installer can program separate codes for each DISA trunk group to be used during day and or night modes To prevent unauthorized access to the outgoing trunks all trunk groups using NOTE DISA should have a security code During database programming the programmer can determine the number of times that a caller may unsuccessfully attempt to enter a security code and or dial an extension number If the u
115. information For phones operating in SIP mode voice mail displays are not supported but NOTE the user does receive audio prompts Six Line Display Models 8660 and 8662 IP phones and the Model 8560 and Executive and Professional Display digital phones are equipped with a six line LCD screens Refer to Figure 4 and Figure 5 Each line displays up to 16 characters The top two lines display standard call information and show the same displays as other display phones The remaining four lines display feature related menus that change with the function being performed by the phone intercom call outside call programming etc The lines have four menu selection buttons on each side of the screen eight buttons that are used to select displayed menu features When there are two prompts on a line like PREVIOUS and NEXT pressing the button next to the word selects the feature When there is only one prompt on a line like DO NOT DISTURB then pressing the button on either side of the prompt will select it A system wide Alternate Keyset Menu Dis plays flag determines the display that HOLD SYS HOLD Model 8660 IP phone and Model 8560 TRANSFER CNF Executive and Professional digital phone TRANSFER TO HOLD users see during an outside call In the MUTE MORE default state the display shows the follow ing menu with Transfer To Hold on the first menu and Flash on the More menu If the Alternate Keyset Menu Disp
116. is re enabled You cannot mute the microphone on your phone while your call is on hold at another phone If you receive complaints from IP phone users about losing audio on muted calls NCTE there may be a firewall issue Contact your local Inter Tel dealer for assistance Muting the endpoint microphone 1 To temporarily turn off your microphone while on a call press the button or MUTE menu button or press the Special button and enter the Microphone Mute On Off feature code 314 The button is lit and the display shows MICROPHONE MUTE ON If off hook do not hang up unless you press the Speaker button first 2 Press the lit button or UNMUTE menu button or press the Special button and enter the feature code 314 to turn the microphone on The button goes off and the display shows MICROPHONE MUTE OFF Page 195 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Call Waiting Page 196 While an endpoint is in use incoming intercom and outside calls camp on until the busy end point is available The busy party hears a single Camp On tone every 15 seconds unless the Camp On Tone timer is changed or Camp On tones are disabled at the endpoint A endpoint programming flag titled Camp On Indications allows Camp On tones to be enabled or disabled for incoming intercom and outside calls This flag is programmed on an endpoint by endpoint basis The DID E amp M Receive Busy Instead Of Camp
117. it is answered or the caller hangs up Direct ring in Rings at last forwarding point until it is answered or caller hangs up Rings at the principal endpoint until it is answered or the caller hangs up Transfer from an endpoint Automated Attendant or Voice Mail Recalls the transferring endpoint s transfer recall destination when the System Forwarding Advance timer expires at the last forwarding point If immediate forwarding is enabled rings the principal endpoint until the applicable Transfer timer expires Then it recalls the transferring end point s transfer recall destination If a conditional forwarding is enabled rings principal endpoint until the Sys tem Forward Initiate timer expires Then it recalls the transferring end point s transfer recall destination DISA includ ing Call Rout ing to DISA Rings at last forwarding point until the Abandoned Call timer expires Rings at the principal endpoint until the Abandoned Call timer expires Page 216 System Forward Enable Disable Call Forward Call Forward System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 28 Final Destinations for Types of Calls Continued TYPE OF ALL FWD POINTS ALL FWD POINTS CALL BUSY OR DO NOT ANSWER IN DO NOT DISTURB Recalls Recalls the principal endpoint s If immediate forwarding is enabled Attendant when the System For warding Advance
118. lift the handset to speak privately Go to the next step On Inter Tel endpoints an individual trunk or Call button flashes slowly and the display shows the call cost and elapsed time Model 8660 or 8662 endpoint users may press one of the following menu buttons OUTSIDE DIR This button appears only if you are using ARS Press the but ton to use the outside directory as described on page 227 STN SPEED DIAL Press this button to use an Station Speed Dial number as described on Station Speed Dial on page 223 SYS SPEED DIAL Press this button to use a System Speed Dial number as described on page 221 REDIAL Press this button to redial the last number dialed or saved as described on page 231 e Single progress tone Enter a forced account code using the dialpad buttons or a pre programmed Speed Dial button refer to page 191 The display shows ENTER ACCOUNT CODE and the digits as they are entered You hear outside dial tone when the code is accepted On Inter Tel endpoints an individual trunk or Call button flashes slowly e Repeating reorder tones You are restricted from the trunk group chosen choose another trunk group Or you are restricted to using ARS only try again using ARS see page 187 The display shows OUTGOING ACCESS DENIED After dialing the call you can place it on hold transfer it set up a conference enter optional account codes etc as described in this manual The Model 8660 or 8662 ha
119. make a similar distinction between American English and British English spellings of common words Only American English spellings appear in this guide For example the word analog is not also spelled analogue since the meaning is clear As appropriate for clarity and legibility the British English variation of a term may also appear in brackets or be written out For instance the first of the preceding examples could read CO trunks local exchange trunks in Europe NOTE Document Navigation Aids To help users know what section and topic they are looking at in the guide each page contains the identification in both paper and electronic formats Paper A paper copy of this guide contains Contents pages showing the outline of the entire manual and the page number where each section heading and subheading begins For quick reference to sections the section title appears in a black box on the outside edge of each page of the sec tion Together the black boxes form a visual aid that marks the extent of the pages in each sec tion Also at the beginning of the guide are a List of Figures and a List of Tables with page locations Each section also provides a Contents page or pages To help the user locate specific information in the manual an Index of topics and subtopics appears at the end of the manual Electronic PDF When viewing the Portable Document Format PDF version of this document the user will see
120. no names recorded for the individual mailboxes or for the system s extension IDs this option will not be provided Directory names can be sorted by first or last name Refer to page 279 for information about using the directory e Dial the operator access destination If the caller needs further assistance dialing 0 will access the voice processing system s programmed operator destination Or if the caller is on a rotary endpoint and cannot enter a digit the call will be automatically transferred to the operator destination The operator access destination is programmed in the database There can be separate destinations for day and night modes Due to the natural characteristics of the trunk the volume level of DTMF tones transmitted over the trunk may be substantially reduced before reaching the system and voice processing system This natural degrada NOTE tion in tone volume may adversely affect the reliability of the Automated Attendant feature Other factors which can affect Automated Attendant performance are trunk noise and the quality and strength of the DTMF tones generated by the off premises endpoint itself Automated Attendant Applications There are a number of different uses for this feature Here are two examples e Direct ring in calls to a busy Attendant could be forwarded to Automated Attendant using the Call Forward If Busy feature or system forwarding e Calls could ring in directly to Automated Attendan
121. node the hunt group with the longest camped on call will receive the available agent Given off node ties in priority the first hunt group to camp on will receive the available agent Maintenance of Node Spanning Hunt Groups e Deletion of an ACD agent from a hunt group is done from the node on which the hunt group resides or from a remote node If an agent is deleted on the node containing hunt group s of which he is a mem ber then the agent is removed from all hunt group s on that node and is logged out If the agent is deleted from a remote node the agent is logged off from that node but remains a member of any hunt group s located on other nodes e Ifthe hunt group is deleted all remotely logged in endpoints will be logged out e Ifthe extension number of an ACD Hunt Group is changed any local or remote end points that are logged in will reflect the change If links are down at the time of the change remote nodes will not receive the change and an import export process will be necessary to update the information on the affected nodes e Removing an Agent ID from a hunt group agent list logs out any endpoint local or remote that is logged in to that hunt group using that Agent ID Page 150 Operational Changes System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 e With the node spanning features of ACD hunt groups changing Agent IDs can be done from two possible locations
122. not hear you or the OHVA caller Press again to enable the handset 2 To terminate the OHVA call Press the lit Speaker button or have the OHVA caller hang up If you terminate the original call by hanging up the handset you remain con nected to the OHVA call in the handsfree intercom mode To block an off hook voice announce call OHVA enabled Inter Tel endpoints only 1 While on a call using the handset you hear a camp on tone The display shows CALL ANNOUNCE FROM username To cause the intercom call to camp on press the Speaker button The button flashes 2 If you want to send Do Not Disturb signals to the camped on call press the DITE button Off Hook Voice Announce OHVA Page 185 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Outside Calls When a trunk is selected for receiving or placing an outside call the voice channel is seized and cannot be used by any other endpoint unless the Conference feature is used see page 202 If the desired trunk is busy the user can camp on or request a queue callback Other features that apply to both outside and intercom calls are discussed later in this section of the manual They include placing calls on hold call waiting call transfer reverse transfer confer encing and call forwarding Refer to page 154 for an explanation of outgoing access allowed answer and ring in assignments Placing Outside Calls Inter Tel endpoints can b
123. number 550 8111 The e mail message sent by the Voice Mail will have the following components e To The TO line will contain the recipient s e mail address e From The FROM line will contain the e mail address of the voice processing system If an E Mail Real Name has been programmed for the voice processing system it will also be shown on this line e Subject The SUBJECT line will contain the line length of message Message for MB number from lt source gt If the message is marked priority the subject line will be preceded by the word PRIORITY The source of the Voice Mail message will appear as one of the following MB number xX extension number the Voice Mail system an unknown caller an outside caller at phone number If the message is from an extension ID or a mailbox the programmed username will be shown inside parentheses after the number For example mailbox 1000 ADMIN e Received on The RECEIVED ON line contains the date and time that the Voice Mail was received by the mailbox e Priority Private or Certified If the Voice Mail message was sent with a delivery option the body will contain the line Message marked PRIORITY PRIVATE or CER TIFIED gt Note that this is for informational purposes only and does not affect the e mail message itself For example if a Voice Mail message is marked for certified deliv ery the sender will receive a confirmation w
124. number or using digit translation depending on digit translation node pro gramming If the document is selected by number the system will ask the caller to ver ify the entry by pressing If the number is invalid the system alerts the caller and returns to the introductory recording 3 The system checks the availability of the document and one of the following occurs e If the document is available the system tells the caller how many documents have been selected and how many more documents can be requested as determined by the Maximum Selections Allowed value in the database It then returns to the recording to allow the caller to select more documents or end the selection process e Ifthe document has been deleted or is being updated the caller is told that the doc ument is unavailable and returns to the recording E mail Reader Voice Processing Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 4 If desired the caller selects additional documents and the system checks for their avail ability as described above If the maximum number of allowed documents has been reached the system informs the caller and gives the option of returning to the greeting or ending the selection process If a caller selects the same document more than once the system informs the caller of the error and allows another selection 5 If desired the caller can cancel the document selections at this point by pressing th
125. on page 261 Digit Translation Digit translation allows callers to dial a single digit to access a designated extension number mailbox or hunt group Up to 12 digit translation storage locations 0 9 are available for each Call Routing Announcement application To use digit translation the Call Routing Announcement application must have special programming After the application is created and programmed the Voice Mail Administrator s mailbox is used to make a custom audiotex recording that explains the options to callers as described on Creating Audiotex Recordings on page 65 The custom audiotex recording is then assigned to the Call Routing Announcement application A caller who listens to the Call Routing Announcement recording can dial the single digit location number to reach the designated des tination For example if the hunt group extension for a customer support group is programmed for digit 3 the recording should say something like For customer support press 3 The system provides a choice between Primary and Secondary Language prompts and dis plays The available languages are American English British English Spanish and Japanese The system selects the language to use for each call as determined by the trunk endpoint and voice processing system programming When using a Call Routing Announcement application with digit translation the individual voice processing system applications assigned to the digits
126. ongoing call in their designated Record A Call mailbox Users can retrieve the recorded messages later just as they would any other mailbox messages When a user requests the Record A Call feature the system establishes a conference call with the current call parties and a mailbox If there are no conference circuits available when the user requests Record A Call or if there are already four parties on the call the user hears reor der tones and cannot use the feature The Record A Call mailbox records the call as a Voice Mail message All parties will be included in the recording If desired the Record A Call mailbox can be programmed to play a message announcing that the Record A Call feature is in progress There can be separate mes sages for day and night modes To signal to the other parties that the Record A Call feature is in use a system wide Record A Call Tone flag can be enabled during system programming If the flag is disabled there will be no alerting tone If enabled the beep will occur periodically throughout the call The Record A Call Tone Interval timer determines how often this tone is generated If the timer is set to O the tone is generated only when the feature is first activated There are two ways an endpoint can be programmed to use this feature e The endpoint can be programmed to use its personal mailbox or another mailbox as the assigned Record A Call mailbox Only this assigned mailbox can be selected Thi
127. other digital endpoints Page 15 Product Description INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 IP Single Line Adapters IP SLA Single Line Adapters SLA and single line analog phones and other endpoints e Pocket PC SoftPhone The Model 8601 is a SIP softphone that runs on selected Pocket PC 2002 or later Personal Digital Assistant PDA platforms The IPRA supports the Model 8601 Pocket PC SIP mode softphone which is described in the following para graph but does not support Inter Tel legacy IP SoftPhones e Multi protocol phones A multi protocol phone is one that operates either in Inter Tel Protocol ITP mode or in Session Initiation Protocol SIP mode A SIP server is required for SIP mode operation Multi protocol phones include Models 8620 8622 8662 and 8690 Multi protocol phones require software licenses e Wireless phones Models 8664 8665 and 8668 are wireless phones that operate in ITP mode e Single line phones In addition being able to install single line phones in each of the two circuits built into the Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 chassis one single line phone can be installed in with each IP SLA and two single line phones can be installed with each SLA System Network Capacities Two or more Inter Tel Advanced Communications Platforms Inter Tel 5000 or Axxess can be connected to form a network that provides a seamless interface between the systems To the user the network appe
128. page 79 Model 8662 The Model 8662 is a multi protocol phone that has a six line display This phone has 25 pro grammable buttons and two fixed buttons This phone also has eight menu buttons used to access additional features from a menu shown on the display The Model 8662 has dedicated headset and handset jacks a speaker and a microphone and two Ethernet ports This phone operates in ITP or SIP mode Refer to IP Operating Modes on page 79 Model 8690 The Model 8690 is an advanced IP endpoint that has an LCD touch screen that displays a tele phone type interface A stylus pen provides access to elements on the interface which include a dialpad feature buttons menu buttons and navigation buttons The Model 8690 can operate in Session Initiation Protocol SIP mode or Inter Tel Protocol ITP mode see page 82 This endpoint uses a customized version of Microsoft Windows CE NET V4 2 and includes ports and connectors for optional hardware and memory cards For more information about this unique IP endpoint consult the appropriate documentation listed below e For supported features and end user instructions Model 8690 User Guide Inter Tel Protocol Mode part number 550 8116 or Model 8690 User Guide Session Initiation Protocol Mode part number 550 8025 e For general administrator information Model 8690 Administrator Guide part num ber 550 8120 e For installation and maintenance information IP Devices Installatio
129. partial extension number Press EB or ACCEPT to continue or scroll to another endpoint as described below Scroll through the numbers To scroll through the extension number list press the high end of the Volume button or the NEXT menu button to scroll for ward or press the low end of the Volume button or the PREVIOUS menu but ton to scroll backward When the desired extension number is displayed press EJ or ACCEPT to continue NOTE If the feature times out while entering an extension number the displays shows INCOMPLETE EXTENSION The display shows SWAP extension WITH EXTENSION Enter the second extension number to be swapped using the same methods previously described The display shows DATABASE UPDATED If you cancel or terminate the feature without entering the second extension number the system discards any changes that have not yet been saved and the display shows NO UPDATE PER NOTE FORMED If the entered extension is the Administrator phone per forming the swap the same extension number as the target endpoint or the wrong device type the display shows CONFLICT ING EXTENSION When the display shows ENTER SYSTEM OPTION press EJ again to exit to the ENTER DATABASE OPTION prompt When finished with all programming press EM while the ENTER DATA BASE OPTION prompt is displayed This ends the programming session If a system reset is required the display shows ENTER SYS RESET OPTION Do one of the following
130. recognized by the system There is a system wide option called SPCL Key Required for Feature Code Entry that if enabled requires Inter Tel endpoint users to always press the Special button before entering a feature code Regardless of programming if an Inter Tel endpoint user presses the Special button while on hook the display shows ENTER FEATURE CODE and the Executive Display Professional Display or Model 8560 endpoint menu shows a list of feature codes The user can enter the desired code or press a menu button Feature Codes Page 118 Each of the endpoint features is assigned a feature code Using the endpoint s dialpad these codes are entered to select trunks process calls and use special features Complete explana tions of the features and instructions for using them begin on the next page The codes shown on the following pages are the values that are assigned when the system is in the default state If desired they can be changed in Database Programming to any one to five digit value NOTE Changing a feature code may affect the accessibility of other features Speaker Buttons System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Trunk Access Codes These feature codes are used for selecting trunks when placing outgoing calls Table 18 Trunk Access Codes CODE FEATURE NAME US EUROPE DEFINITION Automatic Route Selection 92000 Allows the s
131. remote sites or at the main system location To place calls during a power failure in this situation IP and SIP endpoint users can only use a single line phone connected to one of the system s power failure bypass circuits or a local phone not connected to the system IP and SIP Endpoint Ports and Connectors Page 90 The ports and connectors on IP and SIP phones vary depending on the model number The fol lowing ports and connectors may be included on your endpoint Headset Jack Connects to a headset Handset Jack Connects to a handset Combined Headset Handset Jack Connects to a headset or handset LAN Power Jack Connects to an external power supply see page 91 LAN Power Jack Connects to a network hub or a switch External Microphone Jack Allows you to connect an external microphone to the end point 8690 only External Speaker Jack Allows you to connect an external speaker to the endpoint 8690 only Reset Button Resets the connection to the network 8690 only Compact Flash CF Port Allows you to connect a CF memory card if additional memory is needed 8690 only Personal Computer Memory Card International Association PCMCIA Port Allows you to connect a PCMCIA memory card if additional memory is needed 8690 only Universal Serial Bus USB Client Port Connects the endpoint to a host computer running ActiveSync 8690 only USB Host Port Allows you to connect a keyboard mouse or other USB devic
132. repairs or adjustments made by the telephone company will be made at their expense Allowing this equipment to be operated in such a manner as to not provide proper answer supervision signaling is in violation of Part 68 of FCC rules This equipment returns answer supervision signals to the public telephone network when answered by the called station answered by the attendant routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the equipment user and or routed to a dial prompt This equip ment also returns answer supervision on all DID calls forwarded back to the public tele phone network Permissible exceptions are a call is unanswered busy tone is received or reorder tone is received This equipment is capable of providing users access to interstate providers of operator services through the use of equal access codes Failure to provide equal access capabili ties is a violation of the Telephone Operator Consumer Services Improvement Act of 1990 and Part 68 of the FCC Rules TYPE OF PORT FACILITY INTER RINGER EQUIVA SERVICE ORDER USOC JACK INTERFACE FACE CODE FIC LENCE NO REN CODE SOC CONNECTOR 2 Wire Loop 02LS2 D4 Superframe AMI 04DU9 BN 2 6 0Y RJ 48C D4 Superframe with 04DU9 DN 6 0Y RJ 48C B8ZS Extended Super 04DU9 1KN 6 0Y RJ 48C frame ESF ESF with B8ZS 04DU9 1SN 6 0Y RJ 48C Primary Rate ISDN 04DU9 1SN 6 0Y RJ 48C Page x FCC Regulations INTER TEL CS 52
133. show 00 00 In a network setting the call cost shown on the display and SMDR output use the factors and rates for the node on which the trunk resides In other words if a station on Node 1 dials what is considered a long distance number on Node 1 but the call is routed to Node 2 where the number is considered local the Inter Tel endpoint will use the local call cost rate from Node 2 The call rate used for calls between nodes will be based on the Network call rate All outgoing calls using a trunk that is not subject to toll restriction are classified as one of the following call types for call cost calculation call cost type is programmed in the database Free Local Toll Local e Toll Long Distance e Incoming e Operator e Network e International Station Message Detail Recording Page 246 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR is a system feature that provides a detailed record of outgoing and incoming calls The system records only valid calls Outgoing calls become valid when depending on system programming the Valid Call timer expires or polarity rever sal is detected Outgoing calls become valid immediately if placed on hold or transferred Incoming calls are always valid immediately Endpoint call data can be recorded on a customer provided printer or an alternate device such as a magnetic tape or floppy disk The voice processing system PC can also be used to capture Station Message Detail Recording SM
134. signals Callers on a trunk needed to return busy signal such as a non T1 loop start will hear ringing and the call will be sent to the primary Attendant ISDN callers hear busy signals Endpoints within the hunt group can receive direct trunk ring in intercom forwarded or trans ferred calls to their extension numbers without affecting other endpoints in the hunt group Hunt Group Call Processing Page 135 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Hunt Groups and Call Forwarding Hunt group programming affects the Call Forwarding feature in the following ways e Hunt group calls follow unconditional forward If an endpoint in a hunt group is in the unconditional call forward mode to another endpoint calls to the hunt group will follow the endpoint forwarding request A forwarded hunt group call will ring at the forwarding destination until the No Answer Advance timer expires If it is not answered before the timer expires the call will return to the hunt group and continue circulating through the hunt group list e Conditional forward dependent on timer interaction Phones that are busy and have their calls forwarded conditionally no answer busy or unavailable to another endpoint will receive the hunt group call if the endpoint is not busy until the Forward No Answer timer expires At this point if the hunt group s No Answer Advance timer has not expired then the call will
135. that allow the user typically an attendant to monitor up to 16 extensions The unit attaches directly to the Model 8660 phone and does not require any peripheral equipment SMDR and error message recording output devices Output devices can be connected by IP socket only to record the data generated by the Station Message Detail Recording SMDR and error message recording features The Inter Tel 5000 v1 1 does not support serial communica tion Surge spike protector A surge spike protector should be installed to reduce the effects of AC voltage surges and spikes that may cause system malfunctions false logic and or damage to the electronic components Facsimile fax machine A fax machine may be connected and programmed to a single line port built into the chassis or connected with an IP SLA or SLA port Off premises stations Single line DTMF phones can be connected to the system at a remote location The connection is made through a telephone company OPX trunk Playback devices A playback device such as an answering machine can be used in place of the voice processing system interface to help process calls The device answers a call plays a message then disconnects from the call or transfers it to a Hunt Group to allow the caller access to other system resources Optional System Equipment Hardware and Endpoints INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Additional Information and Troubleshooting
136. that is placed after the timer expires the display will show that the message was from your endpoint and you will be called when the endpoint user responds to the message indications The display shows MESSAGE LEFT FOR username If the endpoint you are calling does not have a designated message center you NOTE will hear dial tone immediately after pressing the IET button The endpoint will receive a Message Waiting indication Silent Messages Silent messages can be placed while on or off hook without making an intercom call to the endpoint This method should be used by analog Voice Mail units To leave a silent message Executive Display Professional Display and Model 8660 or 8662 While on hook press the WEJ button Then press the LEAVE MESSAGE menu button The display shows LEAVE MESSAGE ON EXTENSION Enter the desired extension number The number is shown on the display If desired you can press the IC DIRECTORY menu button to use the intercom directory to look up a number Refer to page 227 for instruc tions Other Inter Tel endpoints While on hook enter the Silent Message feature code 367 Then dial the extension number of the desired endpoint Single line endpoints Lift the handset and enter the Silent Message feature code 367 Then dial the extension number of the desired endpoint and hang up Canceling a Message Waiting Indication Occasionally before the person you called responds to your message yo
137. the Model 8664 5665 8668 User Guide part no 935 4522 The Inter Tel 5000 Network Communications Solutions platform utilizes the gateway end points described in the following section to connect IP and SIP phones with the public switched telephone network PSTN NOTICE Inter Tel Inc assumes no responsibility for problems that may result from an unaccessible line being connected to an MGCP or SIP gateway AudioCodes MP 104 MGCP Gateway The Inter Tel CS 520 5400 provides connection to the local PSTN using a third party Media Gateway Control Protocol MGCP endpoint AudioCodes MP 104 SIP Gateway The system supports SIP Session Initiated Protocol trunks to reach the CO SIP trunks allow the system to communicate with the CO through SIP enabled gateways Inter Tel supports the AudioCodes MP 104 SIP gateway running v4 2 or later software Inter Tel provides technical support only for the AudioCodes MP 104 gateway SIP gateway trunks Hard IP Phones Hardware and Endpoints INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 e Are transparent to the system user because they perform like any other CO trunk in the system e Reside in CO trunk groups like other trunks SIP trunk calls can be routed using Auto matic Route Selection SIP gateway trunks support e Transferring trunks putting trunks on hold and connecting trunks to conferences simi lar to other CO trunks in the system e
138. the call If a second loop reversal is not received the system will not terminate NOTE the call unless the inside party hangs up or loss of loop is received from the telephone company Caller ID When selected the Caller ID option indicates that the associated trunk will provide caller identification signals This capability can be programmed because of the Advanced CO Interfaces feature that is included in your software license Hybrid balance Hybrid balance can be set to Normal or Short to allow the installer to adjust the hybrid impedance of the trunk based on local central office conditions Short The short balance is used when trunks are supplied by other equipment located within the same building using private copper wire termination e g an OPX supplied by another PBX that does not use the public network or when the site is located close to the central office Normal The normal balance can be used by most trunks DTMF or dial pulse signaling Trunks can be set for DTMF or dial pulse signals Trunk group assignment Trunks can be assigned to trunk groups on an individual basis Busy trunk This feature allows you to temporarily remove a trunk from service While the trunk is out of service it cannot be used for placing outgoing calls However incoming calls on analog trunks will ring in and can be answered Incoming calls on ISDN trunks cannot be answered The trunk will remain out of service until the Trunk Busy Out ti
139. the following ACD distribution methods The Restart ACD Idle Time Upon Login flag affects how the longest idle NOTE time is calculated See page 147 for more information e Longest Idle An incoming LONGEST IDLE DISTRIBUTION call is sent to the endpoint ACD HUNT GROUP that has not been involved in Ext 2000 a call to this hunt group for the longest period of time It TIME IDLE does not count calls that were Ext 1000 3 min Next call will be sent here Ext 1001 10 min received through other hunt Ext 1002 6 min groups direct ring ins or Ext 1003 1 min transfers e Balanced Call Count To BALANCED CALL COUNT DISTRIBUTION balance the call load each ACD HUNT GROUP incoming call is sent to the Ext 2000 endpoint that has received the fewest calls through this hunt i NUMBER OF CALLS group It does not count calls Ext 1000 10 calls that were received through ze ins ies other hunt groups direct ring Next call will be sent here Ext 1003 3 calls ins or transfers When an agent logs in to a balanced call count ACD hunt group or comes out of Do Not Disturb mode the system checks the average call count for that ACD hunt group and assigns that average count to the end point logging in This prevents the agent who is logging in from receiving all of the incoming calls until the call count of the lowest agent catches up with his call count For example if there ar
140. the supervisor sees NO CNF CIRCUITS AVAIL ABLE on the display A silent monitor call is rejected if e A hunt group member or agent is on a conference call e The hunt group member or agent is on a peer to peer P2P call e A hunt group member or agent is getting agent help e Another supervisor has already joined the call When the above situations occur the supervisor will see SILENT MONITOR REJECTED on the display The Barge In Silent Monitor feature can be used across all Inter Tel network NOTE nodes as long as all Axxess nodes are running at least v9 0 The System Administrator can also now add off node Endpoints as hunt group supervisors Accessing the Barge In Features A supervisor may silent monitor a hunt group member agent if that supervisor is designated as a supervisor of the group to which the member agent is logged in Three fields are associated with the Barge In feature in DB Studio These programmable fields control the Barge In notification tone and display To monitor a call 1 To use the speakerphone While on hook enter the Station Monitor feature code default is 321 After hear a confirmation tone the Speaker button lights The display shows ENTER EXT TO MONITOR To use the handset Lift the handset and enter the Station Monitoring feature code default is 321 After a confirmation tone ENTER EXT TO MONITOR is displayed Supervisor Barge In Page 141 System Features INTER TEL CS 5
141. to Attendants You can change the assigned Attendant for each phone Program usernames You can program or change the username for any endpoint Program endpoint toll restrictions You can program toll restriction classes of service for endpoints Endpoint toll restrictions are described in detail on page 157 The endpoint Database Programming process is summarized in the flowchart shown on page 31 For a Program Planning Sheet refer to page 69 If necessary at any time during the following procedure you can press the aster NOTE isk Ef or Speaker button to cancel programming and discard any unsaved changes To program endpoints 1 Station Programming While on hook enter the Program Database feature code 9932 Page 27 Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 28 If a password is required the display shows ENTER PASSWORD Use the dialpad to enter your 1 8 digit password and press EM If you enter an incorrect password or do not press EM the display shows INVALID PASSWORD If a password is not required skip this step The display shows ENTER DATABASE OPTION Display phones also show the options ENDPOINT SYSTEM and TRUNK Press Klll or the ENDPOINT menu but ton The display shows ENTER ENDPOINT EXTENSION Enter the extension number of the phone to be programmed using one of the following methods If you enter an invalid extension number y
142. to an expanded external voice mail system is recommended when an unacceptable number of callers are being camped on before they can leave a voice message BVM can be replaced with an external Voice Processing Unit VPU or Enterprise Messag ing EM system The VPU and EM systems can be installed on any or all nodes in the net work to allow a caller to leave a message on a local voice processing system for a mailbox located on another voice processing system in the network Enterprise Messaging Enterprise Messaging EM is an optional external system that unifies communication and messaging by providing access to voice mail fax and e mail messages in the user s mailbox In addition EM provides automatic speech recognition capabilities and built in Unified Mes saging features EM runs on the Windows 2000 operating system For detailed information about EM refer to the Enterprise Messaging Installation Manual part no 780 8006 Voice Processing Unit The Voice Processing Unit VPU is an optional external system that provides integrated voice processing Integrated features include Voice Mail Automated Attendant Hunt Group announcement and overflow optional Fax On Demand buffered SMDR Record A Call and others with special applications software that can be attached to the telephone system VPU runs on either the Windows NT or Windows 2000 operating systems For detailed information about EM refer to the Voice Processing Unit Instal
143. to place the call on consultation hold You hear three short tones followed by dial tone 2 You can place a call or enter a feature code If you hang up while the call is on consultation hold the call immediately NOTE recalls your endpoint If you hang up after dialing an extension number the call transfers to that endpoint 3 Return to the caller on hold by hookflashing To answer a hold recall When the recall rings at your endpoint the display shows endpoint or trunk RECALLING Lift the handset or press the button Executive Display Pro fessional Display and Model 8560 phone users can press the ANSWER menu button Single line endpoints are automatically connected Inter Tel endpoint users may need to press the flashing Call or individual trunk button Microphone Mute Consultation Hold Whether handsfree or using the handset you can temporarily turn off your microphone while on a call The call is still connected you can hear the other party but they cannot hear you Since the call is not placed on hold no timer is activated The button is lit when the microphone is muted the light will go off when you press the button to re enable the microphone If you receive an Off Hook Voice Announce call refer to page 184 you can press the button while speaking to the OHVA caller to mute the handset microphone The caller on the handset will not hear you or the OHVA caller When you press again the handset microphone
144. to speakerphone has a headset enabled or is in Do Not Disturb Also OHVA calls are not possible if the caller is placing a private intercom call or has the Ring Intercom Always feature enabled To place an OHVA call using a single line phone the Ring Intercom Always feature must be disabled To disable this feature lift the handset of the sin gle line phone and dial feature code 377 By default the Ring Intercom Always feature is enabled IMPORTANT If you press the button while speaking to an OVHA caller on the speakerphone the handset microphone will be muted and the caller on the handset will not hear you or the OHVA caller When you press again the handset microphone is re enabled Off Hook Voice Announce OHVA To place an OVHA call 1 When placing an intercom call to a busy OHVA enabled Inter Tel phone do not hang PCDPM IE up You hear busy signals Pd until the Camp On and OHVA ur ACTIVE Screening timers expire If 5 CALL ON a r Ext 1103 Ext 1002 HANDSET you hear music after the Camp On timer expires con ditions for an OHVA call were not met and you are System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 OFF HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE ENDPOINT WITH Caller places a call to ext 1002 and hears busy signal Display shows INTERCOM CALL FROM 1103 After 5 seconds call is established on speaker if not blocked camped on Refer to page 178
145. to the principal station by another endpoint user and the principal station s system forward is set for the no answer endpoint status a system wide option determines what the caller hears as shown in the table below Table 27 Handsfree Announce and System Forward Options outside calls for warded HANDSFREE SYSTEM ANNOUNCE FORWARD RESULT OPTION OPTION Disabled Intercom and or The intercom call from the transferring endpoint enters the forwarding path after the System Forwarding Initiate timer expires The transferring user hears ringing and can announce the call only if it is answered Enabled Outside calls for warded The transferring user will place a handsfree call to the principal station and can announce the transfer the System Forwarding Initiate timer does not start until the transfer is completed Enabled Enabled or Disabled Intercom calls for warded Calls forwarded to Voice Mail The handsfree announce option is overridden and the intercom call from the transferring station enters the for warding path after the System Forwarding Initiate timer expires The transferring user hears ringing and can announce the call only if it is answered The transfer is completed when the transferring endpoint hangs up The principal station s mailbox number is auto matically dialed Individual Endpoint Forwarding Points Page 213 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRA
146. trunks ARS is programmed using route groups and facility groups e Route Groups A route group contains dialing patterns and facility groups The dialing patterns are used to determine the calls that will be routed through the route group For example the default dial pattern for Route Group 1 is N any number of digits beginning with digit 2 9 If a number is dialed that begins with 1 it will not be routed through this route group Each route group has an ordered list of facility groups that contains lists of local trunk groups and or nodes There can be 100 facility groups in the system The facility groups should be programmed so that the least expensive route is checked and if available is selected first If the least expensive facility group is not avail able the system checks the other groups in the list until it finds an available trunk e Facility Groups A facility group contains trunk group node lists and dial rules The trunks can include local trunk groups or nodes The dial rules tell the system what to dial The system can have up to 32 dial rules 26 of which are programmable Each facility group can use up to 32 dial rules For example if the selected route group requires that the number contain 1 but no area code the dial rules include the 1 and drop the area code The modified phone number can contain up to 32 digits If SMDR is enabled the modified phone number not the digits dialed will a
147. will ring at the station forwarding point If the principal station receives a manually forwarded call not a sys tem forward that call will not fol low the principal station s system forwarding path If an infinite forward loop results from the combination of manual for wards and system forwarding paths the endpoint that was originally intended to receive the call will ring even if the endpoint is in Do Not Disturb System Forward and Manual Call Forward Example FORWARDING POINT FORWARDED TO VOICE PROCESSING SYSTEM System forwarded calls from Principal Station will be sent here if not answered at 1st Forwarding Point Principal 1st System e Station Forwarding Point N 2nd System MANUAL Forwarding Point FORWARD h Proce Processing Unit Manual Forward Destination PRINCIPAL STATION IS MANUAL FORWARD DESTINATION SYSTEM FORWARD Principal Station Forwarding Point Manually forwarded calls will stop here and will not be sent to System Forwarding Point INFINITE LOOP CAUSED BY SYSTEM AND MANUAL CALL FORWARD Calls received by this station will not follow the manual forward if other two stations are unavailable Manud Page 215 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 System Forward Enable Disable The user can enter feature codes that disable or enable System Forward at that endpoint This
148. will return the following features to their default states Returning an endpoint to default Cancels the following features if in effect Do Not Disturb Manual Call Forwarding Queue Request Account Code for All Calls Following Background Music Ring Intercom Always Headset Mode Restores the following features if disabled Handsfree Page Receive Hunt Group Replace System Forwarding Returns endpoint volumes to default levels Default Endpoint System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 e Returns endpoints to the standard keymap e If the endpoint is a member of one or more ACD hunt groups logs into the hunt group s This feature is especially useful for installers and troubleshooters who need to know exactly how a given station is programmed To return the station to default Inter Tel endpoints While on or off hook enter the Default Station feature code 394 You hear a confirmation tone and the display shows STATION DEFAULTED If off hook hang up Single line endpoints Lift the handset and enter the Default Station feature code 394 You hear a confirmation tone followed by dial tone Hang up Hookflash Recall Hookflash Recall A timed hookflash recall in Europe may be required for Inter Tel endpoint and single line users to use certain telephone company or PBX features The CO hookflash recall feature code sends a timed hookflash recall over the trunk wh
149. 0 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Voice Mail Networking Page 20 A voice processing system can be installed on any or all nodes in the user s network These voice processing systems can also be networked together to allow a caller to leave a message on the local voice processing system for a mailbox located on another voice processing system in the network Maximum capacities of networked voice processing systems are listed in Table 4 Table 4 Network Capacities FEATURE DEVICES CAPACITY Voice Processing Systems per network 1008 Local or Off Node Mailboxes Extension IDs per Voice Processing System 10 0005 node System Audio Interface Ports per node 40 Applications per node 150 Group Lists per node 1000 Members per group list 1500 Remote Message Notification Numbers per mailbox 18 Audiotex Recordings per node 500 Message Notification Retrieval Applications per node 1 System Passwords per node 4 Time Slot Groups per node 10 This is the maximum number of nodes supported by the software System traffic may limit the actual number of nodes that can be supported without affecting system performance gt This is the maximum number of mailboxes supported by the NT based software Voice Mail Networking Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Administrator Procedures CONTENTS PAGE Introducl n 6 656 555 6644565565 R
150. 0 Caller ID Display IP Endpoint nter Te Ri Located in Phoenix Arizona 480 961 9000 USA 480 961 9000 Remote Site Located in Orange California USA 714 283 1600 Figure 12 Example of a Remote Site with an MGCP SIP Gateway 911 4 MGCP SIP n T l Gateway cw _ A range California a SA E L de PEEP EERE i e AudioCodes Caller ID Display ee eue Inter Tel 5000 714 283 1600 Caller dials 911 Phoenix Arizona WEE 480 961 9000 IP Endpoint Remote Site Located in Orange California USA 714 283 1600 The MGCP SIP gateway is intended to connect to the PSTN Connecting the NOTE MGCP gateway to single line ports on other telephone systems is currently not supported When configured with an MGCP SIP Gateway the system can be programmed so that when an Emergency Number such as 911 or 999 is dialed from an IP endpoint the associated calling name and number not the system is sent to the emergency responder operators Example of a Remote Site Without an MGCP SIP Gateway Page 163 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Possible Delay in Local Emergency Response to Remote Sites IP and SIP endpoint users should be alerted to the following hazardous situations e If an Emergency Call phone number is dialed from an IP or SIP endpoint located at a remote site that is not equipped with a correctly configured gateway the call will be
151. 00 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 NOTICE The telephone instruments specifically designed for this system have hearing aid compatible handsets that are in compliance with section 68 316 of the FCC Rules The IP SLA complies with UL60950 CSA60950 and EN 60950 standards and complies with EN 55022 and CFR 47 part 15 of the FCC Rules This equipment generates and uses radio frequency RF energy and if not installed and used properly that is in strict accordance with the manufacturer s instructions may cause interfer ence to radio and television reception It has been type tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device in accordance with the specifications in Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause unacceptable interference to radio and TV reception requiring the operator to take whatever steps are neces sary to correct the interference However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encour aged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorentthe receiving antenna e Relocate the equipment chassis with respect to the receiver e Check that the equipment chassis and receiver are not on the same circuit the equip
152. 00 5400 unit When a music source is installed music on hold is enabled or disabled in Database Program ming If music is not desired the system can be programmed for tick tones or silence on hold The Background Music feature uses the music source connected to the unit only In some circumstances there may be broadcast restrictions associated with the music heard by callers on hold Check with the music s original distributor and or the radio station for copyright and broadcast restrictions concerning music on hold NOTE In a network each node has its own music source s If a caller on Node 1 is holding for a user on Node 2 the caller hears the music on node 2 Note that if a caller is holding for a user on Node 1 and the call moves to Node 2 due to a transfer forward or recall the user will stop hearing the music on Node 1 and will begin hearing the music on Node 2 The music on hold option that will be heard by outside callers on the trunks in the trunk group can be set for music silence tick tones ringback or silence Throughout the manual the term music refers to the selected option Background music is interrupted for calls pages endpoint programming and ringing If you receive complaints from IP endpoint users about losing background music there may be a firewall issue Contact your local Inter Tel dealer for assistance NOTE To turn endpoint background music on or off While on or off hook enter
153. 00 For Monday through Friday service press one For Monday through Friday service say Weekdays or press one 301 For all the days of the week press two For all the days of the week say Days or press two 302 Thousand N A 303 The hard disk is N A 304 percent full N A 305 I m sorry The system is full and cannot record N A any messages 306 Zero N A 307 pound N A 308 star N A 309 Group list number N A 310 Please speak louder N A 311 You have recorded for the maximum time per N A mitted 312 Not used N A 313 Resuming playback N A 314 You have one priority message N A 315 Use two digits for the hour and two digits for N A the minutes 316 Not used N A Page 327 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued Page 328 press four PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 317 Not used N A 318 You have chosen not to have a password N A 319 I m sorry This mailbox is currently in use and N A cannot be accessed Please try again later 320 Not used N A 321 If you are calling from a rotary type telephone N A please stay on the line and your call will be answered 322 You can not reply to a system sent message N A 323 Not used N A 324 Not used N A 325 Please select the days of the week N A 326 To select individual we
154. 00 Hello you ve reached the Inter Tel voice processing system 401 Hello you ve reached the Inter Tel automated call processing system 402 To change your message search order press 2 403 Your current message search order is first in first out Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 42 Voice Prompts BVM EM and VPU Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT 404 Your current message search order is last in first out 405 To search for messages first in first out press 1 406 To search for messages last in first out press 2 407 To change the search order for new messages press 1 408 To change the search order for saved messages press 2 409 499 Not used 500 If you know your party s extension number enter it now 501 To leave a message press 1 502 To try another extension press 2 503 Please hold while your call is being transferred to 504 Not used 505 To return to the menu press 2 506 Your fax is scheduled to be delivered on 507 The system already contains the maximum number of fax documents allowed 508 The system does not have enough disk space to import any more documents 509 The system is currently at or above the Maximum Fax Library Size 510 Levels 1 through 9 are currently disabled 511 Your call will be answered in the order it was received 512 There is one call ahe
155. 08 Ring In Assignments 154 Route Groups 155 Index INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Routing Off 124 S Sample Call Routing Announcement Tree 267 Save Button 98 Save Key 99 Scheduled Time based Application Routing 277 feature description 19 Screened Calls 200 Screened Transfer 200 261 266 Searching the Voice Mail Directory 270 Secondary Extension Buttons 98 99 100 168 Secondary Extensions ring after n number of calls at primary ext 100 transient call indication on call answer 100 Secondary Language Selection 172 Secure Socket Layer x Security codes for DISA 165 Seizing a Device 57 Selectable Ring Tone 167 Send Network Alarms 51 54 Sequence Number Message Record Field 251 Session Initiation Protocol see SIP 91 Session Initiation Protocol SIP Mode 82 Setting Network Date and Time 26 Setting System Date and Time 26 Setting Time and Date 26 Severe Messages 250 Silent Messages 181 Single 108 Single Line Endpoints 107 204 Single Line Adapter SLA 107 Single Line Card SLC 107 Single Line Sets ring zones 108 SIP Session Initiation Protocol endpoints 91 SIP Supported Features 85 SMDR see Station Message Detail Recording report format 248 249 SMDR Information Storage and Retrieval 279 Source Message Record Field 251 SPCL Button 117 118 Speaker Buttons 98 99 Speakerphone DSPs 81 enhanced 104 125 358 standard 104 Special Button and Hookflash 117 Speed Dial 221 feature
156. 1 To erase an existing number and leave it blank Press LIUM until the number is erased Press EM to exit Repeat these steps for each additional number to be stored Programming Station Speed Dial Numbers and Names System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 29 Programming Station Speed Dial Numbers Using the Dialpad NUMBER OF TIMES BUTTON IS PRESSED BUTTON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ENGLISH SPANISH CHARACTERS KATAKANA CHARACTERS 1 amp 1 A l U E O a 2 A B C i 2 KA KI KU KE KO i 3 D E F 3 SA SH SU SE SO u 4 G H l s 4 TA CHI TSU TE TO e 5 J K L 5 NA NI NU NE NO o 6 M N O N 6 HA HI FU HE HO tsu 7 P Q R S 7 MA M MU ME MO ya 8 T U V 8 YA YU YO yu 9 Ww X Y Z 9 RA RI RU RE RO yo 0 0 WA WO N pa ba long The Japanese characters are only available if the Multilingual feature is enabled and Japanese is installed as the secondary language To program Station Speed Dial numbers at a nondisplay endpoint NOTE If you make a mistake press or CANCEL then start over The number in memory remains unchanged Or use the button to backspace While on hook enter the Program Station Speed Dial feature code 383 2 Press the Speed Dial button to be programmed or dial the Speed Dial location code 0 9 If you hear reord
157. 1 1 August 2005 Table 19 Endpoint Feature Code Definitions Continued FEATURE NAME CODE DEFINITION LCD Contrast Adjustment Message 303 365 Model 8620 8622 8660 or 8662 Adjusts the LCD contrast on the display The endpoint must be idle to use this feature This feature code is used for leaving and retrieving a message waiting indication at a called endpoint or the called endpoint s mes sage center Depending on how the message was left the called endpoint user either retrieves the message from his her message center or from the endpoint that left the mes sage Inter Tel endpoints use the MSG but ton Message Cancel Message Cancel Current 366 368 Allows the endpoint user to cancel a message waiting indication that he or she left at another endpoint Cancels a message waiting indication that is waiting at the endpoint without requiring the user to respond to it Inter Tel endpoints can use the asterisk button while viewing the message Message Silent 367 Leaves a Message Waiting indication at a endpoint without first placing an intercom call Mute On Off 314 Not used on single line endpoints Turns the microphone on or off during a call If muted the endpoint user can hear the other party but the party cannot hear the endpoint user Inter Tel endpoints can also use the MUTE button Page When followed by a paging zone code 0 9 or 0 4
158. 163 Please enter your mailbox number Please say or enter your mailbox number 164 Today N A 165 Yesterday N A 166 January N A 167 February N A Page 320 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 168 March N A 169 April N A 170 May N A 121 June N A i72 July N A 173 August N A 174 September N A 175 October N A 176 November N A 177 December N A 178 First N A 179 Second N A 180 Third N A 181 Fourth N A 182 Fifth N A 183 Sixth N A 184 Seventh N A 185 Eighth N A 186 Ninth N A 187 Tenth N A 188 Eleventh N A 189 Twelfth N A Page 321 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued Page 322 PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 190 Thirteenth N A 191 Fourteenth N A 192 Fifteenth N A 193 Sixteenth N A 194 Seventeenth N A 195 Eighteenth N A 196 Nineteenth N A 197 Twentieth N A 198 Twenty first N A 199 Twenty second N A 200 Twenty third N A 201 Twenty fourth N A 202 Twenty fifth N A 203 Twenty sixth N A 204 Twenty seventh N A 205 Twenty eighth N A 206 Twenty ninth
159. 20 To select a custom recording press 2 221 Not used 222 Please enter the recording number 223 After the tone please record Then press POUND 224 Recording saved 225 To continue recording press POUND 226 Not used 227 No saved messages 228 To change and spell the first name press 5 229 To change and spell the last name press 5 230 Using the buttons on your phone please spell the first name of the person Then press POUND For the letter Q press 7 For the letter Z press 9 231 No message left 232 last 233 an outside caller at 234 Message was sent from 235 This matches the mailbox of Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 42 Voice Prompts BVM EM and VPU Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT 236 an unknown caller 237 To turn off the envelope press 5 238 To accept the changes press POUND 239 The envelope is turned off 240 Please enter the application extension number 241 To select a day recording press 1 242 To select a night recording press 2 243 If this is the correct recording press POUND 244 Warning no recording has been made 245 Invalid application entered 246 is not a valid recording number 247 252 Not used 253 This is a return receipt verifying the message sent has been heard 254 I m sorry Private messages cannot be for
160. 200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 2 Dial the extension number or press the lit sta tion Speed Dial or Mini DSS button of the endpoint to be monitored After automatically connecting to the call the display shows MONITORING extension number 3 While silent monitoring a call you have the fol lowing options e Barge in on the call e Return to silently monitoring the call e Record the call MONITORING EXT 12345 BARGE IN RECORD JOIN AND RECORD STEAL Only 6 line display endpoints have the menu buttons mentioned in NOTE these instructions Users who have endpoints with a 2 line display or no display must use the feature codes to access the Barge In features To barge in on a call Press the BARGE IN menu button or enter the feature code 386 default On display endpoints the display shows BARGE IN IN PROGRESS While on a call you can monitor record or steal the call by entering the appropriate feature code or by pressing the appropriate menu button To return to silently monitoring the call Press the feature code 386 default again or press the MONITOR menu button To record the call Press the RECORD menu button or enter the Record A Call feature code default is 385 On display endpoints the dis play shows MONITORING lt extension num ber While on a call enter the appropriate feature code or press the appropriate menu but ton to monitor or steal the
161. 223 Viewing Station Speed Dial Numbers 0 0 0 cece eee eee 226 Dialing Station Speed Dial Numbers 2 0 e eee eee eee eee 226 Intercom Speed Dial and Feature Code Directories ees 227 House PHONG sooo eR teYUERRRE REEF AX NE PXXERREAREPTRCARXA C E XUERR REO RE EARN 230 Reilial ss uisaskasiwatiksTa Gk R93 wd A EPe3 rCRP amp adukk d RR kw XR pP RR 231 Using the Last Number Saved Feature sess esu ye 9E RR RR RRE E RARE 232 Using the Last Number Dialed Feature 2 0 00 cece eee eee 233 Redirect Call cs ciisnt edn bes bce skew ene eek be thea been eed ee bed ea een TCU RC AG RACE 233 Pagl g i i ese ay SoH ESOT ENTE OR eS s PATON CES Oe DIEESE ENEE OTE SON Oe EEE eee 234 Remove from Paging 03 2 ics enc rp 890 06 60 060 bs HERE KR eEPa ehe Fe geek SE 235 Do Not Distur D Qucm RR kee kee eee ae eed ae Pew eee he CURE OR Ree Ree eNews 235 Do Not Disturb Override ccc cece ccc cece cece eee cece hh hh hn ntn 239 Remote Programming 4242 3 ca RECO RRRAOROR IRURE CIRACROCRUR CR ACROC UAR CRUCE ACORN CRT 239 Endpoint PaSSword 12essme niae RE RR en ALI idee sneraceuanessdes veeescuaand 239 Page 115 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 CONTENTS PAGE Remote Do Not Disturb Programming 240 Remote Forward Programming esae e RR PE PORE E ace EA d OR RS RR 241 Default Endpoint 5 65 64 25599 55e 665 t EF AREE NEW a NRE iri
162. 24a edo rhe srrbon PR UR ERR PREPARES 197 Transfer to a System Forward sou o e qx ops tac e Ee IE ode eee owl ees 197 Transfers and Outside Calls ou cx or a Ue de RP E PERPE EAR EE DR REED 197 Transter to Connect Endpoint Flags o 2 t22 0 ue ke ke RR Ra EE ERE A E RE 198 jcncrqoids m r T rm 198 Transfer to Hold 24242 kd ERR rado RR ARE RE REG RE RAS dE A REdd Exe 199 Transfer ResallSs od aaa ge iB RC d uisi dept d od case deca ng Codd a xa 199 CIE cog CPC 200 Rev rse Transfer 6654598446655 RR RON OR ER A UR GARG Rs Gee A b s RR RU CR Y RR 201 Conference Calles odie s X ac EU EROR E UR CE NER UR RC RUE E Sd e ROC Ped E 202 Placing a Conference Callii 2 2 22n3 9 a ak RR ERAS ERRARE RR RES 203 Add Parties to a Conference Lua ed ace rg iiaa ee Ed HER FORE LR HEAR 204 Exiting d Conf renc es dax ree be ORIG UP Ve pda E RH exque E nre i RE 204 Exiting and Re Entering the Conferences 444 654 4454 epp REO REACH REOR 205 Ending the Conference and Placing All Parties on Hold 4 205 Placing the Entire Conference on Hold 2 2s caseo o RR RR RR RERO 206 Records A Call usas e e X ERERRXEACETPG CA P RATE CE ER a EP EP EREGCEE TE 207 Agent Hella sess e RSV Re ETUE KO EIER FERINKIERGN KRAU EUN VW aN C EQ Kos Rr e 208 Page 114 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 CONTENTS PAGE System F rwardin iius ader x RR ARTE
163. 3 Digits After Toll Echo Local Address il Add Account Code e Dials the modified num OUTGOING CALL ber DIALED 1 602 961 9000 1234 Basic Rate Module BRM S Toll Restriction ARS Example IMPORTANT Basic Rate Interface BRI capability is supported only in Inter Tel Europe installations Each Basic Rate Module BRM S provides two BRI S T interface ports for connecting BRI trunks to the system The BRM S does not support video conferencing or connection of BRI endpoints to the system Each ISDN BRI port provides two trunks circuits bearer channels for a total of four BRI trunks possible on each BRM S module in the chassis The following features provide toll restriction on the system and are described in further detail in this section Trunk Group Toll Restriction Each trunk group can be designated as subject to toll restriction or not subject to toll restriction in Database Programming If subject to toll restriction endpoint class of service is checked when the trunk group is selected for placing an outgoing call The exceptions to trunk group toll restriction are as follows Emergency Call Feature When the Emergency Call feature code is entered the designated trunk access code is used to seize a trunk and the programmed emer gency number is dialed regardless of any endpoint or trunk group toll restrictions Automatic Route Selection ARS Calls placed using ARS except Emergency Call feature calls are alw
164. 334 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 464 Not used N A 465 Not used N A 466 Not used N A 467 Not used N A 468 Not used N A 469 Not used N A 470 Not used N A 471 Not used N A 472 Not used N A 473 Not used N A 474 Not used N A 475 Not used N A 476 Not used N A 477 Not used N A 478 Not used N A 479 Not used N A 480 Not used N A 481 Not used N A 482 Not used N A 483 Not used N A 484 Not used N A 485 Not used N A Page 335 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 486 Not used N A 487 Not used N A 488 Not used N A 489 Not used N A 490 Not used N A 491 Not used N A 492 Not used N A 493 Not used N A 494 Not used N A 495 Not used N A 496 Not used N A 497 Not used N A 498 Not used N A 499 Not used N A 500 If you know your party s extension number If you know your party s extension please say enter it now or enter it now 501 To leave a message press one To leave a message say Leave Message or press one 502 To try another extension press two
165. 400 Communication Servers are ports for connecting two loop start trunks two sin gle line endpoints external voice mail Music On Hold MOH and Paging Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 Communication Servers The Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 Communication Servers furnish the processing power and the integration hardware and circuits for the Inter Tel 5000 Network Communications Solutions platform The communication servers function identically but the Inter Tel CS 5200 provides fewer IP resources than the Inter Tel CS 5400 For an explanation of IP resources refer to IP Resources which follows on this page In this guide a trunk is an audio path that connects the Inter Tel 5000 with the public tele phone network Both systems can support between 2 and 92 non IP trunks In addition the CS 5200 is capable of supporting 28 IP gateway trunks IP network trunks or IP endpoints and the CS 5400 is capable of supporting 116 IP gateway trunks IP network trunks or IP end points System capacities cited in this guide refer to the maximum number possible before making resource tradeoffs The actual number of trunks or endpoints installed on a System depends on the user s requirements and the physical constraints and con figuration of the system NOTE BVM is provided with the system but o increase voice mail capacity BVM can be replaced with either a Voice Processing Unit VPU or an Enterprise Messaging EM system For details refer to
166. 8 To spell the first name press five To search by first name say First or press five 229 To spell the last name press five To search by last name say Last or press five 230 Using the keys on your telephone please spell Please say the first name of the person you are trying to reach Otherwise using the keys on your telephone please spell the first name of the person then press pound For the letter Q press seven For the letter Z press nine Page 323 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 231 No message left N A 232 last 233 an outside caller at 234 Message was sent from N A 235 This matches the mailbox of N A 236 an unknown caller N A 237 To turn off the envelope press five To turn off the envelope say None or press five 238 To accept the changes press pound To accept the changes say Accept or press pound 239 The envelope is turned off N A 240 Please enter the application extension num Please say or enter the application extension ber number 241 To select a day recording press one To select a day recording say Day or press one 242 To select a night recording press two To select a night recording say Night or press two 243 If this is the c
167. 9 it allows announcements to be made through endpoint speakers and any external paging speakers in the page zone Page On Off 325 Not used on single line endpoints Halts pages through the endpoint speaker or allows them to be received again Program Buttons 397 Not used on single line endpoints User pro grammable feature buttons and Station Speed Dial buttons can be programmed using this feature code Program Endpoint Password Queue Request 392 The endpoint password is used for the Remote Programming feature The password can be changed by entering the Program End point Password feature code at the endpoint or when using the Remote Programming fea ture Requests or cancels an automatic callback when a busy trunk or endpoint becomes avail able Endpoint Feature Codes Page 123 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 19 Endpoint Feature Code Definitions Continued FEATURE NAME CODE DEFINITION Record A Call 385 If the system is programmed with a Record A Call application the endpoints can be pro grammed to use the Record A Call feature It allows users to enter a feature code whenever they want to record an ongoing call in their designated Record A Call mailbox Users can retrieve the recorded messages later just as they would any other mailbox messages Redial 380 Redials the last outs
168. 9 The message could not be played N A 860 Not Used Not Used 861 I m sorry there are no network mailboxes N A available for Node 862 I m sorry This message cannot be forwarded N A 863 could not connect to any of your remote serv N A ers You will be redirected to the local voice mail view 864 Not Used Not Used 865 Not Used Not Used 866 Not Used Not Used 867 Not Used Not Used 868 Not Used Not Used 869 Not Used Not Used Page 353 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 870 Not Used Not Used 871 Not Used Not Used 872 Not Used Not Used 873 Not Used Not Used 874 Not Used Not Used 875 Not Used Not Used 876 To record a standard greeting press one To record a standard greeting say Standard or press one 877 To copy the standard greeting to the speech To copy the standard greeting to the speech recognition greeting press two recognition greeting say Copy or press two 878 To record a speech recognition greeting press To record a speech recognition greeting say three Speech Recognition or press three 879 If you would like to copy this recording to the If you would like to use this recording as the speech recognition greeting press one speech recognition greeting say C
169. 9181 Compression Statistics 9932 9132 Program Database 9900 9100 Diagnostics On Off 9801 Program System Speed Dial 9862 Enable Network Day 9810 Set Network Date Time 9861 Enable Network Night 9800 Set Time Date 9867 Modem Disable 9811 Synchronize Network Time System Diagnostics Features System diagnostics mode allows a system administrator to perform diagnostics functions such as freezing unfreezing the database printing message logs and seizing a device for troubleshooting purposes Use diagnostics mode when the system is idle to avoid affecting system performance To Enable Disable System Diagnostics Mode While on hook enter the Diagnostics Mode feature code 9900 or 9100 to enable disable diagnostics mode The display shows DIAGNOSTICS ON OFF Then enter one of the following diagnostics feature codes 9xxx Default Diagnostics Feature Codes System Histories CODE FEATURE NAME CODE FEATURE NAME US EU US EU 9926 9126 Diagnostic ASAI Snoop Off 9963 9163 Diagnostic Network Groups 9927 9127 Diagnostic ASAI Snoop On 9972 9172 Diagnostic Print Auxdata 9922 9122 Diagnostic Dump Extension 9975 9175 Diagnostic Print Message Log 9936 9136 Diagnostic Dump Node Information 9976 9176 Diagnostic Print Network Log 9933 9133 Diagnostic Dump System Diagnostics 9978 9178 Diagnostic Query Node Traffic 9943 9143 Diagnostic Heap D
170. A 648 ecent N A 649 deleted N A 650 one page N A 651 Voice mails N A 652 e mails N A Page 343 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 653 faxes N A 654 This message is marked N A 655 flagged N A 656 Saved N A 657 answered N A 658 ecent N A 659 deleted N A 660 With attachment N A 661 For your voice mail envelope press one For your voice mail envelope say Voice Mail or press one 662 For your e mail envelope press two For your e mail envelope say E mail or press two 663 For your fax envelope press three For your fax envelope say Facsimile or press three 664 For message filters press six For message filters say Filters or press six 665 For the message subject press three For the message subject say Subject or press three 666 message subject N A 667 message filters N A 668 For the number of pages press three For the number of pages say Pages or press three 669 You cannot turn all fax envelope options off N A 670 humber of pages N A 671 You have no new voice mails N A 672 Fax scheduled for delivery N A 673 hew voice mails N A Page 344 Voice Processing
171. ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 The interaction of the House Phone Mode flag with the programmed Speed Dial number and system feature is shown in Table 31 Table 31 House Phone Mode Interactions ITUATION PA MIGUT NORMAL MODE RESTRICTED MODE SITUATIO NUMBER Oo Oo STRIC O House phone user Complete exten Dials the extension Dials the extension num lifts the handset sion number ber House phone user Blank User receives intercom User receives reorder lifts the handset dial tone tone House phone user Incomplete System dials the par System dials partial num lifts the handset extension num tial number and waits ber then times out after ber for further digits Long Interdigit timer expires and sends reor der tones House phone is con Dials an outside System inserts a hook System restarts ARS by nected to ARS and number using flash in the number clearing the number and the user performsa ARS and registers end of returns outside dial tone hookflash dialing to the user House phone is con N A The call is placed on The trunk dials a hook nected to an outside consultation hold and flash and toll restriction call and the user the user hears inter is restarted performs a hookflash com dial tone Party the house N A User receives intercom System redials the house phone is connected dial tone and can use phone digits after the SL to hangs up before another feature
172. ANY ACD GROUP and you hear reorder tone ACD Hunt Group Agent Log In and Log Out System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 2 Dial the pilot number of the desired ACD hunt group or press pound I to log out of all of your ACD hunt groups You hear a confirmation tone and the display shows AGENT LOGGED OUT OF hunt group If you were not logged in to the hunt group number that you entered the display shows NOT LOGGED INTO hunt group Start over 3 Ifoff hook hang up Restart ACD Idle Time Upon Login Flag The Restart ACD Idle Time Upon Login flag determines where an agent is placed in a longest idle queue when he or she logs back in to a hunt group When enabled the agent s idle time is reset to zero whenever he or she logs in i e that agent will be least likely to receive the next distributed call If disabled the agent s idle time includes the time the agent was logged out of the hunt group i e that agent will be most likely to receive the next distributed call By default this flag is disabled This flag is programmable for each individual hunt group ACD Agent Wrap Up Timer Each time an agent ends an ACD hunt group call the endpoint goes into wrap up mode and the ACD Wrap Up Duration timer is started Until that timer expires the agent will not receive another call through any ACD hunt group However the agent can receive non ACD hunt group calls direct rin
173. ASR and ASR Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 738 Not Used Not Used 739 Speech recognition has been disabled for this N A call 740 Not Used Not Used 741 Messages N A 742 Seen N A 743 Not Used Not Used 744 Not Used Not Used 745 You have no saved voice mails N A 746 Not Used Not Used 747 You have no saved e mails N A 748 Not Used Not Used 749 You have no saved faxes N A 750 Not Used Not Used 751 voice mail received N A 752 E mail received N A 753 Fax received N A 754 Priority voice mail received N A 755 Priority e mail received N A 756 Not Used Not Used 757 and seen N A 758 and recent N A 759 and answered N A Page 348 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 760 and deleted N A 761 Not Used Not Used 762 Million N A 763 Billion N A 764 Trillion N A 765 Minus N A 766 Dollar N A 767 Dollars N A 768 Cent N A 769 Cents N A 770 Pause N A 771 O clock N A 772 Point N A 773 was unable to connect to your voice mail N A server 774 was unable to connect to your e mail server N A 775 was unable to connect to yo
174. ATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Changing Station Extension Numbers Swapping Stations Page 72 OLD EXTENSION NUMBER NEW EXTENSION NUMBER EXTENSION NUMBER SWAPPED WITH EXTENSION Recording Custom Voice Mail Prompts Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Individual Trunk Programming Record the following information for each trunk to be programmed Answer Supervision Type Polarity Reversal or Valid Call or Valid Call with Polarity Reversal Caller ID Yes or No Hybrid Balance Normal or Short Signaling DTMF or Dial Pulse Trunk Group Number Username Trunk Group Programming Record the following information for each trunk group to be programmed Endpoints with Day Answer Access Endpoints with Night Answer Access Endpoints with Day Ring In Endpoints with Night Ring In Toll Restriction Classes of Service Trunks in Trunk Groups Recording Custom Voice Mail Prompts Page 73 Hardware and Endpoints INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Hardware and Endpoints CONTENTS PAGE Introduction ss i405 hah sawtdansieds RrfXkkR2ER ESRRETXEREXEERXRRA4Y 4 Xd cae 77 Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 Communication Servers Chassis
175. Alarms 51 54 Receiving Intercom Calls 176 Receiving Outside Calls 188 Record all conference calls 247 all DID DNIS calls 247 all DISA calls 247 all free calls 247 all incoming calls 246 all international calls 247 all local calls 246 all network calls 247 Page 368 Record Continued all operator 247 all ring in diagnostics 247 all toll local calls 247 all toll long distance calls 247 all trunk to trunk calls 247 Record Keeping and Maintenance Features 245 Record A Call 19 207 268 276 tone 207 tone interval timer 207 Recording Custom Voice Mail Prompts 70 Red 106 Red and Green LEDs 106 Redial 231 Last Number Dialed 231 Last Number Saved 231 Redialing feature code 125 358 Redirect Call 124 233 Reference documents 6 Reminder Messages 34 173 244 Remote Do Not Disturb Programming 240 Remote Feature Programming 239 Call Forwarding 241 Do Not Disturb 240 Remote Forward Programming 241 Remote Messaging 280 281 Remote Notification Cascade 281 Remove From Paging 235 Remove Replace Hunt Group 136 Remove Replace Paging 235 Reports 252 Requesting Additional Information 270 Resetting the Internal Modem 56 Responding to Messages 182 Retry Call Attempts 282 Reverse Transfer 201 DSS BLF 51 transient call indication 168 201 Ring In day night 164 DISA 164 hunt groups 135 Ring Intercom Always 175 Ring Principal Once 212 Ring secondary ext after n calls at primary ext 98 100 Ring Tone Selection 167 Ring Zones 1
176. Code Directories 227 House Phone coa eek kr REEReERRTEEREEEEREA RU EG RR a S 230 Redial 4 amp 4 cue try a RRRRRCR MORES OKRERTARE EMORY RO OWEMEEREE DESO RR HERERO RS 231 Redirect Call Pere ee eee er ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 233 PAGS qe Te GES ee EEE eh Oe 234 Remove from Paging ose wr e RR Om ERO ede OR CREE Yeas 235 Da Not Disb rb sasssa esce ES ew RSRREA TER ERE E ROO CERPEERE WR ERR 235 Do Not Disturb Override 6 ici cessas eh eh a a hh RR E E RTR castes naees 239 Remote Programming ai aaa RERSERRRADRT RRS AZAR AE RRIRARCERAEERA 239 Default Endpoint 5543392505393 64054555 cob ON Pek ROTER ER UYV TIERE RSV 242 Hooktlash Recall 4 aen nr ra re ER RERr COE x n ROUTER Rd 243 Reminder Nessaces 223a wexa a c RV ERR V REX ERROR ERR Ed RE ERN E Rd a VR CR es 244 Record Keeping and Maintenance Features eeeee eee eee 245 Audio DIagnosteS 2st ar RRENXEPECORRRRERRO UR RERO EGER EERE ENS ROEDER ORE RAS 252 Phantom Devices 4 54e on euh A RR RR RR uss nee ae EA RARE RR E RUE S E RR n enews 255 Voice Processing Features 257 Introduction 2x2 EROR EOAORER A EACUS EO ER UCA RACER HE RACER UA EROR AC RH 259 Automated Attendant vice y Le XE RXVERERECEREREREPXVESER ERE ERRCK IRE 259 Automatic Fax Detection v aoa mc kem e RE eX Y SOS VERE eee KE E 263 Automatic Speech Recognition ceeeeeeeeeee e enhn nn 264 Call Routing Announcement ccc cece cece ccc ence ee es
177. Conference 5 Data 340 Default Station 394 Directory 307 FEATURE NAME EURGEE Display Outside Party Name On Off 379 Display Time Date IP Mode 300 Display IP Address SIP Mode Do Not Disturb 370 Do Not Disturb Cancel 371 Do Not Disturb On Off 372 Do Not Disturb Override 373 Enhanced Speakerphone Enable 310 Feature Key Default 395 Group Listen 312 Handsfree On Off 319 Headset Enable 315 Headset Disable 316 Headset On Off 317 Hold Individual 336 Hold System 335 Hunt Group Remove 322 Hunt Group Replace 323 Hunt Group Remove Replace 324 LCD Contrast 303 Message 365 Message Cancel 366 Message Cancel Current 368 Message Silent 367 Mute On Off 314 Page 7 Page On Off 325 Program Bit Rate 393 Program Keys 397 Program Station Password 392 Queue Request 6 Record A Call 385 Redial 380 Redirect Call 331 Reminder Message 305 Reminder Message Cancel 306 Page 357 Default Feature Codes INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Diagnostics Feature Codes CODE US ics pL EUROPE The Diagnostics Mode feature code 9900 9100 must be entered Remote Programming 359 before the following feature codes can be used Reverse Transfer Call Pick Up 4 FEATURE NAME EUROPE REVIEW Keys ea
178. DR information The SMDR information is stored in a file on the voice processing system PC hard disk for later retrieval Selectable SMDR options include any combination of the following See page 245 for an defi nition of call cost types e Record All Incoming Calls Records all incoming calls that are answered except DID DNIS calls e Record All Local Calls Records all calls that use the local call cost Multicative Factor Adjustment System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 e Record All Free Calls Records all calls that use the free call cost e Record All Ring in Diagnostics A ring in message is recorded for every incoming call whether answered or unanswered to indicate how long it rang Record All Toll Local Calls Records all calls that use the toll local call cost e Record All Toll Long Distance Calls Records all calls that use the toll long dis tance call cost e Record All Operator Calls Records all calls that use the operator call cost Record All International Calls Records all calls that use the international call cost e Record All DISA Calls Records all DISA calls e Record All Conference Calls Records all conference calls If all conference parties exit except one station and one outside party the call is no longer considered a confer ence and when completed it will be recorded using the appropriate call cost
179. DS and you hear a confirmation tone If you were not logged in continue to the next step The display shows AGENT LOGIN AGENT ID Do one of the following To log in to all ACD hunt groups for which you have an Agent ID Enter your Agent ID The display shows AGENT LOGGED INTO ALL ACDS You are logged into only the ACD hunt group s that use the Agent ID that you entered Hang up if off hook If another agent is already logged in at this endpoint you hear reorder tones and the display shows DIFFERENT AGENT ID ALREADY USED You must have the other agent log out before you can use that endpoint _ To log in to all of your ACD hunt groups that do not use Agent IDs Press EM The display shows AGENT LOGGED INTO ALL ACDS You are logged into only the ACD hunt group s that do not use Agent IDs Hang up if off hook To log in to one or more hunt groups using the ACD agent login feature code 1 4 While on or off hook single line users must lift the handset enter the ACD Agent Login feature code 326 The display shows AGENT LOGIN ACD NUMBER Enter the pilot number of the desired ACD hunt group Or you can press EM to log in to several ACD hunt groups at once If you entered an invalid hunt group number the display shows NOT AN ACD HUNT GROUP and you hear reorder tones The display shows AGENT LOGIN AGENT ID Then do one of the following To log in to ACD hunt group s using Agent IDs Enter your Agent ID The dis
180. DUAL TRUNK OPTION Enter one of the following options To view the last two options on a display phone press the arrow or gt gt menu button at the bottom of the display Answer Supervision To program the answer supervision for the trunk press Ell or the ANS SUPERVISION menu button When the display shows ANS SUPERVI Page 39 Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 40 SION OPTION press Kl or the POLARITY REVERSE menu button for the polar ity reversal supervision type Or press Ell or the VALID CALL menu button for Valid Call timer supervision Or press Kl or the VALID POLARITY menu button for Valid Call timer with Polarity Reversal supervision Then press E or ACCEPT to continue Caller ID To enable or disable Caller ID press AJ or the CALLER ID menu but ton When the display shows SET CALLER ID press Kl or ON to enable the fea ture or press Ell or OFF to disable it Then press EM or ACCEPT to continue Hybrid Balance To set the hybrid balance of the trunk to normal or short press Ei or the HYBRID BALANCE menu button When the display shows HYBRID BAL ANCE OPTION press Hf or the NORMAL menu button or press El or the SHORT menu button Then press J or ACCEPT to continue DTMF Dial Pulse Signaling To set the trunk for DTMF or dial pulse signaling press EN or the SIGNALING menu button When the display shows ENTER SIG NALING OPTION press Ell o
181. Dial the desired extension number or press a Speed Dial button the VOICE MAIL menu button or the MESSAGE CENTER menu button Model 8660 or 8662 users can use the Directory feature by pressing the IC DIRECTORY menu button The number can be an endpoint extension number Ell for the Attendant a hunt group pilot number or a Voice Mail extension number a Transfer to an endpoint that is forwarded to Voice Mail You hear repeating double tones and the display shows DEST FORWARDED TO VOICE MAIL b Transfer to Voice Mail The system waits for you to enter the mailbox number The display shows ENTER MAILBOX Enter the desired mailbox number Users of Executive and Professional Display phones and Model 8560 phones can access the Directory feature by pressing the IC DIRECTORY menu button if the system is validating mailbox numbers f you do not enter a mailbox number before you hang up the caller is connected to the Voice Mail unit and must enter the mailbox number after listening to the introductory voice prompts If desired wait for an answer and announce the call If you are calling an endpoint such as Automated Attendant that does not accept call announcements the display shows HANG UP TO FINISH TRANSFER You have the following options To complete the transfer Hang up or press another Call button The display shows CALL TRANSFERRED TO user name To return to the caller Press the fluttering Call button trunk button or but ton Inte
182. ER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 278 For example e The Labor Day entry with a specific time comes before the Day Night entry so that a different message is played from 10 00 AM to 2 00 PM only e The early time intervals come before the later intervals on Memorial Day e Dec 25 comes before the range of dates Dec 24 Jan 4 so that the special holiday mes sage will be played on that day only Once a match is found the application corresponding to the matched entry is invoked If no match is found the application programmed in the Default Application field is used When programming the days and times be careful not to overlap For example if you place a date entry for Dec 25 after a day of the week entry for Monday and Christmas falls on a Mon day the Monday application will be selected instead of the Dec 25 application Scheduled Time based Application Routing STAR Voice Processing Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Voice Mail Voice Mail and Message Notification Retrieval Applications Voice Mail The Voice Mail feature allows callers to send and receive recorded messages from any end point or DTMF endpoint Dial pulse signaling is not recognized by the voice processing sys tem Callers using dial pulse endpoints will be routed to the Voice Mail application s Dial 0 Destination for assistance Two types of app
183. EREEERENEE S REREEXREECXECRXVECER EPA E CREE e CR 22 System Administrator Phone Designation 22 Scheduled Delayed Major Resets 413 3 9A REA ERRUREKVA RR RERREZARERSACREAA EG 22 System Administrator Procedures cece cece cece cece ccc e ce eceeceees 23 Placing the Local System in Day or Night Mode 0 0 0 0 000 e eee eee 23 Placing Network Nodes in Day or Night Mode 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee 23 Setting System Dale and Ime iusso sai ue RES RARE RYE ERE REES 24 Setting Network Date and Time leeseeeeee e 24 Synchronizing Network Time 0 2402 dues brem ed hb REP nra ER Ad Ere eid 25 Programming the Database Using a System Administrator Phone 26 Station Programming oie ace EAERIQREINREPA RP WRESXAG EAS RTEDdxd i quat 27 System Programming Suus equ era RR aRREA RE eo New nee x RR ER ees 34 Trunk Programming 222 4229 3 c 9 s ER REX RR tediesidbrebadauawads 38 Programming System Speed Dial Numbers 45 Programming and Using Mini DSS Buttons 0 0 00 ce eee eee eee 47 Managing System and Network Alarms 0 00 00 cece eects 49 System Alarms s su coger vars ened E x Eee ReracicdeEs ob wee ius semen bee 49 Network Alarms 2224 decade seek retentu rae eek ueees ve REDE EN E eats 49 Cleans ALBIS sooo oe 2 siuna pros aaae ee sane bO tenes caedeeteunwas 52 Alarm Queue ecesas eeii aerae ER IARE eR RR RS Eq A EEA ERE RET RE 52 Enabling Disabling the Internal Modem se
184. Feature Codes 357 dial patterns strings 155 Dial Rules 155 Emergency Calls 156 exemption from ARS 157 Facility Groups 155 feature description 155 network ARS calls 157 placing a call using ARS 187 Route Groups 155 toll restriction 156 Automatic Speech Recognition 19 Auxiliary Message Record Field 251 Axxess Basic Volume Control 166 B Background Music 109 171 Balanced Count Hunt Group 144 Basic Rate Interface BRI 157 Basic Rate Module BRM S 157 Page 360 Basic Voice Mail description 17 standard prompts 294 storage capacities 17 Boot Code boot code update 93 download interruption 93 BRI capability 157 BRM S 157 Broadcasting Messages 61 Busy Endpoint Callback Queue 179 Busy Signal Instead of Camp On DID E amp M 196 Busy Trunk Callback Queue 190 Busy Trunk Option 40 G Call Buttons 98 Call Center Suite 143 Call Cost Accounting 245 246 Call Forwarding 217 all calls 217 FWD button 218 hunt groups 136 if busy 217 if no answer 217 if no answer busy 217 remote programming 241 system 211 to message center 219 to outside number 218 to voice mail 219 unsupervised CO timer 219 Call Forwarding calls 219 Call Pick Up 201 Call Processing Version Feature Code 130 Call Routing Announcement 19 265 266 Call Routing Table 212 Call Screening 200 261 266 Call Transfer 197 Call Waiting 196 Callback Queue endpoint 178 feature code 125 358 trunk 190 Caller ID in SMDR 247 Caller ID DNIS and ANI 152 C
185. For example if the Message Print port on Node routes to Node 2 and the Message Print port on Node 2 routes to Node 1 the configu ration will cause an infinite loop Message Print reports for Node 1 would be printed to the backup serial port on Node 2 and vice versa e A two digit node number is inserted in front of the sequence number to indicate the node where the message originated The following is an example of the new message print string format for a message the originated on node 3 e 03 001 15 30 03 20 M6009 WRN EG CP e Corrupted Queue Was Cleared HISTORY QUEUE e Message Print will not route diagnostic messages that apply to another node except during manual Message Print requests Those messages will only be printed locally e Message Print will not route messages during a startup or reset The system will wait one minute before starting to send messages Startup messages will only be printed locally e Messages may not be printed in time sequence order on remote nodes The order of an incoming message print depends on how the message print was routed to the destination node Therefore a message print could possibly arrive at the destination message print node out of order In addition to the messages the following error indications will occur in the event of a system alarm e Ifa major system alarm occurs MAJOR ALARM appears on all display endpoints The warning may also appear on a single display phone if the phone is d
186. For usage instructions refer to Call Screening Options on page 261 Change Procedures for Mailbox Personal Options The Voice Mail Administrator can change personal options for individual mailboxes or for the entire Voice Mail system as described in the following procedures To record or change a personal greeting T 2 6 Access the Voice Mail Administrator s mailbox and menu Refer to page 58 Say Mailbox Maintenance or press KZ to access the Mailbox Group List Maintenance option Say or enter the mailbox or extension ID to be accessed You hear the Personal Options Menu Say Greeting or press Kl to record change the personal greeting You have the fol lowing options e Say Primary or press Hl to record and or enable the primary greeting e Say Alternate or press El to record and or enable the alternate greeting e Say System or press J to enable the system default mailbox greeting If you selected the system greeting option continue to the next step If you selected the primary or alternate greeting option record the greeting when prompted then press EM If you already have a primary or alternate greeting it is played when you select pri mary or alternate You can then do one of the following e Say Accept or press EM to accept the greeting e Say Replay or press Hl to replay the greeting e Say Append or press El to add to the greeting Press EM when you are done e Say Erase or
187. Forwarding paths are programmed in the database Up to 200 unique paths can be pro grammed Each endpoint can have up to three forwarding paths Two system timers are used with this feature System Forwarding System Forwarding Initiate This timer determines how long a call will ring unan swered at the principal station before moving to the first forwarding point The default value is 15 seconds and the range is 2 255 seconds Page 211 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 e System Forwarding Advance This timer determines how long the call will ring unanswered before moving to the next forwarding point The default value is 15 sec onds and the range is 2 255 seconds For each forwarding path assigned to the endpoint the system checks the following three crite ria to determine if and when a call should be forwarded e Type of incoming call The following six different types of calls can be programmed to be sent to the forwarding path Outside calls received through a call routing table including DID and E amp M calls but not including DISA calls Ringing outside calls Transferred outside calls including Automated Attendant and Voice Mail trans fers Recalling outside calls DISA calls including DISA calls received through a call routing table Intercom calls e Endpoint status The system recognizes four different types of endpoint status
188. I m sorry I m not allowed to dial that number N A 593 Message received from an outside number N A with no caller ID information 594 I m sorry do not have valid Caller ID informa N A tion 595 the network N A 596 Your call is being handled by the Inter Tel N A voice processing system 597 You have no new e mails N A 598 New e mails N A 599 you have one new e mail N A 600 Saved e mails N A 601 You have one saved e mail N A 602 You have no new faxes N A 603 New faxes N A 604 You have one new fax N A 605 saved faxes N A 606 You have one saved fax N A 607 The system has not been properly configured N A 608 To listen to voice mails press one To listen to voice mails say Voice Mail or press one 609 To listen to e mails press three To listen to e mails say E mail or press three Page 341 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 610 To listen to faxes press six To listen to Fax messages say Facsimile or press six 611 You have no new messages N A 612 with the subject N A 613 l m sorry you cannot delete this e mail N A 614 To reply to all recipients press one To reply to all recipients s
189. ID information provided to a dispatcher is incorrect To help ensure that emergency services can respond quickly to IP or SIP endpoint calls from remote sites the remote site must be equipped with a correctly configured MGCP or SIP gate way If an Emergency Call is dialed from a remote site equipped with a correctly configured gateway responders can be dispatched to the site of the emergency However if the remote site is not equipped with a correctly configured gateway the call will be identified instead as coming from the location where the system chassis is located NOTICE Emergency Call phone numbers include e 911 the default for US systems 999 the default for UK systems e If applicable 112 an emergency number used widely in Europe outside of the UK e Any emergency dial number sequence that is appropriate for the location Ask youn Inter Tel dealer or certified technician for details Also if uninterruptible power supply UPS protection is not installed with the Inter Tel 5000 system IP and SIP endpoints will not operate if the power fails either at remote sites or at the main system location All IP and SIP endpoint users should be alerted to these potentially haz ardous situations Inter Tel Protocol Mode IP Endpoints Hardware and Endpoints INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 To allow system flexibility and cost efficiency both Inter Tel proprietary and other
190. IDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 ITP and SIP Feature Exceptions Some endpoints cannot fully support certain features due to hardware or software restrictions These exceptions are listed below by endpoint type Model 8600 The Model 8600 phone operates in ITP or SIP mode However it does not sup port the following features feature code in either mode e Feature Button Default 395 Microphone Mute On Off 314 e Program Buttons 397 e Review Buttons 396 e Switch Keymap 399 Model 8690 The Model 8690 phone operates in ITP or SIP mode However the phone does not support the following features feature code in either mode e Change Language 301 e Feature Button Default 395 e LCD Contrast Control 303 e Program Buttons 397 e Review Buttons 396 e Switch Keymap 399 Models 8664 8665 and 8668 The Model 8664 8665 and 8668 wireless IP phones operate in ITP mode However they do not support the following ITP features feature code e Automatic Intercom Access On Off 361 e Automatic Line Access On Off 360 Background Music On Off 313 e Change Language 301 e Group Listen 312 e Handsfree On Off 319 Headset On Headset Off Headset On Off 315 316 317 LCD Contrast Control 303 e Page Receive On Off 325 e Switch Keymap 399 Model 8601 The Model 8601 operates in SIP mode only However it does not support the following SIP features feature code Headset O
191. IS 152 247 DID E amp M Receive Busy Instead of Camp On 196 Digit Translation 266 nodes 266 programming 266 Digital Endpoint Data Port Modules 107 Digital Keyset Card DKSC speakerphone resources 81 switching matrix 81 tone generator 81 Direct Inward System Access 164 security codes 165 using the feature 165 Direct Station Selection DSS programming and using the Mini DSS Unit 49 Direct Station Selection Busy Lamp Field DSS BLF reverse transfer 51 transferring calls 50 Directories 175 268 Directory 279 automated attendant 260 feature code 227 intercom 227 mailbox recording 62 name 62 Speed Dial 227 using Quick Spell or Exact Spell 269 voice mail 62 voice mailbox 271 Voice Processor 260 262 268 Directory Services 19 DISA see Direct Inward System Access 164 Disconnecting a Headset 102 Display and Non display Digital Endpoints 103 Displays 153 Distributed Hunt Group 134 DNIS 152 Document navigation aids 5 Page 361 Index INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Do Not Disturb 235 call forwarding 217 messages 235 override 235 239 programming 34 remote programming 240 Do Not Disturb and Reminder Messages 173 Down Button 98 DSS BLF Button 98 DSS BLF Key 98 Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF Signaling 40 BE Eclipse Basic Volume Control 166 Elapsed Time in Seconds for SMDR 248 EM Directories 271 EM BVM and VPU voice prompts 294 E Mail Format 286 E mail Reader 19 Emergen
192. If Emergency Call is not operational the system presents a warning mes sage that the feature has been disabled The programmer must acknowledge or change this con dition before system operation can continue Like other feature codes the Emergency Call feature code can be changed from 911 or 999 to a different code if necessary An Emergency Number is blocked when no trunks or Emergency Numbers are programmed in the database or when all trunks in a trunk group are busy If the Emergency Call feature is programmed to use ARS Route Group 1 for local calls will be used even if its dial patterns are reprogrammed Emergency calls by default use the first local trunk group and will not be sent using node trunk groups on other nodes However when ARS is used to place an emergency call Route Group 1 is used even if it contains nodes This means that the network can access a trunk on a node other than the user s node if the user accesses ARS and dials the Emergency Number When a user places an emergency call every Administrator in the network receives the emer gency alarm Alarm 11 Local trunks must be installed and used for Emergency Number trunk IMEORTANT access Nodes should not be used in Route Group 1 Calling Party Number Each endpoint can be programmed to send an identifying number when a call is placed The Calling Party Number field is located in Devices and Feature Codes Endpoints Individual End point programming This in
193. K RE C Trunk Features oan eec xe Re ER ERA EREREPEA TTE ERR S eres Inter Tel Endpoint Features ccc cece cece cece cece nec e neces Multilingual Capabllily 44s hacac ACROCRHACRRCRACROUE we aanehen canoes Intercom Calls aaa ae REO ERR IER HEU RA ARRA YA a ERROR Station to Station Messages c cece cece cece cece sees ee scesees Off Hook Voice Announce OHVA ccccccccccccceccccccens O tside COAG ica he o an RO WADE EROR REC CK HE ERASE Placing Calls On Hold 5606000554059 RR RES Call Wain Lac Er REX OSSESRENE ERE EK ERE EE E EP RIERRAJ PET EA Page vi Contents INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 CONTENTS PAGE System Features Continued Call Transfer 45353 540w 9 ERRORES EC EE SEYCERRPEREDEPREPERERREC ERE XX SERO TONS 197 Call Screening ec T 200 Reverse Transit oa zonswhe rrr ERA RR Ra A REPE REGE ERERGA ARE REEF CE ER 201 Cunterence Calls so sid saa EGO cen Cased aoa ke Gass se Pe RO UR ARA CON SOCR EA OCA Ru ie 202 Record A Call i esa ca sic OC ORCRDUCRRCRAC RA ROCHA GER ROI ORIENTAR CE HAGO e 207 Acent Holger tK OR RES EPEKESUC RES ERR DEG Rad E EE ICE ERA RE 208 System Forwarding 4 iia see a esere essien s user eies ewe eee Toere 211 Call Horward sese cows cat wees ee ae Cae ERR TAREE KEE E RE ERG M AR EREME TRE 217 Speed Dial su aa chs che be 66a shoe 4a RR eee VERE ERU VERRE ERI ERG Ee 221 Intercom Speed Dial and Feature
194. LID TIME To receive a reminder message 1 Atthe selected time you hear eight short tones and the message is displayed Do one of the following If your station is idle go to the next step If you are on a call the message will display for 10 seconds After you hang up the reminder message returns and must be cleared If you are programming your Inter Tel endpoint the programming function is inter rupted The message will display but will not interrupt programming you can con tinue After programming is completed the reminder message will return and must be cleared 2 To clear the message Remain on hook and press Eg The display shows EXPIRED REMINDER MESSAGE CLEARED To cancel all of your reminder message requests While on hook enter the Cancel Reminder Message feature code 306 The display shows REMINDER MSGS CANCELED You cannot view or cancel individual mes sages Record Keeping and Maintenance Features The record keeping and maintenance features available include the following items e Call Cost Accounting System Error Message Printing Call Cost Accounting For Estimating Purposes Only The system s Call Cost Accounting feature is intended to provide a cost estimate that is applied to the various classes of calls Due to the wide variation in NOTE charges among network carriers the system s call cost calculation cannot be used as a prediction of actual charges This feature can only be used
195. Levels 2 and 3 Page 287 Voice Processing Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Figure 18 Integrated Solution Installation Example Receive voice mail messages and faxes via e mail Receive send voice mail messages Telephone I System Copy and Forward LAD n Forward Only m or Forward and Copy Local Voice Mail Remote E mail and IMAP Server Faxes Server e g IMAP or SMTP POP3 EM Unit Integrated solution does not require the UM Server and UM Client software It is set up primarily in telephone system and voice messaging system programming NOTE When a mailbox receives a voice mail message or uses the voice mail Record A Call feature one of the following options occurs depending on how the mailbox s E mail Gateway field is programmed under Voice Processor Devices Mailboxes lt mailbox extention gt Fax E mail For warding NOTICE Enterprise Messaging has been designed to process outbound fax messages and will sup port up to 200 pages in queue at the same time If more page capacity is required then a stand alone fax server is recommeded The available E mail Gateway options for Integrated solution are described below e Disabled The voice mail or Record A Call message is delivered to the mailbox just as normal and no e mail is sent e Forward Only The EM unit converts the voice mail or Record A Call message to an 8 bit
196. MINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Use the following table as a guide for your entries using the keypad buttons Table 34 Programming in Alphanumeric Mode NUMBER OF TIMES BUTTON IS PRESSED BUTTON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ENGLISH SPANISH CHARACTERS KATAKANA CHARACTERS 1 amp 1 A l U E O a 2 A B C 2 KA KI KU KE KO i 3 D E F 3 SA SHI SU SE SO u 4 G H l 4 TA CHI TSU TE TO e 5 J K L 5 NA NI NU NE NO o 6 M N Oo N 6 HA HI FU HE HO tsu 7 P Q R S 7 MA M MU ME MO ya 8 T U V 8 YA YU YO yu 9 Ww X Y z 9 RA RI RU RE RO yo 0 0 WA WO N pa ba long The Japanese characters are only available if the Multilingual feature is enabled and Japanese is installed as the secondary language When using either mode endpoint users may use the Speed Dial buttons and or the button to enter stored numbers or messages Speed Dial numbers can be chained together when entering messages that require more that 16 keystrokes to create the desired message When programming a message in Speed Dial memory you can use the Special button to enter a hookflash F in place of the MAH button to advance or insert spaces or to enter a pause P to change numeric alphanumeric modes within the message The Special button can also be used to enter or in the Speed Dial number Users can also place th
197. Making and receiving calls by any endpoint e Peer to peer P2P audio by IP phones e Dialing Emergency Call number sequences such as 911 in the US and 999 112 and others in Europe SIP trunks do not support the Direct Inward System Access DISA or speed Koul dial features The MP 104 does not support e Pause digits These digits are used to program a Speed Dial number or other digit string SIP registration which is used for authentication purposes IP Single Line Adapter The IP Single Line Adapter SLA provides an interface between the standard single line end point and a 10Base T network It allows you to make phone calls through the IP network The IP SLA has an Ethernet IEEE 802 3 10Mbps UTP interface The IP SLA uses flash memory and its software can be updated over the LAN ITP and SIP Supported Features Users can access most features by entering a feature code using the endpoint s dialpad buttons The following table shows the station features and default feature codes that are supported for phones operating in ITP mode and SIP mode Support for some features varies by endpoint For a complete list of supported features refer to the appropriate user guide For a summary of user guides and part numbers refer to Table Phone User Guides on page 6 Table 11 ZTP and SIP Features and Feature Codes FEATURE NAME FEATURE ITP MODE SIP MODE CODE Y supported x not support
198. N A 207 Thirtieth N A 208 Thirty first N A 209 the Voice Mail system N A 210 The system is set to notify you between N A 211 is turned off N A Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued the first name of the person Then press pound For the letter Q press seven For the letter Z press nine PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 212 is turned on to call your pager at N A 213 With all new messages N A 214 With all priority messages N A 215 Starting at N A 216 ending at N A 217 For mailbox and group list maintenance press For mailbox and group list maintenance say two Mailbox Maintenance or press two 218 To send a message to all subscribers press To send a message to all subscribers say one Broadcast Message or press one 219 To make a custom recording press one To make a custom recording say Custom or press one 220 To select a custom recording press two To select a custom recording say Select or press two 221 Not Used Not Used 222 Please enter the recording number N A 223 After the tone please record Then press N A pound 224 Recording saved N A 225 To continue recording press pound To continue recording say Continue or press pound 226 Not Used Not Used 227 You have no saved messages N A 22
199. NISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 CONTENTS Administrator Procedures PAGE Introduction Lira ira rra d ka ARE RAY eoster e es Esener eserse System Administrator Procedures eeeeeee eene Voice Mail Administrator Procedures eeeeeee ee Administrator Programming Planning Sheets Hardware and Endpoints Introduce 2s cesses Ra SACRA A dorky RN UR DU RC RU RR I CR TR ARN Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 Communication Servers Chassis Chassis Interfaces Connections eeeeeee eene nnn Modul S 5232394Era PwiaG EEe3 EA sr rei tasti d pig 3 Fed reds IP Operating Modes 5 5 ev nh EROR eres IP EndDOHi S 215040565866 AREER CREE eee RR eh Gee Rhee E EEPE I USA ITP and SIP Connectivity eise sseses tete se eves se vbewweeeeteewes Features Common to IP and Digital Inter Tel Endpoints Digital EBdDUIDIS a 2 extre ace ex RR Ree RR OR hee e ke ar Nees Single Line Endpoints ceeeeee eee eee ehh Optional System Equipment 0 cece ccc cece cece eee nnn Additional Information and Troubleshooting System Features Introduci l 5 icasaoskbeta Mes eGR KERR OTE RARE a RR RERO ARRA ACCESS to the Fealur s cesso ska n ho ER ERO RRER Ra RERAAYTARTARE EE CA Attendant Phillies 2vevee kt rei eA 3x E RYQERER EE EPERSRESPYVERRER EO Hunt Groups qas veec y Re 4 eSNG Ee Gee ETE E ee hte Roe E K
200. NT EXTENSION perform the procedure described on the following page 1 Enter a endpoint extension using one of the methods described on page 39 2 The display shows the extension number and a Yes No prompt To include the endpoint in the list press IJ or the YES menu button followed by EM Or to exclude the endpoint from the list press Ell or the NO menu button followed by EJ 3 When the display returns to ENTER ENDPOINT EXTENSION select another extension number Or if finished programming the endpoint list press EB or ACCEPT to continue Trunk Programming Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Ring In For Day Or Night Mode To program the endpoint that will have ring in for this trunk group for day mode press Kl or the RING IN DAY menu button To program for night mode press Kl or the RING IN NIGHT menu button When the display shows ENTER ENDPOINT EXTENSION enter endpoints into the list one at a time as described above for Answer Access Toll Restriction To program the toll restrictions for the trunk group press Kl or the TOLL RESTRICTION menu button When the display shows TOLL RESTRIC TION OPTION press the numbers that correspond to the toll restrictions you want to program as follows 1 COS for day or night mode To program the toll restriction class of service for day mode press HJ or the COS DAY menu button To program class of service for night m
201. On endpoint flag determines whether E amp M and DID callers will receive busy signal or receive ringback and camp on when calling a busy endpoint In the default state busy tones are disabled and the callers will hear ringback while camped on to the called endpoint This flag is programmed on a endpoint by endpoint basis To respond to call waiting using an Inter Tel endpoint 1 If while on a call you hear a single camp on tone and or see the button a Call button or an individual trunk button flashing rapidly you have a call waiting The dis play indicates the type of call that is waiting intercom outside recall etc If you are a hunt group member the display shows the number of calls camped on to the hunt group Do one of the following e lf you want to end the current call hang up A waiting outside call rings as an incoming call an intercom call rings as a private call Answer as usual e Ifyou want to place the current call on hold press the Hold button or press the Special button and enter the Individual Hold feature code 336 The Call button individual trunk button or button flutters unless an intercom call is camped on in which case the button flashes rapidly until the camped on call is picked up then the button flutters Answer the waiting call by pressing the flashing Call button individual trunk button or button e If using Model 8660 or 8662 You may press one of the following menu buttons ANSWER Pr
202. Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 3 Enter the module number where the device to be seized is located if you enter a single digit press EM after the digit to continue If you enter an invalid module number the display shows INVALID MODULE NUMBER Do not enter the Unit number 0 The display shows ENTER PORT 4 Enter the port circuit number of the device to be seized if you enter a single digit press E after the digit to continue Valid numbers depend on the type of module If you enter an invalid module number the display shows INVALID MODULE NUM BER If there is only one device on the selected port the selected device is seized as if the user had directly entered the extension or trunk number If there is more than one device on the selected port the display shows ENTER DEVICE Enter the number of the device to be seized Valid numbers depend on the type of devices installed If you enter an invalid device number the display shows INVALID DEVICE NUMBER When the device has been selected it is seized as if the user had directly entered the extension or trunk access number 5 Enter the Diagnostics Mode feature code 9900 or 9100 in Europe to turn off diagnos tics mode The display shows DIAGNOSTICS OFF Freezing Unfreezing the System History When certain system failures occur service personnel might request a system history freeze This allows them access to the
203. Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 674 You have one priority voice mail N A 675 You have one new voice mail N A 676 Saved voice mails N A 677 You have one saved voice mail N A 678 To listen to messages press one To listen to messages say Messages or press one 679 The system is momentarily unable to process The system is momentarily unable to process your request your request 680 To wait for resources to become available To wait for resources to become available say press one Wait or press one 681 To cancel the request and return to a previous To cancel the request and return to a previous menu press star menu say Cancel or press star 682 Not Used Not Used 683 You have one unheard voice mail N A 684 You have one heard voice mail N A 685 unheard voice mail N A 686 heard voice mail N A 687 You have no unheard voice mails N A 688 Not Used Not Used 689 Not Used Not Used 690 Not Used Not Used 691 Not Used Not Used 692 Not Used Not Used 693 You have one priority e mail N A 694 Not Used Not Used 695 Not Used Not Used Page 345 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR
204. R TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 909 To copy this message to additional mailboxes press four To copy this message to additional mailboxes say Copy or press four Page 356 Trunk Access Codes Default Feature Codes INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Default Feature Codes FEATURE NAME EUROPE Automatic Route Selection ARS 92000 Trunk Group Access 1 208 92001 92208 Emergency Calls 911 999 Outgoing Call 8 These feature codes may differ depending on the software version Station Feature Codes FEATURE NAME URGE Account Code All Calls Following 391 Account Code Optional 390 ACD Agent Login 326 ACD Agent Logout 327 ACD Agent Login Logout Toggle 328 ACD Agent Wrap Up Terminate 329 Agent Help 375 Agent Help Reject 376 Answer Ringing Call 351 Audio Diagnostics 320 Automatic CO Access On Off 360 Automatic IC Access On Off 361 Automatic Trunk Answer 350 Background Music On Off 313 Barge In 386 Call Forward All Calls 355 Call Forward If Busy 357 Call Forward If No Answer 356 Call Forward If No Answer Busy 358 Change Language 301 CO Hookflash 330
205. RESTRICTION 01 ARS Only This is an endpoint class of service only It is not used for trunk groups Also the Automatic Route Selection ARS feature which is standard on the Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 is required Calls can only be placed using the ARS feature The user will hear reorder tones when attempting to place a call using any other method A restricted user can still select individual trunks if the trunks are designated as exempt from ARS Only as described on page 158 or if they were transferred were placed on hold or are recalling or ringing Trunk restriction determines which trunks in the ARS route group can be selected by the endpoint or applica tion Class of Service Class of Service System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 25 Class of Service Default Values Continued COS NAME RESTRICTION 02 Deny Area This restriction is divided into eight user groups to allow the use of Office varying area office code restriction tables This is useful for reduc ing restrictions for some of the endpoints applications or trunk groups while increasing restrictions for others Each endpoint application and trunk group is assigned a day mode and a night mode user group in Database Programming Within each user group area codes can be designated as restricted allowed or extended Restricting an area code prevents users from pl
206. SR is a very flexible feature it can be enabled or disabled on several dif ferent levels ASR also allows subscribers and non subscribers to navigate automated attendant menus call routing applications and search the directories using voice commands When ASR is enabled for a user s mailbox he or she can issue spoken commands to navigate the voice mail menus ASR is currently supported on EM voice processing systems only If ASR is enabled on a voice processing system users are prompted to speak or press a digit on the dialpad to complete a voice mail task If ASR is not enabled users are only prompted to press a digit When ASR is not enabled users can still navigate the menus and perform tasks by pressing the appropriate dialpad digits when prompted The following ASR guidelines are provided in the endpoint user guides Instruct users to fol low these guideline for best results when using ASR e When completing a mailbox related task either say the command each time or press the dialpad digits each time Pressing the dialpad digits will temporarily disable ASR for the current call e Use the handset when issuing spoken commands Your endpoint s speaker can pick up background noise and other sounds which may cause the system to misinterpret a com mand e If your endpoint has a display voice mail options are shown on the display If you don t hear the command word when the prompt is announced look at the display for the appropria
207. Sach oaks RAXARCACER ERA ARR RA E E Ear RR 211 Individual Endpoint Forwarding Points llle 213 Hunt Group Forwarding POLIS 25 1243 9 Rer REM EW RIT dx Ee ze EAE Y ad 213 Handsfree Announce System Forward Option lillileeleeeeeeeee 213 Manual Call Forwarding and System Forwarding llle 214 System Forward Bilable Disable iind ade RP TRES RRRPSA E ESCERPeq URS TAM qu d 216 Unanswered System Forward Calls l l 216 Call Forward 24 esoes e kb CR RR ER wakee eee RARO CORE RR RR UR CR dr e 217 FWD Buttons nuuc RR ERU ERN MER eade a MER ddd URN ER RSS 218 Forward to an Outside Number 0 0 ee ene eens 218 Manual Forwarding to Public Network 0 0 eee eee eee eee 219 Forward to the Message Center 22 22 4cedesesdeanesedabatereseeareesvenees 219 Forward to an Attendant 6 0 05 0 sow REIXA RIDERE Oe ESE RCO ee OES SE EE Da 219 Forward to Voice Mall ssa ec aaen aeu een eee e hn 219 How to Forward Calls to an Extension or Outside Number 200000005 219 Speed Dial oan eR hee eee hehe ROSES ERED EE ER ROE Ge HOSA OR ARDEN EA EES 221 System pecd Didl pvcenae eeu arete nae CREE ode ENS P DdUeR EA AR a RES E 221 Viewing System Speed Dial Numbers 0 0 0 e ee eee eee ee 222 Dialing System Speed Dial Numbers 222 Station Speed Dial oe caces ou rererere sarien irae eRe eRe GE EP REA EE ESAE 223 Programming Station Speed Dial Numbers and Names 000
208. Software pack ages released after the publication of this guide will be documented in addenda to the guide or succeed ing issues of the guide For sales service or technical support contact your local authorized Inter Tel reseller If you have any questions or comments regarding this guide or other technical documentation contact the Inter Tel Technical Publications Department at Tech Pubs inter tel com All products and services mentioned in this publication are the trademarks service marks registered marks or registered service marks of their respective owners Inter Tel Axxess Enterprise Messaging and Unified Communicator are registered trademarks of Inter Tel Incorporated IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation Microsoft Windows and ActiveSync are a registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation AudioCodes is a trademark of AudioCodes Ltd Contents INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Contents CONTENTS PAGE FCC Regulations ix Safety Regulations xii Network Security Statement xiv Document Overview 1 T LFOGUCHOR osa dox aes wea enw RU QUO OR RORCCR UU EOE HEE UC Cb Cd 2 Endpoints and Phones cusa sich RR RR ORE WR ORE CR CR ORE ROR ACRHRCROR SUCCI d RR 2 Changes to Issue Lui ugawskre khe ERE RRRGUG d XXE TOS 4408s oN CLE eee CEPR 3 Intended Audieuc usdssuxese e hx ER ORERRO ER RE RR OR RR RR RR RR 3 Section
209. TOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Manual Call Forwarding and System Forwarding If the principal station or a forwarding point has manual call forward enabled using the button or one of the Call Forwarding feature codes the Call Forward feature overrides System Forwarding Figure 14 System Forward and Manual Call Forward Example PRINCIPAL STATION USING BOTH SYSTEM AND MANUAL CALL FORWARD Principal Station AEE 1st System 2nd System Forwarding Point Forwarding Point MAREA FORWARD Unanswered calls at the Principal Station will be sent here Manual Forward Destination FORWARDING P INT USING f a forwarding point has the Call For ward feature enabled a system for warded call will ring at the forward MANUAL CALL FORWARD System forwarded calls from Principal Station will be sent here if not answered at 1st destination until it is answered or the System Forward Advance timer expires then the call moves on to the next forwarding point Forwarding Point 1st System Forwarding Point Principal Station 2nd System Forwarding Point Manual Forward Destination Page 214 Manual Call Forwarding and System Forwarding System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 If a station forwarding point is manu ally forwarded to Voice Mail the call will not follow the manual forward to the voice processing system it
210. TRANSFER CALL TO EXTENSION Single line endpoints While on a call hookflash and enter the Transfer To Hold fea ture code 346 2 Model 8660 or 8662 users can use the Directory feature by pressing the IC DIRECTORY menu button 3 M Hang up to complete the transfer To pick up a call that was transferred to Hold If a call was transferred to Hold at your endpoint Inter Tel endpoints When your button a Call button or individual trunk but ton is fluttering lift the handset and or press the fluttering button or the but ton for an outside call You are connected to the caller Single line endpoints Lift the handset and enter the Individual Hold feature code 336 You are connected to the call Transfer Recalls Transfer to Hold If a call is transferred to another phone and is not answered before the appropriate Transfer timer expires and if it was not transferred to hold the call recalls the transferring phone s recall destination defaults to the phone and the Recall timer is started The call rings until the Recall timer expires If unanswered it recalls the transferring party s Attendant and the Aban doned Call timer is started If the transferring endpoint has no Attendant the call continues to recall at the transferring endpoint If the call is not answered before the Abandoned Call timer expires the call is disconnected by the system In a network a phone s transfer recall destination can be an off node device
211. This is usually the extension number that matches the mailbox number associated mailbox However a different number can be used for the mailbox s message notification endpoint non associated mailbox e Associated When the extension number message notification number and mailbox number for an endpoint all match that endpoint user can forward calls to Voice Mail and have the call go directly to the associated mailbox s personal greeting Even if other mailboxes use that extension number as their message notification extension e Non Associated The extension number assigned as the Message Notification Endpoint for a non associated endpoint is an extension number that does not match the mailbox number For example a hunt group pilot number can have a mailbox but the message notification must be sent to a specific endpoint so that a message lamp can be lit or message notification signal can be sent If an endpoint user s extension number does not match a mailbox number and the endpoint user forwards calls to Voice Mail the caller will hear the main Voice Mail greeting and must enter a mailbox number When a mailbox receives a message the message notification endpoint is signaled If it is an Inter Tel endpoint the IE button is lit and the display shows that a message has been received A single line endpoint will receive message waiting signals if enabled system wide Cascading Remote Message Notification Remote Messaging is a subs
212. To try another extension say Extension or press two 503 Please hold while your call is being transferred N A to 504 Not used N A 505 To return to the menu press two To return to the menu say Menu or press two 506 Your fax is scheduled to be delivered on N A Page 336 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 507 The system already contains the maximum N A number of fax documents allowed 508 The system does not have enough disk space N A to import any more documents 509 The system is currently at or above the Maxi N A mum Fax Library Size 510 Levels one through nine are currently dis N A abled 511 Your call will be answered in the order it was N A received 512 There is one call ahead of you N A 513 To change your transfer method press five To change your transfer method say Trans fer or press five 514 Your current transfer method is unannounced N A 515 Your current transfer method is screened N A 516 Your current transfer method is announce only N A 517 To select unannounced transfers press one To select unannounced transfers say Unan nounced or press one 518 For screened transfers press two For screened transfers say Screened or press two 519 For announce
213. a station in Do Not Disturb mode using the remote programming feature NOTE After each entry non display endpoint users will hear a confirmation tone Out side callers using a DISA line will hear confirmation tone followed by DISA dial tone Display endpoint users will not hear confirmation tones but will see a prompt asking for the next entry If calling from an outside endpoint access the system through a DISA line Enter the DISA security code if applicable You hear a confirmation tone followed by DISA dial tone If programming from another station lift the handset or press the Speaker button Enter the Remote Programming feature code 359 If you have a display it shows ENTER EXTENSION Model 8660 or 8662 endpoint users can press the IC DIR button to use the intercom directory to look up a number Enter the extension to be placed in DND If you have a display it shows ENTER PASS WORD If you entered an invalid extension number you will hear reorder tones and can try again Enter the extension s password followed by EM If you have a display it shows ENTER FEATURE CODE If you enter an incorrect password the display will show INVALID PASS NOTE WORD and the call is disconnected Station users will hear reorder tones Remote Do Not Disturb Programming System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 5 Toturn on Do Not Disturb a Enter the Do Not Disturb On feature code
214. a trunk using the saved trunk access code and dials the saved phone number Releases the current call reseizes the trunk using the access code used on that call and redials the digits that were dialed On an incoming outside call Releases the current call seizes a trunk using the saved trunk access code and dials the saved phone number Releases the current trunk seizes a trunk using the same trunk access code used on the last outgoing call and dials the last number dialed Using the Last Number Saved Feature Use the following procedures to save and redial numbers at stations that are programmed to use the Last Number Saved feature To save a number on a station programmed for last number saved NOTE The saved number is replaced each time you repeat this procedure Inter Tel endpoints While the endpoint is idle or while listening to intercom dial tone press the button or press the Special button and enter the Redial feature code 380 You hear a confirmation tone and the display shows LAST OUTSIDE NUMBER SAVED Single line endpoints Lift the handset and enter the Redial feature code 380 When you hear the confirmation tone hang up To redial a number last number saved Inter Tel endpoints While on a call or after selecting a trunk press the but ton or press the Special button and enter the Redial feature code 380 Refer to the Page 232 Using the Last Number Saved Featu
215. able the entire envelope and return to the Personal Options Menu NOTE This option is not available for fax messages Change Procedures for Mailbox Personal Options Page 61 Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 7 Hang up or press to return to the previous menu To set up Remote Messaging if enabled in DB Programming 1 Access the Voice Mail Administrator s mailbox and menu Refer to page 58 2 Say Mailbox Maintenance or press Kl to access the Mailbox Group List Maintenance option 3 Sayorenter the mailbox or extension ID to be accessed You hear the Personal Options menu 4 Say Remote or press HE You have the following options e Say Primary or press Hf to set up a primary cascade e Say Alternate or press KM to set up an alternate cascade 5 Say Level or press Klll and say or enter the number 1 9 of the level you want to pro gram You then have the following options e To set up or change an extension outside or pager number Say Number or press KM EITHER say Internal or press Kl for an extension number OR say Outside or press El for an outside number Say or enter the number e To set up or change pager notification Say Pager or press KB Say Personal or press E Say Change or press EE to enable or disable the number 6 Say Time or press EM Then say or enter the time you want the messa
216. ach supervisor The supervisor endpoint cannot use the Agent Help feature while monitoring a call NOTE Station Monitoring is not supported on an IP or SIP device engaged in a P2P call For details refer to Peer to Peer Audio for IP and SIP Phones on page 91 To monitor a hunt group call designated supervisor only 1 Touse the speakerphone While on hook enter the Endpoint Call Monitoring feature code 321 You hear a confirmation tone and the Speaker button lights The display shows ENTER EXT TO MONITOR To use the handset Lift the handset and enter the Endpoint Call Monitoring feature code 321 You hear a confirmation tone The display shows ENTER EXT TO MONI TOR 2 Dial the extension number or press the lit station Speed Dial or Mini DSS button of the endpoint to be monitored You are automatically connected to the call and the dis play shows MONITORING username 3 To monitor another hunt group member s call Enter the Endpoint Call Monitoring feature code 321 and dial the extension number or press the Speed Dial button To terminate monitor 7f off hook hang up If on hook press the Speaker button UCD Hunt Group Supervisors and Station Monitoring System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Supervisor Barge In Station Monitor Enhancements In previous system versions the Station Monitor feature allowed hunt group supervisors to monitor the calls of a
217. acing calls to that area code Allowing an area code allows all office codes within that area code Designating an area code as extended allows the programmer to determine which office codes up to 800 are allowed or restricted within that area code 03 Deny Calls to operator numbers are restricted Operator 04 Deny Toll Calls to numbers containing a toll string defaults to 1 are Access restricted 05 Deny Calls to international numbers are restricted International 06 Deny Equal Calls that begin with equal access digits 10XXX or 101XXXX are Access restricted 07 Deny Local Calls to local numbers are restricted Calls 08 Denied Calls to programmed denied numbers defaults to Numbers 1900NXXXXXX and 976XXXX are restricted 09 Allowed Calls to programmed allowed numbers defaults to Numbers 1800NXXXXXX are allowed even if number also matches a dial pattern in a restricted class of service that is assigned to the end point application or trunk group being used Page 159 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Emergency Call Page 160 NOTICE It is the responsibility of the organization and person s performing the installation and main tenance of Inter Tel Advanced Communications Platforms to know and comply with all regu lations required for ensuring Emergency Outgoing Access at the location of both the main system and any remote
218. ad of you 513 To change your transfer method press 5 514 Your current transfer method is unannounced 515 Your current transfer method is screened 516 Your current transfer method is announce only 517 To select unannounced transfers press 1 518 For screened transfers press 2 519 For announce only press 3 520 Who should say is calling 521 To replay the announcement press 1 522 To send this call to Voice Mail press 2 Page 309 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 310 Table 42 Voice Prompts BVM EM and VPU Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT 523 To forward this call to another extension press 3 524 To accept this call press POUND 525 To refuse this call press STAR 526 You have a call from 527 534 Not used 535 Please enter the extension number 536 537 Not used 538 For system prompt replacement or reinstatement press 6 539 Please enter the number of the system prompt 540 The system prompt has been replaced by the following custom prompt 541 The original system prompt is 542 To replace this system prompt with a custom prompt press 3 543 is not a valid system prompt number 544 To delete the custom prompt and reinstate the system prompt press 9 545 To replace this custom prompt with a new custom prompt press 3 546 You have no del
219. ad without changing the date Use the dialpad buttons to enter the time in hours and minutes For example enter 0900 for 9 00 Or press EM twice to exit without changing the time Ifthe system is set for 12 hour display format press K for AM or press E for PM To Synchronize Network Time While on hook enter KB E EB EB To Respond to an Alarm Message Whena minor alarm indication appears write down the alarm information While on hook clear the alarm by entering KB Ei g mg Clear System Alarm OR entering KB i EN KI Clear Network Alarm Look up the alarm in the Administrator Guide and take the appropriate action O Inter Tel Inc February 2005 printed in US Part No 835 2461 5 To Program System Speed Dial Numbers While on hook enter KB A IE E Enter the speed dial location code 000 999 or 0000 4999 To change or program the name Enter the desired name for the speed dial number using one of the following methods In numeric mode the dialpad buttons are used to enter numbers 0 9 the ES button is used for entering a hyphen and the EJ button is used for entering a colon In alphanumeric mode dialpad buttons are used to enter the desired letters numbers and punctuation The number of times a button is pressed deter mines which character is entered When adjoining characters are located under the same button press Ia Pl to advance to the next character Refer to the followin
220. ailable a private call is automatically placed and you hear repeating double tones until the call is answered The display shows WAITING FOR username e Model 8660 or 8662 You may press one of the following menu buttons LEAVE MESSAGE This button appears only if you have called an endpoint Press this button to leave a Message Waiting indication at the endpoint Refer to page 180 for details LEAVE VOICE MAIL This button appears only if the called endpoint has a Voice Mailbox Press this button to call the endpoint s Voice Mailbox QUEUE Press this button to request a callback when the resource is available as described on the next page Busy Endpoint Callback Queue When a called endpoint is busy or in Do Not Disturb the caller can apply the Queue Callback feature and hang up until the endpoint becomes available This can be done even if the call camps on Each endpoint can apply only one active Queue Callback request at a time The Queue Callback feature can also be used when calling a hunt group if all endpoints are unavailable A user cannot queue onto busy resources on another node Queue callbacks must be answered before the Queue Callback timer expires If a callback is not answered the queue is canceled If the endpoint is busy when called back the queue request is placed behind any other waiting queue requests Queue callbacks do not follow forwarding and are not blocked by Do Not Disturb mode To requ
221. ailbox and group list maintenance Create and select custom audiotex recordings voice mail company greetings auto attendant recordings call routing announcements and hunt group overflow and announcement station recordings Import fax documents Customize or reinstate voice mail prompts If ASR is enabled for your mailbox you have the option of issuing a spo NOTE ken command or pressing a dialpad button For ASR guidelines refer to Automatic Speech Recognition on page 264 To begin using the Voice Mail Administrator s mailbox you will need to first initialize the mailbox To initialize the Voice Mail Administrator s mailbox 1 aor wo nN Dial the voice mail access number Say Login or press to identify yourself as a subscriber Say or enter the Voice Mail Administrator s mailbox number Enter your default password mailbox number and then press El If you want a password enter a new password using digits 0 9 up to 12 digits and then press EB when you are done The messaging system plays back your password If you do not want to use a password just say Skip or press EA To provide system security all mailboxes and extension IDs should have a password To make the passwords difficult to guess they should not NOTE match the mailbox number or consist of one digit repeated several times This is especially important for the Voice Mail Administrator s mailbox which allows programming access to o
222. ake Include the area code if needed You hear one of the following signals e Single progress tone Your call is being placed The associated individual trunk or Call button flashes slowly Model 8660 or 8662 endpoint users have the same options as described for outgoing calls on the previous page e Busy signals then music All of the trunks in the route group are busy Do one of the following 1 Camp on and wait for the trunk 2 Request a queue callback The system places your endpoint in a queue for the trunk When you hear ringing and the display shows TG XXXX or group name IS NOW AVAILABLE lift the handset Inter Tel endpoint users may also need to press the fast flashing Call button or individual trunk button or the button You hear dial tone and digits being dialed The associ ated individual trunk or Call button flashes slowly e Repeating reorder tones You are restricted from the number dialed or from using the route selected The display shows INVALID OUTSIDE NUMBER or RESTRICTED OUTSIDE NUMBER If the number that you dialed does not match any of the programmed ARS route group patterns the display shows UNABLE TO ROUTE CALL Receiving Outside Calls Page 188 To receive an outside call on an Inter Tel phone You will hear one of the following signals when receiving an outside call Repeating long tones and a Call button or individual trunk button is flashing at the fast rate A call is ringing in Lift the handse
223. aker lamp is lit Pressing the button will disconnect the call The Group Listen feature code can be programmed under a feature button just like any other feature The button functions as a toggle If the button has a lamp it is lit when the feature is activated and unlit when the feature is turned off If the Group Listen feature is active when an OHVA call is received by the endpoint the OHVA call will camp on because the speaker is busy On Hook Monitoring Page 189 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Trunk Camp On and Busy Trunk Callback Queue Page 190 Camp On and Callback Queue requests allow the caller to wait for an available resource A user waiting for a specific resource a trunk or a endpoint will be served before a user waiting for a group that contains that specific resource such as a trunk group or hunt group This includes camped on Emergency Call feature calls Trunk Camp On When a user attempts to select a busy outgoing trunk or trunk group the system sends a busy signal The user can wait off hook to camp on until the trunk is available A user can camp on to busy resources on other nodes and will hear the other node s music on hold while camped on When the system has several routing options for a call it tries to use each route in order until it finds a free route If it is unable to find a free route the system tries once again to use the first rout
224. al Days 1 7 3 Saved Messages ES Select Message Category E Unannounced EN Then set search order 3 gory Screened EN First In EN All Messages E Announce Only E Last In EN Priority Messages EN Cancel Part No 580 8001 Issue 1 1 August 2005
225. al application places a call to the caller s fax machine as soon as a fax port is available unless one of the following occurs e Ifthe fax was requested outside of the programmed fax delivery times the system will wait until the Fax Delivery Start Time on an allowed day of the week before it attempts to send the document The Fax Delivery Start and Stop times determine when faxes can be sent Start and stop times can be set to any time period up to 24 hours The programmer can also determine which days of the week faxes will be sent e Tf other calls are going out and the programmed Maximum Number of Outgoing Calls has been met the system waits for an available outgoing call to send the fax e fa fax port or trunk is not available or if a requested document is not available the system delays delivery until the resource or document is available e Ifa requested document has been deleted the system will complete the delivery but will indicate on the cover sheet that the document is no longer available e Ifa fax delivery fails after one or more pages have been transmitted the system remembers which pages were not sent and tries again to send only those pages For example if the transmission failed in the middle of page 3 of 5 the system would attempt to send only pages 3 4 and 5 on the retry The cover sheet on the retry will say This fax is the continuation of and the description for the fax will include continued in the title
226. alarms but Node 3 still has one in its alarm queue This alarm will stay in the queue until Node 3 clears it or until the alarm is overwritten as a repetitive alarm Enabling Disabling the Internal Modem Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 internal modem performs multiple functions When enabled the modem is for Database Programming Message Print SMDR and for uploading software licenses If disabled the modem and extension is placed into DND In DND the modem rejects all calls and does not allow camp ons Any outside calls that attempt to ring a disabled modem are automatically transferred to the Primary Attendant To enable disable a modem 1 While on hook enter the Modem Enable 9866 or Modem Disable 9867 feature code The display shows ENABLE DISABLE MODEM EXT 2 Enter the extension of the modem to enable disable it The display shows MODEM ENABLED or DISABLED If an invalid modem extension is entered the display shows INVALID MODEM EXTENSION Resetting the Internal Modem Page 54 Possible data corruption Do not reset the modem if it is connected to a Database Programming session If you do the programming session is dropped potentially corrupting the database For this reason Inter Tel recommends that you assign the modem extension to a Speed Dial button The internal modem must be reset if it fails to answer an incoming call or is out of sync with an external modem Enabling Disabling the Internal Modem Admi
227. all 199 Transfer to Hold 199 Transfer to Ring 198 Forced Account Codes all calls non validated 191 all calls validated 191 entered 187 feature description 191 local toll calls non validated 191 Forced Account Codes Continued local toll calls validated 191 long distance toll calls nonvalidated 192 long distance toll calls validated 191 validated 191 Forward to an attendant 219 to an outside number 218 to the message center 219 to voice mail 219 Forward FWD Button 98 Forward FWD Key programming 218 Forwarding Path 211 Freeze Unfreeze feature description 59 Freezing Unfreezing the Network History 59 Freezing Unfreezing the System History 59 Gateway MGCP 15 Gateways 84 Greetings 62 Group Call Pick Up 148 201 Group Listen Feature 189 Group Lists 281 a Handsfree announce system forward 197 213 enable disable 176 network calls 175 Hazard identification 7 Headsets connect tone 101 enable disable 125 358 Hold alternate hold timer 194 button 118 consultation 193 195 feature codes 125 358 individual 193 recall 193 195 system 193 Hookflash 117 243 Page 363 Index INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 House Phone 230 enabled by Station Speed Dial 230 for an intercom network 230 for courtesy paging 230 for dialing off node destination 230 for emergency dialing 230 for service calling 230 mode 231 programming 29 Hunt Groups 134 as alternate message so
228. all by lifting the handset If no call is ringing the user hears intercom dial tone when the handset is lifted This is the way single line endpoints work When the system is in the default state all Inter Tel endpoints have this type of call access NOTE In all variations users can receive handsfree intercom calls if enabled The selected option determines how all types of ringing intercom or outside calls direct calls transferred calls recalls etc are answered If more than one call is ringing at the endpoint the first call received is the first answered When programmed for automatic outside call access a user with allowed answer but without ring in for a ringing trunk must always press an individual trunk button for that trunk or enter the Automatic Trunk Answer feature code 350 to answer the incoming call Transferred calls and recalls can be answered by lifting the handset Camped on calls cannot be answered by simply lifting the handset or pressing the Speaker but ton For example an endpoint is programmed to automatically answer ringing outside calls but requires pressing the button to answer ringing intercom calls If a private intercom call rings in and is immediately followed by an outside call ringing in the display shows the intercom call message and the outside call camps on The intercom call also camps on when the handset is lifted The user can then choose between the camped on calls by pressing either
229. all of the system features except for the limitations listed on IP Phone Limitations on page 91 SIP mode offers basic phone features and the flexibility of shared extensions which means you can use one extension with up to five different endpoints on the telephone and voice processing systems An endpoint may have certain hardware and software restrictions that prevent it NOTE from fully supporting a feature Consult the appropriate user guide to determine which features are supported for your endpoint Supported features for the two modes appear in Table 11 ITP and SIP Features and Feature Codes on page 83 Digital Endpoint Module Page 79 Hardware and Endpoints INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Inter Tel Protocol Mode When multi protocol phones operate in ITP mode they function like Inter Tel digital phones They connect to Inter Tel advanced communications platforms by way of an IP stream to the IP Resource application running an Inter Tel proprietary protocol This is the same protocol that the Model 8660 uses which is a modified version of the protocol that the Model 8500 series digital phones use The main difference is that the multi protocol phones connect to the system via IP The advantage of ITP mode over SIP mode is that ITP mode allows you to use the features and functionality that the system provides for a digital phone The disadvantage of ITP mode over SIP mode is that when
230. aller Information 153 Index INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Calling Party Number 162 CampOn 178 endpoint 178 huntgroups 135 moving call to DND 197 tones 196 trunk 190 Canceling a Message Waiting Indication 181 Canceling a Waiting Message 183 Cascade levels Enabling and Disabling 65 Cascading Remote Messaging 281 Change Language Feature Code 175 Chassis interfaces 79 Circuit Number Display 96 Class of Service COS 158 ARS only 158 day night 164 Speed Dial override 221 Clearing alarms Clear Network Alarm 54 Clear System Alarm 54 general description 54 Conferencing 202 adding parties 204 exiting parties on hold 205 exiting re entering 204 placing on hold 206 Connecting a Headset 101 Consultation Hold 193 195 Custom Audiotex Recordings 68 Customized System Programming Reports 252 Customized Voice Mail Prompts 70 AN Database Programming Additions 149 Database Programmed Account Codes 191 Date and Time Display 26 166 Date Message Record Field 251 Day and Night Modes 164 Default Endpoint 242 Default Extension Numbers 131 Default Feature Codes 357 Default Voice Processing Prompts 294 Diagnostic Dump Node Information 128 Diagnostics network 59 system 59 Dial Initiation Timer 117 Dial Patterns Strings 158 Dial Rules 155 192 Dial 0 Destination mailbox 280 Voice Processor 260 279 Dialing Station Speed Dial Numbers 226 Dialpad Hot Buttons 118 DID DN
231. allers on local calls and on most long distance calls However NOTE on some T1 and long distance calls involving significant delays for example cross country T1 calls overseas calls or calls via satellite the amount of echo may be objectionable and the enhanced speakerphone mode should not be used on these types of long distance calls If an enhanced speakerphone call is placed on hold and then taken off hold on an Executive or Professional Display phone it remains an enhanced speakerphone call For all other digital phones if the call is placed on hold the call is returned to standard speakerphone mode A station can only have one enhanced speakerphone call For example if an Executive or Pro fessional Display phone user makes an enhanced speakerphone call puts it on hold and estab lishes another enhanced speakerphone call the first call will be turned back into a standard speakerphone call A digital phone user can set up a conference and then once it is established presses the ERN Special button and Speaker or presses SS and enter the Enhanced Speakerphone feature code 310 to have an enhanced speakerphone call in the conference Executive and Professional Display Speakerphones Page 103 Hardware and Endpoints INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Digital Phone Flashing Light Indicators The following table summarizes digital phone LED flash rates in interruptions per minute Pag
232. allow callers to select the documents they want to have faxed to them Callers can use a DTMF endpoint to request one or more documents from the company s fax library the library that is also Voice Processing System Applications Product Description INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 used in the Unified Messaging faxing feature When the request is completed the voice processing system places a call to the caller s fax machine to deliver the requested doc uments For information about Fax On Demand refer to page 274 e Record A Call This feature allows a phone user to record a call in progress as a voice mailbox message When a phone user enters the Record A Call feature code the sys tem places a call to the phone s assigned Record A Call application When the applica tion answers the system sets up a conference call with the Record A Call mailbox If programmed the mailbox plays a greeting to indicate that the recording is in progress For information about the Record A Call feature refer to page 276 e Scheduled Time based Application Routing STAR STAR enhances the program mability of the voice mail application greetings Applications can be programmed to play alternative greetings for holidays and weekends A STAR application is a table of up to 20 entries that serves as a routing table STAR tells the voice processing system which application to use to respond to incoming calls Based o
233. allows the endpoint to always place private non hands free intercom calls Ring Tone Selection 398 Not used on single line endpoints Selects the type of ringing alert tone that will be heard from the endpoint Routing Off 304 Disables System OAI Offering Control for third party applications This feature requires you to enter a password Once you disable routing you cannot enable it again i e only the third party application can enable routing Endpoint Feature Codes System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 19 Endpoint Feature Code Definitions Continued FEATURE NAME CODE DEFINITION Station Monitor Station Speed Dial 321 382 Station Speed Dial Programming 383 Hunt Group supervisors only Allows a desig nated hunt group supervisor to monitor a call of anyone in the associated hunt group Dials programs one of the 10 Station Speed Dial numbers when followed by a location code 0 9 Inter Tel endpoints use the Station Speed Dial button plus a location code for pro gramming and dialing or they can program Speed Dial buttons for one button dialing Steal 387 Allows the supervisor to take away a call from the hunt group member agent Switch Keymap 399 Not used on single line endpoints This allows an endpoint user to switch between standard and alternate keymaps System Forward Ena
234. amming 40 ringin 154 Trunk Programming 28 40 Trunks 173 access codes 118 answer supervision 40 busy out programming 40 caller information 152 capacity 15 DTMF dial pulse signals 40 features 152 hybrid balance 40 programming 40 Two Line Endpoint Liquid Crystal Display LCD 95 Two Stage Caller Identification 152 Type Message Record Field 251 m UCD Hunt Groups 137 139 announcement stations 137 overflow stations 137 priority level 139 priority list 139 supervisors 139 supervisors and Station Monitoring 140 UM Outlook Client Based Solution 290 Unannounced Calls 201 Unanswered System Forward Calls 216 Undefined Buttons 99 Unified Messaging 284 level 1 285 level2 285 level3 285 Unified Messaging Integrated Solution 287 Unified Messaging Required for Fax E Mail 263 Unlisted Number extension ID 263 mailbox 270 271 Unsupervised CO Timer attendant recall 133 call forwarding 219 Up Button 98 99 USB security key 14 Use Green LEDs for Direct Ring 106 Use Primary Language 173 Use Secondary Language 173 User Guides 6 User Keyed Extension 208 Username display 166 programming 29 User Programmable Buttons 98 99 100 168 Using Mini DSS Unit buttons 49 the Network Group Diagnostics Feature 57 V Valid Call Timer 40 Validated Account Codes 191 Version Feature Code 130 View Call Processing Version 130 Viewing waiting messages 182 Page 371 Index INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
235. and ASR Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 696 Not Used Not Used 697 Not Used Not Used 698 Not Used Not Used 699 Not Used Not Used 700 N A Please spell the first few letters of where you would like to search in the directory 701 hours N A 702 hour N A 703 10 second pause N A 704 five second pause N A 705 one second pause N A 706 Fax cancelled N A 707 telephone number N A 708 Not Used Not Used 709 Your results match more than Your results match more than 710 entries entries 711 If you would like to browse these results press If you would like to browse these results one To filter your search press two please say Yes or press one To filter your search say No or press two 712 If the result is the first name press one Other If that name is the first name say Yes or wise please tell me the first name by pressing press one Otherwise please tell me the first the keys on your telephone name by saying spelling or pressing the keys on your telephone 713 If the result is the last name press one Other If that name is the last name say Yes or wise please tell me the last name by pressing press one Otherwise please tell me the last the keys on your telephone name by saying spelling or pressing the keys on your telephone 715 Not Used Not Used 716 Not Used Not Used
236. andards Institute ARM Asynchronous Response Mode ARS Automatic Route Selection ASAI Adjunct Switch Application Interface AVDAP Advanced Voice Data Applications Processor BLF Busy Lamp Field BVM Basic Voice Mail CD Compact Disk CF Compact Flash CLID Calling Line IDentification European British CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation Caller ID CLID for wireless CO Central Office CP Call Processing CPE Customer Provided Equipment CAUTION without Triangle Document Overview INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 1 Abbreviations and Acronyms Continued ABBREVIA TION SPELLED OUT MEANING CS Communication Server CT DDI Computer Telephony Direct Dialing Inward DID in Europe DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DID Direct Inward Dialing DISA Direct Inward System Access DND Do Not Disturb DNIS DSP Dialed Number Identification Service Digital Signal Processor DSS Direct Station Selection E amp M Ear and Mouth EM Enterprise Messaging EMI Electromagnetic Interference ESD Electrostatic Discharge FCC Federal Communications Commission FolP Fax over Internet Protocol FTP File Transfer Protocol GW Gateway HTML Hypertext Markup Language Internet Protocol IPR IP Resource IPRA IPR Application ISDN Integrated Serv
237. ard Display and Associate Display phones Personal Computer Data Port Module The optional Personal Computer Data Port Module PCDPM can be installed on Standard Associate Executive and Professional Display phones or on Models 8520 or 8560 phones to gain Off Hook Voice Announce OVHA receive capability or to install an optional Modem Data Port Module MDPM When used in conjunction with the Inter Tel 5000 DEI product the PCDPM supports audio only with v1 1 software In this version of software the serial port is not func tional on the PCDPM and it does not transmit data even though the name of the device suggests that it does NOTE Modem Data Port Module The optional Modem Data Port Module MDPM can be installed on Standard Display Execu tive Display Model 8520 or Model 8560 phones for attaching a modem equipped data device or a single line phone The MDPM requires a PCDPM The Model 8416 Mini DSS connects to Model 8520 or Model 8560 digital phones without PCDPM and MDPM devices Single Line Endpoints Industry standard single line DTMF sets can be installed on the system and or used as an off premises extension OPX On premises single line circuits can be used for installing AC ring ing single line phones playback devices and other single line devices The single line sets are connected to Single Line Adapter SLA circuits which are in turn connected to available DEM 16 circuits Off premises stations can b
238. are in DND or that are logged out When sent to display endpoints the display also indicates N CALLS WAITING FOR HUNT GROUPz where Nis the number of calls that are currently camped on to the hunt group This allows hunt group members to see the hunt group queue in real time If this flag is enabled e UCD hunt group members that are in DND will receive camp on notifications e ACD hunt group members that do NOT use agent IDs will receive camp on notifica tions when the members are NOT logged in to the hunt group This in effect is the same as being in DND from the hunt group perspective e ACD hunt group members that use agent IDs will receive camp on notifications only when the agent is logged in to the hunt group and in DND Agents also receive notifica tions while in wrap up If the flag is disabled which is the default setting camp on notifications are not sent to hunt group members Programming a Mini DSS for Agent Wrap Up ACD agents can program a Mini DSS button to light while they are in wrap up mode When the wrap up timer has expired the lamp turns off and the agent is available for calls again To use this feature the agent s phone must have an available user programmable button To program a Mini DSS for agent wrap up at an agent endpoint 1 Enter the Program Keys feature code 397 by default 2 Press the button to program 3 Enter the ACD Agent Wrap Up Terminate feature code 329 by default The button is now
239. ars as one integrated system With few exceptions the user can perform all of the functions across the network that can be performed within a single system In this guide all references to a network mean two or more connected systems Each system in a network is called a node The maximum capacities for networking appear in Table 2 Table 2 System Network Capacities FEATURE DEVICES CAPACITY System Nodes per network 63 Local devices per node 304 Off node devices per node 10 000 Devices per network 40 000 The maximum number of endpoints and trunks that can be installed is limited by the number of voice channels and or system memory resources available Voice Processing Systems Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 Communication Servers support an internal Inter Tel 5000 voice pro cessing system Basic Voice Mail BVM and two external voice processing systems the Voice Processing Unit VPU and Enterprise Messaging EM Basic Voice Mail Page 16 Basic Voice Mail BVM is built into Inter Tel 5000 platform capability to provide voice mail and messaging services BVM does not support Fax On Demand or Unified Messaging BVM messages are stored on a CompactFlash CF memory card formatted by Inter Tel The card also stores system applications and the user database System Network Capacities Product Description INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 The data capacity of th
240. as three Call buttons The following table describes the use of three Call buttons Table 15 Call Buttons Example ACTION CALL BUTTON 1 CALL BUTTON 2 CALL BUTTON 3 User places call 1 Shows status of call 1 Call 2 rings in while Shows status of call 1 Shows ring flash for call 1 is active call 2 Calls 1 and 2 on Shows hold flash for Shows hold flash for Shows status of call hold call 3 placed call 1 call 2 3 If there are more calls in progress than there are Call buttons e g if another call rings in to the phone in the example the new call will not have an available Call button and will camp on to the phone until a Call button becomes available The call will then appear under the available button Pressing an idle Call button will enter the pro grammed Outgoing Call feature for that phone If no button is programmed in the keymap intercom calls will appear under Call buttons All keymaps should have at least one Call button if there is not an individ NOTE ual trunk button for every trunk Down Button No further programming is necessary This button can be used scrolling backward through displays When the phone is idle it can be used for adjusting volume in place of the Volume button Digital phones use the Volume button Mini DSS Button A Mini DSS button dials the associated extension number when pressed If assigned to a button with a lamp it will also show the status of
241. assigned to a user programmable feature button If the feature button has a lamp it flashes while the Record A Call conference is being set up and is lit while the feature is active The programmer can set a maximum length for Record A Call messages The Record A Call Maximum Message Length timer can be set at 0 600 minutes A 0 setting allows messages of any length limited only by the available disk space The default is 30 minutes This overrides the mailbox s maximum message length setting However if a Record A Call message exceeds the maximum message length the mailbox will be considered full until that Record A Call message is deleted As with any other conference call any inside party involved in a Record A Call conference can use the Hold Transfer Agent Help or other features However if any inside party has Page 207 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 enhanced speakerphone enabled the enhanced mode will be disabled when the conference begins and must be re enabled if desired NOTE Record A Call is not supported on IP or SIP devices on P2P calls For details refer to Peer to Peer Audio for IP and SIP Phones on page 91 To use Record A Call with an Inter Tel endpoint 1 Press the Special button and dial the Record A Call feature code 385 or press the RECORD A CALL menu button The display shows REQUESTING RECORD A CALL 2 If required or allowed enter the d
242. associated Call or button single line endpoint users enter the Individual Hold feature code twice and release parties until there are fewer than the maxi mum Then repeat step 5 to connect the conference Add Parties to a Conference Parties cannot be added when the maximum number of participants has been NOTE reached To add parties to an existing conference any inside party on an Inter Tel endpoint 1 During the conference press the button The other parties remain connected The Call button and button flutter 2 Place an intercom or outside call to the other party or return to a call on hold to be included in the conference and press the button 3 To connect all parties in a conference Press the button again 4 To add another party Repeat steps 1 3 again To add parties to an existing conference any inside party on a single line endpoint 1 During the conference hookflash The other parties remain connected 2 Place an intercom or outside call to the other party to be included in the conference or return to a call on hold Hookflash and enter the Conference feature code 5 3 To connect all parties in a conference Hookflash and enter the Conference feature code 5 again 4 To add another party Repeat steps 1 3 again Exiting a Conference There are several options for leaving the conference e Exit the conference by hanging up The other parties remain connected only if at least one is the endpoint
243. at station calls an Ameri can English programmed station that has selected Do Not Disturb message 02 the Japanese station s user will see the Japanese version of message 02 NOTE Only digital display phones display Japanese prompts The second line of the message can be customized with a numeric alphanumeric message of up to 16 characters English Spanish and or Japanese characters The customized message is entered as described below When entering a customized Do Not Disturb message you can press the MEJE button or USE ALPHA MODE USE NUMERIC MODE menu button to switch back and forth between alphanumeric and numeric mode e In numeric mode the dialpad buttons are used to enter numbers 0 9 the pound EJ button is used for entering a hyphen and the asterisk El button is used for entering a colon For example 1 00 would enter 1 00 in numeric mode When program ming a custom Do Not Disturb message the station is automatically in numeric mode In alphanumeric mode dialpad buttons are used to enter the desired letters numbers and punctuation The number of times a button is pressed determines which character is entered For example 33377744432999 would enter FRIDAY When adjoining char acters are located under the same button press the button once to advance to the next character For example 6 666 6632999 would enter MON DAY Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 AD
244. ate non handsfree call to an NOTE Inter Tel endpoint press the pound EJ button before dialing the extension num ber 1 Forall Inter Tel endpoints To use the handset Lift the handset If the endpoint has a display it shows ENTER EXTENSION NUMBER To use the speakerphone Skip to step 2 begin dialing The Speaker button lights The display shows ENTER EXTENSION NUMBER Executive Display Professional Display and Model 8660 or 8662 Lift the handset or begin dialing as described above The display shows ENTER EXTENSION NUM BER You may press one of the following menu buttons IC DIRECTORY Press this button to use the Intercom Directory feature Refer to page 227 for instructions OUTSIDE CALL If you would rather make an outside call press this button and refer to the instructions on page 186 Single line phones Lift the handset If the DTMF decoders are busy you hear silence Hang up and try again 2 Dialan extension number The number can be 0 for the Attendant an endpoint exten sion number or a hunt group pilot number Display endpoints show the number dialed If you dial too slowly the Inter digit timer may expire and you will hear reorder tones One of the following will occur a dfcalling a handsfree Inter Tel endpoint speak after you hear a double tone The display shows IC TO lt username gt b df placing a private call or calling a single line endpoint a hunt group or an Inter Tel endp
245. ated as the Administrator mailbox has all of the standard subscriber features which can be found in the appropriate user guide plus the ability to perform the fol lowing tasks Record a broadcast message Perform mailbox and group list maintenance With Audiotex recordings create and select customized voice mail company greetings Automated Attendant recordings call routing announcements and hunt group over flow and announcement station recordings Import fax documents Customize voice mail prompts Voice Mail Administrator procedures are described on page 57 Sections of the Administrator Guide Page 4 This Administrator Guide includes the following sections Document Overview This section provides information about the document s struc ture and content associated documents typographical methods used to call the reader s attention to important information and a listing of selected abbreviations and acronyms used throughout the document Product Description The Product Description section describes system processes capacity and feature summaries and licensing requirements of the Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 platform defines capacities dimensions and parameters of the hardware and soft ware components of the systems The section also identifies the environmental condi tions required to ensure safe and reliable system operation For further details turn to the section Or if viewing the PDF version of the manual go d
246. ature calls are never toll restricted Adds or deletes digits according to the facility group chosen Each facility group has a programmed set of dial rules that tells the system what to dial For example if the selected route group requires that the number contain 1 but no area code the dial rules include the 1 and drop the area code Dials the modified phone number If the number is allowed the system seizes an idle trunk in one of the selected trunk groups waits for the Dialing Wait After Connect timer to expire and then dials the number When ARS is used the user hears dial tone when the feature code is entered manually or auto matically using a Call button the ARS button or the button The user then dials the number and hears silence until the trunk is seized and dialing is completed The user will not hear the digits being dialed The call appears under an available Call or trunk button Automatic Route Selection ARS System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Figure 9 ARS Example Station user enters 1234 account code and dials T 1 602 961 9000 ARS does the following Checks the number and l finds dialing pattern 602 in Route Group 2 Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 e Selects a facility group Communication with an available trunk Server Checks toll restriction and i outgoing access Uses dial rules to modify CO the number Echo
247. ay Everyone or press one 615 To reply to just the sender press two To reply to just the sender say Sender or press two 616 I m sorry this message was received from an N A unknown source 617 Please enter the digits for the fax destination N A and wait for further instructions 618 The system could not access your e mail N A account with the known password 619 totalling N A 620 pages N A 621 l m sorry you cannot delete this fax N A 622 For voice mails press one For voice mails say Voice Mail or press one 623 For e mails press two For e mails say E mail or press two 624 For faxes press three For faxes say Facsimile or press three 625 Not Used Not Used 626 Not Used Not Used 627 Not Used Not Used 628 Not Used Not Used 629 Not Used Not Used 630 voice mail N A Page 342 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 631 e mail N A 632 Fax N A 633 Not Used Not Used 634 Not Used Not Used 635 Not Used Not Used 636 Not Used Not Used 637 Not Used Not Used 638 Not Used Not Used 639 Not used Not Used 640 Not Used Not Used 641 Not Used Not Used 642 Not Used Not Used 643 Not Used Not Used 644 Not Used Not Used 645 flagged N A 646 Saved N A 647 answered N
248. ay shows VERIFY PASSWORD Enter the password exactly as you did in the step above followed by EM The display returns to the ENTER SYSTEM OPTION prompt If you hear reorder tones and see an error mes sage the passwords did not match and you must start over at the CHANGE PASSWORD prompt Reminder Messages This option allows you to program the reminder messages used by the endpoints To select it press Ell or the REMINDER MSGS menu but ton Then do the following 1 2 3 4 5 The display shows SELECT REMINDER MSG Enter a message number or scroll to the desired message To scroll to the message press the Volume but ton or the SCROLL plus NEXT and PREVIOUS menu buttons When the display shows the desired message enter the new message as described on page 26 Press EM or ACCEPT to save the new message The display shows DATA BASE UPDATED and then returns to the SELECT REMINDER MSG prompt Or to cancel your entry press or CANCEL The display shows NO UPDATE PERFORMED To program another message scroll to the desired message and repeat these steps Press EB again to exit to the ENTER SYSTEM OPTION prompt Station Extensions This option allows you to assign new extension numbers to stations endpoints phones To select it press Kl or the STN EXTENSION menu button If programming a phone 1 Press Kll or CHANGE EXT The display shows ENTER ENDPOINT EXTEN SION Enter the extension number of the
249. ays back the password If you do not want to use a password say Skip or press EM Voice mail announces that you have chosen not to have a password 6 Say Accept or press EM to accept the password as entered or say Re enter or press EJ o erase and re enter the password 7 Hang up or press to return to the previous menu To change and save a Message Envelope 1 Access the Voice Mail AdministratorVoice Mail Administrator s mailbox and menu Refer to page 58 2 Say Mailbox Maintenance or press El to access the Mailbox Group List Maintenance option 3 Sayorenter the mailbox or extension ID to be accessed You hear the Personal Options Menu 4 Say Envelope or press Eli to select the Message Envelope Options Menu 5 Select the media type you would like to change e Say Voice Mail or press KM Say E mail or press EM e Say Facsimile or press EJ 6 You can then do any of the following e Say Time Date or press Kl to enable or disable the time date option e Say Source or press El to enable or disable the message source option e For voice mail say Length or press Kl to enable or disable the message length option e For e mail say Subject or press Ito enable or disable the subject option e For faxes say Pages or press Ef to enable or disable the pages option e Say All Options or press Kl to enable all options and return to the Personal Options Menu e Say None or press Ef to dis
250. ays subject to toll restriction regardless of the selected trunk group s toll restriction programming Note that only the endpoint COS is checked the trunk group COS is not Network ARS Calls When determining toll restriction for an ARS outgoing call the network checks the endpoint toll restriction based on the database information on the node on which the endpoint resides not the node that contains the trunk which the system uses to place the call The system does not check the trunk COS for ARS calls Page 157 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 e Exemption from ARS Only Restriction Each trunk group may be designated as exempt from automatic route selection ARS only If exempt endpoint users with the ARS Only class of service can select the trunk group directly e Absorbed Digits Trunk groups that are subject to toll restriction can be programmed to absorb ignore the first digit s dialed This allows the system to handle the dialed digits just as they would be by the local telephone company or PBX to which the sys tem is connected e Endpoint and Trunk Group Classes of Service Each endpoint and trunk group can be assigned one or more classes of service COS to restrict or allow certain digit pat terns when an outside call is dialed Trunk group COS is not checked if ARS is used Class of Service Page 158 Each endpoint and each trunk group that is subject t
251. base Programming password Entry to the Database Programming feature at the Administrator phones can be protected using a password A password would prevent unauthorized users from altering the system database Define reminder messages System reminder messages can be changed using an Administrator s phone For a feature description and operating instructions refer to Reminder Messages on page 244 The messages can have up to 16 characters each When Primary and Secondary Languages are enabled the system has default reminder messages in both languages The current language of the programming phone deter mines which list is programmed For a description of the Change Language feature refer to Secondary Language Selection on page 172 Each Secondary Language trans lation has the same meaning as the Primary Language message When two languages are enabled and reminder messages are changed the programmer should attempt to keep the meanings for the messages in both lists the same That is if the Primary Language message 02 is changed to GO TO AIRPORT a similar mes sage should be programmed for the Secondary Language message 02 Program new extension numbers for endpoints The extension number for any end point can be changed by an Administrator The new extension number cannot conflict with an existing number System Programming Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Swap e
252. be forwarded Once the No Answer Advance timer expires the call will circulate to the next endpoint in the hunt group list e Hunt group calls will not forward to some destinations Hunt group calls will not forward to Voice Mail outside numbers or system forwarding paths e Announcement and overflow endpoints can forward hunt group calls If an announcement or overflow endpoint has call forward enabled hunt group calls will fol low the forward and the forwarding destination endpoint will act as the announcement or overflow endpoint e Hunt groups can receive forwarded calls Endpoints can forward calls to a hunt group s pilot number Hunt groups can be assigned as message centers and or alternate message sources for individ ual endpoints Hunt Group Remove Replace and Do Not Disturb Page 136 Hunt group members can temporarily stop hunt group calls from ringing at their endpoints by entering the Hunt Group Remove feature code as described below If an endpoint is assigned to more than one hunt group this halts calls from all hunt groups Hunt group assignments can not be removed individually Do Not Disturb can also be used to halt hunt group and other calls to the endpoint see page 235 for details NOTE This feature has no effect on ACD hunt groups See page 145 for ACD login logout information When the Hunt Group Remove feature is enabled the user will still receive the Camp On dis play and tone and the individual tru
253. bers For example the Speed Dial number can contain an SCC local number a pause an access code and the phone number For using PBX trunks the other system s trunk access codes followed by a pause may be included in Speed Dial numbers The lengths of the hookflash and the pause are determined by the pro grammable CO Hookflash and Pause Digit timers To program System Speed Dial numbers use one of the following methods Use the dialpad to manually dial the number To backspace press EIU Press to enter the last number dialed or saved at the phone up to 48 digits Press one of the Speed Dial buttons on the Inter Tel phone to enter the outside phone number up to 16 digits programmed under that button Speed dial names can contain up to 16 characters To program Speed Dial names dialpad but tons are used to enter the desired letters numbers and punctuation in English Spanish or Japa nese Katakana When programming Speed Dial names you can press WEJ or USE ALPHA MODE USE NUMERIC MODE menu button to switch back and forth between alphanu meric and numeric mode In numeric mode the dialpad buttons are used to enter numbers 0 9 the pound E button is used for entering a hyphen and the asterisk Eg button is used for entering a colon For example 1 00 would enter 1 00 in numeric mode 7 In alphanumeric mode dialpad buttons are used to enter the desired letters numbers and punctuation The number of times a
254. bits CALLER DIALS A NUMBER THAT BEGINS NUMBER THAT BEGINS CALLER DIALS A WITH 2 CALLER DIALS 3 CALLER DIALS 4 Transfer to Sales Node To speak to the operator press 0 To select Sales infor mation by fax press 1 To speak to a Sales representa tive press 2 Transfer to Hunt Group 2001 Tech Support WITH 1 Company Call is sent to extension Directory number dialed ne 0 CALLER bars 1 Transfer to Operator Transfer to Node Sales Info Fax If you know the fax document number please dial it now If you want to speak to the operator dial 0 For a product list dial 2 For a price list dial 3 For training infor mation dial 4 Then press to check your selections and enter your fax number or press to cancel CALLER DIALS 0 CALLER DIALS 2 Transfer to Extension 2000 Sales Hunt Group Transfer to Operator CALLER DIALS 1997 1998 or 1999 Fax with that number is selected CALLER DIALS 2 Selects Fax Document 1999 Product List CALLER DIALS 3 Selects Fax Document 1998 Price List CALLER DIALS 4 Selects Fax Document 1997 Training CALLER DIALS End Fax Selections System requests dialing infor mation and send fax then returns to Main Menu CALLER DIALS Cancel Fax Selections System returns to greeting Sa
255. ble 352 Enables or disables the database pro System Forward Disable 353 grammed System Forwarding feature for this System Forward On Off 354 endpoint The on off feature code can be used to toggle the feature on or off System Speed Dial 381 Dials one of the 1000 System Speed Dial phone numbers when followed by a location code 000 999 Also used for reviewing Sys tem Speed Dial numbers Transfer to Hold 346 Transfers a call to another endpoint and places it on individual hold so that it does not ring or send call waiting signals until it recalls Transfer to Ring 345 Transfers a call to another endpoint or to an outside phone number Administrator Feature Codes The following feature codes may be used only at designated Administrator endpoints Non Administrator endpoint users hear reorder tones if they attempt to use these feature codes Table 20 Administrator Feature Code Definitions FEATURE NAME CODE US EUROPE DEFINITION Clear Network Alarm 9851 Clears network wide alarms on every node in the network but will not affect system alarms The Clear Network Alarm feature code may be entered on any node in the network but the Send Network Alarms flag must be set for the administrator to clear alarms on other nodes in the network Clear System Alarm 9850 Clears all local and network wide system alarm displays on your node Administrator Feature Codes Page 125 Sy
256. ble 42 Voice Prompts BVM EM and VPU Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT 350 You have chosen not to have a pager number 351 Cascade Level 352 You did not enter a valid document number 353 This document is currently unavailable 354 is not a valid document number 355 You have already selected that document 356 To cancel press STAR 357 You have selected the maximum number of documents allowed 358 To send your fax press pound 359 You have selected one document 360 You haven t selected any documents yet 361 You may select one more document during this call 362 You may select up to 363 more documents during this call 364 Selections Canceled 365 The number that will appear on your fax cover sheet is 366 You have chosen not to have your extension appear on your cover sheet 367 If you would like to have your fax automatically delivered to you later press pound 368 To re enter the number press 3 369 If you wish to have your extension appear on your cover sheet enter the extension followed by the POUND button 370 If you are calling from your fax machine press 1 371 Press the start button on your fax machine now 372 All of our fax lines are currently busy 373 Please try again later 374 Your fax will be delivered to 375 Your fax will be delivered shortly 376 am unable to communicate with your fax machine
257. button The display shows the extension number username and circuit number of the endpoint trunk or trunk group that most closely matches the partial extension number Press EM or ACCEPT to accept the displayed extension or scroll to another endpoint as described below Scroll through the numbers To scroll through the extension number list press the high end of the Volume button or the NEXT menu button to scroll forward or press the low end of the Volume button or the PREVIOUS menu button to scroll backward When the desired extension number is displayed press J or ACCEPT to continue To program trunk information Trunk Programming 1 2 While on hook enter the Program Database feature code 9932 If a password is required the display shows ENTER PASSWORD Use the dialpad to enter your 1 8 digit password and press EM If you enter an incorrect password the display shows INVALID PASSWORD If a password is not required skip this step The display shows ENTER DATABASE OPTION Six line display phones also show the following options ENDPOINT SYSTEM and TRUNK Press EJ or the TRUNK menu button The display shows ENTER TRUNK OPTION To Program an Individual Trunk Press EE or the INDIVIDUAL TRUNK menu button Then program trunk options as follows a The display shows ENTER TRUNK EXTENSION Enter the extension number of the trunk to be programmed using one of the methods described on page 39 b The display shows INDIVI
258. c Can be l an Extension i 18 sec Recall Voice Processin Dest System or a Hunt Group Page 137 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 138 Announcement Endpoints When a call rings in or is transferred to a hunt group the Announcement and Recall timers are started The incoming call circulates through the hunt group until it is answered or the Announcement timer expires When this timer expires the unanswered call is picked up by the designated announcement endpoint which is a playback device that answers the call and plays a message Meanwhile the call continues circulating through the hunt group unless it was sent to a voice processing system application and then transferred to an endpoint If it is answered by an available hunt group endpoint while the announcement station is connected to the call the call will leave the announcement station Each direct ring in call will transfer to the announcement endpoint only once If it remains unanswered when the Overflow timer expires the call will be sent to the overflow station Or if there is no overflow station the call will be sent to the recall destination endpoint when the Recall timer expires Overflow Endpoints The Overflow timer is started when the Announcement timer expires or if there is no announcement endpoint when the call is received by the hunt group If an incom ing hunt group call is unanswered when
259. c442swagbua ENS CENA ea ee NaN ENSUE Ra KORA a ees 15 Digital Expansion Interface 0 ccc ccc cece ccc c cece cece eee ee eee eceees 15 System Capacities csset ber kane ce vex kde pebes IRE nen A AGUAS RU R dg RR CC TR ean 15 System Network Capacities 2 00 cease oer s err hurts 17 Voice Processing Systems ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee see eoe 17 Basic Voice Mall 5 bed dd UR e e dde cmd du dg deese 17 Enterprise M ssagi so o iaucke deed ck PEG ERAN ER EROR A EUR SCR e depo andes 18 Voice Processing Unit icio e ossa RR RS e RE s Ru abe eee hase ee RA qu DRE 18 Voice Processing System Applications eeeeeeeeeeee enhn 18 Voice Mail Networking a 2n uesua eon xr ram OR RR RUE Rn ma CR RC e s 21 Page 11 Product Description INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Introduction The Inter Tel 5000 Network Communications Solutions platform is a converged communica tions platform designed for use in small and medium sized business environments It provides an Internet Protocol IP solution for telecommunication needs and supports IP phones Inter Tel digital phones standard single line phones and other endpoints The system provides call processing and business productivity features messaging services with Basic Voice Mail BVM and Fax over IP FoIP Wide Area Network WAN Fail Sur vivability and a Power Fail Bypass relay On the main chassis of the platform the Inter Tel CS 5200 5
260. call To stop recording the call Enter feature code 385 again or press the STOP RECORDING menu button To steal a call press the STEAL menu button or enter the Steal feature code default is 387 On display endpoints the display shows CALL STOLEN FROM lt extension number The hunt group member display shows CALL STOLEN BY extension number When the supervisor steals a call it becomes a regular call While on the call enter feature code 385 or press the RECORD menu button to record it Page 142 BARGE IN IN PROGRESS MONITOR RECORD CALL STEAL MONITORING EXT 12345 BARGE IN RECORD JOIN AND RECORD STEAL Supervisor Display CALL STOLEN FROM EXT 12345 Hunt Group Member Display CALL STOLEN BY EXT 12345 Accessing the Barge In Features System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 To join and record a call Press the JOIN AND RECORD menu button or enter the Join feature BARGE IN code default is 386 followed by the Record IN PROGRESS A Call feature code default is 385 On dis play endpoints the display shows BARGE IN IN PROGRESS While on a call the supervisor can monitor stop recording or steal the call by entering the appropriate feature code or press the appropriate menu button To stop recording the call enter feature code 385 default again or press the MONITOR or STOP RECORDING menu button
261. call ringing in on another endpoint and you have allowed answer Lift the handset and enter the Automatic Trunk Answer feature code 350 You are con nected to the lowest numbered trunk ringing in for which you have allowed answer Receiving Outside Calls System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 To receive a call that was transferred to hold When you hear a page announcing that an outside call is holding at your endpoint a Call but ton or individual trunk button is fluttering Inter Tel endpoints Lift the handset and or press the fluttering Call button or individ ual trunk button or press the button You are connected to the caller Single line phones Lift the handset and press the Hold button or enter the Individual Hold feature code 336 You are connected to the caller On Hook Monitoring An Inter Tel endpoint user with a speakerphone can monitor the call listen to a recorded mes sage wait for the call to be answered or wait on hold and then speak handsfree when answered To use on hook monitor 1 While on a call press the Speaker button and hang up If you do not want to be heard and if the MUTE button is not lit press the button or MUTE menu button or press the Special button and enter the Microphone Mute On Off feature code 314 You can hear the other party if the microphone is muted you cannot be heard The Speaker button is lit and the button is lit if the m
262. caller to wait for an available resource A user waiting for a specific resource a trunk or a endpoint will be served before a user waiting for a group that contains that specific resource trunk group or hunt group This includes camped on Emergency Call feature calls if the Emergency Call feature uses a trunk group requests for specific trunks will be processed ahead of the emergency call Camp On When a user calls a busy endpoint or hunt group the system sends a busy signal The caller can wait off hook to camp on after the Camp On timer expires and hear music while waiting until the called endpoint is available The system periodically sends Call Waiting signals to the busy endpoint s A user can camp on to busy endpoints on other nodes and will hear the other node s music on hold while camped on If an endpoint enables Do Not Disturb while an intercom call is camped on the camped on caller is removed from the camped on state and that caller receives Do Not Disturb indications see page 196 Intercom callers cannot camp on to an endpoint that is in Do Not Disturb To camp on to an extension number e All Inter Tel endpoints If you hear a busy signal when calling an extension number and want to camp on do not hang up If Music On Hold is enabled you hear music Intercom Camp On and Queue Callback System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 while camped on When the endpoint is av
263. cc ccc cece cece cece eeeee 4 Multicultural English References cc ccc cece cc cece cece cece cece hh nnn n 5 Document Navigation Aids lt 04 v00 0s08 hmmm hw hme News har x rm WON ewe 5 Pap r aeuo sre d T ep entire iatis asi een or ae eat ie Rte ats M ide 5 El ctrome PUP sees a ades hes eos aap akn PE Eo ee SEES Oe SEUNG IER ERN 5 Header and Footer Guides nnana nunnana aaee 6 Inter Tel Reference Documents essssosesssesssososssesesosoosssssesesososso 6 Equipment Manuals ns rushed cheese bese ihre eee PU CREE RE AESA RS ue 6 Planning Sh etS C T 6 Phone User Guides 4 22018 xd PR CE E REY Ea DU Ge Rue ex Ka CR CC os ORDRE 6 Hazard Identification and Supplemental Information eee 7 Hazard Identification Methods 2 ssasco esee rr RERO REESE RE RR ARR 7 bU dn vcMCPT 7 CAUTION with THABEIS oco e EX EP tiata ana o o E a EFIE 7 CAUTION Without Trhiangle cu 42519 Tri o ES tane ane e e A E REN 7 Supplemental Information stoked exu a eaea 8 Abbreviations and Acronyms essssssessssececesescscecesesessssececeseeeo 8 Page 1 Document Overview INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Introduction The Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 Communication Servers Administrator Guide contains informa tion that System Administrators and Voice Mail Administrators need to know about the Inter Tel 5000
264. ccu y y Enter the extension DND message i VERIFY i Reminder message i Mb TE number of the first SCROLL OR EDIT SCROLL OR EDIT int to be changed dPoint to be swapper PASSWORD poin and press v v v x art E Enter the new Enter the new Enter the new CHANGE number SWAP extension message using alpha password again message using alpha SCROLL OR EDIT WITH EXTENSION or numeric mode and press or numeric mode MERE PR es ee a eh R 4 and press and press es ees Y Y Y If another message to program desired select another message to program ming AT ANY LEVEL Press or the Speaker button to cancel any un saved changes and back up to exit program Press or ACCEPT to save changes and back up one display level INFORMATION IN THIS CHART IS SHOWN AS FOLLOWS YOUR INPUT System Database Programming Flowchart Enter the new extension number for the endpoint and press Enter the extension number of the second endpoint to be swappd and press Page 37 Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 38 Trunk Programming The trunk information that can be programmed by an Administrator phone includes the follow ing Individual trunks Answer Supervision type Answer Supervision determines whether the system should consider a call valid when it receives polarity reversal
265. ced Calls This is the default method for transferring a call The call is transferred to your endpoint without any kind of announcement Extension ID Page 262 Extension IDs are used in conjunction with transferring calls through the Automated Attendant or using the Extension Directory The extension ID allows callers to be transferred to endpoints and applications that do not have mailboxes It also allows the endpoint or application to have a recorded name in the directory This feature is set up and initialized using Database Program ming and Voice Mail features If an Extension ID has been created in Database Programming for an endpoint extension num ber either the principal owner of the extension or the Voice Mail Administrator must set up initialize the ID with a new password and record a name for use in the Extension Directory At default the extension ID password is the same as the extension number If the Extension ID has not been initialized calls can still be transferred to the associated extension number However they cannot be accessed from the directory If the Extension ID s username has not been recorded it cannot be heard when callers access the Extension Direc tory The name must be recorded in order to fully initialize the Extension ID See page 57 for more information on initializing Extension IDs To provide system security a extension IDs should have a password To make the passwords difficult to gues
266. change a number Dial the extension number or phone number up to 16 digits including pauses and hookflashes to be stored To include a hookflash or a pause in the number hookflash once for an asterisk twice for a pound three times for a hookflash or four times for a pause If you make a mistake press to leave the number unchanged then start over at step 1 e To erase an existing number and leave it blank Overwrite the existing number by entering only a hookflash as the new number 4 Hang up to exit Repeat these steps for each additional number to be stored Viewing Station Speed Dial Numbers To view the contents of a Speed Dial button on a display endpoint 1 While on hook enter the Review Keys feature code 396 The display shows PRESS THE KEY TO REVIEW Press the desired Speed Dial button The display shows the currently stored number and name 2 After viewing the number press the Speaker button EJ or EM to exit or wait for the display to return to date and time To view the stored numbers and names on a display endpoint 1 While on hook enter the Program Station Speed Dial feature code 383 The display shows PROGRAM STN SPD 0 9 OR SCROLL Do one of the following e Use a location code Dial the desired Speed Dial location code 0 9 When the name is displayed press EB or ACCEPT to view the number e Scroll through the displayed numbers Scroll to the desired number by pressing the V
267. code Wait for Disconnect timer the house phone or dial a number expires user The Redial feature can store one phone number in Redial memory of the endpoint If the end point user reaches a busy number is disconnected or receives no answer the number can be readily redialed To redial the user lifts the handset and presses the button or enters the Redial feature code 380 A trunk access code is automatically entered and the phone number is redialed If redialing is activated while still connected to an outside call the connection is dropped and the trunk is reseized before the number is dialed Only one phone number can be stored in an endpoint s Redial memory at a time This number can be stored in either of the following ways depending on endpoint programming e Last Number Saved The desired number is manually stored in Redial memory by the station user Dialing other numbers does not change the stored number It only changes when a new number is stored e Last Number Dialed The last number manually dialed or speed dialed is automati cally stored It changes every time the user dials a phone number Last Number Dialed is the default state of the Redial feature The Last Number Saved and Last Number Dialed features work differently depending on the station status when it is used as shown in Individual endpoint programming determines the mode of the Redial feature either Last Number Dialed or Last Number Saved The Redial fea tu
268. communication endpoints Ask your Inter Tel equipment provider or Inter Tel certified technician for details about Inter Tel systems Emergency Call capability Remote IP and SIP endpoints may require gateway access to nearby emergency responders Emergency Call phone numbers include 911 the default for Inter Tel systems located in the United States US e 999 the default for Inter Tel systems located in the European market and used pri marily in the United Kingdom Uk e If applicable 112 an emergency number used widely in Europe outside of the UK e Any emergency number such as for a police or fire station that is appropriate for the location of the main system and or remote endpoints The Inter Tel 5000 allows immediate access to local emergency facilities when an endpoint user enters the Emergency Call feature code The dialing pattern defaults to 911 in US systems and to 999 on systems in the European market When activated the Emergency Call feature selects a trunk or routes the call based on endpoint programming When activated the Emer gency Call feature overrides all toll restrictions and trunk access programming Emergency Extensions can be programmed for each endpoint and Day Night Emergency Out going Access Lists are used to validate the extension making the emergency call When a user dials the Emergency Call phone number at intercom or CO dial tone emergency outgoing access is granted based on system program
269. completes the transfer and the transferred call rings at your endpoint Answer as usual e Screened Calls When the caller enters your extension number the system asks the caller to record his or her name The voice processing system then places a private call to your endpoint When you answer it plays You have a call from caller s name and gives you the following options To accept the call press E or the ACCEPT menu button The call will ring at your endpoint To replay the announcement press Klll or the REPLAY menu button To send the call to Voice Mail press Kl or the SEND TO V MAIL menu button The caller is transferred to your mailbox and hears your personal greeting To forward the call to another extension press lE or the FORWARD menu but ton Then enter the extension number The call is sent to the other endpoint If that endpoint has screened or announced transfers the caller s name is played again for that endpoint To refuse the call press or the REFUSE menu button or simply hang up The caller receives a recording that says you are not available and offers the option of leaving a message e Unannounced Calls This is the default method for transferring a call The call is transferred to your endpoint without any kind of announcement Call Screening System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Reverse Transfer Reverse Transfer Call
270. connection of reverse transferred calls you are immediately connected If not press the flashing CALL indi vidual trunk or button Single line endpoints You are automatically connected ACD Hunt Groups Span Nodes The premium feature called Remote Automatic Call Distribution Hunt Groups allows ACD hunt groups to span nodes Node spanning ACD hunt groups can have either members or ACD Agent IDs e Members ACD hunt group members may include off node endpoints off node single lines and Hunt Group Member extension lists e ACD Agent IDs Unlike members there are no off node Agent IDs Agent IDs are considered global throughout all nodes in which the Agent exists This means that if you create Agent ID 100 on one node you must also create Agent ID 100 on all other nodes that have an endpoint that a user may want to login to the hunt group using that ID The Remote ACD Hunt Groups premium feature must be included in the software license where the hunt group resides as well as any node that wants to have users login to the node spanning hunt group The ACD Hunt Groups premium feature is also required Because of this fact there are several cases that must be considered The following table shows the different displays and results for logging in to and out of ACD hunt groups with the different combina tions of the premium feature and the ACD Hunt Group enabled disabled Table 24 Displays and Results for Logging In and Out
271. corrupt certificate was uploaded or there was an error in writing the file Contact service personnel SYS ALARM 20 CHECK PRINTER The printer is not functioning properly Check that the cable and the power cord are connected and that it has paper and toner SYS ALARM 21 V MAIL 80 FULL The external voice mail disk space is 80 of full If it reaches 100 Voice Mail cannot accept any messages until disk space is made available Contact service personnel SYS ALARM 22 V MAIL 100 FULL 100 of the external voice mail disk space is in use Voice mail cannot accept any messages until disk space is made available Contact service personnel SYS ALARM 23 SMDR 80 FULL The SMDR disk space on the external voice processing system is 80 of full If it reaches 100 before the SMDR information is cleared no further SMDR recording will be possible Contact service personnel SYS ALARM 24 SMDR 100 FULL 100 of the SMDR disk space on the external voice processing system is in use No further SMDR recording is possible Contact service personnel SYS ALARM 32 INSUF BAND The IP Network does not have enough bandwidth to support the IP call that is currently connected to the extension If this alarm is generated frequently it could indicate a network problem that requires the attention of your network administrator Notify your network administrator The affected device is not behind a fir
272. criber feature that is enabled through database programming Sub scribers may program a series of specific phone numbers a cascade for the Voice Mail sys tem to call when new messages are received by their mailboxes Refer to the appropriate user guides for instructions on using cascading remote message notification Group Lists Page 281 Voice Processing Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 282 Primary and Alternate Notification Each mailbox can have a Primary and or an Alternate notification cascade of numbers The notification numbers are programmed to be accessed during specific days and times The Voice Mail system monitors subscriber mailboxes continuously During monitoring if new messages have been received the system will check to see if Primary notification is turned on If it is the system will check the day and time programming If the current time is within the programmed notification day and time the Voice Mail system will make the notification call s to the numbers in the Primary Notification cascade If Primary Notification is turned off or if the day or time does not match the Voice Mail system will immediately make the same check for Alternate Notification and possibly place calls to the numbers in the Alternate Notification cascade When the voice processing system makes a notification call it moves through the appropriate notification cascade level by level as
273. ct directly to the system owner s enterprise through local area network LAN computer ports Modules are the system hardware components used to connect to the public telephone network outside the enterprise and to digital phones and endpoints inside the enter prise The Processor Module PM 1 contains the main controlling microprocessor and associated control logic and memory circuits It is under the control of the IPR Application which is stored in flash memory and activated when the system is powered up The PM 1 without a Pro cessor Expansion Card PEC 1 attached drives the Inter Tel CS 5200 system The PM 1 with a PEC attached drives the Inter Tel CS 5400 system The PEC provides 82 additional IP resources and increases the system s processing capability The Inter Tel 5000 supports two port and four port Loop Start Modules LSM 2 and LSM 4 T1 El Primary Rate Interface T1 E1 PRI modules which require licensing when using PRI Basic Rate Modules BRM S for Basic Rate Interface BRI trunk capability and Digital End point Modules DEM 16 IP Operating Modes Depending on the model Inter Tel IP phones operate in Inter Tel Protocol ITP mode or Ses sion Initiation Protocol SIP mode Models 8600 8620 8622 8662 and 8690 Multi Protocol phones operate in ITP mode or SIP mode Models 8664 8665 and 8668 wireless IP phones operate in ITP mode only The Model 8601 SoftPhone operates in SIP mode only ITP mode supports nearly
274. cy Call 160 ARS routing 156 feature description 157 IP and SIP endpoints from remote site 82 toll restriction override 158 Emergency Call Feature 160 Emergency Calling Party Number 162 Emergency Calls 162 minor alarm 161 network 162 Emergency endpoint 230 Emergency Numbers 162 override trunk access and toll restrictions 162 Emergency Outgoing Access List 160 Enabling Disabling the Internal Modem 56 End the Conference and Place All Parties on Hold 205 Endpoint features 166 handsfree enable disable 176 LED indicators 89 Endpoint display default ID information 167 how to refresh ID data 167 Endpoint Feature Codes 119 Endpoint Features Return to Default 242 Endpoint flags DKTS Alternate Transient Display Timer 168 Transient Call Indication On Call Answer 168 Display Outside Name 153 Page 362 Endpoint flags Continued Expanded CO Call Information on Displays 153 Outside Party Call Information Has Priority 153 Endpoint Off Hook Alarm 51 Endpoints 103 172 hot dialpad 118 automatic answer 170 caller information 153 display phone alternate menu display 94 displays 152 DSS BLF button 49 keymaps 97 LEDs 89 optional equipment headsets 101 MDPM 107 PCDPM 107 ring tone selection 167 secondary extension buttons 100 SPCL button 117 volume controls 107 Endpoints supported 83 Endpoint to endpoint calling 176 Endpoint to Endpoint Messages 180 alternate message source 183 answering 182 canceling a message that s been sent
275. d INTER TZL Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 Communication Servers Administrator Guide amp DuA Voice Mail Administrator Features If your voice mail system has Automatic Speech Recognition ASR capability and it is enabled for the administrator mailbox you can complete voice mail tasks by issuing spoken commands or by pressing dialpad digits Accessing the Voice Mail Administrator s Mailbox Call the voice mail access number Say Login or press Egi Say or enter the administrator mailbox number Then enter the password and press EM Say Nine or press E to access the voice mail administrator menu To Record a Broadcast Message Access the voice mail administrator s mailbox and menu see above Say Broadcast Message or press Jj to send a broadcast message Record the message When the message is recorded hang up or press EJ for more options To Perform Mailbox Maintenance Access the voice mail administrator s mailbox and menu see above Say Mailbox Maintenance or press lj to select the Mailbox Group List Maintenance option Say or enter the mailbox extension ID or group list number to be accessed and follow the prompts To Import a Fax Document Using a fax machine obtain dial tone and access the voice mail administra tor s mailbox and menu see above Say Import Fax or press Egi to select the Import Fax option
276. d ing Advance timer defaults to 15 seconds If the endpoint forwarding point is busy the call will camp on until the System Forwarding Advance timer expires and then it moves to the next forwarding point If the endpoint forwarding point is in Do Not Disturb the forwarding path will bypass that endpoint and immediately send the call to the next forwarding point If a forwarding point is a voice processing system application and the system is unable to communicate with the voice processing system the call will bypass the forwarding point An endpoint forwarding point can place calls or transfer calls to the principal Hunt Group Forwarding Points If a forwarding point is a hunt group a call following the forwarding path will be sent to the announcement endpoint or overflow endpoint as usual it will advance to the next forwarding point if not answered before the System Forwarding Advance timer expires The call will ring at the hunt group until the System Forwarding Advance timer expires It will then move to the next forwarding point The No Answer Advance timer determines how long the call will ring at each hunt group endpoint as usual If all endpoints in a hunt group forwarding point have Do Not Disturb or hunt group remove enabled the call will camp on until the System Forwarding Advance timer expires The call will then be sent to the next forwarding point Handsfree Announce System Forward Option When a call is transferred
277. d Call timer expires Placing the Attendant s phone in Do Not Disturb does not block recalls or direct ring in calls If there is not a primary Attendant recalls remain at the phones and ring until answered or dis connected by the system To answer a hold or transfer recall at an Attendant phone When you see a hold or transfer recall display XXXX RCL FROM YYY Y and hear a recall ringing 1 If desired lift the handset 2 Outside call recall Press the medium flashing Call button or individual trunk button Or press the button If more than one trunk is recalling pressing the button selects the outside call indicated on the display Intercom call recall Press the button or the ANSWER menu button If you are busy when the intercom call recalls it will camp on The button flashes at the medium rate but you do not hear recall ring signals Conference call recall Press the flashing button to connect with the confer ence call The button flashes slowly and the display shows CONFERENCE IN PROGRESS If the parties are still talking press the button again and hang up to return the parties to their conversation The button flutters You can enter the conference at any time by pressing the fluttering button If the Hold timer Page 133 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Hunt Groups expires the conference recalls your phone again If the parties have hung up hang up to disco
278. d Messaging and the user s PC must have Microsoft Outlook Exchange and the Unified Messaging Client software installed Voice mail messages are sent to the Voice Mail server and are stored on the voice processing system This allows the user to play the messages using the Inter Tel endpoint speakerphone or the PC s speakers The number of users with Uni fied Messaging is limited by a security button attached to the voice processing system PC Level 3 with Microsoft Outlook Exchange and Outbound Fax This level is the same as Level 2 with outbound fax server features added Use of the outbound fax server functionality does not require a mailbox only the Microsoft Outlook Exchange and Unified Messaging Client software Therefore the number of outbound fax users is not limited by the security button only the number of mailboxes with Unified Messag ing enabled are limited Level 1 When a mailbox receives a Voice Mail message or uses the Voice Mail Record A Call feature one of four things can occur depending on how the mailbox s E Mail Gateway field is pro grammed If the field is programmed to DISABLED the Voice Mail or Record A Call message is delivered to the mailbox just as normal and no e mail is sent If the field is programmed to FORWARD ONLY the voice processing system will con vert the Voice Mail or Record A Call message to an 8 bit WAV file build an e mail message attach the WAV file and send the e mail message to the addres
279. d feature code again Exiting and Re Entering the Conference Page 205 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 206 Placing the Entire Conference on Hold Any inside party involved in a conference can place the conference on hold at his or her end point The other conference parties remain connected and can converse The user that placed the conference on hold can then place calls or use system features while the conference is on hold Then the user can return to the conference on hold Note however that a conference may not be terminated while it is on hold Once a user has moved a conference to hold the user may if desired establish another confer ence Because each conference is established under a separate Call button it is possible for the user to have access to any individual conference for further call processing If the user elects to use the button for conference access the button will rotate through the confer ences in priority order The button will always reflect the status of the top priority con ference The priority order for the button when multiple conferences are in effect is e Conference or call on transfer hold e Ringing ring in recall or camp on conference e Conference on hold Active conference To place the conference on hold any inside party during a conference call with an Inter Tel endpoint Press the Hold button or press the Special button
280. d for Japanese the prompts are reversed and NOTE you will set the AM or PM before the hour and minutes If you entered the time incorrectly the display shows INVALID TIME and you are prompted to enter a new time If the node is set for 12 hour display format the display shows SELECT AM OR PM AM 1 PM 2 Press Kl or the AM menu button for AM or press EM or the PM menu button for PM The display shows SYSTEM DATE AND TIME UPDATED If you press any button other than 1 or 2 the display shows INVALID TIME and you are prompted to enter a new time Synchronizing Network Time System Administrators can synchronize the minutes past the hour across the network without changing the hour This is useful when the nodes are in different time zones NOTE If the node time is off by more than 30 minutes synchronizing the minutes may cause the hour to change Also network time is automatically synchronized every day at 12 30 AM 00 30 using the time setting on the node with the low est number To synchronize the clocks in all nodes in the network While on hook enter the Synchronize Network Time feature code 9811 You hear a confirmation tone and the display shows NETWORK TIME SYNCHRONIZED Synchronizing Network Time Page 25 Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Programming the Database Using a System Administrator Phone Page 26 Any System Administrator phone ca
281. d if the single line endpoint receives a transferred call from another endpoint that has calling party information NOTE Caller ID is not transmitted to Single Line adapters SLAs Single line endpoint Caller ID requires the following provisions e Calling Party information services from the telephone company CO Advanced CO Interfaces which is a standard feature on the Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 e CO trunks programmed for Caller ID e Programming that enables the single line endpoint to receive Caller ID signals Outgoing Access Allowed Answer and Ring In Assignments Each trunk group has programmed lists of endpoints for outgoing access allowed answer and ring in assignments for day and night modes Outgoing access assignment for a particular trunk group or node trunk group permits the end point user to place calls using trunks in that trunk group Each endpoint has a default outgoing access code programmed in the database When the user presses the button presses an idle Call button or enters the Outgoing Call feature code 8 the system automatically selects an outgoing trunk Because the network does not allow users to directly access trunks on other NOTE nodes each trunk group s Outgoing Access can contain only endpoints on the local node Users must use ARS to access trunks on other nodes e Allowed answer access to a particular trunk group permits the endpoint user to answer incoming calls on the trunks in that trunk
282. d the attempt is consid ered unsuccessful Notification Numbers Page 283 Voice Processing Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Subscriber Features Unified Messaging Before subscribers can use voice mail they must set up their mailbox Mailbox setup and con figuration options include Initializing a mailbox Setting up an e mail password if E Mail Reader is enabled Recording personal greetings Recording a directory name Changing a password Changing a message envelope Programming remote messaging Changing the call screening transfer method Programming a fax destination Changing the message search order After the subscriber s mailbox is configured mailbox tasks include the following Accessing a mailbox Disabling and enabling ASR if ASR is enabled Accessing voice mail messages Accessing e mail and fax messages if E Mail Reader is enabled Recording and sending voice messages Canceling unheard voice messages Recovering deleted messages Instructions for all of the subscriber tasks are located in the endpoint user guides In addition to instructions for the tasks listed on the previous page endpoint user guides contain frequently asked questions guidelines for using ASR information about using E Mail Reader and flow charts for the standard voice mailbox and the advanced mailbox For the appropriate user guide for voice mail and mailbox information refer to
283. d transfer call including an announced transfer from Voice Mail connects immediately with the destination once the transferring party hangs up If the flag is disabled the recipient must press a Call but ton or the button to answer the transferred call If the user has a headset enabled or if the user picks up the handset for the initial call and the transferring party disconnects the transferred party hears a single tone and then is immediately connected without any further action from the user Calls will not automatically connect in handsfree speakerphone mode This flag applies only to Inter Tel endpoints and is disabled in the default state To transfer a call or conference 1 Inter Tel endpoints While on a call press the button or press the Special button and enter the Transfer to Ring feature code 345 Intercom dial tone is heard The display shows TRANSFER CALL TO EXTENSION Single line endpoints While on a call hookflash Tones are heard followed by inter com dial tone EITHER Select an outgoing trunk group or press the OUTSIDE PHONE menu button and dial the desired phone number If all trunks in the trunk group are busy select another trunk group or camp on and wait for a trunk f you hear repeating reorder tones you dialed a restricted phone number To return to the caller on transfer hold press the lit Call button trunk button or button Inter Tel endpoint or hook flash twice single line endpoint OR
284. ddressing minor alarms You can then clear the individual alarm or clear all the alarms in the queue up to 30 When clear ing alarms individually the alarms are displayed in order of severity When an extension has dialed emergency services the Emergency Alarm is the only priority 1 alarm Other prioritized alarms have a 2 3 or 4 priority based on the severity of the alarm Not all alarms have a number 1 2 3 or 4 priority The numbered priority scheme is limited to alarms that can cause a major or minor system reset Those alarms in the Alarm Queue that have a numbered priority 1 4 are displayed before the alarms that do not receive a numbered priority Alarms that do not have a numbered priority are prioritized in the queue by date and time When alarms are generated The highest priority alarm is placed in the front of the queue regardless of when lower priority alarms are generated For example if A114 priority 3 and A116 priority 4 are currently in the queue but A119 priority 2 is generated A119 is placed first in the queue Clearing Alarms Alarm Queue Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Alarms with the same priority level are placed in the queue based on the time the alarm was generated For example if A010 priority 3 is generated at 10 30 AM and A012 priority 3 is generated at 10 32 AM A012 is placed in the queue after A010 If the queue co
285. de 316 or the Headset On Off feature code 317 The display shows HEADSET MODE OFF Digital Endpoints With the addition of Digital Expansion Interface DEI equipment and appropriate licensing the Inter Tel 5000 Network Communications Solutions platform supports the following digital phones and endpoints e Hard Digital Phones Model 8500 Model 8520 Two Line Display Model 8560 Six Line Display Associate Standard Executive Professional Axxess Basic Eclipse Basic Single Line Adapter SLA Single Line Phones Modem Data Port Module MDPM e Personal Computer Data Port Module PCDPM audio only Disconnecting a Headset Page 101 Hardware and Endpoints INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Inter Tel Digital Phones Page 102 The following paragraphs describe the features supported by Inter Tel endpoints Throughout this guide the term Inter Tel endpoint refers to full feature endpoints NOTE phones manufactured and sold by Inter Tel The term does not apply to industry standard single line DTMF phones Display and Nondisplay Digital Phones The following display and non display digital phones have a built in speaker and microphone that allow the user to answer intercom calls handsfree dial while on hook monitor calls and listen to background music e Models 8500 8520 and 8560 e Executive Display e Professional Display Standa
286. de number 579 580 Not used 581 has just listened to the original message 582 This mailbox has 583 This message was canceled by the originator 584 I m sorry there are no network mailboxes available for node 585 For the directory press now 586 I m sorry you cannot reply to this network message 587 The following message could not be delivered to 588 This nonsubscriber message could not be delivered to Page 311 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 42 Voice Prompts BVM EM and VPU Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT 589 Enter the number of the remote extension 590 To cancel this message press 591 Fax on demand was unable to deliver one or more faxes Please view the Fax Delivery Report for details 592 I m sorry I m not allowed to dial that number 593 Message received from an outside number with no Caller ID information 594 I m sorry do not have valid Caller ID information 595 the network 596 Your call is being handled by the Inter Tel voice processing system EM Voice Prompts The following table shows all of the US English default system voice prompts for ASR and non ASR enabled Enterprise Messaging EM systems Prompts designated by an asterisk cannot be re recorded Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR
287. de you can press the button to enter the stored characters You may chain Speed Dial and or redial numbers together a Hang up to complete the programming 6 To turn off Do Not Disturb Enter the Do Not Disturb Off feature code 371 The On Off feature code cannot be used in remote programming The call is automatically disconnected when the feature code is accepted f you entered an invalid feature code you will hear reorder tones and can try again Remote Forward Programming To forward a station using the remote programming feature After each entry non display endpoint users will hear a confirmation NOTE tone Outside callers using a DISA line will hear confirmation tone fol lowed by DISA dial tone Display endpoint users will not hear confirma tion tones but will see a prompt asking for the next entry 1 If calling from an outside endpoint access the system through a DISA line Enter the DISA security code if applicable You hear a confirmation tone followed by DISA dial tone If programming from another station lift the handset or press the Speaker button 2 Enter the Remote Programming feature code 359 If you have a display it shows ENTER EXTENSION Model 8660 or 8662 endpoint users can press the IC DIR button to use the intercom directory to look up a number Remote Forward Programming Page 241 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 6 Default Endpo
288. des for all calls following Do Not Disturb manual call forwarding background music ring intercom always and queue requests restores handsfree mode pages hunt group calls and system forwarding and returns end point volumes to default values Directories 307 Display endpoints Only Allows display end point users to search for extension numbers or System Speed Dial numbers The number can then be dialed if desired Display Outside Party Name On Off 379 Display endpoints Only When the endpoint user enters this feature code while connected to a CO call that has outside party name infor mation the display will toggle between the caller s name and number If there is no out side party name or the Expanded CO Call Information On Displays flag is disabled the user will hear a burst of reorder tone and see the CANNOT ACCESS FEATURE display If the Display Outside Party Name On Off fea ture code is programmed in a user program mable button with a lamp the lamp will be lit when the outside party name is enabled and off when the outside party number is enabled Display Time Date ITP Show IP Address SIP Endpoint Feature Codes 300 Display endpoints Only Temporarily displays the system date and time username and extension number during a call or when other displays are shown Feature code 300 displays the IP Address of an endpoint if it is in SIP mode Page 121 System Featu
289. determined by the notification and retry programming described below When the system reaches the last level in the cascade it will return to level 1 and begin again if necessary If the system is not able to place the call within the parameters of the programmed notification day and time due to busy facilities or invalid programming the mailbox will receive a mes sage stating that notification could not be completed the mailbox owner will hear the message next time he or she accesses the mailbox The number of calls that the voice processing system can process simultaneously is determined by the Maximum Number of Outgoing Calls flag It defaults to 2 but can be programmed to use all of the enabled voice processing system voice channels Message Flags When the mailbox is being programmed for remote notification message notification can be set to place the notification call when any message is received or only when priority messages are received This defaults to All Messages Another mailbox flag called Call For Each New Message determines when the voice processing system will attempt to make the notifi cation call when more than one message is waiting to be heard e If the Call For Each New Message flag is enabled the voice processing system will attempt immediate notification each time a new message or priority message depend ing on the option selected is received regardless of the status of the applicable retry time
290. dialed digits Forced standard and all calls fol lowing account codes are automatically entered before the digits If using an optional account code it must be entered after seizing a trunk but before dialing the number to be included in the ARS digits Optional Account Codes Optional account codes can be entered at any time during a call These user defined codes are not preprogrammed but must be within the maximum length set in programming If entered optional account codes are printed in the SMDR report for that call in place of standard or forced account codes that may have been used To enter an optional account code after selecting a trunk or while on an outside call 1 Inter Tel endpoints Press the Special button and enter the Optional Account Code fea ture code 390 Display endpoints show ENTER ACCT CODE The outside party if any does not hear you enter the code Single line endpoints Hookflash and enter the Optional Account Code feature code 390 The outside party if any hears music until step 2 is completed 2 Enter the account code using the dialpad Inter Tel endpoint users may press a Speed Dial button to enter an account code number that has been stored in that Speed Dial number location Display endpoints show numbers You hear a single progress tone when the code is accepted Single line users are reconnected when the system accepts the account code If an account code is entered that has fewer than th
291. dialing of System Speed Dial numbers The System Speed Dial numbers and names are stored in battery backed RAM and will not be erased in the event of a power failure The System Speed Dial numbers and names are programmed by the installer or at any Admin istrator endpoint For programming instructions refer to page 45 Viewing System Speed Dial Numbers To view System Speed Dial numbers and names NOTE If you make a mistake use the button to backspace While on hook press B amp E or enter the System Speed Dial feature code 381 The display shows REVIEW SYS SPEED 000 999 Enter the desired location code 000 999 or press the SEARCH menu button The dis play shows the programmed name and number If desired scroll forward through the Speed Dial locations in alphabetical order by pressing the high end of the Volume button or the NEXT button or scroll backward by pressing the low end of the Volume button or the PREVIOUS button Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each Speed Dial location to be viewed Or press or CAN CEL to terminate this feature To automatically select a trunk and dial the displayed number press EZ Dialing System Speed Dial Numbers To dial System Speed Dial numbers at an Inter Tel endpoint 1 2 If desired lift the handset and select an outgoing trunk You may skip this step Press R or enter the System Speed Dial feature code 381 The display shows REVIEW SYS SPEED 000 999 No
292. dialpad buttons to spell the name Refer to Table on page 273 If 10 or fewer matches are located you can access and browse the list immediately see step 4 If the list contains more than 10 matches you have the option to browse or filter the list skip step 4 and see step 5 4 If 10 or fewer matches are located you have the following options e Say Yes or press EJ to accept the name that is played e Say Previous or press Jj to browse to the previous name in the list e Say More or press Eli to hear more information about the subscriber e Say Next or press EJ to browse to the next name in the list e Say New or press El to search for a new name e Say Cancel or press to exit the directory EM Directories EM Directories Voice Processing Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 5 If more than 10 matches are located the system prompts you to browse or filter the list Do one of the following e Say Yes or press Eli to browse the list See step 4 for options e Say No or press Eg to select the filter option and then respond to one of the fol lowing filter questions The system begins by asking you if the name you are searching for is the last name If it is say Yes press J say the last name or spell the last name If you did not respond to the first question the system asks if the name you are searching for is the fi
293. ding feature code 355 358 and hang up The following three system features provide Speed Dial e System Speed Dial Up to 1000 System Speed Dial numbers can be stored in the sys tem Each System Speed Dial number can contain up to 48 digits e Station Speed Dial Each endpoint user can program up to ten 16 digit Station Speed Dial numbers Display phone users can program a 16 character name for each Station Speed Dial number e System Directory Intercom and Outside The intercom directory enables display endpoint users to look up intercom extension numbers and usernames The outside directory enables display endpoint users to look up System Speed Dial numbers and associated names System Speed Dial Speed Dial Speed Dial allows phone users to dial stored phone numbers quickly Up to 1000 System Speed Dial numbers containing 48 digits each can be stored with identifying names in system memory Refer to the System Directory feature on page 227 and Caller ID on page 152 Each node in a network has its own System Speed Dial numbers System Speed Dial numbers can be used only on the node where they are programmed To keep System Speed Dial numbers confidential some or all can be programmed as non dis play numbers Non display numbers can be used by any endpoint user but are displayed only on the programming station s endpoint Nondisplay numbers cannot be redialed or saved as Station Speed Dial numbers at a display en
294. directory If Page 271 Voice Processing Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 272 the caller presses EM or a Directory menu button anyway the prompts states that the selection is invalid and the initial instructions are repeated Searches With the voice mail directory subscribers and non subscribers can use speech rec ognition if ASR is enabled or dialpad digits if ASR is disabled to search for names in the directory Subscriber names are automatically added to the directory when the user s mailbox is initialized ASR may not be able to locate names that are pronounced differently than they are spelled For these types of names use the alternate search method of spelling the name using the endpoint dialpad digits Refer to Table on page 273 A caller begins a directory search by selecting the directory option from the menu The caller is prompted to say or spell the last name of the mailbox user they would like to locate When the caller searches for a name the directory locates all matches first and last names for the name For example if the caller searches for the name John the system locates all of the subscribers in the system with the first or last name of John The list of matches might include the names John Smith John Jones John Nielson David John Robert John etc When one to 10 matches are located the caller can browse the list of returned names by select ing the P
295. disk space The default is 30 minutes In a network setting the Record A Call destination does not have to be on the same node as the endpoint but the voice processing system must have a mailbox for that endpoint For more information on using the Record A Call feature refer to page 207 Scheduled Time based Application Routing STAR Scheduled Time based Application Routing STAR allows you to have applications with alter nate greetings and or different programming set up for holidays weekends and other sched uled events A STAR application is basically a routing table for voice processing system applications When a direct ring in call from a trunk group or call routing table rings in to a STAR applica tion it sends the call to another application according to its programmed schedule The caller will not be aware of this transfer but will hear the programmed day or night greeting for the destination application The STAR application itself does not play a greeting STAR can be used with any type of application except Auto Attendant Recall and Record A Call You can even send calls from one STAR application to another thereby chaining the applications to increase the number of available schedules A STAR application can contain up to 20 scheduling entries with the following fields e Application This is the application call routing announcement Automated Atten dant etc that is used when the scheduling informat
296. dpoint Nondisplay numbers will appear in the SMDR record System Station Speed Dial names can be programmed by an Administrator using English Spanish or Japanese characters or a combination The programmed language for the endpoint does not affect the characters that can be viewed That is no matter what language the endpoint uses or which characters are in the name the endpoint user will be able to see the Station Speed Dial names exactly the way they were programmed In lists such as Station Speed Dial directories the English Spanish characters are alphabetized before the Japanese characters Jap anese names will be at the end of the list System Speed Dial numbers are subject to toll restriction unless a system wide option has been enabled that allows any endpoint to dial any System Speed Dial number regardless of toll restriction The System Speed Dial numbers are stored using location codes 000 999 When dialed the numbers appear on a display endpoint unless they have been programmed as non display num bers Display endpoint users can also view System Speed Dial numbers and names without dialing however with non display numbers only the name is displayed Page 221 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 222 System Speed Dial codes 000 999 can be stored in user programmable endpoint buttons by following the directions given on page 168 These buttons allow one button
297. dumps the internal data structures for that extension to message print If you press the pound button you are prompted for a command The command allows you to enter an alphanumeric string of the structure to dump Page 127 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 21 Diagnostics Feature Code Definitions Continued FEATURE NAME CODE US EUROPE DEFINITION Diagnostic Dump Node Information 9936 9136 The user can easily dump node information to Message Print using a single feature code Pressing the Dump Node Information feature code dumps specified node information to Message Print for diagnostic purpose When the system prompts for a node number enter the desired node number or zero 0 for all nodes within a network If the node does not exist an error message saying INVALID NODE NUMBER appears and prompt the user for a node number again After entering a node number the system dis plays a confirmation message on the endpoint display This helps for the user to analyze which nodes are up and which nodes are down the word down does not mean that the node is completely down it simply means the node is unreachable For Example If all nodes are up the display shows ALL NODES ARE UP X The X represents the total number of the nodes If node 3 and 5 of a 5 node network are down the display shows 44 NODES DOWN 2 3 5 Diagn
298. e is provided for each endpoint in the system This field corresponds to the Change Language feature 301 This feature toggles between the System Primary Language and the endpoint Secondary Language or it can specify a language This allows any endpoint in the system to have its own secondary language or use the System Sec ondary Language giving the system the ability to support more than two languages If an endpoint s Secondary Language field is programmed as Use Primary Language the Change Language feature will do nothing because the endpoint will toggle between the System Primary Language and the endpoint Secondary Language the System Primary Language If a phone s Secondary Language field is programmed as Use Secondary Language the Change Language feature will toggle between the System Primary Language and the phone s Secondary Language which is the System Secondary Language This state is the system default Multilingual Capability Trunks System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 If an phone s Secondary Language field is programmed as Japanese the Change Language fea ture will toggle between the System Primary Language and the phone Secondary Language which is Japanese The Language field for endpoints indicates the language the endpoint is currently set to This field used to toggle between the Use Primary Language and Use Secondary Language It can be set to any specif
299. e or press HI to send a broadcast message 3 Record the message If you exceed the maximum allotted time for message length a prompt will notify you and allow you to re record the message or send it If voice mail is full a message will notify you that it cannot accept the message Hang up and try again later 4 When you have completed the message press EM for the following options e Say Replay or press E to replay the message e Say Append or press I to add to the message e Say Erase or press El o erase and re record the message e Say Accept or press EM to accept the message You must use the Accept option for the message to be sent When pene you hang up the message is canceled Maintaining Mailboxes and Group Lists Page 58 Voice Mail Administrator Capabilities Using the Voice Mail Administrator s mailbox you may provide basic voice mailbox and group list maintenance You do not need to know the password of a particular mailbox to per form maintenance on it Mailbox and group list maintenance includes the ability to Record the name of a standard mailbox user extension ID user or Group List Record a primary and alternate mailbox greeting Recording a Broadcast Messages Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Set additional personal options for a mailbox To provide system security all mailboxes and extension IDs s
300. e Cancel Fax Selections digit usually However once the next steps are completed the faxes will be delivered 6 When the caller ends the selection process by pressing the End Fax Selections digit usually or reaches the allowed maximum number of documents the system requests fax dialing information from the caller 7 The caller enters and verifies his or her extension number to be printed on the cover sheet and the caller s fax machine phone number 8 The system checks the entered number and one of the following occurs e fthe number is valid the system tells the caller when the document will be deliv ered this depends on the programmed fax delivery times in the voice processing system database and returns to the recording e Ifthe number cannot be dialed by the Message Notification Retrieval application due to toll restrictions the system tells the caller that the number cannot be dialed and asks for a new number e Ifthe caller enters an invalid number the system tells the caller the number is invalid and asks for a new number 9 The caller hangs up or returns to step 2 to select more documents If more documents are selected and canceled the documents that were selected and accepted previously will still be sent Each time the caller accepts the documents and enters the dialing information the documents are prepared for transmittal They cannot be canceled after that point 10 The Message Notification Retriev
301. e If the first route is still busy the system camps on to the first route To camp on to an outgoing trunk group 1 When you hear a busy signal after selecting an outgoing trunk do not hang up You camp on and hear music until a trunk in the trunk group is available The display shows WAITING FOR trunk name 2 When you hear a single progress tone and outside dial tone dial the desired phone num ber The associated Call button or individual trunk button flashes slowly Busy Trunk Callback Queue If you attempt to select a busy outgoing trunk group and hear a busy signal or if you camp on you can request a queue callback and hang up until the system signals your endpoint that a trunk in the trunk group is available Each endpoint can place only one queue request at a time If a second request is made the first request is canceled and replaced by the second request A user cannot queue onto busy resources on another node Queue callbacks must be answered before the Queue Callback timer expires If a callback is not answered the queue is canceled If the endpoint is busy when a trunk in the queued trunk group becomes available the queue request is placed at the end of the queue list To queue a busy outgoing trunk 1 Inter Tel endpoints When you hear a busy signal while selecting a trunk Or if you are camped on press the QUEUE button or press the Special button and enter the Queue Callback feature code 6 and hang up T
302. e intercom calls to the endpoint Or a 4 may be entered before an endpoint extension number or hunt group pilot number to reverse transfer pick up calls from that endpoint or hunt group If either of these options is used normal handsfree intercom calls cannot be placed using that Station Speed Dial location or Speed Dial button and the Speed Dial button will not show the endpoint s status An outside phone number can be preceded by a trunk access code for easier trunk selection and number dialing Endpoint users can also program pauses and or hookflashes recalls in Europe into the stored outside phone numbers For example the number can contain a specialized common carrier SCC local number a pause and an access code When programming Speed Dial numbers each hookflash and each pause is considered one digit The durations of the hookflash and the pause are determined by the programmable CO Hookflash and Pause Dial ing Digit Length timers Display endpoint users can program an associated name for each Station Speed Dial number Speed Dial names can contain up to 16 characters To program Speed Dial names dialpad but tons are used to enter the desired letters numbers and punctuation in English Spanish and or Japanese Katakana Only digital display phones can display Japanese characters When pro gramming Speed Dial names you can press the IE button or USE ALPHA MODE USE NUMERIC MODE menu button to switch back and forth between alp
303. e phone must be off hook to allow the other phone to enter enhanced speakerphone mode If both phones are on hook there is no benefit to having one phone in enhanced mode NOTE Enhanced Speakerphones for Digital Phones The following display and nondisplay digital phones have enhanced speakerphone capabilities e Model 8500 8520 and 8560 e Executive Professional Standard and Associate Display e Axxess and Eclipse Basic Digital To use an enhanced speakerphone on a digital phone the user establishes a call and presses ERN the Special button and then the Speaker button or presses ESSI and enters the Enhanced Speakerphone feature code 310 There will be about one second of white noise at this point Both parties should avoid speaking during this white noise which is used to cali brate echo canceling circuitry After the white noise there will be a confirmation tone that both parties will hear except for Executive Display and Professional Display phone users who will hear the tone but the other party will not Then the user will be connected in an enhanced handsfree call If the speakerphone cannot be calibrated correctly due to trunk conditions the enhanced speakerphone will not be enabled and the display will show CANNOT ENABLE ENHANCED MODE It is normal for an outside party to hear a minimal amount of his or her own echo when speaking to a digital phone in enhanced speakerphone mode This is usually acceptable to most c
304. e 104 IPM Table 16 Inter Tel Digital Phone LED Flash Rates STEADY SLOW MEDIUM FAST FLUTTER 0 IPM 30 IPM 120 IPM 240 IPM 60 960 IPM Call is Callis recall Call or Call is on active at ing from hold queue call hold Green your sta or transfer back is ring LED tion Green Green ing in or CALE LED LED camped on waiting Green LED Conference Conference A confer is in is recalling ence party progress your station is on confer CNF Green Green ence wait LED LED hold Green LED Your sta tion is in DND Do Not Disturb Red LED Calls are being for EH warded Red LED All stations Hunt group in Hunt has a call HUNT Group are camped on GROUP unavail Red LED able Red LED Intercom Recalling Intercom Intercom call is in intercom call call is call is on IC progress is camped camped on hold Green Green on Green waiting LED LED LED Green LED Station is in Message is alphanu waiting Red MSG meric LED mode Red LED Micro MUTE phone is muted Red LED Executive and Professional Display Speakerphones Hardware and Endpoints INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 16 Inter Tel Digital Phone LED Flash Rates Continued STEADY SLOW MEDIUM FAST FLUTTER 0 IPM 30 IPM 120 IPM 240 IPM 60 960 IPM Speaker phone is on or ready for use Onr
305. e CF determines the amount of BVM message storage which ranges from 30 hours with a 256 MB card to more than 211 hours with a 1 GB card For storage of voice mail messages and greetings custom prompts and Record A Call messages each sys tem CF reserves a predetermined amount of memory The larger the capacity of the CF the more memory will be available for storage as shown in Table 3 The amount of message storage which is allocated for each user as a quota of the total storage capacity is programmable in minutes through DB Programming A warning flag can be set for each mailbox to alert the user when a specified percentage of the allocated quota has been reached In addition to the standard US English prompts each set of language prompts reduces by approximately 75 minutes the amount of storage available for allocation Table 3 shows the amount of message storage available on the three sizes of CF before additional sets of prompts are applied In addition to US English the system supports UK English Spanish and Japanese language prompts Table 3 BVM Storage Capacities on CompactFlash Memory Cards Compact Flash Card ENTE Cir 256 MB with US English prompts 30 hr 1800 min 512 MB with US English prompts 90 hr 5420 min 1024 MB with US English prompts 211 hr 12 670 min When all of the IP resources available for BVM are busy the next callers are camped on to wait for a resource to become available Upgrading
306. e Compress On Off 9982 9182 RingiIntercom Always OnO n Compression Statistics 9981 9181 Ring Tone Selection 939 Diagnostic ASAI Snoop Off 9926 9126 Routing Off aut Diagnostic ASAI Snoop On 9927 9127 ranon Manitor A Diagnostic Dump Extension 9922 9122 care Edi ds E Diagnostic Dump Node Informa 9936 9136 eal d Diagnostic Dump System 9933 9133 Switch Keymap 399 Diagnostics System Forward Enable 352 Diagnostic Heap Dump 9943 9143 rie ibd Peers Diagnostic Heap Statistics 9947 9147 System Speed Dial 381 Diagnostic ISDN View 9948 9148 Transfer to Hold 346 Diagnostic Major Reset 9962 9162 Transfer to Ring 345 Diagnostic Mark As Leaks 9945 9145 Diagnostic Mark As Quiescent 9946 9146 T Diagnostic Minor Reset 9964 9164 Anminisirator Feature Codes Diagnostic Network Freeze Zone 9939 9139 FEATURE NAME EUROPE ee dallas Diagnostic Network Unfreeze 9989 9189 Automatic Diagnostics Delivery 9823 Zone System Histories Enel Diagnostic Network Group 9963 9163 Dea NeW iain PR Diagnostic Print Auxdata 9972 9172 Sear eyelet Alan ud Diagnostic Print Message Log 9975 9175 Diagnostics On Off PROUN Diagnostic Print Network Log 9976 9176 ANOR ne Diagnostic Query Node Traffic 9978 9178 aus d a a Diagnostic Show Version 9928 9128 edem sah P Diagnostic SIP View 9987 9187 MOOD Enana 9890 Diagnostic Spare 1 3 9910 9912 Modem Reset 9869 9110 9112 Night Ring On Off 9860 Diagnostic System History 9974 9174 Periodic Diagnostic
307. e Japanese version of message 02 Of the IP endpoints only the Model 8660 can use Japanese prompts NOTE Only digital display endpoints will display Japanese prompts Other Inter Tel end points do not support Japanese prompts When Do Not Disturb or Reminder Messages are reprogrammed the programmer should attempt to keep the meanings for the messages in both lists the same That is if the Primary Page 173 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Language Do Not Disturb message 02 is changed to PAGE ME a similar message should be programmed for the Secondary Language Do Not Disturb message 02 Voice Processing System When a voice processing system application receives a call from an endpoint or trunk the sys tem tells the application which language is programmed for that device For example e Ifa trunk programmed for American English rings in to an application the voice pro cessing system will play the American English prompts e If an endpoint programmed for Japanese calls Voice Mail the user will hear Japanese prompts e If an endpoint programmed for American English receives a call on a trunk that is pro grammed for Japanese and then transfers the call to Voice Mail the caller using the trunk will hear Japanese voice prompts e Ifa Japanese endpoint is forwarded to Voice Mail a caller on an American English end point or trunk will hear the American English p
308. e Mail hunt group is assigned as an Atten dant For information about Automated Attendant refer to Automated Attendant on page 259 Network and Local Primary Attendants One Attendant can be designated as the primary Attendant who can receive unsupervised out side call recalls hunt group recalls and calls that cannot be matched to patterns in call routing tables When the Inter Tel 5000 Network Communications Solutions platform is installed in a net work two types of primary Attendants are possible e Node Attendants There can be a primary Attendant for each node e Network Primary Attendant A network primary Attendant can be programmed on each node Typically one Network Primary Attendant is shared by all of the nodes When the network needs to direct a call to an Attendant it attempts to direct the call to the network primary Attendant first If the network primary Attendant is unavailable it directs the call to the Attendant on the node where the call originated If there is not a network or local primary Attendant calls that would normally go to the pri mary Attendant as described above are handled as follows e Ifthe system has seized the call but it has not been sent to an endpoint it is discon nected e Jf the call has been sent to an endpoint it remains at the endpoint and rings until answered e If the call is not seized and not sent to an endpoint the caller will hear ringing until he or she hangs up T
309. e Outlook Client based solution works with a separate Microsoft Exchange e mail server to provide complete e mail functionality The Outlook Client based solution provides the same inbound fax capabilities as in Integrated solution However it also allows the use of Outlook to send outbound and receive inbound voice mail messages and faxes via the EM unit voice mail messages are stored on the EM unit they are not file attachments It also allows user the choice of playing the messages using the endpoint speakerphone or the PC speakers The following diagram shows an example of the Outlook Client Based Solution installation Figure 19 Outlook Client Based Solution Installation Example Receive send voice mail messages and faxes via e mail A PC with Microsoft Outlook and UM Client software Local Voice Mail IMAP Server Microsoft Exchange EM Unit The Outlook message that contains the voice mail has the following components Remote E mail and Faxes Server e g IMAP or SMTP POP3 e To Contains the recipient s name and mailbox number e From Contains the sender s name and mailbox or caller ID CLIP in Europe if known or Unknown e Subject If the message is from a endpoint it indicates VM message from mailbox xxxx If the message is from a UM Client user it indicates the description that the user had entered in their message If the message has been forwarded it is preceded by FW
310. e alarm also appears in the error message report Alarms 1 99 indicate problems that can be corrected without calling service personnel Alarms 100 199 telephone system and 200 299 voice processing system require attention from ser vice personnel Note that when a Voice Mail alarm is in effect the telephone system may be functioning properly but the voice processing system may be inoperative Network Alarms Each node has two flags which determine whether the node broadcasts or receives network wide alarms The Send Network Alarms flag determines whether a node will broadcast alarms that occur on that node to the rest of the network The Receive Network Alarms flag determines whether the node will receive and dis play alarms sent by other nodes in the network To differentiate between network wide and local alarms network wide alarms appear on Administrator phones preceded by NET ALARM and local system alarms are preceded with SYS ALARM Network wide alarms will override system alarms on an Administrator s phone display On remote nodes network wide alarms will indicate the name of the node on which the alarm occurred The node name is obtained from the username Managing System and Network Alarms Page 49 Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 To respond to a minor alarm from any alarm display phone 1 When a minor alarm indication appears write down
311. e caller does not enter a digit when prompted If programmed each digit could lead the caller to a digit translation node that has its own set of digit translation values This layered CRA digit translation creates a tree of programmable digit trans lation nodes For more detailed information about CRA refer to page 265 Directory Services Directory Services provide callers with a list of mailboxes and extension IDs that can be accessed through Voice Mail or the Automated Attendant The Directory feature is available in each of the voice processing systems but varies slightly in the EM system For information about directories refer to page 268 For information about using directories in EM refer to page 271 E mail Reader E mail Reader is a licensable feature available with the EM voice pro cessing system It provides users with advanced mailbox capabilities through Text To Speech TTS technology When E mail Reader is enabled for a mailbox users can access voice mail e mail and fax messages by logging in to their mailboxes E mail Reader announces the message envelope and can also read the text in the body of e mail messages E mail Reader users also have access to additional message options which vary based on the media type For information about E mail Reader refer to page 274 Fax On Demand The Fax On Demand feature is a specially programmed Call Rout ing Announcement application that uses digit translation to
312. e connected to SLAs or T1 EI PRI modules e Each SLA can support any combination of up to two single line endpoint or DID devices e TI EI PRI module circuits can be used for installing off premises single line stations Types of Single Line Endpoints Page 106 Industry standard single line endpoints can be installed on the system and or used as an off premises extension OPX An on premises single line endpoint can be an AC ringing single line phone a playback device and other single line device Single line dual tone multifrequency DTMF phone users gain access to system features by hookflashing pressing and releasing the hookswitch quickly and entering feature codes Personal Computer Data Port Module Hardware and Endpoints INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Off Premises Extensions OPX Off premises extensions are remote single line DTMF endpoints connected to the Inter Tel sys tem through telephone company OPX circuits or customer provided circuits OPX phone users gain access to the features by hookflashing recalling pressing and releasing the hookswitch quickly and entering feature codes Some telephone company OPX networks do not recognize certain single line phone ring cadences used in the system This incompatibility results in an inability to provide certain ring signals to OPX phones Because of this the system is equipped with an endpoint option known as Extended Rin
313. e eee eee eens 107 Extended Ring Cadence verse ex bi ed eR SearSee eS Se kteewS ere sees P eR 107 single Line Caller ID siue esq epi seu ie RERE PEE F SEE NGC eee PES E 107 Optional System Equipment i4i22cokesas or e RR 9 REEF TRES 108 Additional Information and Troubleshooting eee eee 109 Page 76 Introduction Hardware and Endpoints INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 The Inter Tel 5000 Network Communications Solutions platform can be licensed and pro grammed to support multi protocol IP SIP digital and single line phones as well as other endpoints and system enhancing hardware The platform supports communication needs from individual workstations to single site or network wide Hunt Group arrangements Types of hardware available include basic hard IP phones that typically support workers in an office environment Some phones are multi protocol that is they operate in either IP or SIP mode Some operate in IP mode only and others operate in SIP mode only Other options include wireless IP phones a soft phone that operates on a Personal Digital Assistant PDA and Single Line Adapters that support standard single line phones For Attendant like capability the system supports a 16 extension direct station select Mini DSS unit that attaches to one of Inter Tel s Six Line Display IP or digital phones To enable IP communication through the public telepho
314. e five agents logged in whose call counts are 5 5 5 10 and 10 the average call count of 7 will be assigned to the next agent who logs in NOTE If an extension list is included in an ACD hunt group set for Longest Idle or Balanced Call Count distribution it will treat each endpoint in the extension list as a separate agent it will not ring all of the endpoints on the list at the same time If the hunt group is set for linear or distributed order a call will ring all endpoints on an extension list at the same time when the call reaches that point in the hunt group list ACD Agent IDs ACD hunt group members are referred to as agents Agents log in to the ACD hunt group to receive calls and log out to halt ACD hunt group calls An ACD hunt group can be pro grammed to circulate calls to agents in two ways e Agent IDs If the hunt group is programmed to use ACD Agent IDs each agent is assigned an Agent ID number which he or she enters during the login procedure described below The hunt group calls are routed to logged in agents according to their Agent ID number instead of their endpoint extension Because the Agent ID is not associated with any endpoint extension the agent can use any endpoint in the system to log in and does not have to use the same endpoint every time ACD Call Distribution System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Members If the hunt group is not programmed to u
315. e pause Notification Numbers Each cascade level has a programmed notification number that can be an extension number or an outside phone number When an outside phone number is used the system will access an outgoing trunk using the code programmed for that level The code contains a pre programmed trunk access code and followed by an outgoing access termination feature code if needed Notification calls to outside phone numbers can be sent to a pager or to a number where a per son will answer personal number e Ifthe call goes to a pager the system will dial the programmed Pager Dial String then disconnect the call The dial string should include any digits that the paging company requires when the call is answered the pager LCD number and the pager termination code if needed Also if desired the pager string can be programmed to show the num ber of the mailbox that placed the call and or the number of waiting messages in the mailbox e Ifthe call goes to a personal number the system will play a prompt announcing that the call is from Voice Mail play the directory name or mailbox number that originated the call and play user instructions The listener can then enter the mailbox number s pass word to gain access to the mailbox and hear the message The listener has three chances to enter a correct password If the system receives an incorrect password three times the Voice Mail system will disconnect the call immediately an
316. e phone 1 Hookflash and enter the Conference feature code 5 The party is on conference wait hold hears music 2 Place an intercom or outside call to another party or return to a call on hold to be included in the conference Users of Executive and Professional Display phones and Model 8560 phones can press the IC DIRECTORY or OUTSIDE DIR menu buttons to look up numbers if desired NOTE An existing conference is not a valid party for another conference To place the party on conference wait hold with an Inter Tel endpoint Press the WO button again Or press the Special button and enter 5 again To place the party on conference wait hold with a single line endpoint Hookflash and enter the Conference feature code 5 The party is on conference wait hold hears music 3 Repeat step 2 until all desired parties are on conference wait hold or the maximum allowed number has been reached 4 Connect all waiting parties in the conference To connect all waiting parties in the conference with an endpoint that has menu buttons Press the CONNECT TO CONFERENCE menu button All parties are connected The display shows CNF IN PROGRESS The CNF button and a Call button flash slowly Use the following menu buttons HOLD Press this button to place the conference on hold DISCONNECT Press this button to remove your endpoint from the conference If there are no other endpoints in the conference all parties are disconnected
317. e programmed maximum number of digits press EM to return to the call Pressing will cancel the account code entry Enabling the Account Codes for All Calls Following Feature You can use the Account Code For All Calls Following feature to enter an account code once and apply it to all calls placed from that endpoint until the feature is canceled The account code is stored in system memory and is used for all calls made by that endpoint It affects other account code programming as follows Forced If forced account codes are enabled for the endpoint the all calls following account code is used for all calls and the user will not be prompted to enter an account code until the all calls following code is canceled If account codes are validated and the Account Code For All Calls Following is NOTE an invalid code calls will not be allowed at the endpoint until the code is removed or reprogrammed Optional Account Codes System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Standard If standard account codes are enabled for the endpoint the all calls follow ing account code overrides the standard code None If no forced or standard account codes are enabled for the endpoint the all calls following code will be used as an optional account code Optional In the event that this feature is in effect and an optional account code is also entered the optional account code will override
318. e programmed to select a trunk a trunk group or ARS when a Call button is pressed In the default state all Call buttons are programmed for ARS access On display endpoints the dialed number is displayed with hyphens separating the toll field equal access field area code office code hookflashes pauses asterisks pounds Centrex codes and or absorbed digits When the system absorbs local trunk digits the digits are dis played even when they are not dialed For example if 423 is absorbed and 6767 is dialed 423 6767 is displayed When placing a call begin dialing before the Dial Initiation timer expires If the NOTE timer expires the system drops the trunk connection and sends repeating reor der tones This prevents a trunk from being tied up accidentally To place an outside call 1 Lift the handset Inter Tel endpoint users can dial on hook by skipping this step 2 Select an outgoing trunk using one of the methods below The associated individual trunk or Call button flashes slowly If on hook the Speaker button is lit NOTE You must have outgoing access to a trunk to seize it Model 8660 or 8662 Press the OUTGOING menu button Any Inter Tel endpoint Select a trunk using one of the following methods e Pressan individual trunk button for direct access e Enter a trunk group access code 92001 92208 or press a trunk group button This selects a trunk in the chosen trunk group If the group has not bee
319. e to your endpoint 8690 only ITP and SIP Connectivity Hardware and Endpoints INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Battery Packs and Chargers Models 8664 and 8665 require a charged battery pack to operate The Nickel Metal Hydride NiMH rechargeable battery pack needs to be charged periodically A charged battery pack provides four hours of talk time or 80 hours of idle time To save battery power instruct the user to place the phone in idle mode at the end of every call When the charge on the battery pack is low the battery icon is displayed The user will also hear a soft beep through the earpiece every six seconds when the battery is low When the bat tery pack is critically low the phone will not work until the battery pack is charged Power Supplies Each SIP and IP endpoint must use a compatible power supply Because there are many power supply options contact your authorized Inter Tel equipment provider when selecting a power supply for an IP or SIP endpoint IP Phone Limitations SIP and IP phones e Do not have a secondary voice path and consequently cannot support the Off Hook Voice Announce OHVA feature e Cannot use a PCDPM or MDPM Refer to Digital Phone Data Port Modules on page 106 e Do not support full DSS BLF units e Do not support Desktop Open Architecture Interface OAT applications e Do not support the Agent Help Record A Call and Station Monitor features w
320. e used as a simple playback device that plays a message and then hangs up to disconnect the call This is especially useful for program ming hunt group announcement and overflow endpoints Or the Call Routing Announcement application can use digit translation which allows the caller to press a single digit for access to a endpoint hunt group or mailbox CALL TO CALL ROUTING ANNOUNCEMENT WITHOUT DIGIT TRANSLATION y Call Routing Announcement answers and plays a recording Call Routing Announcement hangs up If this is an announcement or overflow endpoint the call returns to the hunt group CALL TO CALL ROUTING ANNOUNCEMENT WITH DIGIT TRANSLATION y Call Routing Announcement answers and plays a greeting Y Y Caller does not Caller selects option select an option Timeout Y Y Call is sent to end point hunt group Voice Mail opera tor destination digit translation node or directory as deter mined by digit pro gramming Call is sent to end point hunt group Voice Mail opera tor destination digit translation node or directory as deter mined by Timeout programming When a Call Routing Announcement application is used as a hunt group announcement or overflow endpoint calls to the application automatically stop circulating through the hunt group if the caller selects a valid digit translation option This allows the application to send
321. ease bated xb Ed RES be aes 143 ACD Call DIStBUDOR sias dd Ex xr Shae ieda tenine a ahh te k ARAS 144 Page 111 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 CONTENTS PAGE ACD Agent IDS 12 25 ved deve praep REA ax Rr BARRE DS Dax KR RESEqI EE 144 ACD Agent Log In and Log Out i224 iaa caus e ER Rat ER see de een ee EE es 145 Restart ACD Idle Time Upon Login Flag 0 0 0 0 eee eee ee eee 147 ACD Agent Wrap Up Timer s sou i045 4 repre XE RELES IEERSERRERRNHERA TES RIS pu 147 Wrap Up Mode for Holding ACD Calls 0 0 0c eee ee eee 147 ACD Agent ID Automatic Connect Flag 0 cee eee ee eee 148 Group Call Pick Up ic2ssesecieceiesebadaeateceseibeneededboabassi aes ex 148 ACD Hunt Groups Span NOUBS se css ceoceerdasSeedne seneee PER RP SG E Ee E 149 Database Programming 22262206 9 RPG ERE E IE PR RP EGO Add ea Sd 149 Operational Changes 222b e n RR ERR RR ERE RR Rd RE PEE Rs 150 Maintenance of Node Spanning Hunt Groups 0 0 0 e eee eee eee 150 Enabling the Send Camp On Notifications to Members in DND Flag 151 Programming a Mini DSS for Agent Wrap Up 0 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee 151 TrOBK Fears c ctc cid RC Re Rc RA ene CR Week eee ewes CRGO ACR awe DU EQ eee eee ewer 152 Caller ID DNIS and ANI RI RR Set UN ER dial Bead ae IS 152 Inter Tel Endpoint Displays 24b rbc 4x REI RRRe ROREEQU RET RBPe E REGIE SQEEAS 152 Single Line Endp
322. ecording Instructions flag is enabled by default NOTE Directory Name A recorded name is used to identify each mailbox in the directory and to verify the mailbox number when messages are addressed by non subscribers and other subscribers Although the name is recorded when a user first sets up the mailbox you can change it at any time Password Passwords prevent unauthorized access to a mailbox Although the mailbox user creates a personal password when they first set up the mailbox you can change it at any time To provide system security all mailboxes and extension IDs should have a password To make the passwords difficult to guess they should not match the mailbox number or consist of one digit repeated several times You should recommend to all users that they set a password NOTE s Message Envelope Options Each message is preceded by an envelope that can include the time and date the message was left the source of the message and addi tional information that is associated with the media type Voice mail messages have a length envelope option e mail messages have a subject option and faxes have a pages option By default all envelope options are enabled for each type of message Remote Messaging Remote Messaging is available for voice mail messages only and is enabled in DB Programming on a per mailbox basis Using Remote Messaging the user can program voice mail to call the mailbox owner when a new message arri
323. ecordings use the table below to make note of the text For further instructions refer to Creating Audiotex Recordings on page 65 Depending on which voice processing system your site uses how your system is programmed and how the recordings are used an ASR version as well as a non ASR version may be needed RECORDING TEXT WHERE USED EXT Example Thank you for calling XYZ Company All of our representatives are Ext 2011 Hunt Group busy right now Please hold Overflow Station Recording Custom Voice Mail Prompts Page 69 Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Endpoint Programming Administrator Database Programming Password Endpoint Information For each station to be programmed record the following information Endpoint Extension Administrator endpoint Yes or No Attendant endpoint Yes or No House Phone Yes or No This endpoint s attendant Username Toll restriction classes of service Do Not Disturb Messages PRIMARY LANGUAGE DEFAULT DND MESSAGE DND MESSAGE SECONDARY LANGUAGE DND MESSAGE MESSAGE 01 DO NOT DISTURB MESSAGE 02 LEAVE A MESSAGE MESSAGE 03 IN MEETING UNTIL MESSAGE 04 IN MEETING MESSAGE 05 ON VACATION HOLIDAY TIL MESSAGE 06 ON VACATION HOLIDAY MESSAGE
324. ecover this message say Recover or press seven 551 Message recovered N A 552 To purge this message press nine To purge this message say Purge or press nine 553 Message purged N A 554 To listen to deleted messages press one To listen to deleted messages say Listen or press one 555 To recover all messages press two To recover all messages say Recover or press two 556 To purge all messages press three To purge all messages say Purge or press three 557 messages recovered N A 558 messages purged N A 559 message recovered N A 560 message purged N A 561 For message options press five For message options say Options or press five 562 For more options press nine For more options say More or press nine 563 To change the fax destination number press To change the fax destination number say one Number or press one 564 Please enter the extension number of your fax Please say or enter the extension number of destination followed by the pound key your fax Then say or press pound 565 Your fax destination is N A 566 You have chosen not to have a fax destina N A tion 567 Invalid extension N A Page 339 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 568 Fax de
325. ectory and make calls to endpoints more effi ciently If ASR is disabled callers must use their dialpad to spell the name of the endpoint user department or group that they were searching for When ASR is enabled callers can search the directory by saying the name of the endpoint user and the directory will search and locate a match Private Numbers Individual mailboxes and extension IDs can be programmed as Private in DB Studio A Private number is included in the directory and can be dialed by a caller who knows the number but the associated mailbox and extension number information are not avail able to the caller only the name is played Unlisted Numbers Mailboxes and extension IDs can also be programmed as Unlisted That means that the number will not be included in the directory but can be dialed if the caller knows the extension number Directory Access Callers can access the directory in the following ways From the voice mail or Automated Attendant main menu EITHER say Directory OR press EB OR press the DIRECTORY menu button e From a Call Routing Announcement application say or press the digit assigned through Digit Translation for directory access For a detailed explanation of digit translation refer to page 266 If a directory is disabled or empty because no names are recorded for any of the system s mail boxes and extension IDs callers will not hear the prompt that allows access to the
326. ed 096 Message deleted 097 There are no further messages 098 Message received 099 at 100 from 101 totaling 102 minutes 103 minute 104 Seconds 105 Second 106 Message received from an outside caller 107 To record an introduction with a copy of this message press 1 108 To change your personal greeting press 1 109 To change your name in the directory press 2 110 To change your password press 3 111 To change your message envelope press 4 112 To replay the message press 1 113 To use your primary greeting press 1 114 To select your alternate greeting press 2 115 To select the system greeting press 3 116 After the tone please record your greeting then press POUND 117 Greeting saved 118 After the tone please record your name then press POUND 119 Name saved 120 Your message envelope is currently set to return 121 all information Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 42 Voice Prompts BVM EM and VPU Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT 122 time and date 123 message source 124 and 125 message length 126 To turn on all envelope options press 4 127 For message source press 2 128 For message length press 3 129 This option is now off 130 This option is now on 131 For time and date p
327. ed Account Code Following Calls 391 y x Account Code Optional 390 Y X ACD Agent Log In 326 y X ACD Agent Log Out 327 Y x ACD Agent Log In Out 328 y x ACD Agent Wrap Up Terminate 329 Y X Agent Help Request 375 y x Agent Help Reject 376 y x AudioCodes MP 104 SIP Gateway Page 83 Hardware and Endpoints INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 84 Table 11 ITP and SIP Features and Feature Codes Continued FEATURE NAME podeis ITP MODE SIP MODE Answer Ringing Call 351 y y Automatic Intercom Access On Off 361 Y X Automatic Line Access On Off 360 V x Automatic Line Answer 350 Y X Background Music On Off 313 Y x Call Forward All Calls 355 Y Call Forward If Busy 357 y x Call Forward If No Answer 356 Y x Call Forward No Answer Busy 358 y x Conference 5 Y Default Station 394 y x Directory 307 y X Display Time And Date Inter Tel Pro tocol IP Mode 300 Y y Show IP Address SIP Mode Do Not Disturb 370 Y Y Do Not Disturb Cancel 371 V y Do Not Disturb On Off 372 V y Do Not Disturb Override 373 y x Feature Button Default 395 y x Group Listen 312 y y Handsfree On Off 319 Y x Headset On 315 y V Headset Off 316 y Y Headset On Off 317 Y Y Hold Individual 336 Y Y Hold System 335 Y x Hookflash Recall 330 d x Hunt Group Remove 322 Y x Hunt Group Replace 323 y x Hunt Group
328. ed for any of the system s mail boxes and extension IDs callers will not hear the prompt that allows access to the directory However if the caller does try to access the directory if it is disabled he or she will be instructed that the selection is invalid and returned to the initial instructions Recorded names are added to the directories when the owner of the mailbox or extension ID has initialized the name If the mailbox or ID is not initialized the directory will include only the mailbox number or extension ID number Group Lists are not included in either type of directory The caller can use ASR if enabled or press dialpad buttons to enter the name The application then plays the closest matching directory name that corresponds to the digits entered by a caller Once the name has been played the system will return a menu of options including the following e Listening to the previous or next name in the directory e Listening to additional information This option is not available if the mailbox or exten sion ID number has been classified in the database as a Private number Spelling a new name e Toggling from a last to first name search mode e Accepting the name Directories Voice Processing Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Locating a Name Locating a Name Two methods may be used to enter a name using your endpoint s dialpad digits Quick Spell and Exact
329. ed in the Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 Installation and Maintenance Manual part no 580 8001 Voice Processing Depending on the selected voice processing option provides multiport inte grated voice processing features e g Voice Mail Automated Attendant Hunt Group announcement and overflow SMDR storage Record A Call etc Inter Tel supports three types of voice processing systems For more information about voice processing systems and supported features refer to Voice Processing Systems on page 16 Attendant Console Allows Attendants to use their personal computers PC to answer and manage incoming call traffic It is primarily designed for use by Attendants of larger system sthose systems with so many stations that using Mini DSS Units is not practical However due to its enhanced functionality including electronic text messaging and directory dialing the Attendant Console is an attractive option for smaller systems as well External music sources External music sources radios tape players etc can be connected to the system to provide music on hold and background music External paging speaker equipment An amplifier and speakers can be connected to the sys tem to provide external paging and background music to large areas such as warehouses load ing docks etc Mini DSS Model 8416 The IP Model 8660 and digital Model 8560 support the Mini Direct Station Select Mini DSS Unit which provides 16 programmable buttons
330. ed it or placed it on hold If the Attendant phone is busy the call camps on and the display shows the source of the recall If the call is not answered before the Abandoned Call timer expires the system disconnects the call If an Attendant phone transfers a call and it is not answered before the Attendant Transfer timer expires it will recall the Attendant phone If a phone user transfers or forwards an outside call to an outside phone number it becomes an unsupervised CO to CO call because no inside parties are involved The CO to CO call is limited by the Unsupervised CO timer When the timer expires the call recalls the primary Attendant phone and causes the button to flash Display phones show UNSUPER VISED CNF RECALL This serves two purposes e It allows the Attendant to monitor the length of CO to CO calls When a CO to CO call recalls the Attendant can disconnect the call or allow it to continue e Ifthe callers hang up before the Attendant receives the recall the system may not have disconnected the trunks because a disconnect was not received from the central office The Attendant must disconnect the call When a recall rings at the Attendant s phone a Call or individual trunk button flashes at the medium rate If the Attendant has calls forwarded recalls from phones follow internal call forward requests Recalls do not forward to outside phone numbers but recall the Attendant s phone until they are answered or the Abandone
331. ee son 265 Page vii Contents INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 CONTENTS Voice Processing Features Continued Directoris o4 933 3S4 a VERERESERERE E EPEEERERTON ER RQK E eh EE PSOE EM DIICCIUPIGS S s eu Ee x roostet Awe CC ERE ETE YER ERES ER EC ETE ES E mail R ader 66500 saws a Eri RUE VERA ERE T A RESET REG VER KE Oa S ARR F ax On D mand iasds asa 30 RAOCE RH OH ESCR EORR COR UR E RR ee ARR Record A C all i4 osa zur RR AGER SEO ROCA OA GA ORO CR OEROS ES Scheduled Time based Application Routing STAR Note Mall coo va storseier sses stener es sT risd kssr EA Aq SEE Subscriber Feat res sorswsesuerrreere wk a eX YER EXE ERE TE ER Unified Messaging oc us va eens etra 5405040 EO E KR YR EI e Voice Processing Prompts Default Voice Processing Prompts c cece ccc cccccccesceecs Default Feature Codes Index Page viii FCC Regulations INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 FCC Regulations IMPORTANT This equipment complies with Part 68 of Federal Communications Commission FCC rules On the side of the equipment chassis is a label that contains among other infor mation the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number REN for this equipment Customers connecting this equipment to the telephone network shall before such connection is made give notice to the telephone company of the particular
332. ee the correct display hear ringing and can answer as usual To switch between keymaps when the endpoint is idle While on hook enter the Switch Keymap feature code 399 The display shows STANDARD KEYMAP IS ACTIVE or ALTERNATE KEYMAP IS ACTIVE To switch between keymaps during a call While on a call press the Special button and enter the Switch Keymap feature code 399 The display momentarily shows STANDARD KEYMAP IS ACTIVE or ALTERNATE KEYMAP IS ACTIVE Automatic Call Access Page 170 This feature allows an Inter Tel endpoint user to determine the way incoming calls are answered by entering a feature code to select the type of call access The four variations are as follows e No Automatic Call Access The user hears intercom dial tone when the handset is lifted and must press a Call or individual trunk button or the button to answer an outside call or press the button or Call button if there is no button to answer an intercom call e Automatic Intercom Call Access Only The user can answer ringing intercom calls by simply lifting the handset but outside calls must be answered by pressing a Call button an individual trunk button or the button e Automatic Outside Call Access Only The user can answer ringing outside calls by lift ing the handset but ringing intercom calls must be answered by pressing the button or Call button if there is no button Automatic Access For All Calls The user can answer any ringing c
333. eeting and recording 002 is the Auto mated Attendant main greeting A single recording may be used for multiple applications The default audiotex recordings can be changed but if the voice processing system database is defaulted the system recordings will be restored After making the required recordings you must determine which recordings will play during the telephone system s day and night modes of operation Programming day and night modes for audiotex recordings can be done from either the Voice Mail Administrator s mailbox or through DB Programming When customizing audiotex recordings you must enter a valid three digit recording number or a single digit followed by EM for recordings 1 9 If a valid number has been entered and a pre vious recording exists the voice processing system will play it This includes the two standard default greetings When no recording is associated with a recording number you are prompted to create a recording Once the recording has been made the new recording replaces any previous recording The only recordings that can be retrieved are system default recordings 001 and 002 They can be retrieved by defaulting the voice processing system database The maximum recording time for each custom audiotex recording is determined in DB Programming In DB Programming link several greetings together for one application and or use the special UCD ACD hunt group characters that tell the caller how many calls
334. efective If all end points on the system are inoperative the alarm message appears on the Administrator s display phone and the chassis LCD panel System Error Message Print System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 A minor alarm sends a message to the primary Attendant and to Administrators if pro grammed to receive alarms Each message record includes the following fields Sequence Number This field shows the order in which the faults occurred If there is a skip in a series of sequence numbers it indicates that a message was logged that is not programmed to be printed Time The Time field shows the time that the fault occurred This field shows the hours and minutes in 24 hour format as HH MM Date The Date field shows the date that the indicated fault occurred The date shows the month and date as MM DD Fault Code The Code field holds the associated number of the indicated fault This field is four characters in length and the first character is an M for messages or A for minor alarms Each of the different system faults that the system is capable of detecting is assigned a unique number M100 M999 or A001 A299 in the system database Type This field indicates the following Alarms The field shows ALARM for system faults that have not stopped sys tem operation Information Messages The field shows INF The condition requires no atten ti
335. eir endpoints in Do Not Disturb using the Remote Programming feature described on page 239 To enable Do Not Disturb mode 1 Inter Tel endpoints While on hook press the DITE button or enter the Do Not Dis turb feature code 370 or Do Not Disturb On Off feature code 372 Display end points show SELECT DND MESSAGE 01 20 2 Single line endpoints Lift the handset and enter the Do Not Disturb feature code 370 or the Do Not Disturb On Off feature code 372 You hear a progress tone 3 To select message 01 DO NOT DISTURB Inter Tel endpoints Press the Speaker button or lift and replace the handset The MEN button lights Single line endpoints Hang up To select any of the 20 preprogrammed messages Enter the desired number 01 20 or press the SCROLL menu button to begin scrolling Display endpoint users may scroll through the messages by pressing the high end of the Volume button or the NEXT button to go forward or the low end of the Volume button or the PREVIOUS button to go backward the display shows the selected message If you enter an invalid message number you will hear reorder tones and the display shows INVALID DND MESSAGE NUMBER try again Page 237 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 238 If desired customize the second line of the message Use any combination of the fol lowing methods a Remain in numeric mode Press the dialpad but
336. ek days press three To select individual week days say Day or press three 327 Service is set for Monday through Friday N A 328 Service is set for each day of the week N A 329 Recording canceled N A 330 The system was busy and could not deliver N A message notification at the specified time 331 The system was unable to deliver message N A notification due to a programming error 332 Extension ID N A 333 the operator N A 334 the operator N A 335 Remote Messaging will call N A 336 To change a cascade level press one To change a cascade level say Level or press one 337 To select a message notification category To select a message notification category say Category or press four Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 338 Please enter the cascade level you wish to Please enter the cascade level you wish to program program Say or enter one through nine using the keys on your telephone 339 With a pager number of N A 340 To change the pager dial string press three To change the pager dial string say Pager or press three 341 To call an internal extension press one To call an internal extension say Internal or press one 342 To call an outside number press two To call an
337. emote Programming feature It can also be programmed through Individual Endpoint programming If the password is changed from an endpoint the user will be prompted for the old password then the new password and will be asked to verify the new password If it is programmed through Remote Programming the user will already have entered a correct password In this case the user is prompted only for the new password and then asked to verify the password Should the verified password and new password not match the old password will be retained and the programming session canceled To change the station password from your station 1 Enter the Program Station Password feature code 392 You hear a confirmation tone If you have a display it Shows ENTER PASSWORD 2 Enter your current password followed by At default it is your extension number If you have a display it Shows NEW PASSWORD NOTE If you enter an incorrect password the display will show INVALID PASS WORD and your endpoint will return to the idle state 3 Enter the new password followed by EM You hear a confirmation tone 4 Enter the new password again for verification followed by EM You hear a confirmation tone If you have a display it Shows PASSWORD SAVED Your station returns to idle Do Not Disturb Override Page 239 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 To change the endpoint password using remote p
338. en entered A hookflash recall restarts the call cost display and toll restriction plus it starts a new line in the SMDR printout However the call remains on the same Call button The Hookflash Recall feature can be enabled or disabled on a trunk group by trunk group basis It can be used on any outside call including conference calls The duration of the hookflash recall can be changed by reprogramming the LS GS CO Hook flash timer default value is 0 6 seconds If the system is not installed behind a PBX the Hookflash timer must be programmed to be compatible with the system s trunks To send a timed hookflash recall while on a trunk Inter Tel endpoints Press the Special button and enter Hookflash feature code 330 Single line endpoints Hookflash and then enter the Hookflash feature code 330 Page 243 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Reminder Messages NOTE This feature does not apply to single line endpoints Reminder messages are set like an alarm clock to signal an Inter Tel endpoint at a specified time The user can select the message and time up to 24 hours in advance Twenty different reminder messages are available These messages can be reprogrammed by the installer or using an administrator s station They are limited to 16 characters At the programmed time the reminder message signals the station with eight short tones A display endpoint shows the mes
339. ence Single Line Caller ID When a single line endpoint receives an incoming call if the system has adequate Caller ID resources the single line endpoint displays the username and IC extension of the calling party This feature allows the single line endpoint to use the Caller ID information to perform certain functions This feature is supported by single line endpoints including endpoints and fax machines con nected to an IP SLA or SLA single line port The single line endpoint connected to the single Single Line Endpoints Page 107 Hardware and Endpoints INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 line port must support Caller ID or Calling Line Identity Presentation CLIP as defined by current industry standard specifications Some third party device documents claim to support Caller ID but in fact do not Because an extension is shorter than a 10 digit number that the device would nor mally receive the device may not be capable of receiving the Caller ID informa NOTE f soa tion Also some third party devices may display the extension in a telephone number format rather than as an extension number For example an extension of 11023 may appear as 110 23 or 1 1023 etc Optional System Equipment Page 108 The following optional equipment can be purchased and installed with the Inter Tel system Complete specifications and installation instructions are provid
340. er 6 Select one of the following options e Say New or press lf to change the search order for new messages e Say Saved or press EM to change the search order for saved messages 7 Your current message search order is played Select one of the following options e Say First In or press Hl to retrieve the earliest received messages first First In First Out e Say Last In or press E to retrieve the latest received messages first Last In First Out e Say Cancel or press to return to the Personal Options Menu without making changes 8 Hang up or press to return to the previous menu Change Procedures for Mailbox Personal Options Page 63 Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Changing A Group List Name A Group List is a collection of mailboxes that is programmed in DB Programming Subscribers can use Group Lists to send messages to several mailboxes simultaneously With the Voice Mail Administrator mailbox you can record a name for the Group Lists that have been pro grammed in the system However before you can record a Group List name you need to know the Group List number assigned to the list Group List names are used for verification purposes only To record a group list name 1 Access the Voice Mail Administrator s mailbox and menu Refer to page 58 2 Say Mailbox Maintenance or press Ell to access the Mailbox Group List Maintenance o
341. er 00 You hear a single confirmation tone The display shows NIGHT MODE IS ON Then the display shows NODE X IS IN NIGHT MODE until day mode is turned on To turn day mode on 1 While on hook enter the Enable Network Day feature code 9862 2 When you are prompted to enter a node number enter the desired node number You hear a single confirmation tone The display shows DAY MODE IS ON Placing the Local System in Day or Night Mode Page 23 Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Setting System Date and Time Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 supports the Automatic Daylight Saving Time British Summer Time in Europe feature However the Enable Daylight Saving Time flag in Database Programming must be set to Yes to use the Automatic Daylight Saving Time British Summer Time feature NOTE A System Administrator can manually reset the system time or date when it is necessary For example when the system is defaulted or for daylight saving time Any Administrator can change the date and time that appears on all display endpoints and in the SMDR reports The day of the week is automatically calculated and set by the system when the date is entered To set the system date and time NOTE If necessary press to backspace or press Ed or CANCEL to start over 1 While on hook enter the Set Date Time feature code 9800 Your display shows DATE current date 2 If you do no
342. er accesses a fax message E mail Reader announces the fax envelope according to the envelope options that the user set up Because a fax message is received by the e mail server as an attachment to an e mail message in the form of a tif file E mail Reader cannot read the text in the body of the fax To view a fax and read it users must access it from their e mail account Fax options include saving deleting and forwarding to another fax machine For detailed information about using standard voice mailboxes and advanced mailboxes with E mail Reader capabilities see the appropriate endpoint user guide Fax On Demand Page 274 The Fax On Demand feature provides fax services to callers It is a specially programmed Call Routing Announcement application that uses digit translation to allow callers to select the doc uments they want to have faxed to them With Fax On Demand callers can use a DTMF endpoint to request one or more documents from the company s fax library the library that is also used in the Unified Messaging faxing feature When the request is completed the voice processing system places a call to the caller s fax machine to deliver the requested documents The Fax On Demand process is shown in the following steps 1 The caller reaches the Call Routing Announcement application either through direct ring in or transfer 2 After listening to the introductory recording the caller selects a document by entering a document
343. er database and voice mail messages e USB flash drive thumb drive for backing up voice mail prompts and messages e Support for IP SIP Multi Protocol Wireless IP Multimedia Touch Screen digital and single line hard phones and for one PDA soft phone Support for nonphone endpoints such as IP gateway trunks IP SLAs SLAs fax machines and answering machines e Programmable Call Processing features Refer to System Features on page 111 e Directory Look Up e Hunt Groups e Automatic Call Distribution e Uniform Call Distribution e Open Architecture Interface OAT e Multilingual Support e Music On Hold e Paging e Power Fail Bypass circuitry e Wide Area Network WAN Fail Survivability The Inter Tel CS 5200 is the basic system In the default configuration it comes with five IP endpoint licenses and three IP networking resources With required hardware and licensing the Inter Tel CS 5200 can support a mix of up to 28 IP endpoints IP network trunks and or IP gateway trunks Additional IP endpoint licenses are required before more than five IP end points will operate on a system The Inter Tel CS 5400 is an Inter Tel CS 5200 with a Processor Expansion Card PEC 1 and licensing added to the system In the default configuration it comes with five IP endpoint licenses and six IP networking resources With required hardware and licensing the Inter Tel CS 5400 can support a mix of up to 116 IP endpoints IP
344. er tones and the display will show CANNOT ACCESS RESERVED FEATURE Scheduled Delayed Major Resets Page 22 A delayed major reset is sometimes needed when programming the database using the Admin istrator phone If a major reset is required the message ENTER SYS RESET OPTION appears on the phone display You can select to perform an immediate major reset when this message is shown or you can schedule a delayed major reset The delayed major reset option allows you to schedule a reset to occur when the system is not in use The following programming changes do not require a major reset Changing extensions Swapping extensions Creating off node devices Changing ACD Agent IDs i Adding and removing extensions from Extension Lists Equipping and unequipping devices Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 System Administrator Procedures With a System Administrator phone you can perform the following procedures Place the local node in night or day mode Place other network nodes in night or day mode Set the date and time of the local node Set the network date and time Synchronize clocks in the network 7 Make database changes see page 26 for a list of programming areas Enable disable and reset local and off node call processing application modems Program System Speed Dial numbers on the local node Receive and clear displayed system and network alar
345. er tones you entered an invalid speed dial location code try again 3 Do one of the following To enter or change a number Dial the extension number or phone number up to 16 digits including pauses and hookflashes to be stored To include a hookflash or a pause in the number press the Special button once for an asterisk twice for a pound 45 three times for a hookflash or four times for a pause You can enter more than one or hookflash in a row by pressing the SITE button to move to the next character not necessary after pauses f you make a mistake press to back up and erase or press Ell or CANCEL to leave the number unchanged then start over at step 1 To erase an existing number and leave it blank press until the number is erased 4 Press EM to exit Repeat these steps for each additional number to be stored Programming Station Speed Dial Numbers and Names Page 225 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 To program Station Speed Dial numbers at a single line endpoint NOTE If you make a mistake press EJ then start over The number in memory remains unchanged 1 Liftthe handset and enter the Program Station Speed Dial feature code 383 You hear a confirmation tone 2 Dial the Speed Dial location code 0 9 If you hear reorder tones you entered an invalid speed dial location code try again 3 Do one of the following e To enter or
346. ers SLA providing for connection of up to 48 Inter Tel digital phones or SLAs Each SLA supports one or two single line analog phones In addition to IP endpoints each licensed DEI connected to the Inter Tel CS 5200 chassis pro vides capability to add up to three Digital Endpoint Modules DEM 16 that would support up to 48 digital endpoints For each digital phone substituted with a Single Line Adapter SLA two single line phones can be added to the system System Capacities Inter Tel CS 5200 The Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 chassis supports e Central Office CO Local Exchange Trunks Including the two loop start circuits built into the chassis up to 14 loop start trunks can be supported by the Inter Tel 5000 Up to three Loop Start Modules LSM can be installed and LSMs are available with either two or four ports e TI EI PRI Spans Up to three T1 TI PRI or EI PRI spans can be connected to the Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 chassis through T1 E1 PRI modules Each module supports one span A T1 span supports up to 24 trunks a T1 PRI span supports up to 23 trunks and an E1 PRI span supports up to 30 trunks Trunk options in DB Programming include Loop Start Off Premises Extension OPX Direct Inward Dial DID Direct Dialing Inward DDI in Europe T1 T1 PRI EI PRI and TI E amp M e Endpoints The Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 supports Inter Tel IP phones and other IP end points IP and SIP trunk gateways Inter Tel digital phones and
347. esired mailbox number The display shows ENTER MAILBOX NUMBER If you do not enter a mailbox number and you have a default Record A Call mailbox the system will automatically select your default mailbox If you do not have a default mailbox the feature will time out or can be canceled by pressing EM or ACCEPT 3 You hear a confirmation tone when the Record A Call feature is activated The display shows RECORD A CALL IN PROGRESS 4 To turn off Record A Call repeat step 1 or end the call The display shows RECORD A CALL TERMINATED To use Record A Call with a single line endpoint 1 During a call hookflash and dial the Record A Call feature code 385 2 If required or allowed enter the desired mailbox number The display shows ENTER MAILBOX NUMBER If you do not enter a mailbox number and you have a default Record A Call mailbox the system will automatically select your default mailbox If you do not have a default mailbox the feature will time out or can be canceled by pressing J or ACCEPT 3 You hear a confirmation tone when the Record A Call feature is activated The display shows RECORD A CALL IN PROGRESS 4 To turn off Record A Call repeat step 1 or end the call The display shows RECORD A CALL TERMINATED Agent Help NOTE The Agent Help premium feature is required to use Agent Help The Agent Help feature allows a user to request help from a designated Agent Help Exten sion during a two or three pa
348. ess El for WE BOTH HEAR IT ENTER TWO DIGIT AUDIO PROBLEM ECHO STATIC DELAYED AUDIO OTHER PLEASE SELECT AUDIO DIRECTION ONLY HEAR IT ONLY OTHER PARTY WE BOTH HEAR IT If the Record A Call feature is enabled for your endpoint the display shows WOULD YOU LIKE TO RECORD CALL If the Record A Call feature is available you have the option of recording the call EITHER Press the desired menu button OR Press the dialpad button that corresponds to one of the following responses e Press Kl to record the call e Press EM to continue without recording WOULD YOU LIKE TO RECORD CALL YES NO NOTE If the system cannot accurately record the call the display shows CALL CANNOT BE COMPLETED Hang up to complete the Audio Diagnostics feature When the Audio Diagnostics selections are completed the system generates Alarm 128 ALARM 128 x12345 AUDIO FRZ CLEAR ALARM CLEAR ALL ALARMS IDLE MENU Using the Audio Diagnostics Feature System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 and the administrator station displays ALARM 7828 extension number AUDIO FRZ To learn which Audio Diagnostics codes have been enabled for the sys DTE tem consult an Inter Tel field technician Responding to the Audio Diagnostics Feature To respond to Alarm 128 Alarm 128 indicates that someone has completed the Audio Diagnostics
349. ess this button to end the current call and answer the ringing call SEND TO V MAIL This button appears only if you have a Voice Mailbox Press this button to transfer the call to your mailbox ICCALL TO DND Pressing this button will send Do Not Disturb tones to the caller If using a display Inter Tel endpoint the caller will see DO NOT DIS TURB 2 Toreturn to the holding call Press the fluttering individual trunk button Call button Or button To respond to call waiting using a single line endpoint When you hear a single camp on tone every 15 seconds while you are on a call another call is waiting Do one of the following 1 If you want to end the current call hang up The call rings at your endpoint Lift the handset to speak to the waiting caller If you want to place the current call on hold hookflash and then enter the Individual Hold feature code 336 You are connected with the waiting caller 2 To return to the first call on hold If you want to end the current call hang up Return to the holding call by lifting the handset and entering the Individual Hold feature code 336 If you want to place the current call on hold and connect with the original call Hookflash and then enter the Individual Hold feature code 336 twice Call Waiting Call Transfer System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 To move a camped on intercom call to Do Not Disturb W
350. essage Printing 249 System Features 117 System Forwarding 211 212 advance timer 211 enable disable 215 handsfree announce option 197 213 initiate timer 211 recalls 216 ring principal once 212 System History 59 System Hold 193 194 System OAI 143 System Programming 34 System programming with Administrator endpoint 34 System Prompts 70 System Registry 83 System Report Programming 252 System Speed Dial 221 feature code 125 feature codes 358 location codes 221 on display number 221 pauses hookflashes 47 PBX trunks 47 programming 47 System Speed Dial Buttons 222 toll restriction override 158 221 System wide flag SPCL Key Required for Feature Code Entry 118 T T1 Card TIC OPX 107 T1 E1 PRI Spans 15 Page 370 Table Administrator Feature Codes 125 Agent Help Extension 209 Alarm Numbers and Priorities 55 Alphanumeric Directory Search 228 Call Button Assignments 98 Class of Service Default Values 158 Diagnostics Feature Code Definitions 127 DSS Lamp Behavior 49 Endpoint Feature Codes 119 Entering Alphanumeric Information 29 48 225 228 237 Handsfree Announce System Forward 213 House Phone Mode interactions 231 Locating a Name Alphanumerically 269 Major Alarm Text Description and Action 53 Multiplicative Factor in Call Cost 246 Network Capacity Features Devices 17 Redial Last Number Dialed or Last Number Saved 232 Speed Dial Alphanumeric Entry 224 STAR Alphanumeric Entry 278 Trunk Access Codes 119 Unanswered S
351. essages at a display endpoint 1 If your WEJ button is flashing one or more messages are waiting and the display shows YOU HAVE XX MESSAGES Model 8660 or 8662 While on hook press the VIEW MESSAGES menu button Then press PREVIOUS or NEXT to scroll to the desired message Other Inter Tel endpoints While on hook press the IIl button repeatedly to view waiting messages 2 A displayed message will show MESSAGE RECEIVED FROM EXT XXXX If desired you can answer or cancel a message while it is displayed as described below Answering Messages To answer messages at a display endpoint 1 When the desired message is displayed as described above press the EJ button or the REPLY menu button while on or off hook Depending on how the message was left an intercom call is placed to the endpoint that left the message or to your message center If when you respond to the message the called endpoint is unavailable does not answer a private call is busy or is in Do Not Disturb your EEJ button continues to flash and the display indicates a waiting message unless you immediately leave a message before hanging up or cancel the message after hanging up The message waiting indications are canceled automatically only when you have actually connected with the called endpoint Message indications from Voice Mail will only be cleared if you save or delete the waiting Voice Mail message The IJ button will re light if you clear the message i
352. essaging are available from your mailbox only if authorized by your System Administrator Your mailbox is now fully set up 041 Your password may be up to 12 digits 042 Enter your new password then press POUND If you don t want a password press POUND now 043 You new password is 044 The number entered is too long 045 To accept this entry press POUND 046 To erase and re enter press 3 047 Password erased 048 Password saved 049 Your mailbox is full and cannot receive any new messages Please delete old messages 050 Not used 051 Not used 052 Your mailbox is almost full Please delete any messages you no longer need so new messages may arrive 053 You have 054 You have one new message 055 hew messages 056 of which is priority 057 You have no new messages 058 You have one saved message 059 Saved messages 060 Remote messaging is currently enabled 061 To listen to new messages press 1 062 To record a message press 2 063 To listen to saved messages press 3 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 42 Voice Prompts BVM EM and VPU Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT 064 For personal options press 4 065 To setup remote messaging press 5 066 For your primary setup press 1 067 For your alternate setup press 2 068 If this
353. essing Unit then places a pri vate call to your endpoint When you answer it plays You have a call from caller s name It then completes the transfer and the transferred call rings at your endpoint Answer as usual Automated Attendant Custom Audiotex Recordings Page 261 Voice Processing Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 e Screened Calls When the caller enters your extension number the system asks the caller to record his or her name The Voice Processing Unit then places a private call to your endpoint When you answer it plays You have a call from caller s name and gives you the following options To accept the call press or the ACCEPT menu button The call will ring at your endpoint To replay the announcement press or the REPLAY menu button To send the call to voice mail press or the SEND TO V MAIL menu button The caller is transferred to your mailbox and hears your personal greeting To forward the call to another extension press or the FORWARD menu button Then enter the extension number The call is sent to the other endpoint If that end point has screened or announced transfers the caller s name will be played again for that endpoint To refuse the call press or the REFUSE menu button or simply hang up The caller receives a recording that says you are not available and offers them the option of leaving a message e Unannoun
354. est a callback from a endpoint 1 Inter Tel endpoints When you hear a busy signal or Do Not Disturb signal a repeat ing signal of four fast tones and a pause when calling an extension number press the QUEUE menu button Or press the Special button enter the Queue Callback feature code 6 and hang up The display shows QUEUE REGISTERED FOR username Single line endpoints When you hear a busy signal or Do Not Disturb signal when calling an extension number hookflash and enter the Queue Callback feature code 6 Then hang up 2 When the queued endpoint is available your endpoint will ring Display endpoints show username IS NOW AVAILABLE Lift the handset or press the but ton A private call is automatically placed to the queued endpoint Executive Display Professional Display and Model 8660 or 8662 You may press one of the following menu buttons e CANCEL QUEUE To cancel the queue request press this button without lifting the handset e ANSWER You may press this button instead of lifting the handset to answer the queue callback using the speakerphone To cancel a queue request before the queued endpoint becomes available e Inter Tel endpoints While on hook enter the Queue Callback feature code 6 The display shows QUEUE REQUEST CANCELED Single line endpoints Lift the handset enter the Queue Callback feature code 6 and hang up Busy Endpoint Callback Queue Page 179 System Features INTER TEL
355. et PC 84 Model 8614 Mini DSS Unit 94 Model 8660 84 Index INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 J Japanese prompts and displays alphanumeric 28 date and time 26 Do Not Disturb 34 multilingual capability 172 network date and time 27 reminder messages 34 System Speed Dial 221 Ee Keymaps 97 Keymaps Switching 169 L Language 27 alphanumeric 28 date and time 26 Do Not Disturb 34 multilingual capability 172 primary vs secondary 34 System Speed Dial 221 Language Selection 172 Last Number Dialed automatic storage save 231 using the feature 233 Last Number Saved using the feature 232 LCD Contrast Adjustment 96 LCD Touch Screen 83 Leaving Messages 181 Light Emitting Diode LED red and green 106 Light Emitting Diode LED flash rates 89 Light Emitting Diode LED red green 106 Linear Hunt Group 134 Liquid Crystal Display LCD 95 Listening to the Next Previous Name 270 Locating a Name 269 Longest Idle search 144 Mailbox directory 271 numbers 271 private 271 unlisted number 271 Mailboxes 280 associated non associated 281 dial 0 destination 280 directory 62 268 directory names 268 envelope settings 62 message indications 180 message notification station 281 operator destination 280 passwords 62 280 receive only 280 remote messaging 280 standard 280 subscriber access 284 system administrator 280 Maintaining mailboxes and Group Lists 61 Maintenance of Node Spanning Hunt Gr
356. eted messages 547 You have one deleted message 548 deleted messages 549 To recover deleted messages press 2 550 To recover this message press 7 551 Message recovered 552 To purge this message press 9 553 Message purged 554 To listen to deleted messages press 1 555 To recover all messages press 2 556 To purge all messages press 3 557 messages recovered 558 messages purged 559 message recovered Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 42 Voice Prompts BVM EM and VPU Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT 560 message purged 561 For message options press 5 562 For more options press 9 563 To change the fax destination number press 1 564 Please enter the extension number of your fax destination followed by the button 565 Your fax destination is 566 You have chosen not to have a fax destination 567 Invalid extension 568 Fax destination saved 569 Fax destination erased 570 To cancel unheard sent messages press 1 571 All sent messages have been heard 572 Enter the destination mailbox 573 This mailbox has one unheard message 574 unheard messages 575 To append to the message press 2 576 To leave a Voice Mail message press 1 577 To make a return call press 2 578 Please hold while your call is being transferred to an outsi
357. etimes the two jobs are handled by the same person You can use a phone that has been designated as an Administrator phone to perform certain programming tasks for the call processing system and or the voice mail system In addition the System Administrator phone shows system and network alarm messages This section provides you with the instructions for performing System Administrator and Voice Mail Administrator tasks The information is presented as follows 7 System Administrator Procedures begin on page 23 Voice Mail Administrator Procedures begin on page 57 A Quick Reference Guide containing instructions for frequently performed procedures is located in the front of this guide As a System Administrator you must know which languages are considered Pri NOTE mary and Secondary for the system The platform supports American English British English Spanish and Japanese prompts and displays System Administrator Phone Designation Any Inter Tel phone can be designated as a System Administrator phone through Database Programming However to facilitate programming and to manage system Alarm messages Inter Tel recommends using a six line display phone for this purpose such as the Model 8660 IP phone or Model 8560 digital phone NOTE A single line phone cannot be used as an Administrator phone If a user of a non Administrator display phone attempts to execute Administrator features the user will hear fast busy reord
358. evere Messages These messages indicate that a severe error occurred in the system The messages can be programmed to be sent to any output device attached to the system Mes sages can be printed through only one system port at a time The print width is adjustable 64 80 or 132 characters to accommodate different output devices When a line of information is longer than the programmed width the information is printed on subsequent lines and pre ceded with to indicate the continuation The system database also has a reserved area for recording the history of messages to allow service personnel to request a report at any time The message history area has enough memory to maintain a record of at least 50 of the most recently generated messages When the reserved area is full the more recent messages begin to replace the older ones so that the most recent messages are available In a network setting each node has its own message print programming message print output port and message print output port backup There should be a message print terminal at each node to monitor node and network performance and aid in troubleshooting e If a node s Message Print output port is a node the network sends Message Print records to the specified node e You cannot select a node as the message print output port backup e If Message Print output programming forms a loop the system will send the output to the node s backup Message Print port
359. ewall or NAT To respond to a major alarm from any alarm display phone take the following action Table 9 Priority of Alarms by Type SYS ALARM NNN CALL TECHNICIAN A major alarm message tem wide failure If the Network Alarms ALARM TEXT DESCRIPTION AND ACTION REQUIRED 100 199 These alarms indicate that an equipment failure has occurred that 200 224 requires the attention of service personnel Contact service personnel Be prepared to provide all alarm information as well as what was taking place when the alarm occurred MAJOR ALARM appears on all display phones in the event of a sys major alarm appears on a group of endpoints the associated Digital Page 51 Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 52 Endpoint Module DEM 16 may have failed The warning might also appear on a single phone if the phon or its cabling are defective Because they indicate that all or part of the sys tem is inoperative major alarms require immediate attention from service personnel Clearing Alarms An Administrator can clear a network wide alarm on the local node only or on every node in the network To clear an alarm you can use either the Administrator feature codes or the menu buttons on your phone To use the feature codes to clear alarms Enter the appropriate feature code to clear the alarm The clear alarms feature codes are as fol low
360. ex Erde x e rd E S 188 Page 113 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 CONTENTS PAGE On Hook Monitoring sco py RR RII Ra x EFRERG ERSTER X REG d 189 Group Listen Feature Ceu FAX RODA Y PORE b dear Ed RE eR a na 189 Trunk Camp On and Busy Trunk Callback Queue 0 00 0 190 Trunk Camp biu oocebeQurveREER A REPE ERU REERER DUCES REA ERE EE 190 Busy Trunk Callback Queue 5 ver PER PGREXRPERRR RROAGeEEATAIAGRRER E 190 ZAGEOUBE T DIBR ous iun Ar a heehee D Ra d Ce X Roe RETE bo Oa d Nue S a ot pid tn iy 191 Database Programmed Account Codes 0 0 eee eee eee 191 Optional Account COUPS s dr R IE eI EE aUe RN A TO ERE EP RP ES 192 Enabling the Account Codes for All Calls Following Feature 192 Placing Calls On Hold iiis eos ses E 54945 EEXETLFAYTEYPTORES XETER PE XS 193 Trdrerdual Hold oo 4 44 am ir amp ido di OCDE AH eden EHOR c EIC eR ARCU RP e 194 System Hold seere eg aca lor oR a pate ea adc on or doy AG Sean Ubera 194 Consultation Hold 14412253 x2 22 a7 rd GRE CER CI ERROR s a D eR S o CR 195 Hold Recalls 232432 teere rut Kee oa Ree ee SOE OS ei La e Sete Sade eae ese Vots 195 Mict pho Mute E rrrrEN 195 Call Wanting co EE ERROR RO HR COCA RON E en OR RERUM Gp RC CRT UR A 196 Call Transfer oos RR RARROCHA GER ORDRE ESAS AERORSA ER DEORER ROLE SEER a ROG 197 Feature CodeS enes patent ce rrm 197 Transferring Conference Calls a
361. f the following e Say Accept or press Eto accept a name e Say Previous or press Hl to hear the previous name in the directory e Say More or press Ell to hear additional information for the selected name if allowed e Say Next or press EJ to hear the next name in the directory e Say New or press E and say or spell a new name to search for a different name e Say Cancel or press to exit the directory Directories contain a list of extensions or mailboxes and the names programmed for them The following directories can be enabled or disabled in the system e The Mailbox Directory is a list of mailbox subscribers their recorded names and mailbox numbers e The Automated Attendant Directory is a list of all mailbox subscribers and extension ID owners and their recorded names NOTE Group Lists are not included in either type of EM directory The directory function is accessible to all incoming callers and voice mail subscribers The directory is built automatically through the voice mail subscribers and extensions Recorded names are added to the directories when the mailbox or extension ID owner has initialized the name The directory also includes extensions that do not have a voice mailbox if the extension is programmed with an Extension ID If the mailbox or ID is not initialized the directory will include only the mailbox number or extension ID number The ASR feature allows callers to search the dir
362. feature Contact your Inter Tel service technician so that they can poll the information for troubleshooting purposes Phantom Devices Phantom devices are virtual extension numbers that are created for users who are usually not physically in the office and who do not need endpoints to retrieve calls or messages Phantom devices do not consume a physical hardware address and do not count against the system total device count Phantom devices e Cannot make or receive calls e Cannot be programmed as System Administrators e Have a Voice Mailbox e Have the ability to forward endpoint calls to a current location such as to a cell end point pager or home endpoint If the phantom device has a Voice Mailbox the extension appears in the Voice Mail directory and the system intercom IC directory Voice mail indications and endpoint silent messages are stored in the phantom device information Phantom devices remain in Do Not Disturb DND mode at all times and programming will not allow them to go out of DND When created a phantom device is automatically set into DND By default the phantom DND status is Unavailable but you can access the Remote Programming feature code 359 to change the DND status When created phantom devices are automatically added to the All Endpoints extension list Phantom devices can be forwarded and follow the rules for endpoint manual forwarding and system forwarding Responding to the Audio Diagnostic
363. for that outside call e Record All DID DNIS Calls Records all calls received through DID and DNIS e Record All Trunk To Trunk Calls Records all calls made from one outside caller to another e Record All Network Calls Records all calls placed to and received from network nodes e Record All Off Node Devices Records all calls placed to and received from off node devices The service technician can determine whether absorbed digits equal access digits and or toll field digits appear in the SMDR printout As an example assume the following number was dialed 89 other system s trunk access code 10288 equal access code 1 toll field 602 area code 961 9000 seven digit number The following programming options can be used e Suppress Absorbed Digits Absorbed digits on local or PBX lines will not appear in the report if this option is selected In the sample above the absorbed digits the other system s trunk access code would be suppressed so that only 10288 1 602 961 9000 appears NOTE If absorbed digits are repeatable on a local line the absorbed digits will not appear in the SMDR report even when repeated e Suppress Equal Access Digits Equal access digits will not appear in the report if this option is selected In the sample above the equal access code field would be suppressed to print only 89 1 602 961 9000 e Suppress Toll Digits When this option is selected toll digits will not appear in the repor
364. formation is required by government regulation for emergency calls in areas Up to 48 digits can be programmed in the Calling Party Number field However check with your service provider to determine their specific requirements for this field This number will be sent in the ISDN setup message in the Calling Party Number Information Ele ment In addition the system will also send the extension number of the endpoint in the Call ing Party Number Subaddress Information Element No default number exists for this field It is up to the programmer to supply the NOTE correct Emergency Calling Party Number for each endpoint Emergency Outgoing Access Lists System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 If an Off Premises Extension is used for dialing and Emergency Number such as 911 in the US or 999 in the European market the emergency responder operators will see Calling Party Num ber or the address of the location of the system not the off premises address Off premises per sonnel should be prepared to give the correct address and other pertinent information if it is not programmed as the Calling Party Number The following diagrams illustrate a remote site without and with an MGCP SIP gateway Figure 11 Example of a Remote Site Without an MGCP SIP Gateway 911 Operator ITF Caller dials 911 Phoenix Arizona gt li EFBBEBET gt USA EE Inter Tel 500
365. forms that support many devices that people can use for personal and business communication Phones now share communciation space with personal digital assistants PDA with wireless phones capable of text messaging taking photos and recording video with fax machines that transmit and receive messages across Internet Protocol IP and with soft phones that are displayed and used from computer screens Computer Science Roots When referring to communication protocols in computer science the term endpoint describes an entity on one end of a Transport Layer connection The Transport Layer is the Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP layer in the Open Systems Intercon nect OSI network model Utilizing the TCP IP layer standard Internet servers send and receive packets of data across the World Wide Web Usage in This Manual Page 2 This manual uses the term endpoint to describe the entire category of devices that the Inter Tel 5000 family of products supports In this context digital and IP phones are endpoints as are data modules fax machines computer telephony CT gateways Single Line Adapters SLA IP Single Line Adapters IP SLA and answering machines And to promote clear communication and understanding commonly accepted names of end points are used as appropriate In particular desktop IP endpoints are also referred to as IP phones Digital endpoints are also referred to as digital phones Wireles
366. fter the tone To end press POUND 026 Recording erased 027 Recording stopped 028 Please begin speaking after the tone 029 Message play stopped To continue press POUND 030 Enter the destination mailbox or group list number 031 Logon canceled 032 Enter your password Then press POUND 033 There have been 3 invalid attempts to log onto your mailbox 034 Invalid password 035 Thank you for calling Good bye 036 To access Voice Mail features you must change your system assigned pass word 037 You have not finished setting up your mailbox 038 Subscriber access denied 039 Because this is the first time you are accessing your mailbox you must record your name for the company directory Page 295 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 296 Table 42 Voice Prompts BVM EM and VPU Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT 040 Since you are accessing your mailbox for the first time you should be aware of a few standard features To cancel an option you have accessed and return to the previous menu press STAR To accept your recording or dialing sequence or to advance to your next message press POUND For help you may press 0 at any time you are at a menu and Voice Mail will replay the cur rent menu and or give you additional information Certain Voice Mail features such as remote m
367. g Cadences which allows the ring cadences be altered for individual single line circuits Extended Ring Cadences Table 17 shows the different standard and extended ring cadences for the various types of sin gle line endpoints used on the Inter Tel telephone system in the United States Table 17 Ring Cadences for Single Line Endpoints SINGLE LINE ENDPOINT CADENCE TYPE DESCRIPTION Single line phone con nected to IP SLA SLA or T1 OPX Standard IC Ring A repeating 2 sec cadence that rings twice Each ring lasts 200 ms and is separated from the next ring by 400 ms of silence The remaining 1 2 sec is silent Extended IC Ring A repeating 6 sec cadence that rings twice Each ring lasts 800 ms and is separated from the next ring by 400 ms of silence The remaining 4 sec are silent Standard CO Ring A repeating 6 sec cadence that rings once for 2 sec followed by 4 seconds of silence Extended CO Ring Same as Standard CO Ring cadence Model 8560 Model 8520 Professional Executive Standard and Associate MDPM Standard IC Ring This cadence has two 250 ms rings every 2 sec Extended IC Ring A repeating 3 sec cadence that rings once for 1 sec followed by 2 sec of silence Standard CO Ring A repeating 6 sec cadence that rings once for 2 sec followed by 4 sec of silence Extended CO Ring A repeating 6 sec cadence that rings once for 4 sec followed by 2 sec of sil
368. g a Recording Enter Ext Number Record Greeting Enter Mode Primary Greeting ER MAKING A RECORDING Day Mode EN Alternate Greeting 2 Night Mode EN During your recording System Greeting 3 p E Enter Recording Number See Recording Options oss If recording number exists Record Directory Name EN Erase and Re record EB Verify number Ez See Recording Options Continue Ea Re enter number Change Password 3 9 EN After you finish Change Envelope Settings EJ EITHER Hang up IMPORT FAX DOCUMENT Voice Mail EN OR For options ES E Mail EN eee If document number exists RECORDING OPTIONS Replace EJ Facsimile 3 i m EN 7 z Then select Replay Re enter Number Time Date ER Append EB If document number does not exist Source EN Erase and Re record EN Verify Number Ea Length Subj Pages ER Cancel Re enter Number All Options 4 Accept EZ None EH REMOTE MESSAGING RECORD CUSTOM PROMPTS Program Cascade Level EN Remote Messaging Enter cascade level number then Replay Primary Cascade EN Change EE Replace Alternate Cascade EN Enter Personal 2 System 9 More Options ER Enter Pager Ell Cancel Fax Number EE Options EN Enter Time of Day EN Message Order Set Days of Week EB Transfer Method MESSAGE ORDER Monday Friday ER New Messages All Days E TRANSFER METHOD Individu
369. g chart to program information in alphanumeric mode Note that letters correspond to the letters printed on the dialpad buttons To erase the current name and leave it blank Press repeatedly until the name is erased Then press EM To leave the name the same Press EM Enter the number up to 48 digits to be stored Press EJ NUMBER OF TIMES BUTTON IS PRESSED BUTTON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ENGLISH CHARACTERS JAPANESE CHARACTERS 1 amp 1 A l U E O a 2 A B Cc 2 KA KI KU KE KO i 3 D E F 3 SA SH SU SE SO u 4 G H l 4 TA CHI TSU TE TO e 5 J K L or 5 NA NI NU NE NO o 6 M N O Nor 6 HA HI FU HE HO J tsu 7 P QR S 7 MA M MU ME MO ya 8 T U v 8 YA YU YO yu 9 WIX Y Z 9 RA RI RU RE RO yo 0 0 WA WO N pa ba long The Japanese characters are only available if the multilingual feature is enabled and Japa nese is installed as the secondary language The character available depends on the software version Default Administrator Feature Codes CODE FEATURE NAME CODE FEATURE NAME US EU US EU 9823 Automatic Diagnostics Delivery On Off 9866 Modem Enable 9851 Clear Network Alarm 9869 Modem Reset 9850 Clear System Alarm 9860 Night Ring On Off 9982 9182 Compression On Off 9825 Periodic Diagnostics On Off 9981
370. g in calls and transfers The range of the ACD Wrap Up Duration timer is 1 to 65 535 seconds The default value is 15 seconds It is programmed individually for each ACD hunt group If an agent wants to terminate the wrap up mode before the timer expires he or she can use the following procedure To terminate ACD agent wrap up While on or off hook single line users must lift the handset enter the ACD Wrap Up Terminate feature code 329 The display shows ACD WRAP UP TERMINATED If you were not logged in to an ACD hunt group the display shows CANNOT ACCESS RESERVED FEATURE Wrap Up Mode for Holding ACD Calls If enabled the system flag called Wrap Up Mode For Holding ACD Calls places an ACD agent s endpoint in wrap up mode when an ACD call is placed on Hold However the ACD Wrap Up Duration timer is not activated This feature prevents the agent from receiving additional ACD hunt group calls after placing an ACD call on Hold while the endpoint is idle The endpoint can still receive non ACD calls as usual If the flag is disabled the agent will be available to receive additional ACD calls as soon as an ACD call is placed on Hold In the default state this flag is disabled This flag applies to any type of Hold including Individual System Transfer and Conference Wait Hold If the call is terminated or if it is reverse transferred by another endpoint the ACD agent s endpoint will be made available to receive incoming
371. g safety information is reprinted from UL 1459 When using your telephone equipment basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire elec tric shock and injury to persons 1 2 Page xii Read and understand all instructions Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners Use a damp cloth for cleaning Do not use this product near water for example in a wet basement Do not place this product on an unstable cart stand or table The product may fall causing serious damage to the product Slots and openings in the chassis and the back or bottom are provided for ventilation to protect it from overheating these openings must not be blocked or covered This prod uct should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat register This product should not be placed in a built in installation unless proper ventilation is provided This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated in the manual If you are not sure of the type of power source to your building consult your dealer or local power company This product is equipped with a three wire grounding type plug a plug having a third grounding pin This plug will only fit into a grounding type power outlet This is a safety feature If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet contact your elect
372. g system PC must have a fax card installed This can be the same fax card that supports the Fax On Demand feature The software will support up to eight fax ports Fax E mail Message Format The e mail message sent by the Voice Mail has the following components e To The TO line contains the recipient s e mail address e From The FROM line contains the e mail address of the voice processing system If an E mail Real Name has been programmed for the voice processing system it will also be shown on this line e Subject The SUBJECT line contains the line Fax received from lt source gt The source will be the Call Routing Application number or the mailbox number from where the fax is received for example CRA 2505 or MB 1000 e Received On The RECEIVED ON line contains the date and time that fax was received e FAX TIF file attachment The file attachment appears as a file with the name FAX TIF To view the fax the user must display the TIF file using graphics software Fax E mail Requirements Page 263 Voice Processing Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Automatic Speech Recognition Page 264 The Enterprise Messaging EM voice processing system supports Automatic Speech Recogni tion ASR which allows users to access voice mail call routing applications the automated attendant and the directories by issuing spoken commands instead of dialing digits on their endpoint Because A
373. g system application will hear the voice prompts in the Primary Language unless overridden by a Call Routing Announcement as described on the following page If programmed for the Secondary Language the voice prompts will be in the Secondary Language unless overridden By default all trunks are set for the Primary Lan guage Setting a trunk or digit translation Language field to a specific language will not work across nodes unless all the nodes in the Inter Tel network are at least NOTE v5 2F6 or later This constraint exists because the older Inter Tel systems do not understand specific languages and expect to receive only Primary Language or Secondary Language values Do Not Disturb and Reminder Messages Trunks The system has default Do Not Disturb and Reminder Messages in both languages The mes sages that use Japanese characters can be reprogrammed only through an Administrator s end point or Database Programming Refer to System Programming on page 32 The language of the messages seen by the users both when programming their endpoints and when calling another endpoint that is in Do Not Disturb are determined by the endpoint s pro grammed language That is if an endpoint is programmed for Japanese the user will see only Japanese messages when programing a message If a Japanese programmed endpoint calls an English programmed endpoint that has selected Do Not Disturb message 02 the Japanese end point user will see th
374. ge notification to start and stop Enter or say the times with two digits for the hour and two digits for the minutes e g 0900 9 00 If entering the time in 12 hour format e Say AM or press Ell for a m e Say PM or press IZ for p m For 24 hour notification set the starting and ending times to be the same NOTE 7 Say Days or press KM Then select one of the following e Say Weekdays or press Ell for Monday Friday e Say Days or press EM for all days e Say Day or press EJ to select individual days You are prompted to say or press digits 1 7 which correspond to the days Sunday through Saturday 8 Say Category or press EM You have the following options e Say All Messages or press lll for all messages e Say Priority or press EM for priority messages only 9 Hang up or press EM to save the settings and exit To change the Transfer Method if enabled in DB Programming 1 Access the Voice Mail Administrator s mailbox and menu Refer to page 58 2 Say Mailbox Maintenance or press El to access the Mailbox Group List Maintenance option Page 62 Change Procedures for Mailbox Personal Options Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 3 Say or enter the mailbox or extension ID to be accessed You hear the Personal Options menu 4 Say More or press El for More Options 5 Say Transfer or press EM The system tells you what t
375. ges 250 alarm numbers and priorities 55 alarm queue 54 clearing 54 major 53 minor 52 network 51 54 system 51 Allow Green LEDs 106 Allowed Answer 154 day night 164 feature code 155 All Ring Hunt Group 135 Alphanumeric Mode 28 47 Alternate Hold Timer 194 Alternate Keymap 97 169 Alternate Menu Displays 94 Alternate Message Source 136 183 Analog Endpoints display 95 volume control 107 ANI 152 153 ANIin SMDR 247 Announce Only Calls 200 Announced Transfer 200 261 266 Announcement and Overflow Stations 137 Answer Feature Code 155 Answer Supervision 40 Answering Messages 182 ARS see Automatic Route Selection 155 ASR see Automatic Speech Recognition 19 Page 359 Index INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Attendants Attendant Recall 133 endpoints 132 primary 132 133 programming 29 serving other attendants 133 transfer timer 133 Audio Diagnostics 252 AudioCodes MP 104 MGCP Gateway 84 AudioCodes MP 104 SIP Gateway 84 Audiotex Recordings Creating 68 Custom 68 Custom Automated Attendant 261 Automated Attendant applications 260 custom recordings 68 261 directory 260 feature description 18 259 recall destination 260 Voice Processor 259 Automatic Call Access 170 Automatic Daylight Saving Time 26 Automatic Fax Detection 263 Automatic Intercom Answer 170 Automatic Outside Call Answer 170 Automatic Route Selection ARS Only Class of Service 158 Default
376. gramming a Mini DSS button as a resource does not always provide a trans NOTE fer capability For example a Mini DSS button programmed for paging will not transfer a party to the paging system Programming and Using Mini DSS Buttons Page 47 Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 48 Programming Mini DSS buttons 1 2 With the handset in the cradle dial EJ KB EA Press the Mini DSS button and dial the desired extension number Once programmed you can use your Mini DSS button as follows You can place an intercom call to the extension that the button is programmed for by pressing the button once You can transfer a call to the extension that the button is programmed for by pressing the button once and hanging up For transferred calls that are forwarded to Voice Mail you will hear repeating double tones and the display will show DEST FORWARDED TO VOICE MAIL If the button has a lamp you can visually monitor the status of the extension Placing an intercom call using Mini DSS buttons 1 To use the handset Lift the handset The display shows ENTER EXTENSION NUM BER To use the speakerphone While on hook press the Speaker button or GH The Speaker button lights The display shows ENTER EXTENSION NUMBER If you want to place a private nonhandsfree call to an Inter Tel phone press the pound EJ button The display shows RING EXTENSION NUMBER Pre
377. guage To program or change System Speed Dial numbers and names If you make a mistake use the button to backspace Or press NOTE or CANCEL at any time to cancel the operation the name and num ber in memory remains unchanged and the display shows FEATURE CANCELED then start over While on hook enter the Program System Speed Dial feature code 9801 Display phones show PROGRAM SYS SPD 000 999 Enter the Speed Dial location code 000 999 The display shows ENTER NAME lt current name gt If you do not continue to the next step the display times out after the Long Inter digit timer expires and you must start over To change or program the name Enter the desired name for the Speed Dial number using your dialpad as described on page 45 then press EJ or ACCEPT Refer to the chart on the previous page If you make a mistake use the button to back up and erase existing characters or the CLEAR button to erase the whole entry To erase the current name and leave it blank Press CLEAR or press repeat edly until the name is erased Then press EB or ACCEPT To leave the name the same Press Ej or ACCEPT When the display shows ENTER NUMBER enter the number up to 48 digits to be stored using the dialpad one of the Speed Dial buttons or the button If neces sary use the button to back up and erase existing numbers Display phones show the number as it is entered To include pause or hookflash in the number pre
378. hanumeric and numeric mode e In numeric mode the dialpad buttons are used to enter numbers 0 9 the pound E button is used for entering a hyphen and the asterisk E button is used for entering a colon For example 1 00 would enter 1 00 in numeric mode e In alphanumeric mode dialpad buttons are used to enter the desired letters numbers and punctuation The number of times a button is pressed determines which character is entered For example 533266 would enter JEAN When adjoining characters are Page 223 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 224 located under the same button press the button to advance to the next character For example 66 6667776 would enter NORM Refer to the chart on the next page to program information in alphanumeric mode Note that letters correspond to the letters printed on the dialpad buttons To program Station Speed Dial numbers at a display phone 3 4 NOTE If you make a mistake press or CANCEL then start over The number in memory remains unchanged Or use the button to backspace While on hook enter the Program Station Speed Dial feature code 383 The display shows PROGRAM STN SPD 0 9 OR SCROLL Do one of the following Use a Speed Dial button Press the Speed Dial button to be programmed Use a location code Dial the desired Speed Dial location code 0 9 Scroll through the d
379. he ring principal once option can be set that will signal the principal station NO luen when a call begins to follow the forward ing path The signal to the principal station consists of a display CALL SENT TO CALL IS SENT TO FWD 1 HUNT GROUP CALL RINGS IN TO PRINCIPAL STATION FORWARD PATH and a single burst of ring tone The call cannot be answered at the principal station but can be reverse CALL IS SENT TO FWD POINT 2 VOICE MAIL transferred from the system forward point If a call rings in to multiple endpoints and one or more of those endpoints has system forwarding the call will not follow any of the for warding paths Agent Help requests will not follow any forwarding path If a principal station or a endpoint forwarding point is a member of a hunt group calls placed to the hunt group s pilot number are unaffected by system forwarding The hunt group calls will be received at the endpoint as usual and will not enter the system forwarding path Page 212 System Forwarding System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 A call follows only the forwarding path of the principal even if a forwarding point has a for warding path of its own The call that originated at the principal station will follow only the principal station s forwarding path Individual Endpoint Forwarding Points The ringing duration at each endpoint forwarding point is determined by the System Forwar
380. he RINGER OFF menu button The display shows RING TYPE OFF SELECTED 3 Lift and replace the handset or press the pound button EJ both ends of the Volume button or the ACCEPT button to exit The selected tone will be heard when the end point rings unless ringing was disabled The display shows RING TYPE X SAVED Default Endpoint Identification on Display When a display endpoint is idle the extension number username time and date are displayed While on a call in Do Not Disturb or unconditionally forwarded other information appears on the display To redisplay the default ID use the following procedure To display the date time username and extension number On a Model 8600 8620 8660 or 8662 endpoint press the Special button and enter the Display Time Date feature code 300 The date time username extension num ber and endpoint status are displayed for 5 seconds If the endpoint is operating in SIP mode entering code 300 will display the IP address of the endpoint All Transient Displays Endpoint Flag The All Transient Displays endpoint flag when enabled allows all transient call handling displays to appear on the endpoint display If it is disabled the CALL TRANSFERRED TO XXXX and MESSAGE LEFT FOR XXXX transient displays does not appear Each transient display appears for 5 seconds before another display can take its place Dis abling the flag allows high traffic stations such as Attendants to change di
381. he call will not ring at any endpoint One Attendant or Multiple Attendant Operation Page 132 Each node can be set up with one Attendant or several Attendants as follows e One Attendant One Attendant provides all of the Attendant services listed on the pre ceding page All trunks except private trunks are usually programmed to ring in at this Attendant s phone e Multiple Attendants Any or all phones can be programmed as Attendants For exam ple there may be one or more Attendants to serve each department in a business Trunks are programmed to ring at any or all Attendant phones Multiple Attendants can Attendant Phones System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 be arranged in a hierarchy That is one Attendant may be the Attendant for another In this case the serving Attendant is reached by dialing 0 at the served Attendant Attendant Recall Attendant Recall When a call is placed on hold or is transferred from one endpoint to another the Hold and Transfer timers limit the amount of time the call may remain unattended After that time the call recalls the phone that transferred it or placed it on hold and the Recall timer is started If the call remains unanswered at the endpoint until the Recall timer expires it recalls the end point s Attendant and the Abandoned Call timer starts If there is no Attendant the call continues to recall at the endpoint that transferr
382. he current transfer method is You can then select the desired transfer method as follows Say Unannounced or press Kllto select unannounced transfers e Say Screened or press El to select screened transfers e Say Announce or press IE to select announce only transfers e Say Cancel or press to return to the Personal Options Menu without making changes 6 Hang up or press to return to the previous menu To change a fax destination number 1 Access the Voice Mail Administrator s mailbox and menu Refer to page 58 2 Say Mailbox Maintenance or press El to access the Mailbox Group List Maintenance option 3 Sayorenter the mailbox or extension ID to be accessed You hear the Personal Options menu Say More or press El for More Options Say Number or press EE Say or enter the number of the fax destination NO OFS EITHER say Accept or press EB when you are done OR say Re enter and press EJ to erase and re enter the number 8 Hang up or press to return to the previous menu To change the message search order 1 Access the Voice Mail Administrator s mailbox and menu Refer to page 58 2 Say Mailbox Maintenance or press El to access the Mailbox Group List Maintenance option 3 Sayorenter the mailbox or extension ID to be accessed You hear the Personal Options menu 4 Say More or press El for More Options 5 Say Order or press EM for the Message Search Ord
383. he display shows QUEUE REGISTERED FOR trunk name Single line endpoints When you hear a busy signal while selecting a trunk or if you are camped on hookflash and enter the Queue Callback feature code 6 Hang up 2 Your endpoint rings when the queued trunk is available Display endpoints show TG XXXX or group name IS NOW AVAILABLE 3 Inter Tel endpoints Lift the handset and or press the fast flashing Call button individ ual trunk button or the button Then dial the desired phone number The associated Call button or individual trunk button flashes slowly If ARS was used when the call was placed originally the number is dialed automatically Single line endpoints Lift the handset and dial the desired number If all DTMF decoders are busy when your endpoint is called back the system sends repeating reor der tones instead of dial tone and the queue is canceled If ARS was used when the call was placed originally the number is dialed automatically Trunk Camp On and Busy Trunk Callback Queue System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 To cancel a queue before the callback Inter Tel endpoints While on hook press the CANCEL QUEUE button or QUEUE button Or enter the Queue Callback feature code 6 The display shows QUEUE REQUEST CANCELED Single line endpoints Lift the handset and enter the cancel Queue Callback feature code 6 Hang up Account Codes Account Codes
384. he feature code is entered None Disabled The user hears reorder tone if the feature code is entered When a user enters the Agent Help feature code a private call is placed to the endpoint Agent Help Extension While the call is ringing at the supervisor s extension neither the requesting user nor any other parties on the call can hear the private call ringing If the supervisor answers the call the system creates a conference to include the supervisor in the requesting user s origi nal call If the Agent Help Extension is an Inter Tel endpoint the microphone is muted and the super visor cannot be heard unless he or she presses the button If the Agent Help Extension is a single line endpoint the supervisor can be heard as soon as the conference is established In either case the supervisor can hear all other parties on the call NOTE Agent Help is not supported on IP or SIP devices in P2P calls For details refer to Peer to Peer Audio for IP and SIP Phones on page 91 In a network setting the Agent Help Extension does not need to reside on the same node as the user requesting Agent Help The type of endpoint determines how the Agent Help Extension is alerted e Display endpoints If the Agent Help Extension is a display endpoint the display shows that the incoming private call is an Agent Help request and identifies the user name of the requesting station The Agent Help Extension can choose to reject the call b
385. he voice processing system plays the caller s name and completes the transfer e Screened The caller is asked to state his or her name Then the call is transferred to the associated extension number When the called party answers the transfer the voice pro cessing system plays the caller s name The called party has the options of replaying the name sending the call to Voice Mail if the extension has a mailbox transferring the call to another extension accepting the call or rejecting the call e Unannounced The call is transferred to the associated extension number without announcing the call This method is applied in the default state In a network setting the voice processing system can provide call screening for a destination extension on another node However the node where the voice processing system is connected must have an off node device programmed for the destination extension and access to the remote node Receiving an Announced Or Screened Transferred Call Depending on the Transfer Method programmed for your mailbox or extension ID one of the following will occur when you receive a call transfer from Automated Attendant or Call Routing Announcement e Announce Only Calls When the caller enters your extension number the system asks the caller to record his or her name The voice processing system then places a pri vate call to your endpoint When you answer it plays You have a call from caller s name It then
386. heir dialpads Users with 2 line display endpoints or no display end points must enter the numeric codes on their dialpads because they do not have menu buttons A list of the 12 audio problems and the numbers associated with them is provided in the fol lowing table Table 38 Default Audio Diagnostics Audio Problem Numbers AUDIO PROBLEM NUMBER AUDIO PROBLEM NUMBER Echo 01 Too Loud 07 Static 02 Distorted 08 One Way Audio 03 Delayed Audio 09 No Audio 04 Clipping 10 Choppy Audio 05 Cross Talk 11 Too Soft 06 Other 12 Although 12 predefined audio problems are available only four can be programmed for the system The default numbers of the four selected audio problems may also be changed Specifying Audio Direction After selecting the audio problem the system prompts the user to choose the direction of the audio problem The following options are available e ONLY I HEAR IT users with a 2 line display or a no display endpoint press Kl e ONLY THE OUTSIDE users with a 2 line display or a no display endpoint press EN e WE BOTH HEAR IT users with a 2 line display or a no display endpoint press IE Using Record A Call for Diagnostics If the Record A Call feature has been programmed for the station users can record the call while using the Audio Diagnostics feature see page 254 The Record A Call feature cannot be used on certain calls such as Agent Help NOTE Station Monitor
387. hen the recipient listens to the Voice Mail message using the mailbox However the sender will not receive confirmation when the recipient reads the e mail e WAV file attachment The wav file attachment will appear as a file with the name vm wav To listen to the message the user must play the wav file using multimedia software such as Sound Recorder Level 1 Voice Processing Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Levels 2 and 3 To use Level 2 or 3 Unified Messaging you must have the following e An existing e mail system based on Microsoft Outlook Exchange MAPI e The mailboxes E mail Gateway fields are programmed for Unified Messaging The Outlook message that contains the Voice Mail will have the following components e To This line will contain the recipient s name and mailbox number e From This line will contain the sender s name and mailbox or Caller ID if known or Unknown e Subject This line will say Voice Mail Message If the message has been forwarded it is preceded by FW e Sent This line contains the date and time that the Voice Mail was received by the mail box e Priority Messages If the message is marked Priority the subject line will be pre ceded by an exclamation mark and in the Options tab the Importance field is High e Private Messages If the message is marked Private the Sensitivity field in the Options tab will be se
388. hese timers determine how long the voice processing system will wait before making the next notification attempt when messages are waiting to be heard unless it is overridden by the Each New Message flag These timers can be set to a value of 0 255 minutes If set to 0 it retries the cascade level immediately for as many attempts as allowed by the Number of Call Attempts field If the message s has not been picked up by then the system moves to the next cascade level The default setting for the Pager Notification Retry timer is 20 minutes The Number Called Busy and Personal Number No Answer timers default to 5 minutes The 0 minute timer value should be used cautiously If the system is forced to make several calls in quick succession it will impair the voice processing sys tem s ability to place other outgoing calls It should be used primarily with cas cades in which all of the members want to receive notification at approximately the same time In this case all levels except the last could be set to 0 minute NOTE retries with 1 allowed call attempt However the last level in the cascade should be programmed with a longer Pager Notification Retry timer so that the system does not continuously cycle through the cascade levels Continuous cycling is also prevented somewhat by a per mailbox 15 call limit Due to FCC regulations the voice processing system can allow a mailbox to make only 15 calls in rapid succession without a 10 minut
389. hile using P2P audio Refer to System Features on page 111 Peer to Peer Audio for IP and SIP Phones The P2P audio feature allows certain IP and SIP phones to transmit and receive audio directly with each other rather than through the system chassis The P2P feature reduces delay and packet loss for IP and SIP endpoints Phones that support P2P audio include e AudioCodes M MP 104 MGCP gateway e ITP phones except the IP SoftPhone e Mult Protocol phones SIP phones To use P2P the IP Resource Application and the IP and or SIP phones must be upgraded with v8 1 firmware In addition the phones must be programmed as members of the same Network Group Calls between IP and SIP phones that are members of separate Network Groups are routed through the chassis and do not use P2P The Network Group Diagnostics feature allows a System Administrator to verify that the Net work Groups are programmed correctly For instructions on how to use the Network Group Diagnostics feature refer to page 55 Battery Packs and Chargers Page 91 Hardware and Endpoints INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Because IP phones connected on P2P calls do not use chassis resources users cannot access Agent Help Record A Call and Station Monitor features NOTICE Passing real time streaming data such as audio through encrypted virtual private networks VPN may significantly impact the network performance router and
390. hile on a call you hear call waiting signals Endpoints with menu buttons Press the DO NOT DISTURB or IC CALL TO DND menu button Other Inter Tel endpoints Press the DITE button or enter a Do Not Disturb feature code 370 or 372 The WEN button lights The intercom caller is no longer camped on and receives Do Not Disturb indications Single line endpoints Hookflash and enter a Do Not Disturb feature code 370 or 372 The intercom caller is no longer camped on and receives Do Not Disturb indica tions Hookflash twice to return to the current call The following paragraphs describe transfer feature codes and the different ways to transfer calls on the Inter Tel 5000 Feature Codes Either of two feature codes can be used to transfer intercom and outside calls to other end points voice processing system applications hunt groups off node devices or outside phone numbers The call transfer options are as follows e Transfer to ring You can transfer intercom or outside calls to another endpoint a voice processing system application a hunt group or an outside phone number e Transfer to hold Either intercom or outside calls can be transferred to another end point and placed on hold using this feature Transferring Conference Calls An established conference can be transferred to an endpoint While the transfer is taking place the parties in the conference remain connected to each other and may converse The transfer will
391. his feature enabled only When you hear Do Not Disturb tones while placing an intercom call press the Special button and enter the Do Not Disturb Override feature code 373 If the called station is idle the call rings as a private intercom call If the called station is busy your call camps on Remote Programming The Remote Programming feature allows a user to place an endpoint in Do Not Disturb mode DND or forward the station s calls or change the password either from another station or through DISA Each station has a password to limit access to this feature See page 164 for information about DISA In a network Remote Programming can be performed on one node for any Inter Tel endpoint that is programmed as an off node device on that node You must go through DISA for remote programming of any endpoints that are not programmed as off node devices Endpoint Password The endpoint password is used only for the Remote Programming feature To prevent unauthorized use of the call forward feature all endpoints using Remote Programming should have a password To make the passwords difficult to guess they should not match the extension number or consist of one digit repeated several times NOTE The endpoint password can be up to 8 digits in length The default password is the extension number of the endpoint The password can be changed by entering the Program Station Pass word feature code at the endpoint or when using the R
392. hones Digital phones use the Volume but ton for scrolling backward through displays Programmable Button Up to 35 user programmable buttons can be designated and given default values in the keymap database They can then be reprogrammed to enter any of the trunk group access codes extension numbers or feature codes by the indi vidual phone users as desired Or they can be programmed as System or Station Speed Dial bins or as secondary extension buttons see below The phone user or program mer can return the buttons to default values at any time Save Button Used for saving volume levels or programmed phone features Digital phones use the Volume button by pressing both ends at once Secondary Extension Button Allows an phone user to have one button access to calls ringing or holding at another phone It should be assigned to a button with a lamp so that the secondary extension button can show the call status If desired a phone can have several secondary extension buttons each associated with a different station For details refer to page 168 SPKR Button Used for turning the phone speaker or headset on and off Speed Dial Buttons Each keymap can have up to 10 Speed Dial buttons Each Speed Dial button can be programmed by the phone user to dial one digit string If assigned to a button with a lamp the lamp will show the status of an extension number if it is asso ciated with that button Trunk Group Button These buttons a
393. hould have a password To make the passwords difficult to guess they should not match NOTES the mailbox number or consist of one digit repeated several times This is especially important for the Voice Mail Administrator s mailbox which allows programming access to other mailboxes Mailbox and Extension ID Personal Options Voice Mail mailboxes provide personal options that allow the user to customize messaging functions However before personal mailbox options can be changed the mailbox must be ini tialized by the user For programming instructions to change personal options refer to the applicable Inter Tel Phone User Guide which are listed under Phone User Guides on page 6 Each subscriber s mailbox has the following personal options a Greetings A primary or alternate greeting is played when callers reach a user s mail box Users can change a primary greeting at any time to reflect a change in status and or record and enable an alternate greeting If you and the user elect not to record a per sonal greeting the default system greeting is used The system has a database option called Play Recording Instructions that affects mailbox greetings If this option is enabled the leave a mes sage after the beep system prompt plays following the primary or alter nate greeting If disabled no prompt is played and the beep preceding recording occurs immediately after the primary or alternate greeting ends The Play R
394. hunt group calls will follow the forward and the forwarding destination endpoint will act as the announcement or overflow station Voice Processing System Applications as Announcement Overflow Stations When a voice processing system application is used as an announcement or overflow station calls to the application automatically stop circulating through the hunt group if the caller selects a valid digit translation option such as pressing a digit to select an extension from a Call Routing Announcement menu and the call is transferred This allows the application to send the call to other endpoints without the call being pulled back into the hunt group when a Voice Processing System Applications as Announcement Overflow Stations System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 hunt group endpoint answers the call However if the caller does not dial a valid digit transla tion option the call will be pulled back if a hunt group member answers Standard Display Associate Display Axxess Basic Eclipse Basic Model 8500 NOTE 8520 and 8560 Phones do not send DTMF tones on intercom calls and therefore cannot stop circulating through the hunt group by dialing a digit A Call Routing Announcement application s message can be programmed to include the caller s queue position and or estimated wait time The queue position announcement tells the caller how many calls are ahead of his or her call
395. ic language along with the Use Primary Language and Use Secondary Lan guage A side effect of changing the Language field is that if you change it to Japanese at the same time the endpoint Secondary Language field is set to Spanish then the user will have no way to get back to Japanese if they enter the Change Language feature code This situation occurs because the first time the user enters the feature code the system will toggle the end point to the Use Primary Language The next time the user enters the feature code the system will toggle the language to the endpoint s Secondary Language which is Spanish To avoid this situation simply change the endpoint s Secondary Language to Japanese and the end point s Language field to Japanese Setting an endpoint s Secondary Language field to a specific language will not work across nodes unless all nodes in the system are at least 5 2F6 or later This is because the older systems do not understand specific languages and expect to receive only Primary Language or Secondary Language values NOTE A flag in Database Programming determines the language that will be used by each trunk The language choices are Use Primary Language Use Secondary Language American English British English Japanese or Spanish This field can be set to any specific language so that the system can support more than two languages If the trunk is programmed for the Primary Lan guage callers who reach a voice processin
396. ices Digital Network ITP Inter Tel Protocol LAN Local Area Network LCD Liquid Crystal Display LED Light Emitting Diode LSM Loop Start Module MDF Main Distribution Frame MGCP Media Gateway Control Protocol MOH Music On Hold MRA NAT Material Return Authorization Network Address Translation N A Not Available or Not Applicable as appropriate OAI Open Architecture Interface OPX Off Premises Extension CAUTION without Triangle Page 9 Document Overview INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 1 Abbreviations and Acronyms Continued ABBREVIA TION SPELLED OUT MEANING OSA Operator System Access OSI P2P Open Systems Interconnect Peer to Peer PC Personal Computer PCM Pulse Code Modulation PDA Personal Digital Assistant PDF Portable Document Format PEC PPP Processor Expansion Card Point to Point Protocol PRI Primary Rate Interface PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network QoS Quality of Service REN Ringer Equivalence Number RFI Radio Frequency Interference RJ Registered Jack RMS Root Mean Square RTCP Real time Transport Control Protocol RTP Real time Transport Protocol SSH Secure SHell SIP Session Initiation Protocol SLA Single Line
397. icrophone was muted 2 To return to the conversation You may lift the handset or speak handsfree If the microphone was muted press the lit button or the UNMUTE menu button to speak The Lll button goes off Group Listen Feature The Group Listen feature allows an Inter Tel endpoint user to transmit a conversation over the endpoint speaker while in handset or headset mode This allows other people in the room to lis ten to the conversation However the endpoint microphone remains disabled so that only the headset or handset user can speak This feature cannot be used on a handsfree call The user must be on a call using the handset or a headset before entering the feature code Group Listen cannot be used on single line phones To turn the Group Listen feature on or off during a call While on a call using the handset or a headset press the Special button and enter the Group Listen feature code 312 You hear a confirmation tone and the display shows GROUP LIS TEN ON or GROUP LISTEN OFF The other party will not hear the confirmation tone If using a headset when Group Listen is enabled the volume control adjusts the NOTE volume of the headset not the speaker When the Group Listen feature is active in handset mode the Speaker button lamp will remain unlit This allows the user to place the call into handsfree mode at any time during the call by pressing the Speaker button When the feature is active in headset mode the Spe
398. ide call voice volume Adjust the volume while on an on hook speakerphone outside call To change headset intercom voice volume Model 8620 and 8660 endpoints only Adjust the volume while using the headset and on an intercom call To change background music volume Adjust the volume while listening to music through the endpoint speaker The selected background music volume level is automati cally saved To change alerting tone ring tone volume Adjust the volume while the endpoint is ringing or idle OR while on hook press both edges of the Volume button to hear the currently programmed volume Then adjust the volume To change handset progress tone volume Press the desired arrow while listening to intercom dial tone through the handset To change speakerphone progress tone volume Press the desired arrow while listen ing to intercom dial tone through the speakerphone To save the setting on a digital endpoint Press both edges of the Volume button at the same time The display shows VOLUME SAVED If this step is not performed the phone will return to the previous volume level when the call or tone ends except for the ringing alert tone or background music volume which is automatically saved at the most recent volume level Inter Tel Endpoint Features System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 To return an Inter Tel endpoint to default volume levels While on or off hook en
399. ide phone number dialed or saved at the endpoint up to 48 digits Also used to save numbers at endpoints pro grammed for last number saved Inter Tel endpoints use the REDIAL button Redirect Call 331 This feature allows the endpoint user to route ringing outside intercom and camped on calls to another endpoint hunt group or out side number Routing of the redirected call is still subject to trunk and toll restrictions This feature provides these options in addition to the currently available options which allow the endpoint user to redirect calls to Voice Mail or Do Not Disturb The Redirect Ringing Call fea ture does not require any premium features Reminder Message Reminder Message Cancel 305 306 Not used on single line endpoints The end point user can set reminder messages that signal the endpoint at specific times Or the user can cancel all reminder messages for the endpoint Remote Programming 359 Allows a user to place an endpoint in DND mode forward the endpoint s calls or change the password either from another endpoint or through DISA Reverse Transfer Call Pick Up Picks up a call ringing or holding at an end point or hunt group Review Keys 396 Not used on single line endpoints User pro grammable feature buttons and Station Speed Dial buttons can be viewed using this feature code Ring Intercom Always On Off 377 Enables disables the feature that
400. idered private calls and will not appear on the secondary extension button Normally the secondary extension button will not show intercom calls However if the pri mary phone does not have an IC button intercom calls will appear under a Call button and therefore will appear on the secondary extension button If the primary phone is a single line set all calls will appear on the secondary extension button Secondary Extension Appearances Page 99 Hardware and Endpoints INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Headsets Page 100 After answering a call on the secondary extension button the phone user can transfer it back to the primary endpoint using one of the following methods e Transfer to hold To transfer the call to hold at the primary endpoint press the second ary extension button announce the call if desired and then hang up e Transfer to ring To transfer a call to the primary endpoint press the button and then the secondary extension button You can announce the call if desired before hanging up to complete the transfer Because the calls that appear on the secondary extension button are active only at the primary endpoint they will not follow call forwarding or system forwarding paths at the endpoint with the secondary extension button An electret headset can be connected to Inter Tel Model 8600 8620 and 8660 IP phones or to Inter Tel Model 8500 8520 and 8560 digital phones
401. ies Page 227 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 228 Keypad buttons are used to enter the desired English and or Spanish or Japanese Katakana letters numbers and punctuation Refer to the chart on the next page Only digital display end points can be used for viewing Japanese prompts The station user can switch between numeric and alphanumeric modes Numeric mode WEJ button unlit alphanumeric mode BJ button lit In alphanumeric mode the number of times a button is pressed determines which character is entered For example 77776444844 would enter SMITH When adjoining characters are located under the same button press the button once to advance to the next character For example 5666 BI 66337777 would enter JONES The letters corre spond to the letters printed on the dialpad buttons The Message Lamp on Model 8500 8520 and 8560 phones occupies the upper NOTE right hand corner of the endpoint If programmed for the Message feature the lamp lights in alphanumeric mode The intercom directory is automatically updated whenever usernames and or extension number information is reprogrammed The outside directory is updated whenever a System Speed Dial number or name is reprogrammed Only Administrator phones can view administrator feature codes using the directory If the Diagnostics Mode feature is enabled the diagnostic feature codes can also be viewed
402. if a reset is required it should be done as soon as possible to permit proper system operation NOTE A system reset will drop all calls in progress Entering Alphanumeric Information When entering alphanumeric information such as a username reminder message or Do Not Disturb message press WEJM or USE ALPHA MODE USE NUMERIC MODE menu button to switch back and forth between alphanumeric and numeric mode In numeric mode the dialpad buttons are used to enter numbers 0 9 the pound EA button is used for entering a hyphen and the asterisk EJ button is used for entering a colon For example 1EBIOO would enter 1 00 in numeric mode In alphanumeric mode dialpad buttons are used to enter the desired letters numbers and punctuation The number of times a button is pressed determines which character is entered For example 533266 would enter JEAN in English When adjoining charac ters are located under the same button press to advance to the next character For example 66 6667776 would enter NORM Refer to the table on the following page to program information in alphanumeric mode Synchronizing Network Time Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Note that letters correspond to the letters printed on dialpad buttons Japanese charac ters are available with the standard Multilingual Support feature included in your soft ware license
403. ime while spelling a name the system will play a helpful prompt instructing the caller how to enter a name Display endpoint users will receive Exact Spell instructions all other users will hear Quick Spell instructions Changing the First Last Name Search Each directory can be programmed to be organized by last name or by first name Callers accessing a directory receive system voice prompts that ask them to enter the first or last name of the person for whom they want to leave a message If an Executive Display Professional Display or Model 8560 phone with menu buttons is used to access a directory the caller may switch back and forth from looking up a last name to a first name simply by pressing the corresponding menu button Callers using other Inter Tel phones or single line phones can press E to toggle between last and first name Page 269 Voice Processing Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Listening to the Next Previous Name After a name has been played the caller can listen to the previous name in the directory by pressing Kl To listen to the next name the caller can press E The directory lists are circular That is when the end of the list is reached the next name played will be the first name in the directory Or if the caller scrolls to the beginning of the list the previous name played will be the last name in the directory Accepting a Name When the caller is us
404. in SMDR This situation could occur when a call is connected to a phone on a line without supervision or when a conference call is placed on a line without supervision In a network setting a user can build a conference with party members endpoints and or trunks on other nodes The conference circuits used to build the conference will be allocated from the originating party s node Any party not just the originating party can add a party member to the conference e Ifthe party who adds the new member is on the originating party s node the party will be added to the conference circuit already allocated This conference is still restricted to the four party limit e Ifthe party who adds the new member is not on the originating party s node a new con ference circuit is allocated from the second node Because this allows more than four parties in a conference users should be warned that voice levels can be degraded as more parties are added to the conference Page 202 Conference Calls System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Placing a Conference Call To place a conference call while on a call with an Inter Tel phone 1 Press the button or press the Special button and enter the Conference feature code 5 The party is on conference wait hold hears music and the button flutters The display shows CALL NEXT PARTY TO CNF To place a conference call while on a call with a single lin
405. in airport terminals When they lift the hand set they are connected to a pre programmed station user who can give them a message or connect them to a call e Emergency endpoint The House Phone can be programmed to automatically dial the Emergency Call feature code Using the House Phone for this purpose could save time in an emergency e Service endpoint Customers can use the House Phone s to place orders or receive special services from the lobby For example the House Phone would automatically dial the extension number of a service representative or hunt group number of the ser vice department e Intercom network House Phones could be placed in specific locations throughout a building such as examination rooms in a doctor s office and could be programmed to call a specific endpoint or group of endpoints such as nurses stations Any endpoint may be designated as a House Phone in Database Programming However this feature is usually assigned to single line endpoints The primary Attendant should not be desig nated as a House Phone The number dialed by the House Phone is determined by the station s Speed Dial program ming The number programmed through the database or in Station Speed Dial location 0 is automatically dialed during day mode and the number in location 1 is dialed during night mode This number can be either an extension number or an outside phone number If it is an outside number it must be preceded with a tr
406. in calls forwarded to a station in DND will ring according to the DND rules If desired individual phones can be prevented from using Do Not Disturb by disabling the Do Not Disturb option in the database If a hunt group station is in Do Not Disturb calls to the user s hunt group do not cause the phone to ring but the individual trunk button will flash if all other stations in the hunt group are busy forwarded have hunt group remove enabled or are in Do Not Disturb Hunt group announcement stations and overflow stations can use Do Not Disturb to block hunt group calls by using Do Not Disturb Inter Tel phones may be given Do Not Disturb override permission These stations when reaching a phone in Do Not Disturb can enter the Do Not Disturb Override feature code 373 to place a non handsfree intercom call to the station Single line phones cannot be enabled to use the Do Not Disturb Override feature When a phone is placed in DND the user may select one of 20 system stored messages that will appear on the top line of the display unless Do Not Disturb is enabled while the user is on a call or off hook in which case message 1 is automatically selected When a phone in Do Not Disturb is called by a display endpoint user the caller sees the selected message Remove from Paging Page 235 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 236 Do Not Disturb messages are programmed in the da
407. incipal Station 211 Priority Level 139 Private Calls 175 Private Number extension ID 262 mailbox 270 271 Private Trunk Group 155 Procedures Call Forward to an extension Call Forward to an outside number 219 changing a directory name 63 changing a fax destination number 66 changing a message envelope 64 changing the first last name Directory search 269 changing the transfer method 65 Conference call 203 Dialing System Speed Dial numbers 222 Viewing Station Speed Dial numbers 226 Viewing System Speed Dial numbers 222 Processor Module PM 1 design features 81 Page 367 Index INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Programming date and time notification 65 DSS BLF Buttons 50 private intercom calls 175 System Speed Dial numbers 47 Programming and Using Mini DSS Unit buttons 49 Programming from an Administrator endpoint create or delete endpoints 28 entering alphanumeric information 28 system database programming 28 system options 28 Programming System features 34 Prompts alphanumeric 28 date and time 26 Do Not Disturb 34 multilingual capability 172 network date and time 27 reminder messages 34 System Speed Dial 221 mc Queue see Callback Queue 178 Quick Spell search for Directory name 269 R Realm Message Record Field 251 Recall attendant forwarding of 133 Attendant Recall 133 hold 133 193 195 system forwarding 216 transfer 199 unsupervised call 133 Receive Network
408. industry standard endpoints can be used with the Inter Tel 5000 IP endpoints using Inter Tel Protocol ITP and Session Initiation Protocol SIP modes allow users to communicate using the Local Area Network LAN and the public telephone network IP and SIP hard phones can be identified by the additional ports on the back which are used for inserting LAN and power connections IP and SIP phones operate like digital phones installed on the system except for the limitations listed on IP Phone Limitations on page 91 Hard Multi Protocol Phones Model 8600 Model 8600 The Model 8600 is a multi protocol phone that has no display and a single Ethernet port Although the Model 8600 has a speaker it does not have an external microphone In addition the Model 8600 has one jack that is shared for the headset and handset This phone has no pro grammable buttons and two fixed buttons This phone operates in ITP or SIP mode Refer to IP Operating Modes on page 79 Model 8620 8622 The Model 8620 and 8622 are multi protocol phones and have two line LCDs Both phones have 25 programmable buttons and two fixed buttons Both phones also have dedicated head set and handset jacks The phones both have a speaker and a microphone for full speakerphone operation The only difference between the two phones is that the Model 8620 has one Ethernet port and the Model 8622 has two These phones operate in ITP or SIP mode Refer to IP Operating Modes on
409. ing the Voice Mail feature and accepts a name the caller is transferred to the corresponding mailbox Then the caller will hear either the subscriber s recorded greeting recorded directory name or if no recording has been made the mailbox number XXX is not available prompt The caller can then record a message If the caller is using the Automated Attendant feature and accepts the name the caller is trans ferred to the selected destination endpoint or mailbox if it is available If an endpoint exten sion is dialed and the destination is not available the caller is sent to the associated mailbox if one exists Requesting Additional Information After a name is selected from the directory the caller has the option of requesting additional information When requested the mailbox number extension number and name are played if they have not been disallowed Individual mailboxes and extension IDs can be programmed as Private in Database Program ming A Private number is included in the directory and can be dialed by a caller who knows the number but the associated mailbox and extension number information are not available to the caller only the name is played Mailboxes and extension IDs can also be programmed as Unlisted That means that the num ber will not be included in the directory but can be dialed if the caller knows the extension number Searching the Voice Mail Directory Page 270 To search the voice mai
410. inistrator s No action required just clear the alarm To facilitate emergency services reaching the party in need determine who made the emergency call and where help is needed SYS ALARM 12 CHECK PRINTER The printer is not functioning properly Check the cable and the power cord connections and that the printer is supplied with paper and ribbon SYS ALARM 13 CHECK PRINTER The printer is not functioning properly Check the cable and the power cord connections and that the printer is supplied with paper and ribbon SYS ALARM 14 SET DATE TIME The system real time clock has not been initialized or has been corrupted Set the system time and date as described on page 24 SYS ALARM 15 CALL TECHNICIAN SYS ALARM 16 NO DELAYED MAJOR The real time clock chip is not operating Contact service personnel The system was unable to perform a scheduled delayed major reset because the system was not idle If this alarm recurs contact service personnel Page 50 Network Alarms Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 8 System Alarms Continued ALARM TEXT DESCRIPTION AND ACTION REQUIRED CONTINUED SYS MGR LINK ERR error string The certificate is not yet valid or the system is not connected to the appropriate System Manager server Contact service personnel SYS ALARM 18 SYS MGR INV CERT A
411. inistrators can delete or change messages 01 20 to any value up to 16 characters For feature description and DND message details refer to Do Not Disturb on page 235 When the system has a programmed Primary and Secondary Language the system has default DND messages in both languages Available languages are American English British English Spanish and Japanese The current language of the programming phone determines which list is programmed For a description of the Change Language feature refer to Multilingual Capability on page 172 The Secondary Language translation has the same meaning as the Primary Language message The following table lists the default DND messages Table 6 Default DND Messages 01 DO NOT DISTURB 11 OUT OF TOWN TIL 02 LEAVE A MESSAGE 12 OUT OF OFFICE 03 IN MEETING UNTIL 13 OUT UNTIL 04 IN MEETING 05 ON VACATION TIL 06 ON VACATION 14 WITH A CLIENT 15 WITH A GUEST 16 UNAVAILABLE 07 CALL ME AT 17 IN CONFERENCE 08 AT THE DOCTOR 18 AWAY FROM DESK 09 ON A TRIP 19 GONE HOME 10 ON BREAK 20 OUT TO LUNCH Page 32 When two languages are enabled and DND messages are changed the programmer should attempt to keep the meanings for the messages in both lists the same That is if the Primary Language message 02 is changed to PAGE ME a similar message should be programmed for the Secondary Language message 02 Select an Administrator Data
412. inst the group s Emergency Day Night Outgoing Access List If no trunks are available the system tries to route Emergency Call System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 the call on the next member in the facility group If all of the members are unavailable the call will Camp On to Route Group 1 until a trunk is available e Ifthe user accesses a trunk or trunk group and dials any Emergency Number 1 10 the trunk or trunk group does not validate the endpoint originating the emergency call against the trunk group s Emergency Day Night Outgoing Access List An idle trunk is seized and the system automatically dials the emergency number e Ifthe user accesses ARS and dials any Emergency Number 1 10 a The call is routed to Route Group 1 b The call tries the first facility group in Route Group 1 c The trunk group or node trunk group validates the endpoint originating the emer gency call against the group s Emergency Day Night Outgoing Access List d Ifthe call is denied the call tries the next member in the facility group If each member denies the call the call tries the next facility group in Route Group 1 s list If everything is denied due to Emergency Outgoing Access the call is routed once again to Route Group 1 The system then tries to route the call to the first facility group in Route Group 1 The trunk group or node trunk group does not validate the endpoint origi
413. int Page 242 Enter the extension to be forwarded If you have a display it shows ENTER PASS WORD f you entered an invalid extension number you will hear reorder tones and can try again Enter the extension s password followed by EM If you have a display it shows ENTER FEATURE CODE NOTE If you enter an incorrect password the display will show INVALID PASS WORD and the call is disconnected Station users will hear reorder tones To turn on Call Forward a Enter one of the following Call Forward feature codes f you entered an invalid feature code you will hear reorder tones and can try again Call Forward All Calls 355 Call Forward If Busy 357 Call Forward If No Answer 356 Call Forward If No Answer Busy 358 Enter the forwarding destination This can be an extension number or a trunk access code followed by an outside phone number If the forward destination is an extension number programming is complete and the call is disconnected automatically If the forward destination is an outside number hang up to complete program ming If the station is not permitted to forward to the destination entered you will hear reorder tones and can try again If you hang up before entering a forward destination the programmed forward is canceled To turn off Call Forward Enter 355 and then hang up instead of entering a destina tion You hear a confirmation tone An endpoint user can enter one feature code that
414. ion applies to the incoming call e Start Stop Date If the schedule is going to be active on a single day or for a period of days it will have Start and Stop Dates To have the schedule active on only one day the Start and Stop Dates can be the same day e Days of the Week The schedule can be used on specific days of the week e Specific Times or Day Night Mode The schedule can be set to be active for a specific period of time on the selected day s Or it can be set to be active in day or night mode The following chart shows several samples of STAR entries Note that there are two entries for Labor Day and Memorial Day and that Christmas Day and Christmas Holiday overlap Table 41 STAR Programming Entries ENTRY DESCRIPTION DATE DAY TIME INTERVAL DAY NIGHT APPLICATION Labor Day Sep 1 10 00 AM 2 00 PM 2600 2 Labor Day Sep 1 Both 2601 3 Memorial Day May 30 8 00 AM 5 00 PM 2605 4 Memorial Day May 30 5 00 PM 8 00 AM 2606 5 Christmas Day Dec 25 Both 2607 6 Christmas Holiday Dec 24 Jan 2 Both 2608 7 Weekends Sat Sun Both 2612 8 Lunch Break M F 11 00 AM 1 00 PM 2613 9 Night Shift M F Night 2614 10 Day Shift M F Day 2615 The first entry in the table is checked first and so on until a match is found So it is important that you program the applications in the correct order Scheduled Time based Application Routing STAR Page 277 Voice Processing Features INT
415. irectly to the section by clicking Product Description Administrator Procedures This section provides procedures for performing typical System Administrator and Voice Mail Administrator tasks and activities For further details turn to the section Or if viewing the PDF version of the manual go directly to the section by clicking Administrator Procedures Hardware and Endpoints This section describes the physical equipment that makes up the Inter Tel 5000 Network Communications Solutions Included are the Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 Communication Servers the Digital Expansion Interface DEI proces sor trunk and endpoint modules IP and digital phones and other endpoints For further details turn to the section Or if viewing the PDF version of the manual go directly to the section by clicking Hardware and Endpoints System Features The System Features section describes the business communication features available to Inter Tel 5000 users The section identifies trunk and feature codes phone and endpoint features system management and control features and Administra tor and Attendant features For further details turn to the section Or if viewing the PDF version of the manual go directly to the section by clicking System Features Voice Mail Administrator Document Overview INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 e Voice Processing Features The Voice Processing Features section describes Ba
416. is is especially helpful at endpoints with multiple mailboxes For single line end points a system programming option can be enabled that sends six short message waiting tones when the user lifts the handset or presses the hookswitch IP and digital phones are equipped with a Message Lamp located on the upper right hand corner of the endpoint If programmed for the Message Waiting fea ture this lamp flashes lights whenever the WEJ button flashes lights For details refer to page 117 NOTE Any endpoint voice processing system application hunt group or off node device can be des ignated as the message center for an endpoint However an endpoint cannot be programmed as its own message center If the designated message center is a Voice Mail hunt group the Voice Mail hunt group is called after the Message Wait timer expires When the Voice Mail unit answers the call the called party s mailbox is automatically dialed The caller can then leave a message in the mailbox The called party s IET button flashes and the message display indicates that the message was left by the Voice Mail hunt group Each endpoint user can leave message waiting indications at more than one endpoint If more than one message is received from one endpoint the message display shows only the first mes sage and all other requests are ignored When a endpoint is forwarded or has system forwarding and a caller leaves a Message Waiting indication af
417. is the correct destination press POUND 069 To send this message now press POUND 070 For special delivery options press 9 071 To return to the previous menu press STAR 072 Message canceled 073 To mark this message private press 1 074 To mark this message for certified delivery press 2 075 To mark this message priority press 3 076 Message marked private 077 Message marked certified 078 Message marked priority 079 To send this message to additional mailboxes press POUND 080 To backup within your message or recording press 1 081 To pause at any time press 2 082 To advance press 3 083 To lower the Voice Mail volume press 4 084 To increase volume press 6 085 To save this message press 7 086 To delete this message press 9 087 To skip to the end of your message or re cording press POUND 088 To return to the main menu press STAR 089 To reply to this message press 2 090 To forward a copy of this message to another destination press 3 091 To skip back to the previous message press 4 092 To replay the message envelope press 5 Page 297 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 298 Table 42 Voice Prompts BVM EM and VPU Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT 093 To listen to your next message press 6 094 There are no previous messages 095 Message sav
418. isplayed numbers Scroll to the desired number by pressing the Volume NEXT or PREVIOUS button Use the Executive or Professional Display the Model 8560 phone menu Use the menu buttons to select a Speed Dial location When the display shows ENTER NAME do one of the following To change or program the name Enter the desired name for the Speed Dial number using your dialpad as described on Programming in Alphanumeric Mode on page 237 Refer to the chart on the following page Then press EM or ACCEPT If you make a mistake use the button to back up and erase existing characters or the CLEAR button to erase the whole entry To erase the current name and leave it blank Press CLEAR or press repeatedly until the name is erased Then press EM or ACCEPT To leave the name the same Press Ej or ACCEPT When the display shows ENTER NUMBER do one of the following To enter or change a number Dial the extension number or phone number up to 16 digits including pauses and hookflashes to be stored To include a hookflash or a pause in the number press the Special button once for an asterisk twice for a pound three times for a hookflash or four times for a pause You can enter more than one or hookflash in a row by pressing the button to move to the next character not necessary after pauses f you make a mistake press to back up and erase or press EM or CANCEL to leave the number unchanged then start over at step
419. k access allowed answer permission and the feature being used for example System Hold or Call Transfer determine whether you can pick up a red call from another station Two system wide database programming options control these LEDs e Allow Green LEDs This flag gives the installer the option of having all red green phones and red only phones operate the same or allowing the red green phones to use the green LEDs If this flag is enabled the dual color phones will use both the red and green LEDs If it is disabled the phones will operate in red only mode like the phones without green LEDs In the default state the flag is disabled Executive and Professional Display Speakerphones Page 105 Hardware and Endpoints INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 e Use Green LEDs for Direct Ring This flag determines whether direct ring in calls cause a red or green lamp If the flag is enabled direct ring in calls to your station will be green If disabled all direct ring in calls will cause the LED to be red In the default state this flag is enabled The Allow Green LEDs flag in Database Programming must IMPORTANT be enabled Not applicable for programming multi protocol IP phones Digital Phone Data Port Modules As described in the following paragraphs two types of Data Port Modules that can be con nected to Inter Tel digital Models 8520 and 8560 Executive Display Professional Display Stand
420. l If enabled the display will tell if the call was ringing recalling transferred or holding at the primary phone The secondary extension button can be located on an Inter Tel phoneor on a Mini DSS Unit There are two ways to make a secondary extension button e Create a secondary extension button in the keymap and determine which endpoint it will represent This will be the same for all endpoints assigned to that keymap Set the default value of a user programmable button to secondary extension button in the keymap This allows each phone user assigned to that keymap to determine the associated endpoint for his or her secondary extension button For button programming procedures refer to page 168 User programmable buttons cannot be made into secondary extension buttons by the phone user they can only be created in the database Also the phone user cannot change the button into any other type of button such as a Speed Dial or feature button even though it is assigned to a user programmable button Any Inter Tel phone button can be designated as a secondary extension button but buttons with lamps are recommended so that the secondary extension button can show call status The table on the next page shows the definition for each possible lamp flash rate The secondary extension button shows only calls that appear under the Call buttons at the pri mary phone Any calls on individual trunk buttons at the primary phone are cons
421. l CS 5200 5400 platform The Inter Tel platform supports the following voice pro cessing systems Basic Voice Mail The built in voice processing system Basic Voice Mail BVM pro vides voice mail and voice messaging for system users BVM runs on the Linux oper ating system and does not support Fax On Demand buffered SMDR or Unified Messaging If part of a network mailboxes on an Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 node equipped only with BVM cannot forward messages to or receive messages forwarded from mailboxes on other nodes Enterprise Messaging Enterprise Messaging EM runs on the Windows 2000 oper ating system EM is Inter Tel s the newest voice processing system EM unifies com munication and messaging by providing access to voice mail fax and e mail messages in the user s mailbox In addition EM provides automatic speech recognition capabili ties and built in Unified Messaging features For detailed information about EM see the Enterprise Messaging Installation Manual part no 780 8006 Voice Processing Unit The Voice Processing Unit VPU runs on either the Windows NT or Windows 2000 operating systems The VPU system is installed on an IBM com patible PC that is connected to the Inter Tel system to provide integrated voice process ing features such as Voice Mail Directories Record A Call etc BVM EM and VPU Voice Prompts The following table shows all of the U S English default system voice mail prompts for the Voice
422. l backward 2 To enable or disable a displayed flag Press Kll or the ON menu button to enable the flag Or press Ell or the OFF menu button to disable the flag 3 To save your programming when all flags are set correctly Press EB or ACCEPT to save the new flag settings The display shows DATABASE UPDATED and then returns to the ENTER ENDPOINT OPTION prompt 4 To exit without saving your changes Press or CANCEL to exit The dis play shows NO UPDATE PERFORMED and then returns to the ENTER ENDPOINT OPTION prompt Station Programming Station Programming Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 b Endpoint Information This option allows you to select an Attendant for the end point or program the endpoint s username To select it press Ell or the ENDPOINT INFO menu button The display shows ENTER ENDPOINT INFO OPTION Select one of the following 1 Attendant To assign an Attendant to serve this endpoint press J or the ATTENDANT menu button The display shows ENTER ATTENDANT EXTENSION Enter the desired extension number When the circuit informa tion is displayed press EM again to return to the ENTER ENDPOINT INFO OPTION prompt The display shows DATABASE UPDATED Or to cancel your entry press or CANCEL The display shows NO UPDATE PER FORMED Username To change the username of the endpoint press Ell or the USER NAME menu button The display shows ENTER
423. l directory by saying the name If Automatic Speech Recognition ASR is enabled you are given the option to search for a name in the directory by saying it When prompted say the full name most accurate results first name or last name of the person you are searching for The system searches the voice mail directory and returns a list of names If ASR is not enabled on your voice mail system you can use the dialpad buttons to search the directory see below If one to nine matches are located you can browse the list of returned names and select the correct name from the list If the system locates 10 or more matches you are prompted to say First or Last to limit your search to a first or last name NOTE To search the directory using the endpoint s dialpad digits 1 Dial the Voice Mail access number You hear the recorded system greeting 2 Say Directory or press EM for Directory Services 3 The buttons on your endpoint are labeled with letters Use Quick Spell non display endpoint or single line or Exact Spell display endpoint to enter the desired name as described on page 269 then press EM If you want to exit from the directory without selecting a name press or hang up Listening to the Next Previous Name EM Directories EM Directories Voice Processing Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 4 The Voice Mail application will play the selected name Do one o
424. l endpoint user can always receive private calls by disabling the endpoint Hands free Answering feature using the Handsfree On Off feature code as described in the following paragraph The endpoint user hears repeating double tones when receiving an intercom call To answer while Handsfree Mode is disabled the user must lift the handset or press the Speaker SASEN or button To enable or disable handsfree mode While on hook enter the Handsfree On Off feature code 319 The display shows HANDSFREE MODE ON or OFF Endpoint To Endpoint Calling Receiving Intercom Calls To receive an intercom call on an Inter Tel endpoint If you hear a double tone and a call announcement handsfree call and the Speaker button is lit respond handsfree or lift the handset Display endpoints show TO username to identify the source of the call If you hear repeating double tones private call lift the handset or press the Speaker or button to respond handsfree Display endpoints show INTER COM CALL FROM username to identify the source of the call Model 8660 or 8662 Instead of answering the call you may press one of the fol lowing menu buttons SEND TO V MAIL This option appears only if you have a Voice Mailbox Pressing this button sends the call directly to your mailbox greeting IC CALL TO DND Pressing this button sends Do Not Disturb tones to the caller and allows you to program a Do Not Disturb message If using
425. lation Manual part no 835 2890 Voice Processing System Applications Inter Tel voice processing systems support several voice processing system applications Depending on your site s voice processing system equipment and licensing you may have access to one or more of the following voice processing system features Voice Processing System Applications Page 17 Product Description INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 18 Automated Attendant Automated Attendant is a programmable feature that provides automated call answering services Calls can transfer forward or directly ring in to Automated Attendant When Automated Attendant answers a call it plays a recording that gives dialing instructions After hearing the recording or at any time while it is playing the caller may dial an extension or mailbox number For information about the Automated Attendant feature refer to page 259 Automated Attendant Recall Destination If a call that is transferred by Automated Attendant is not answered before the Transfer Voice Processor timer expires the call recalls the Automated Attendant Recall Destination The Recall Destination announces that the phone is unavailable and allows the caller to leave a message if the phone has an associated mailbox or to dial another extension For information about the Auto mated Attendant Recall Destination refer to page 260 Automatic Fax Detection With Automatic
426. lays flag is enabled Model 8660 IP phone and HOLD SYS HOLD Model 8560 Executive and Professional TRANSFER CNF digital phone users see the following menu FLASH with Flash on the first menu and Transfer MUTE MORE To Hold on the More menu Enabling the Alternate Keyset Menu flag allows Centrex features to be accessed more easily using the FLASH menu option Features Common to IP and Digital Inter Tel Endpoints Page 93 Hardware and Endpoints INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Figure 4 Model 8560 8660 or 8662 LCD Screen LCD WITH SIX 16 CHARACTER LINES 8 LCD MENU SELECTION BUTTONS Figure 5 Executive Display LCD Screen LCD WITH SIX 16 CHARACTER LINES 8 LCD MENU SELECTION BUTTONS 0000 Two Line Display The Model 8620 8622 IP phone Models 8520 and Standard and Associate Display digital phones are equipped with a two line displays that support 16 characters per line When the phone is not in use the display shows the extension number username time of day and date Other displays include reminder messages DND messages numbers dialed call sources elapsed time of calls current call costs error messages phone status programming messages etc The displayed information is described throughout the instructions in this sec tion of the guide Page 94 Model 8560 8660 or 8662 LCD Screen Hardware and Endpoints INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE
427. le endpoint flag called Transient Call Indication On Call Answer that determines whether the user sees a call display when reverse transferring a call or using a sec ondary extension button If the flag is enabled the display indicates whether the call was ring ing recalling transferred or holding at the other endpoint To reverse transfer a call EITHER Lift the handset Inter Tel endpoints can remain on hook and enter the Reverse Transfer Call Pick Up feature code 4 then dial the extension or pilot num ber where the call is ringing or holding You are automatically connected to the caller OR Lift the handset Inter Tel endpoints can remain on hook and dial the extension or pilot number where the call is ringing or holding then press the Special button or hookflash and enter the Reverse Transfer Call Pick Up feature code 4 You are automatically connected to the caller Page 201 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Conference Calls Users can establish multi party conference calls without operator assistance There can be up to four parties in a conference In addition to the initiating endpoint the conference can include any combination of up to three intercom and or outside calls During a conference call some reduction in voice volume may be noticed NOTE depending on CO trunk quality During a conference if any user presses a dialpad butto
428. leeeee eee 54 Resetting the Internal Modem is codes ecd REX RR used eRRER E dar EN 54 Using the Network Group Diagnostics Feature l lleeeeleeeeee eee 55 Seizing a DeVIGeS ess toonen iagi rnan rea EER a REG EEA EA EE RE xe 55 Freezing Unfreezing the System History llle 56 Freezing Unireezing the Network History ss scs do eee eh nn 56 Voice Mail Administrator Procedures cece cece cece cece eee eececeens 57 Recording a Broadcast Messages 2 602246 cine ese e pe sena ye 58 Maintaining Mailboxes and Group Lists leleeeeeeeeeeeeeA 58 Voice Mail Administrator Capabilities llle 58 Mailbox and Extension ID Personal Options 0 00 00 eee eee 59 Change Procedures for Mailbox Personal Options 0065 60 Changing A Group List Name 21221520400 dues soe bee RPexaberere adds 64 Importing Pax Documents 242922 eR RAE ERE beeen deeeeag aeeeketes deuseecds 64 Creatine Audiotex Recardilgs socer ach bw RPSRRPERRIWERP GAY eR P E REESE 65 Recording Custom Voice Mail Prompts 0 0 cece eee eee eA 67 Administrator Programming Planning Sheets eeeleeeesees 69 Page 21 Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Introduction When programming your site s database the Inter Tel certified technician can program a phone s extension as both a System Administrator and a Voice Mail Administrator Som
429. lications are combined to provide the Voice Mail feature Voice Mail and Message Notification Retrieval Voice Mail This application handles all calls that are directed to Voice Mail other than the Message Notification Retrieval application placed by subscrib ers and nonsubscribers Callers will hear the main company greeting followed by a menu of available options Endpoints can forward or transfer calls directly to their mailbox using this appli cation s extension number This application can also be the mes sage center for the subscribers endpoints Message Notification Retrie val Only one Message Notifi cation Retrieval application may be created for the system When endpoint users respond to mes sage indications left by Voice Mail they reach the Message notification Retrieval applica tion and are prompted only for their password Endpoint users and outside callers gain access to the Voice Mail application in the following ways By dialing the phone number or extension number assigned to the Voice Mail application By being transferred to Voice Mail by Automated Attendant CALL TO VOICE MAIL Y Voice mail answers and plays a greeting followed by a menu of options Y Y Caller selects option Caller does not select an option Y Y Y Call is sent to Caller uses the Call is sent to mailbox Or a directory and the Voice Mail subscriber can select the designated
430. line s to which such connection is to be made and shall provide the telephone company with the following information e Complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules e FCC registration number e USOC numbers of required interface jacks see chart on next page e Service order code SOC as applicable see chart on next page e Facility interface code FIC see chart on next page e REN as applicable see chart on next page The REN is used to determine the number of devices that can be connected to a single telephone line so that all the devices will ring or otherwise respond to incoming calls Each device that can be connected to a telephone line has NOTE a REN value When the sum of device RENs on a line exceeds the maximum REN value the line can support usually 5 0 some or all of the devices may not ring or respond appropriately To identify the REN for lines in a telephone service area contact the telephone company The telephone company should also be given notice upon final disconnection of this equipment from the particular line s It is also the responsibility of the customer to provide the telephone company with reg istration numbers of any other devices which are configured for connection to the tele phone network This equipment cannot be used on public coin service provided by the telephone com pany Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs Contact the state public utility commission public ser
431. list always beginning with the first endpoint on the list to check each endpoint in the hunt group and then the overflow endpoint for one type of call at a time If there is more than one call of the same type at the selected endpoint the call that was received by the endpoint first is picked up Holding calls and queue callbacks cannot be picked up 1 Calls to the hunt group pilot number 2 COcalls a Direct ring in calls b Transferred calls c Recalls d Camped on calls 3 IC calls a Direct ring in calls b Transferred calls c Recalls d Camped on calls Group Call Pick up can only retrieve calls from endpoints that are currently logged in to the hunt group You cannot use this feature to pick up calls from members who have logged out using the Hunt Group Remove feature code Also Group Call Pick up cannot be used on ACD Hunt Groups that use Agent IDs It can only be used on hunt groups that use lists of extensions If the ACD Hunt Group flag is enabled the Group Call Pick up flag will be dimmed NOTE To pick up a call that is ringing at a hunt group 1 Lift the handset and or enter the Reverse Transfer feature code 4 You hear a single progress tone 2 Dialthe pilot number of the hunt group where the call is ringing ACD Agent ID Automatic Connect Flag System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Inter Tel endpoints If the system is programmed for direct
432. lists cannot place or directly receive outside calls they are limited to intercom calls conferences transferred calls and retrieving calls on system hold A call on system hold can only be picked up at the endpoint that placed it on hold or at an endpoint that has an individual trunk button and has allowed answer and or outgoing access for that trunk A private trunk group with one or more trunks can be established by programming outgoing access ring in and allowed answer permission for the trunk group to only one endpoint Answer Feature Code For calls that are ringing or holding at the endpoint the user may enter the Answer feature code 351 or press the button When more than one call is ringing or holding the following priority list determines which call is answered first e Ringing calls ring ins recalls callbacks or transfers are answered in the order they were received e Calls on individual hold are answered in the order they were placed on hold Automatic Route Selection ARS ARS is a money saving feature that allows the system to be programmed to select the least expensive route for placing outgoing calls It can be used for placing outgoing calls and trans ferring or forwarding calls to outside phone numbers Endpoints can be restricted to using only ARS for placing outgoing calls Also because users do not have direct access to trunks on other nodes ARS is the only way users can place calls using the other nodes
433. ll To return to the caller on individual hold Inter Tel endpoints Lift the handset and or press the fluttering button for intercom calls or the Call button or individual trunk button or the button for outside calls Single line endpoints Lift the handset and enter Individual Hold feature code 336 System Hold NOTE This feature does not apply to single line endpoints To place an outside call on system hold Inter Tel endpoints only 1 While on a call press the Special button and enter the System Hold feature code 335 You hear intercom dial tone and the associated Call button or individual trunk button flutters 2 Hang up or place another call To return to a call on system hold Inter Tel endpoints only At any Inter Tel endpoint that shows a fluttering individual trunk button for the call and has allowed answer and or outgoing access for that trunk lift the handset and or press the fluttering button At the Inter Tel endpoint that placed the call on hold press the fluttering individual trunk or Call button Intercom calls and conferences cannot be placed on system hold If you NOTE attempt to do so the call or conference will actually be placed on individ ual hold Page 194 Individual Hold System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Consultation Hold Hold Recall To use Consultation Hold single line phones only 1 While on a call hookflash
434. llowing interfaces e A two line liquid crystal display LCD panel with control buttons e Three Universal Serial Bus USB ports that provide for system monitoring by a techni cian for backing up voice mail and for installing the system s licensing security key e A Bay for an Inter Tel formatted CompactFlash memory card that stores system appli cations the system database and voice mail prompts and received messages Page 77 Hardware and Endpoints INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Back of the Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 Chassis The back of the Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 chassis provides the following interfaces e Two loop start trunk circuits in a single port preprogrammed for connection to the local telephone company central office CO local exchange in Europe These circuits along with the two built in single line circuits form the Inter Tel 5000 s Power Fail Bypass feature The default settings can be reprogrammed by a certified Inter Tel tech nician e Two single line circuits in a single port preprogrammed for connecting analog phones These circuits along with the two built in loop start trunk circuits form the Inter Tel 5000 s Power Fail Bypass feature The default settings can be reprogrammed by a certi fied Inter Tel technician Power Fail Bypass If power to the system is interrupted an inter nal electrical relay automatically connects the two single line circuits with the
435. lt extension number The voice mail system Anunknown caller An outside caller at phone number If the message is from an extension ID or a mailbox the pro NOTE grammed username will be shown in parentheses after the number for example mailbox 1000 ADMIN e Received On Contains the date and time that the voice mail was received by the mail box e Priority Private or Certified If the voice mail message was sent with a delivery option the body will contain the line Message marked PRIORITY PRIVATE or CERTIFIED gt Note that this is for informational purposes only and does not affect the e mail message itself For example if a voice mail message is marked for certified delivery the sender will receive a confirmation when the recipient listens to the voice mail message using the mailbox However the sender will not receive confirmation when the recipient reads the e mail Integrated Solution Installation Example Page 289 Voice Processing Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 290 e WAV File Attachment Appears as a file with the name vm wav To listen to the mes sage the user must play the wav file using multimedia software such as Sound Recorder Outlook Client Based Solution NOTE If you are using Microsoft Outlook 2002 with Unified Messaging client 2 3xx you will need to install Microsoft Office 2002 Service Pack update SP3 Th
436. m in night mode or cancels night mode While in night mode the night toll and trunk restriction lists are used Periodic Diagnostics On Off Program System Speed Dial 9825 9801 Periodic diagnostics extends and improves the functionality and checks and reconcilia tions performed on various resources in the system Programs system wide Speed Dial numbers when followed by location codes 000 999 Set Network Date Time 9810 Programs the time and date for all nodes in the system Local time and date can also be reset by individual nodes Set Time Date 9800 Programs system time and date Page 126 Administrator Feature Codes System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 20 Administrator Feature Code Definitions Continued CODE FEATURE NAME US EUROPE DEFINITION Synchronize Network Time 9811 Synchronizes the minutes past the hour across the network NOTE If a node s time is off by more than 30 minutes synchronizing the minutes may cause the hour to change Also network time is automatically synchronized every day at 12 30 AM 00 30 using the time set ting on the node with the lowest number Diagnostics Feature Codes The Diagnostics Mode feature code 9900 in the US 9100 in Europe must be entered at the Administrator s phone to enable system diagnostic mode before the following feature codes can
437. m is reset or when the phone line cord is first plugged in or removed and replaced The extension number and assigned username appear on the top line of the display and the node number and circuit number appear on the bottom line for example circuit 1 1 1 on node 2 would appear as 2 1 1 1 After the five sec ond identification display the phone returns to the appropriate display depending on its current status Default Inter Tel Phone Feature Buttons When the system is in the default state all phones are in the same keymap group and have the following feature buttons Feature code descriptions start on page 118 The Special button is represented by keycaps with ES on the Inter Tel phone The following table summarizes the functions of phone feature buttons Table 14 Feature Buttons BUTTON FUNCTION CALL BUTTONS 1 4 Selects an outgoing trunk if idle or answers a call on the button IC Selects a voice channel or picks up a holding or camped on inter com call DND Programmable button 1 Do Not Disturb On Off 372 LCD Contrast Adjustment Page 95 Hardware and Endpoints INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Keymaps Page 96 Table 14 Feature Buttons Continued BUTTON FUNCTION PROGRAMMABLE BUTTONS 2 6 14 16 Undefined values Can be programmed with any feature code trunk access code or extension number or can be programmed as an
438. maintenance Record and select Custom Audiotex Recordings e Extension IDs are used in conjunction with transferring calls through the Automated Attendant or using the Extension Directory The extension ID allows callers to be trans ferred to endpoint extensions which do not have mailboxes and allows the endpoint user to record a directory name and set up a password Calls transferred from the Automated Attendant or a Call Routing Announcement application to a endpoint with a mailbox can be screened announced or unannounced Separate program ming flags determine the methods used for transferring calls to endpoints with mailboxes During database programming each mailbox is assigned a dial 0 operator destination When a caller presses Ell while listening to the mailbox s personal greeting or recording instructions or while recording a non subscriber message the operator destination is called The operator can be one of the following types e Mailbox If the operator is a mailbox the caller will hear the operator destination s per sonal greeting after pressing IU e Endpoint extension number If the operator destination is an extension number the caller will hear the Automated Attendant transfer prompt while the call is placed to the Mailboxes Voice Processing Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 extension number Please hold while I transfer your call to unless it has been
439. mation printed on an additional line is preceded with the character to indicate the continua tion Auxiliary When necessary additional information may be printed as part of a message on separate lines This additional information is referred to as auxiliary text To iden tify this text as pertaining to the previous message each line is preceded with the lt character System Error Message Print Page 251 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Power Fail Bypass Capability The Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 chassis contains relay contacts that can be used for power fail bypass This feature allows one or two single line phones to connect to predetermined trunks in the event of a processor board failure or a power failure The single line phones and CO trunks are required Customized System Programming Reports Customized system programming reports can be created through the database The program mer can select the programming area to be reported and then select the information that will be included When extension numbers are listed in a report they can be sorted by name extension number or circuit number Reports can also be titled Audio Diagnostics Page 252 The Audio Diagnostics feature code 320 allows users to generate diagnostics information for audio problems When the Audio Diagnostics feature is initiated users are prompted to answer questions about the audio
440. me or call information is displayed at the endpoint If it is enabled the Outside Call Party Information Has Priority flag described below determines what is Trunk Features System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 displayed If it is disabled the programmed trunk group username will appear on the display In the default state this flag is enabled e Outside Party Call Information Has Priority If the Expanded CO Call Information flag is enabled as described above this flag determines what information is displayed at the endpoint If enabled any call that is received on a trunk that provides outside call information for example Caller ID or ANI will be identified on the endpoint s dis play with the call information If disabled the display will show the DID or DNIS information for the call if available In the default state this flag is enabled e Display Outside Name If this flag is enabled the endpoint user can switch between the outside party name and number when connected to a CO call with outside party information The endpoint user enters the Display Outside Party Name On Off feature code 379 In addition the enhanced ring in displays will provide the user with more information such as both Caller ID name and number if available or tell the user if a Caller ID number is blocked or out of area This is an endpoint flag that applies to Inter Tel endpoints only In the default s
441. ment 22 4c c2 he5204eeehese RR RR RR RE boe dos 95 Node and Circuit Number on Power Up seleeeseeeeeeeeeeee 95 Default Inter Tel Phone Feature Buttons llseeleeleeeee eee 95 KOvillape RPM MT M 96 Secondary Extension Appearances 0 2 cece eee eee eect cence 99 Headsets ied exa bor e bc Ope eR Re PRE CR Reed eee 100 Connecting a Headset s 2 254 502i2e0e08 centers dee I pde Rd Des edades 100 Disconnecting a Headset i262c22seebsbbvi baeetaceeabadavidasdidaeix 101 Digital Endpoinls 65 i0s8 60 40s h0ewn cash sees aethiews cock eneees RRAREAR E ced 101 Inter Tel Digital Phones 1544 2e dci d meh hh ER CIC REC ER CR RR aan 102 Display and Nondisplay Digital Phones llllllleleeeleleee 102 Executive and Professional Display Speakerphones slslulss 102 Enhanced Speakerphones for Digital Phones eese 103 Digital Phone Flashing Light Indicators lleleeeele eese 104 Red ald Green LEDS oo esos sedeebs RS xls Sud edo Rap db e ag a EXE e 105 Digital Phone Data Port Modules 0 0 0 cece eee eee 106 Personal Computer Data Port Module 0 0 cece eee eee eee 106 Modem Data Port Module s sos2 oa 66555 iin eR RRIE ERE Een Roe wees 106 Single Line Endpoints iss oa cscs ose RAF T RAEEEERUERERAE AR AKA RR 106 Types of Single Line Endpoints au ep 46 rm rhe eR m p hee eme dcs 106 Off Premises Extensions OPX 0 0 c ccc ee
442. menu button to look up and select a number If the Forward destination is invalid because of toll restriction ARS Only restriction no outgoing access for the trunk no ARS or ARS NOTE route group for the dialed number or an invalid dialed number you hear reorder tones and must enter a new destination The display explains why the call was denied Inter Tel endpoints If off hook hang up You hear a progress tone and the button is lit The display shows FWD condition TO XXXX If you attempted to for ward calls to a endpoint that is unconditionally forwarded to your endpoint or if the for warding path already has 10 endpoints your display shows INVALID FORWARD PATH you hear reorder tones and you must enter a new destination Single line endpoints Hang up How to Forward Calls to an Extension or Outside Number Speed Dial System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 To cancel any call forward request e Executive Display Professional Display and Model 8560 phones Press the button and then press the FWD OFF menu button You hear a progress tone and the button is unlit The display shows ANY CALL FORWARD CANCELED e Inter Tel endpoints Press the lit button the Speaker button lights then press the Speaker button both buttons go off You hear a progress tone Display endpoints show ANY CALL FORWARD CANCELED e Single line endpoints Lift the handset enter any Call Forwar
443. mer expires or you place the trunk back in service Trunk Programming Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Trunk groups Day Night Answer Access You can program separate lists for phones with allowed answer access in day and night modes Day Night Ring In You can program separate lists of endpoints with ring in for day and night modes Change Toll Restrictions You can program toll restriction classes of service for the trunk groups Classes of service are described in detail on page 158 Trunk List Each trunk group has a programmed list of individual trunks The Trunk Database Programming process is summarized in the flowchart shown on page 43 See page 69 for a Program Planning Sheet If necessary at any time during the following procedure you can press the aster NOTE isk EJ or Speaker button to cancel programming and discard any unsaved changes Entering extension numbers When the procedure asks you to enter an endpoint trunk or trunk group extension number you can use any of the following methods If you enter an invalid extension number you hear reorder tones and must try again Enter a complete number Enter the extension number using your dialpad When the circuit information is displayed press EM again to continue Enter a partial number Enter a partial extension number then press EM the high end of the Volume button or the EB menu
444. ming and what the user dialed as described in the following scenarios e Ifthe user dials the Emergency Call feature code from an endpoint with a trunk or trunk group programmed as the Emergency Extension the Emergency Call feature routes the call based on the endpoint s Emergency Extension The trunk or trunk group does not validate the endpoint originating the emergency call against the trunk group s Emer gency Day Night Outgoing Access List An idle trunk is seized and the system automat ically dials Emergency Number 1 e Ifthe user dials the Emergency Call feature code from an endpoint with ARS pro grammed as the Emergency Extension a The Emergency Call feature routes the call based on the endpoint s Emergency Extension b The call is routed to Route Group 1 C The call tries the first facility group in Route Group 1 d The trunk group or node trunk group validates the endpoint originating the emer gency call against the group s Emergency Day Night Outgoing Access List e If the call is denied it tries the next member in the facility group If each member denies the call the call tries the next facility group in Route Group 1 s list If everything is denied due to Emergency Outgoing Access the call is routed once again to Route Group 1 The system then tries to route the call on the first facility group in Route Group 1 The trunk group or node trunk group does not validate the endpoint originating the emergency call aga
445. mmable dial rule tells the system to include the extension number of the endpoint or voice processing system application that is being used to place the call Dial Rule 7 Add This dial rule adds a pound to the number dialed This dial rule can be programmed When ARS is selected the user dials the number including the area code if needed and the system does the following 1 Checks the dialed number and matches the dialing pattern to a route group The system checks the route groups in numerical order and selects the first group that applies to the dialing pattern of the number that was dialed If the Emergency Call feature is programmed to use ARS the emergency NOTE calls will always go through Route Group 1 regardless of route group pro gramming Selects a facility group If all of the trunks are busy and the endpoint is enabled for ARS camp on the call will camp on to the facility group until a trunk is available Checks for toll restrictions and outgoing access Before the number is modified by the facility group s dial rules the system checks the endpoint toll restrictions and outgo ing access to determine whether the call is allowed If allowed the system continues to the next step If not allowed the system sends reorder tones and the call is not placed All calls placed using ARS are toll restricted regardless of whether the selected trunk is subject to toll restriction However Emergency Call fe
446. moves to the next endpoint e If hunt group camp on is allowed and all endpoints on the hunt group list are unavail able busy in Do Not Disturb or with hunt group remove enabled an intercom or out side call will camp on and the endpoints will receive the following indications Busy endpoints receive hunt group camp on tones if enabled and display If there is an individual trunk button associated with the trunk it shows ring flash There is a programmable endpoint flag that can disable the camp on tones for hunt group calls Endpoints with Hunt Group Remove enabled receive camp on tones and display If there is an individual trunk button associated with the trunk it shows ring flash Endpoints with Do Not Disturb enabled receive no camp on indications but if there is an individual trunk button associated with the trunk it shows ring flash The first endpoint that becomes available receives ringing and a flashing trunk or Call button The camp on and ring flash indications end at the other endpoints The associated trunk button will be steadily lit at those endpoints to show that the trunk is busy e If hunt group camp on is not allowed and all endpoints on the hunt group list are unavailable the hunt group members will not have any camp on indications Callers will hear one of the following Intercom callers will hear busy signals Callers on a trunk not needed to return busy signal such as a T1 E amp M will hear busy
447. mple Call Routing Announcement Tree Page 267 Voice Processing Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Directories Page 268 The following two types of voice processing system directories can be enabled or disabled in the system e The Voice Mailbox Directory is a list of mailbox subscribers their recorded names and mailbox numbers e The Automated Attendant Directory provided to all Auto Attendant callers is a list of all mailbox subscribers and extension ID owners and their recorded names The directories can be selected in the following ways e From the Voice Mail or Automated Attendant main menu Say Directory if Auto matic Speech Recognition is enabled e From the Voice Mail or Automated Attendant main menu Say Directory or press the EB button e Using a Call Routing Announcement application Press the Digit Translation digit designated for directory access See page 266 for a detailed explanation of digit trans lation e As a Voice Mail subscriber Subscribers can access the directory by saying Direc tory or by pressing EM whenever they are prompted to enter a mailbox number Nonsubscribers can only use ASR to search the directories if ASR has NOTE been enabled for the directory Subscribers can only use ASR to search the directories if ASR is enabled for the directory and the mailbox If a directory is disabled or empty because no names are record
448. mpts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 106 Message received from an outside caller N A 107 To record an introduction with a copy of this To record an introduction with a copy of this message press one message say Record or press one 108 To change your personal greeting press one To change your personal greeting say Greet ing or press one 109 To change your name in the directory press To change your name in the directory say two Name or press two 110 To change your password press three To change your password say Password or press three 111 To change your message envelope press four To change your message envelope say Envelope or press four 112 To replay the message press one To replay the message say Replay or press one 113 To select your primary greeting press one To select your primary greeting say Primary or press one 114 To select your alternate greeting press two To select your alternate greeting say Alter nate or press two 115 To select the system greeting press three To select the system greeting say System or press three 116 After the tone please record your greeting N A then press pound 117 Greeting saved N A 118 After the tone please record your name then N A press pound 119 Name saved
449. ms Use diagnostic mode features Freeze and unfreeze the database history for the local node or any node in the net work using programmed freeze zones Print error logs Seize specific devices for troubleshooting purposes Placing the Local System in Day or Night Mode You can use a System Administrator phone to place the local node in day or night mode The day or night mode selects preprogrammed database lists to determine trunk access toll restric tion emergency outgoing access etc for the phones in the system Active calls are not affected when the Day Night mode is changed To view Day Night Mode status While on hook enter the Night Ring On Off feature code 9860 You hear a single confirma tion tone The display shows NIGHT MODE IS ON or OFF If night mode was turned on the display shows THE SYSTEM IS IN NIGHT MODE until day mode is turned on Placing Network Nodes in Day or Night Mode You can use a System Administrator phone to place one or more nodes in day or night mode The day night mode determines which lists the system will use for trunk access toll restric tion etc The network determines the day night mode status of a call based on the day night mode status of the node where the trunk resides To turn night mode on 1 While on hook enter the Enable Network Night feature code 9861 2 When prompted to enter a node number enter 01 63 for the desired node number To select all nodes ent
450. n Headset Off Headset On Off 315 316 317 LCD Contrast Control 303 e Show IP Address 300 Feature Codes The two feature codes in the table below function differently depending on the mode the phone is operating in Table 12 Feature Codes with Different Meanings for ITP and SIP Modes FEATURE NAME JIS ITP MODE SIP MODE CODE Show IP Address Displays the system Displays the IP Display Time Date 300 date and time user address of the phone name and extension Page 86 ITP and SIP Feature Exceptions Table 12 Feature Codes with Different Meanings for ITP and SIP Modes Hardware and Endpoints INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 FEATURE FEATURE NAME CODE ITP MODE SIP MODE Show Version 9928 Displays the version Displays the firmware Diagnostics 9128 in and date of the call version on the phone Show Version Europe processing software Voice mail displays In SIP mode voice mail displays are not supported however the user will still receive audio prompts IP Phone Flashing Light Indicators The phone Call buttons trunk buttons Speed Dial buttons Hunt Group buttons and some of the feature buttons contain light emitting diodes LED LED flash rates indicate the status of the endpoints trunks and features For phones operating in ITP or SIP mode the following table summarizes the meanings of the LED flash rates in interru
451. n the DTMF tones will be heard by all other parties in the conference This allows conference callers access to DTMF controlled devices Using the call transfer feature described on page 197 an established conference can be trans ferred to another endpoint While the transfer is taking place the parties in the conference remain connected to each other and may converse The transfer will appear at the destination endpoint in the same manner as any other transferred call along with a CONFERENCE TFR FROM user name display and may be answered by the party NOTICE While Inter Tel systems are designed to be reasonably secure against CO trunk misuse by outside callers there is no implied warranty that the Inter Tel system is invulnerable to all forms of unauthorized use For example unauthorized use could occur if the CO local exchange does not provide supervision on the telephone lines connected to the system Without CO local exchange line supervision a party might not be disconnected from the Inter Tel system when they hang up Without line supervision it is possible for the caller to remain connected to a CO local exchange trunk circuit that is connected to the Inter Tel system If the caller then begins dial ing the call could be placed through the Inter Tel system and would then be billed to the Inter Tel system s owner The Inter Tel system cannot check or control this type of call for toll restriction and may not register the call
452. n INOGBS s 5 ace vp enh oa dase ERR EAE RA ERA d Y p eet A Rs 266 Directories 222a Rau Ra Pea RS ERE OR ERRARE E ERE ERE E ER PEE E ERE RES 268 Locating a Name usse paR ERREUR RR RA Ra RRRPEIRGE REPRORI RES D ade 269 Changing the First Last Name Search 0 0 cece eee eee eee 269 Listening to the Next Previous Name 2 26 43eee0sbeeneeuesdevnsesuees 270 Accepting a Nai eiue easx x ker RUE Ee d eq R TIER re ERE RE EG qd RE 270 Requesting Additional Information lilseeeeeeee ee 270 Searching the Voice Mail Directory a2 veaexda ER A RREEAREARRA EZAMESATYEERE ES 270 EM DIr CLOFIGS 2s ERRARE RSS a ERA RR ERREUR NEA S ES 271 E mail Reader i essaie nA A ROCK RACER ORA UCET RR CRUCE RR AURORA AUN URA ROWER ERROR SOS 274 Fax On D ma d vesosossceorset3esee X2 eR re tie ee ECCO E ERPPESE e ee Rene ee 274 RecordeAc ull siut A he Shs YN AERAGXHRUEREEECKE RN RI EREAEETENXNGN d EG PY ENG NS 276 Scheduled Time based Application Routing STAR eere 271 Page 257 Voice Processing Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 CONTENTS PAGE Voice Mall soa skaaxu ks ERES E EARRRVEEA S EREEERRAR REA ERE RARERE ER EXCESS 279 Voice Mail and Message Notification Retrieval Applications 4 2779 Elec PR LT UTI 280 GOUD Lists ue sospes n waded ENG ER E RA SUN SC RCRCROES IHE CAT Rd 281 Message Notification to Endpoints 2 0 0 0 eee eee se 281 Cascading
453. n Manual part number 835 2195 Page 81 Hardware and Endpoints INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Hard IP Phones Model 8660 The Model 8660 IP phone operates in ITP mode and supports both 10Base T and 100Base TX interfaces The phone has a six line display with menu buttons speaker and microphone pro grammable and fixed buttons and dedicated headset and handset jacks This phone operates in ITP mode IP PhonePlus The IP PhonePlus operates in ITP mode This phone has a six line display with menu buttons speaker and microphone and programmable and fixed buttons It has one jack that is shared by the headset and handset Model 8601 SoftPhone for Pocket PC The Model 8601 is a software based SIP soft phone that runs on selected Pocket PC 2002 or later Personal Digital Assistant PDA platforms This phone operates in SIP mode only For a list of supported PDAs and information about installation and programming the Model 8601 refer to the Model 8601 SoftPhone for Pocket PC Installation Manual part no 835 2736 Models 8664 8665 and 8668 Wireless Phones Gateways Page 82 Model 8664 8665 and 8668 are wireless handheld portable phones These phones operate like a Model 8660 IP phone and support IPT mode For details about these phones refer to the NetLink SVP Server and Model 8664 8665 Installation Manual part no 935 4521 For instructions to operate the wireless phones refer to
454. n a Station Speed Dial location select a different number name terminate the direc tory routine or switch to the other directory A directory search can be performed when a call is waiting on conference or transfer hold at the station In a network setting a user can see intercom directory names and extension numbers for all devices that are programmed as off node devices on the local node Devices that are repre sented by wildcard off node extensions will not show up in the intercom directory To use the directory the user enters a letter a string of letters a valid extension number or a valid feature code If searching for a name the full name need not be entered The system will find the closest match and show the number and its associated name on the endpoint display Or the user can scroll alphabetically through the stored list of names It is not possible to scroll through the extension numbers or feature codes numerically extensions and features scroll alphabetically Directory names can include English Spanish or Japanese characters or a combination In the directories English Spanish characters are alphabetized before the Japanese characters There fore Japanese names will be at the end of the list When using Japanese as the Primary or Secondary language you can only NOTE search for last names in IC and CO directories You cannot search based on the first name Intercom Speed Dial and Feature Code Director
455. n day and time informa tion defined in the table the identified applications are programmed to play the greet ings and STAR routes the call to the predetermined application For information about STAR refer to page 277 e Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Information Storage SMDR informa tion is stored only on the VPU voice processing system hard disk then processed using call record sorting software BVM and EM do not support SMDR information storage e Voice Mail and Message Notification Retrieval Other than messages that are sent through the Message Notification Retrieval application Voice Mail handles all voice mail calls directed to it If your system is using EM and E Mail Reader is enabled for the mailbox users have access to advanced messaging features using their advanced mailbox With Voice Mail callers hear the main company greeting followed by a menu of available options Message Notification Retrieval provides voice mail message noti fication and quick mailbox access For information about Voice Mail and Message Notification Retrieval refer to page 279 e Unified Messaging The Unified Messaging UM feature links the voice processing system with e mail and or provides outgoing fax capabilities Depending on which voice processing system you are using you may have UM version 2 2 or 2 3 For infor mation about UM refer to page 284 Voice Processing System Applications Page 19 Product Description INTER TEL CS 520
456. n display endpoint users hear a confirmation tone Enter the location code 000 999 for the desired number Jf you have not selected a trunk press EJ or the ACCEPT menu button to accept the number and automatically select a trunk Or press the ARS button a trunk button a trunk group button or the button to select a trunk The number is automatically dialed Display end points show the number dialed unless it is a non display number If you hear reorder tones your endpoint is restricted from dialing the selected number If the display shows INVALID BIN NUMBER you entered an invalid Speed Dial location code To dial System Speed Dial numbers at a single line endpoint 1 2 Lift the handset and select an outgoing trunk Hookflash and enter the System Speed Dial feature code 381 You hear a confirmation tone Enter the location code 000 999 for the desired number The number is automatically dialed If you hear reorder tones your endpoint is restricted from dialing the selected number Viewing System Speed Dial Numbers System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Station Speed Dial Station Speed Dial Each endpoint user can program up to ten 16 digit Station Speed Dial numbers Single line endpoints use Speed Dial location codes 0 9 Inter Tel endpoints use Speed Dial buttons if programmed in the Inter Tel endpoint keymap or location codes 0 9 Together the lamps in
457. n hold the caller hears music if equipped There are three hold applications in the system Individual Hold places the call on hold at one endpoint It can then be picked up directly at that endpoint or it can be picked up at another endpoint using the Reverse Transfer feature System Hold places the call on hold so that it can then be picked up directly at any Inter Tel endpoint that has an individual trunk button and has allowed answer and or outgoing access for the associated trunk or at the endpoint that placed it on hold Attempting to place a conference on system hold will place the conference on individ ual hold Intercom calls cannot be placed on system hold Single line endpoints cannot place calls on system hold attempting to do so at a single line endpoint will place the call on individual hold In a network setting when a user puts a trunk on system hold only that user and users on the same node as the trunk can access the call Consultation Hold allows a single line endpoint user to pause during a call use other system features and then return to the caller by hookflashing If the user attempts to hang up after placing a call on consultation hold the call recalls the endpoint If a call remains on hold until the Hold timer expires it recalls the endpoint where it is on hold and the Recall timer is started If it is still unanswered when the Recall timer expires it recalls the endpoint s Attendant and the Abandoned Call time
458. n perform database programming However programming requires a display phone such as an Executive Display Professional Display or Model 8560 digital phone or the Model 8660 IP phone A System Administrator phone can be used to perform the following programming Phone Options e Create or delete Administrator stations Create or delete Attendant stations Create or delete House Phones Assign phones to Attendants Program usernames 7 Program endpoint toll restriction System Options E Program Do Not Disturb DND messages Program up to 10 passwords for the Database Programming feature Program phone extensions Swap extensions Trunk Options 7 Individual trunk answer supervision type caller information hybrid balance signaling type DTMF or pulse and trunk group assignment Trunk group answer access ring in toll restrictions and trunk lists A password can protect entry to the Database Programming feature at the Administrator phone A password prevents unauthorized users from altering the system database Passwords are important to system security Without sufficient password protec NOTE tion the system database is vulnerable to unauthorized access Depending on the database changes made the system may require a reset after programming If so the system will prompt you for a reset and ask if it should be done immediately or delayed Delaying the reset may prevent interruption in service However
459. n programmed the display shows NO TRUNKS IN TRUNK GROUP e If your endpoint is programmed to select a trunk group when a Call button is pressed press a Call button for outgoing access e Referto the Automatic Route Selection ARS procedure on the next page e Enter the Outgoing Calls feature code 8 This automatically selects an outgoing trunk according to the programmed outgoing access mode for your endpoint Single line endpoints Select a trunk using one of the following methods e Enter the Outgoing Call feature code 8 This automatically selects an outgoing trunk according to the programmed outgoing access mode for your endpoint e Enteratrunk group access code 92001 92208 e Referto the Automatic Route Selection ARS procedure on the next page 3 You hear one of the following signals e Outside dial tone Manually dial speed dial or redial the desired phone number or use the outside directory Display endpoints show the numbers dialed When Page 186 Outside Calls System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 dialing is ended and the call is determined to be valid the display shows the elapsed time and call cost If you hear repeating reorder tones you dialed a restricted number Also if you dial too slowly and the Interdigit timers expire the call may be dropped and you will hear repeating reorder tones f using an Inter Tel endpoint that is on hook you may
460. n prompted press the Start button on the fax machine One of the following may occur If the system cannot communicate with your fax machine check that it is working prop erly and say Continue or press EM to try again Return to step 4 If the system runs out of disk space while importing the document or if the document will cause the system to exceed the Maximum Fax Library Size you cannot import this document until one or more fax documents have been deleted from the system to create disk space Say Cancel or press EM to return to step 4 6 When the fax transmission is complete the system tells you that the document was received Say Continue or press EM to continue importing documents or hang up Creating Audiotex Recordings Using voice mail you can create and select up to 500 custom audiotex recordings including voice mail company greetings auto attendant greetings call routing announcements and hunt group announcement overflow recordings Depending on how your system is programmed and how the recordings will be used you may need to record an ASR and a non ASR version when you customize a recording Each recording has a designated number Numbers are then assigned to specific applications using the Voice Mail Administrator s mailbox or through DB Programming Any recording number 001 500 can be assigned to any voice processing system application By default recording 001 is the default system voice mail main gr
461. nal features to improve hunt group efficiency The features added when UCD is enabled are as follows e Announcement and overflow endpoints pick up unanswered calls when the hunt group endpoints are busy e Hunt group priority ranking will place calls to one hunt group before another at end points that are members of more than one hunt group e Hunt group supervisors can monitor outside calls of any member of the hunt group Announcement and Overflow Stations Announcement and overflow stations are individual endpoints that receive unanswered calls when all of the hunt group endpoints are unavailable They are not usually included in the hunt group list Announcement and overflow stations can be separate endpoints or they can be the same endpoint Also each of the hunt groups can have the same announcement and overflow stations or they can be assigned different endpoints In a network the announcement and over flow stations can be off node devices Figure 6 Announcement and Overflow Endpoints Example Call rings in to Ext 2000 No Answer Advance Timer UCD Hunt Groups gt 18 sec Announcement Timer 18 sec 18 sec 7a Announcement i Station 18 sec once only i Overflow Timer 72 sec 18 sec a Overflow Pe Station i 18 sec i Overflow Timer 72 sec i 18 sec B Overflow i Station 18 sec Recall Timer f 180 se
462. nating the emer gency call against the group s Emergency Day Night Outgoing Access List If no trunks are available the system tries the next member in the facility group If all of the members are unavailable the call will Camp On to Route Group 1 until a trunk is available Inter Tel recommends that only local trunks be installed and used for emergency trunk access and that only local trunks be programmed in Route Group 1 Pro NOTE gramming a node in Route Group 1 may cause the system to access a trunk on a separate node when ARS is used for emergency access If this occurs Emer gency Outgoing Access is no longer validated The system will allow the Dialing Wait After Connect timer to expire and will then dial the digit string programmed in the database as the emergency number At the time the call is processed a minor alarm will be generated by the system and sent to all Administrator endpoints Also if the Message Print option is enabled the alarm message is sent to the designated output port Figure 10 Emergency Call Feature Flow Diagram Call placed to the programmed Emergency Number Inter Tel 5000 Database Programming AO Emergency Extension c 4 a Trunk Group 1 92001 LA varm LA J displays LES OR Endpoint user Direct Trunk Access dials the Emergency Emergency Number Extension Or as appropriate Message Print printout if enabled Emergency Call Feature Flow Diagram Page
463. nd music 171 music source 171 network 171 Mute Button 195 Yo Network account codes 192 agent help extension 209 alarms 51 54 call cost 246 call forward 217 Camp On 178 190 Page 366 Network Continued conference calls 202 Do Not Disturb 236 emergency calls 162 handsfree calls 175 message print 250 messages 180 music on hold 171 night mode 164 Record A Call 207 277 reminder messages 244 remote feature programming 239 reverse transfer 201 ringin 154 setting time 26 speed dialing 221 synchronizing time 27 Network Alarms 51 54 Network and Local Primary Attendants 132 Network Group diagnostics 57 Network Group Diagnostics 92 Network History freeze unfreeze history 59 Next Button 98 Next Key 99 Night Mode 25 164 Node and Circuit Number On Power Up 96 Nodes 266 alarms 51 54 number on phone display 96 primary attendant 132 Notification Numbers 283 Numeric Mode 28 47 M Off Premises Extension OPX endpoints 109 Off Hook Voice Announce OHVA 184 blocking 184 using the MUTE button 184 One Attendant Operation 132 One Attendant or Multiple Attendant Operation 132 On Hook Dialing Monitoring 189 On Hook Monitoring 189 Operational Changes 150 Operator Destination mailbox 280 voice processor 260 279 Index INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Optional Account Codes 192 Optional Equipment headsets 101 MDPM 107 PCDPM 107 Outbound Fax 285 Outgoing Access 154 164
464. ndary extension button will allow you to answer the call This action allows you to answer recalls transfers callbacks and hunt group calls e Ifthe secondary extension button is unlit pressing the button places an intercom call to the primary phone If the button is flashing an intercom call can still be placed without answering the incoming call by pressing the pound EJ button before the secondary extension button by pressing a Mini DSS Unit button or by manually dialing the pri mary phone s extension number There are two programmable options that determine the type of call indications the phone user will receive for calls on a secondary extension button e Ring When n Calls at Extension This programmable option allows the phone to receive a burst of ringing when n number of calls are present at the associated pri mary phone The ring signal will repeat periodically as long as n number of calls are present at a primary phone This period is determined by the DKTS Secondary Exten sion Key Alerting Tone timer If n is set to 0 the secondary phone will never receive the burst of ringing This option is programmed individually for each secondary exten sion button during keymap programming e Transient Call Indication on Call Answer This programmable endpoint flag deter mines whether the phone user will see a call display when answering a call by pressing the secondary extension button or reverse transferring the cal
465. ndication without saving or deleting the Voice Mail NOTE If the EIE button continues to flash there is another message display shows the next message Repeat step 1 To answer messages at a non display endpoint or single line endpoint 1 Inter Tel endpoints If you see a flashing endpoint MEJE button press the EEJ button Depending on how the message was left an intercom call is placed to either the endpoint that left the message or your message center Page 182 Responding to Messages System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Single line phones If you hear single line message waiting tones six tones after lift ing the handset or hookflashing when the endpoint is idle enter the Message feature code 365 Depending on how the message was left an intercom call is placed to either the endpoint that left the message or your message center If the called endpoint does not answer is busy or is in Do Not Disturb you may hang up or leave a message at that endpoint before hanging up You will continue to receive message waiting indications WEJ button flash or tones unless you left a message while attempting to retrieve the message or canceled the message after hanging up The message waiting indications are canceled when you are actually connected with the called endpoint Message indications from Voice Mail will only be cleared if you save or delete the waiting Voice Mail message The
466. ndpoint is available a private call is placed Refer page 178 for details 3 Request a callback queue This is similar to camping on except that you hang up and wait for the busy endpoint to become available For more infor mation refer to page 179 Executive Display Professional Display and Model 8560 endpoint users can press the QUEUE menu button e If you hear a repeating signal of four fast tones and a pause the endpoint is in Do Not Disturb You can use the Queue Callback feature or if enabled on your endpoint use the Do Not Disturb Override feature to place a nonhandsfree call to the endpoint by pressing the Special button and entering the Do Not Disturb Override feature code 373 or pressing the OVERRIDE DND menu button f Ifthe called endpoint is busy in Do Not Disturb or there is no answer you can leave a message waiting indication with the endpoint itself or with the endpoint s message center For details refer to page 180 Executive Display Professional Display and Model 8560 endpoint users can press the LEAVE MESSAGE or LEAVE VOICE MAIL menu button g df the called station is a busy endpoint and if all the necessary conditions for OHVA are enabled you can complete the call using the Off Hook Voice Announce feature For a complete explanation of this feature refer to Off Hook Voice Announce OHVA on page 184 Intercom Camp On and Queue Callback Page 178 Camp On and Queue Callback requests allow the
467. ne network the Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 also sup ports gateway trunk hardware For an explanation of what is meant by endpoint refer to Endpoints and NOTE Phones on page 2 Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 Communication Servers Chassis The chassis of the Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 Communication Server Unit houses the system pro cessor module PM 1 the Processor Expansion Card PEC 1 as applicable motherboard and power supply Physical dimensions of the unit appear in the following table Table 10 nter Tel CS 5200 5400 Communication Servers Chassis Dimensions Dimension Measurement Metric Length 14 50 in 36 83 cm Width 17 00 in 43 18 cm Height 01 75 in 4 45 cm 1 U Weight 09 00 Ib 4 08 kg Chassis Interfaces Connections The Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 chassis provides multiple access portals to the features and func tionality of platform From the front of the chassis the technician can set up the system and programs it if desired tread system alarm messages backup voicemail messages and monitor ongoing system events From the back of the chassis the technician can connect system power a local area network LAN trunks and spans two single line endpoints two loop start trunks and an external music source paging system and voice mail system Front of the Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 Chassis Introduction The front of the Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 chassis provides the fo
468. network trunks and or IP gateway trunks Each of the DEIs is licensed separately as are premium features For lists of standard and pre mium features refer to System Features on page 111 USB Security Key Page 14 The USB security key uniquely identifies a system by storing an Inter Tel Master License Only the specific software license that has been digitally signed with the Master License data is allowed to control the system The key stores the essential components of the software licens ing scheme The security key also ensures licensing integrity When a system detects removal of its key the system disables audio for subsequent calls When the audio is disabled the system posts appli cable alarms to the LCD panel on the front of the unit chassis and to the LCD on the Adminis trator endpoint Alarm 122 indicates that the key is missing while Alarm 125 identifies the number of minutes before the system initiates a reset Licensing Product Description INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 When the key is replaced and the correct serial number is detected by the system the audio is enabled and the reset countdown is aborted If the system powers up without the USB security key in place the user must reload the soft ware license through database programming Inter Tel CS 5200 For smaller user environments the Inter Tel CS 5200 default configuration includes the Pro cessor Module
469. ng Trunk DID or DNIS Information DID DNIS or DNIS with DISA ring in Blank if answered DISA dig its if unanswered DISA calls do not generate a ring in record Caller ID ANI or ANI Outside Party ANI or Caller ID Ring Outside Party ANI or Caller ID ANI DNIS Outside Party ANI or Caller Ring Outside Party ANI or ID and Trunk DID or DNIS Caller ID and Trunk DID or Information DNIS Information None Blank Blank Ring in records appear only if ring in diagnostic records are enabled as described on page 246 This shows the time that the call became valid see page 246 for an explanation For an unan swered ring in it shows the time the call began ringing It is shown in 24 hour time 00 00 23 59 This shows the call length from the START time above until disconnect or the length of time an unanswered call was ringing If the option is enabled that shows call duration in seconds calls up to 999999 seconds long appears as S XXXXXX XXXXXX represents the number of seconds and calls lasting longer than 999999 seconds appear as HH MM hours and min utes This is the approximate cost of the call XX XX based on the database information If cost exceeds 99 99 it is printed without the decimal point XXXXX If it exceeds 99999 is shown instead If there is no cost the field is blank This is a standard forced or optional account code up to 16 digits An optional
470. nistrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 To reset the internal modem NOTE During a reset any call connected to the modem is dropped 1 Enter the Modem Reset 9869 feature code The display shows RESET MODEM EXT 2 Enterthe modem extension number The display shows MODEM RESET If an invalid modem extension is entered the display shows INVALID MODEM EXTENSION Using the Network Group Diagnostics Feature The Network Group Diagnostics feature allows an Administrator to verify that Network Groups have been programmed correctly When the Network Group Diagnostics feature code is entered the platform initiates pings from each Inter Tel IP device and determines if the other devices respond to the ping If a device does not respond to the ping or if a firewall is detected the system issues a Message Print message For details refer to System Error Message Print on page 249 Because this feature affects system performance Inter Tel recommends that you NOTE run the diagnostics program after normal business hours when the system is idle The Network Group Diagnostics feature works on Inter Tel proprietary IP devices for the local node only It does not work across nodes To run the Network Group Diagnostics 1 While on hook enter the Diagnostics Mode feature code 9900 or 9100 in Europe to turn on diagnostics mode The display shows DIAGNOSTICS ON 2 Enter the Ne
471. nk button flashes if one exists for calls to the hunt group The endpoint continues to receive calls placed to its extension number Hunt group overflow and announcement stations cannot block hunt group calls using this feature If an endpoint user has programmed a button for entering the Hunt Group Remove Replace feature code and if that button has a lamp the lamp will be lit whenever the endpoint is removed from the hunt group To remove the endpoint from its hunt group s or replace the endpoint in its hunt group s Inter Tel endpoints While on or off hook enter the Hunt Group Remove feature code 322 to halt hunt group calls or enter the Hunt Group Replace feature code 323 to return the endpoint to its hunt group s Or use the Hunt Group On Off feature code 324 to toggle the hunt group mode on or off You hear a confirmation tone and the display shows ACCEPT or DIVERT HUNT GROUP CALLS 7f off hook hang up Single line endpoints Lift the handset and enter the Hunt Group Remove feature code 322 to halt hunt group calls or enter the Hunt Group Replace feature code 323 to Hunt Groups and Call Forwarding System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 return the endpoint to its hunt group s Or use the Hunt Group On Off feature code 324 to toggle the hunt group mode on or off You hear dial tone UCD Hunt Groups Uniform Call Distribution UCD hunt groups provide additio
472. nless overridden by a Call Routing Announcement as described on page 174 If programmed for Japanese the displays will be in Japanese Katakana characters and the voice prompts will be in Japanese unless overridden By default all endpoints are set for the system s Primary Language Only digital display endpoints will display Japanese prompts Other Inter Tel end NOTE points do not support Japanese displays All displays and default messages in the system are provided in American English British English Japanese and Spanish Endpoint programmed messages including those programmed through the administrator s endpoint can include English Spanish or Japanese characters or a combination In displayed lists such as directories the English Spanish characters are alpha betized before the Japanese characters Therefore Japanese names will be at the end of the list When programming a feature that requires a time and date an English Spanish endpoint user will enter the date in the order month day year and the time in the order time AM PM The Japanese endpoint user will enter the date as year month day and the time as AM PM time The displays show the time and date differently as well For example the English Span ish display will show the time and date as 12 25 TUE NOV 28 and the Japanese display will show TUE 11 28 12 25 Secondary Language Selection A field titled Secondary Languag
473. nnect the call The Hunt Group feature permits calls to be placed to a group of stations and to be automati cally transferred to an available phone within the group Up to 75 hunt groups can be pro grammed in the database Hunt group lists can contain individual endpoints and or extension lists Non ACD hunt group stations must reside on the same node Off node devices must be ACD hunt group members The order in which hunt group endpoints receive incoming calls is determined by a list stored in the database An endpoint or extension list can appear in a single hunt group more than once and it can appear in multiple hunt group lists if desired Hunt groups have their own extension numbers defaults to 2000 2074 Individual endpoints within the hunt group can be called using their assigned extension numbers Two other hunt group types are also available UCD Hunt Groups a standard feature on the system and ACD Hunt Groups which is a premium feature For UCD information refer to UCD Hunt Groups on page 137 For ACD refer to ACD Hunt Groups on page 143 NEW NEW NEW e ADB Programming flag that enables pre Record A Call messaging capability e A flag titled Return Automatic Call Distribution ACD Calls to Hunt Groups that can be set for individual Hunt Groups HG When enabled this feature requeues a call to the front of the Camp On queue for the HG the call came from It allows a calling party to immediately return to the fron
474. ntains 30 alarms the oldest lowest priority alarm is overwritten with the new alarm For example if the queue currently holds 30 alarms 20 of which are prior ity 4 and a priority 3 alarm is generated the oldest priority 4 alarm is overwritten Repetitive alarms such as A125 are placed in the queue only once If the alarm is regenerated the alarm that is currently in the queue is overwritten with the new alarm data if applicable and time For example A125 is overwritten each time it is regener ated which is every 5 minutes This prevents the queue from being filled with duplicate alarms The queue holds up to 30 alarms with priority 1 high to 4 low given to those listed in the following table ALARM PRIORITY ALARM PRIORITY A010 Low A108 Low A011 Critical A109 Med A012 Low A110 Med A013 Low A111 Med A014 low A112 Med A015 low X A114 Med A016 Low A115 Med A017 Low A116 Low A018 Low A117 Low A020 Low A118 Low A021 tow A119 High A022 low 120 Med 023 Low A121 High A024 Low A122 High A025 Low A123 High A026 Low A124 Med A031 Low A125 High A032 Low A126 Med A100 Low A127 Med A101 Low A128 Low A102 Low A200 Low A103 Low A201 Low A104 Med A202 Low A105 Low A203 High A106 Low A204 High A107 Low Page 53 Administrator Procedures INTER
475. ntil the network link is restored Level 1 Unified Messaging is a one way feature That is the user cannot reply to the sender of a Voice Mail message using e mail If a user attempts to reply the message will be sent to Page 285 Voice Processing Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 286 the administrator s E mail Address instead of to the sender of the Voice Mail message The user should forward the message or send a new message instead of replying In Levels 2 and 3 the user can reply to any message from another mailbox using the Outlook Exchange Reply or Reply to All options E mail messages containing wav files can be forwarded to other e mail addresses or stored on the computer s local drive just like any other e mail message Or the wav file can be detached from the message and stored on the computer To use Level 1 Unified Messaging the customer must have an existing e mail system based on Message Application Programming Interface MAPI Vendor Independent Messaging VIM or Simple Mail Transport Protocol Post Office Protocol SMTP POP3 The following list shows the e mail systems that are supported and the protocols on which they are based e Microsoft Mail or Microsoft Outlook Exchange MAPI cc Mail or Lotus Notes VIM Internet mail SMTP POP3 For complete instructions on using Unified Messaging refer to the Unified Messaging User Guide part
476. ntroduction The automated attendant is a programmable feature that can be used to provide an automated call answering service Calls can transfer forward or directly ring in to an automated atten dant An external voice processing system Enterprise Messaging or Voice Processing Unit is required for the Automated Attendant feature on the Inter Tel 5000 system For information on external voice processing systems refer to Voice Processing Systems on page 16 Calls to Automated Attendant are processed as shown in the following illustration Figure 16 Call to Automated Attendant Example CALL TO AUTOMATED ATTENDANT v Automated Attendant answers and plays a greeting followed by a menu of options Y Y Caller does not select an option Y Y Y Caller selects option Call is sent to Caller uses the Call is sent to endpoint hunt directory and the Automated group Voice can select the Attendant s Mail or opera name of designated tor destination desired party dial 0 operator Call is sent to endpoint hunt group Voice Mail or operator destination When an automated attendant answers a call it plays a recording that gives dialing instruc tions During or after the recording the caller may then directly dial an endpoint extension number Voice Mail access number if there is no associated mailbox or hunt group pilot number Or the caller may use the directo
477. nts e IP network connections e Faxing between Inter Tel 5000 nodes The correct allocation of IP resources is an important factor in maintaining a system that func tions without calls being blocked System Administrators can promote nonblocking system performance by making sure that the allocation of system IP resources is appropriate for their needs System Administrators having questions or concerns about the allocation of system IP resources should contact their Inter Tel equipment and service provider Summary of Hardware and Software Features Built on 32 bit architecture and packaged in a space efficient 154 inch 4 45 cm high 1U chas sis the Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 provides a robust IP communication solution With appropriate licensing the Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 delivers communication assets that include the following hardware and features e Linux operating system e Connectivity for Loop Start T1 T1 Primary Rate Interface PRI E1 PRI and IP gate way MCGP and SIP trunks and for trunk only capability of Basic Rate Interface BRI Basic Voice Mail e Unified Messaging e Networking over IP e Networking over T1 E1 spans e Fax over IP FoIP T 38 Inter Tel 5000 to Inter Tel 5000 nodes only Summary of Hardware and Software Features Page 13 Product Description INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Licensing e CompactFlash memory card for storing system applications custom
478. nu and or replay the current menu and or give you addi give you additional information Certain mail tional information Certain mailbox features box features such as remote messaging are such as remote messaging are available only available only if authorized by your System if authorized by your System Administrator Administrator Your mailbox is now fully set up Your mailbox is now fully set up 041 Your password may be up to 12 digits N A 042 Enter your new password then press pound If Say or enter your new password If you don t you don t want a password press pound now want a password say Skip or press pound 043 Your new password is N A 044 The number entered is too long N A Page 314 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 045 To accept this entry press pound To accept this entry say Accept or press pound 046 To erase and re enter press three To erase and re enter say Re enter or press three 047 Password erased N A 048 Password saved N A 049 Your mailbox is full and cannot receive any N A new messages Please delete old messages 050 Not used N A 051 Not used N A 052 Your mailbox is almost full Please delete any N A messages you no longer need so new mes sages may ar
479. number is automatically dialed when the Voice Mail unit answers the for warded call If a chain of forwarded endpoints ends in Voice Mail the mailbox number of the first endpoint in the chain will be selected when the Voice Mail unit answers the call If a trunk group is assigned direct ring in to multiple endpoints and one of those endpoints is forwarded to a Voice Mail unit incoming calls on that trunk group are not forwarded to the Voice Mail unit How to Forward Calls to an Extension or Outside Number Endpoint users can also forward calls using the Remote Programming feature described on page 239 To forward calls 1 Executive Display Professional Display and Model 8560 Endpoints Press the button The display shows SELECT TYPE OF FORWARD Press the menu button for the desired forwarding option ALL NO ANSWER BUSY or NO ANSWER BUSY The display shows ENTER FORWARD DEST 2 Inter Tel endpoints While on or off hook press the button or enter one of the following feature codes Display endpoints show ENTER FORWARD DEST e Call Forward All Calls 355 Manual Forwarding to Public Network Page 219 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 220 3 Call Forward If No Answer 356 Call Forward If Busy 357 Call Forward If No Answer Or Busy 358 Single line endpoints Lift the handset and enter one of the feature codes listed above If forwarding to an extensi
480. nyone in a specified hunt group The supervisor entered the Station Moni tor feature code default is 321 to connect to the call and hear both parties without being heard by either one With v9 0 tThe Barge In feature adds new functionality to the Station Monitor feature When silent monitoring a call the supervisor now has the following options e Barge In Allows the supervisor to barge in on a call to help the hunt group member agent default feature code is 386 e Record Allows the supervisor to record the call to review it later feature code 385 The supervisor may also hang up and continue to record the call until one of the parties on the call hangs up or puts the call on hold The record option allows the supervisor to record several calls at once and have them delivered to his or her mailbox e Steal Allows the supervisor to steal take away the call from the hunt group member agent default feature code is 387 e Join and Record For 6 line display endpoints only Allows the supervisor to join and record the call simultaneously This feature is useful if the supervisor wants to review the call later Supervisors must be monitoring a call before they can access any of the Barge In features barge in steal record or join and record Like the Station Monitor feature Barge In requires conferencing circuits If resources are not available when a supervisor attempts one of these features the system sends reorder tones and
481. o all endpoint users including inter com call features outside call features and general call processing features e Attendant Features This section explains the special Attendant only features and use of the Mini DSS Unit e Administrator Features This section explains the special Administrator only features e Record Keeping and Maintenance Features For record keeping purposes the system offers station message detail recording SMDR A system error reporting feature pro vides self diagnostic information to make the system easier to service Access to the Features Inter Tel endpoints have feature buttons that allow one button dialing of feature codes Infor mation is programmed in the database to determine the arrangement of the feature buttons and their default values If desired some of the endpoint feature buttons can be designated as user programmable buttons See page 168 for more information Special Button and Hookflash Depending on the feature and system programming users can either enter feature codes imme diately after lifting the handset or while on hook or they must signal the system before enter ing the feature code Inter Tel endpoint users signal the system by pressing the Special button which is represented by on the endpoint Single line DTMF endpoint users perform a hookflash press and release the hookswitch quickly If the user does not enter a code or begin dialing before the Dial Initiation timer ex
482. o another end point or to an outside endpoint number when the endpoint is in use Call Forward If No Answer 356 Forwards all calls to another endpoint or to an outside endpoint number if not answered within a predetermined time Page 120 Endpoint Feature Codes System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 19 Endpoint Feature Code Definitions Continued FEATURE NAME CODE DEFINITION Call Forward If No Answer Busy 358 Forwards all calls to another endpoint or to an outside endpoint number if not answered within a predetermined amount of time or immediately if the endpoint is in use Change Language 301 An endpoint user can change the assigned language for the endpoint by entering the Change Language feature code while the end point is idle CO Hookflash 330 Sends a timed hookflash over the trunk while on an outside call includes conference calls Conference Connects from three to four parties in a con ference A conference consists of any combi nation of inside and outside parties Inter Tel endpoints use the CNF button Data 340 Not used on single line endpoints Allows operation of a data device attached to an end point that has a PC Data Port Module and a Modem Data Port Module also requires a modem equipped data device Default Endpoint 394 This single feature code cancels account co
483. o reset the system now Possible interruption of calls in progress When the system is Reset all calls in progress are dropped immediately Page 42 Trunk Programming Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Figure 3 Trunk Database Programming Flowchart Enter Program Database feature code 9932 4 ENTER DATABASE OPTION ida pem Press 3 or TRUNK menu button L ENTER TRUNK OPTION zem 1 Press 1 or INDIVIDUAL TRUNK menu button ENTER TRUNK EXTENSION L 4 v Enter desired trunk extension number r INDIVIDUAL TRUNK OPTION i Press 1 or menu button ANSWER SUPERVISION gt ANS SUPERVISION OPTION H 4 Press 2 or TRUNK GROUP menu button ENTER TRUNK GRP EXTENSION SEE NEXT PAGE Y Y Y REVERSE menu button Press 1 or POLARITY Press 2 or VALID CALL menu button Press 2 or CALLER ID menu button Press 3 or HYBRID BALANCE menu button Press 4 or SIGNALING menu button Press 5 or save changes and back up TRUNKGROUP y ENTER TRUNK GRP EXTENSION one HIS IR YA Ret menu button a ie i Y INFORMATION IN THIS Enter the trunk CHART IS SHOWN AS nter the trunk group number PLOWS Press 6 or r
484. o the supervisor s node from a remote node cannot be monitored e Hunt groups with remote members rely on network links among nodes Node availabil ity and software version compatibility affects hunt group log in procedures as follows Hunt group members attempting to log in to all hunt groups will be logged in to only those hunt groups on nodes that are reachable The display of the user s phone will only indicate log in results for reachable nodes Members logging out of all hunt groups will be logged out of groups on reachable nodes immediately and will automatically be logged out of groups on unreachable nodes as soon as the link to the node is restored The phone will display MES SAGE PENDING in this case When users attempt to log in to a remote hunt group on a node running system software that is not Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 the endpoint display will show NOT AN ACD HUNT GROUP If users try to log into a hunt group on a node that is not Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 the display will show the message NOT AN AGENT IN THIS ACD GROUP e The ACD Wrap Up functions apply the following prioritization method for hunt groups with remote members The first criterion is priority level The hunt group with the highest priority gets the available agent first Inthe event of a tie in priority hunt groups located locally take priority over those located on remote nodes In cases where ties in priority occur within the local
485. o toll restriction is assigned a toll restric tion class of service COS that restricts dialing patterns on outside calls COS is programmed individually for endpoints voice processing system applications and trunk groups Separate COS designations are available for day and night modes An endpoint or trunk group can be completely unrestricted or can have a combination of COSs System Speed Dial numbers can be programmed to bypass COS restrictions on a system wide basis If the option is not enabled all System Speed Dial numbers are subject to toll restriction Because a condition may exist where a critical or life threatening situation needs to be reported using the Emergency Call feature code will override all toll restrictions and trunk access programming Note that if the trunk group is not subject to toll restriction neither the trunk group nor end point COS is checked unless the call is placed using ARS ARS calls are subject to endpoint toll restriction only The first nine COS designations 01 09 have default values COS designations 10 16 do not have default values and are blank All of the classes of service are programmable Each may be specified as an allowed or denied class of service dialing patterns can be programmed for each and each can be assigned to endpoints and trunk groups as needed The default values of COS 01 09 appear in the following table Table 25 Class of Service Default Values COS NAME
486. ode 372 The button goes off and the display shows DO NOT DISTURB OFF Single line endpoint Lift the handset enter the Cancel Do Not Disturb feature code 371 or Do Not Disturb On Off feature code 372 and hang up To place your busy endpoint in Do Not Disturb while a call is camped on If while on a call you hear Call Waiting signals and you want to let the caller know you do not want to be disturbed Inter Tel endpoints Press the DITE button or press the Special button and then enter a Do Not Disturb feature code 370 or 372 The button lights The display shows DO NOT DISTURB ON The intercom caller is no longer camped on and receives Do Not Disturb indications NOTE The following procedure will interrupt the call you are on Single line endpoints Hookflash recall and enter the a Do Not Disturb feature code 370 or 372 The call you are on is placed on Consultation Hold The intercom caller is taken off of Camp On and receives Do Not Disturb indications To return to the call you interrupted hookflash recall twice Do Not Disturb System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Do Not Disturb Override If your Inter Tel endpoint is enabled for Do Not Disturb override and you hear Do Not Disturb tones when placing an intercom call you may use the following procedure to break through Do Not Disturb and complete the call Do Not Disturb override Inter Tel endpoints with t
487. ode press Ell or the COS NIGHT menu button The display shows SET DAY or NIGHT COS XX If this is not the COS you want to program scroll to the correct COS by pressing the high end of the Volume button or the NEXT menu button to scroll forward or press the low end of the Volume button or the PREVIOUS menu button to scroll backward The default COS numbers are listed below For definitions refer to Class of Service on page 158 COS OI is not used for trunks When the correct COS is displayed press EE or the ON menu button to enable the toll restriction Or press EM or the OFF menu button to disable it If desired repeat this step to program addi tional COS toll restrictions Then press EM or ACCEPT to continue COS 02 Deny Area Office COS 06 Deny Equal Access COS 03 Deny Operator COS 07 Deny Local Calls COS 04 Deny Toll Access COS 08 Denied Numbers COS 05 Deny International COS 09 Allowed Numbers 2 Exempt from ARS To program the Exempt from ARS option press Kl or the EXEMPT FROM ARS button When the display shows EXEMPT FROM ARS press Hf or the YES menu button to enable the option Or press El or the NO menu button to disable it Then press EJ or ACCEPT to continue 3 Subject to toll restriction To program the trunk group Subject to Toll Restric tion option press El or the SUBJECT TO TOLL menu button When the dis play shows SUBJECT TO TOLL press Kl or the YES menu button to enable the option Or
488. odes in the database the call is allowed If the code does not match the call is blocked Endpoints with this account code type cannot forward calls to outside phone numbers Page 191 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 192 e Forced Long Distance Toll Calls Non Validated When this account code type is enabled the user only has to enter an account code if the system detects that a long dis tance call a toll call outside of the local area codes has been dialed when the ARS is used The code is not checked against any lists and the call is allowed as soon as the code is entered Endpoints with this account code type cannot forward calls to outside phone numbers e None If the user will not be required to enter an account code this option is selected The user may still use optional account codes or enable the Account Code For All Calls Following feature as desired If the system is installed in a network the network validates account codes against the account code table on the same node as the caller The account code follows the call as it moves from node to node and appears on every SMDR record associated with the call However if an optional account code is entered during the call that account code will be used in the SMDR report If ARS Dial Rule 5 Add Account Code is enabled the account code must be entered before the end of dialing for it to be included in the
489. of an inside party You cannot return to the conference If there are no inside party endpoints remaining in the conference it is disconnected e Leave the conference and allow the outside parties to remain connected by pressing the button or entering the Conference feature code You can return to the confer ence at any time e End the conference and place all of the parties on individual hold You can return to the parties one at a time e Place the entire conference on hold The conferenced parties remain connected If a user attempts to place a conference call on system hold the confer BOTE ence will be placed on individual hold Page 204 Add Parties to a Conference System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Exiting and Re Entering the Conference To exit the conference and leave the other parties connected any inside party with an Inter Tel endpoint During the conference press the button and hang up The button and a Call button flutters If all remaining parties are outside parties and the Hold timer expires while you are out of the conference the conference recalls your endpoint The recall rings at your endpoint and the button flashes at the medium rate The display shows CONFERENCE RECALLING Press the button to return to the conference If the recall is not answered before the Recall timer expires it will recall the Attendant NOTE To return to the conference
490. of data or databases Possible data corruption and or equipment damage Power down the system before removing the Compact Flash Page 7 Document Overview INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Supplemental Information Notices Notes and Important messages provide supplemental information about the topic being discussed A NOTICE stipulates conditions requirements and or policies relevant to the topic under dis cussion NOTICE For correct operation of the system use ONLY the compact flash memory cards available through Inter Tel Inc A NOTE conveys supplemental information related to the topic NOTE Commercially available premoistened towels provide adequate cleaning An IMPORTANT message contains information that requires special attention related to the topic Make sure the chassis connects firmly to earth ground at the Ground IMPORTANT Lug Abbreviations and Acronyms Page 8 In addition to industry wide and or internationally recognized units of measure such as Hz V AC DC A ms etc the following abbreviations and acronyms appear in this document Table 1 Abbreviations and Acronyms paene AS SPELLED OUT MEANING ACD Automatic Call Distribution ADD Automatic Diagnostics Delivery AMIS Audio Messaging Interchange Specification ANI Automatic Number Identification ANSI American National St
491. oice Mail Administrator tasks System Administrator System Administrators typically perform the following tasks Place the local system or other systems in the network in night or day mode Set the date and time of the local system Set the network date and time and resynchronize clocks in the network Make database changes as described in Programming the Database Using a System Administrator Phone on page 26 Program System Speed Dial numbers on the local system Receive and clear displayed system and network alarms Use diagnostic mode features to Freeze and unfreeze database history on the local system or other systems in the network Print error logs Seize specific devices for troubleshooting purposes Report audio problems to your installer technician Any Inter Tel phone can be designated as a System Administrator phone through Database Programming However to facilitate programming and to manage alarm messages Inter Tel recommends using a Model 8660 Six Line Display IP phone or a Model 8560 Executive or Professional Six Line Display digital phone for this purpose System Administrator features are described in detail beginning on page 23 System Administrator Page 3 Document Overview INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Voice Mail Administrator Voice Mail Administrators can use special features that are not provided to other voice mail users The mailbox design
492. oint Displays 5 4 soos ees bh RR RR e es 154 Outgoing Access Allowed Answer and Ring In Assignments 0 154 Answer Feature Code 222 2 2c0beiosde R9 LEX RERRRARGUU EFPPIRGGRRE CER x RE 155 Automatic Route Selection ARS lt 3 0 4s40 2064504 ed0V5 Eae CRACK RO RR AR 155 Basic Rate Module BRM S 157 Toll Restriction uoles RO RR E pR EG DETARURRU E ERE dh AE EXRARTAd UR XS ERG REX 157 Class OLSEEVIOBue dea su rh ce sete debe E ras RPG ed deh adco sed eee aa e exo eot 158 Emergency Callas eques sce qiue a saa aor Eu eee beer Ea a PEE mgr Spire dg 160 Emergency Outgoing Access Lists 1 5 osesoses e rh hr eh ERR RS 162 Ten Emergency N mbers cs iud uh mne rm etbe AE d nesau an adsa Rd ER Ed 162 Calling Party NUIDDEE S 4 vx ROUX ET IM REC INO RS CRM E ES EAS qM 162 Day and Night MOHGS uoa o prb come R9 o ede dE RPR e Rr Ih e tt 164 Direct Inward System Access DISA 02 4 2 5 26 euvecv e rue E ru REFER ERR 164 Security CodeS Vou ador ck edu ie Ro Vaio ed apice a e a RR er Dabo Sl 165 eine DISA PerTCT TrTT 165 Inter Tel Endpoint Features lt ois0 5 600 sin ku Eua prak a RR RE REL E EREE Ea sae 166 Volume Controls 2 iae rh RLREE tsatan a REF REP EER SERERE EA d RES 166 pelepbdble RING 0E esie e e hee GU REC MEN RE RESC NN ERC EU PH UET cones x4 167 Default Endpoint Identification on Display llle 167 All Transient Displays Endpoint Flag ssseseleeee e 167 DKTS
493. oint with handsfree disabled you hear repeating double tones until the call is answered The display shows CALL RINGING FOR lt username gt When the call is answered the display shows IC TO lt username gt Executive Dis play Professional Display and Model 8560 endpoint users can press one of the following menu buttons while the call is ringing LEAVE MESSAGE This button appears only if you have called a station Press this button to leave a message waiting indication at the station Refer to page 180 for details LEAVE VOICE MAIL This button appears only if the called station has a Voice Mailbox Press this button to call the station s Voice Mailbox Placing Intercom Calls Page 177 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 c If you dial an invalid number you hear reorder tones Display endpoints show INVALID NUMBER If you do not have an assigned Attendant and you dialed 0 the display shows NO ATTENDANT PROGRAMMED If you dialed a hunt group number with no assigned endpoints the display shows NO MEMBERS IN HUNT GROUP d Ifthe called endpoint is busy the display shows lt username gt IS BUSY You have the following options in addition to the menu buttons described previously 1 Disconnect Hang up and try later f dialing handsfree Inter Tel endpoints only press the Speaker button to disconnect 2 Camp on Do not hang up your call camps on When the called e
494. ollowing procedures describe how to connect a headset to an Inter Tel phone To connect a headset to a Model 8620 or 8660 IP or a Model 8520 or 8560 digital phone 1 Insert the headset plug into the vacant headset jack on the back of the phone 2 While on hook enter the Headset On feature code 315 or the Headset On Off feature code 317 The display shows HEADSET MODE ON Headsets Hardware and Endpoints INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 To connect a headset to all other Inter Tel phones 1 Remove the coiled handset cord from the base of the phone Leave the handset in the cradle 2 Insert the headset plug into the vacant handset jack 3 While on hook enter the Headset On feature code 315 or the Headset On Off feature code 317 The display shows HEADSET MODE ON Disconnecting a Headset The following procedures describe how to disconnect a headset from an Inter Tel phone To disconnect the headset from a Model 8620 or 8660 IP or a Model 8520 or 8560 digital phone 1 Unplug the headset cord from the back of the phone 2 While on hook enter the Headset Off feature code 316 or the Headset On Off feature code 317 The display shows HEADSET MODE OFF To disconnect the headset from all other Inter Tel phones 1 Unplug the headset cord from the base of the phone 2 Plug the coiled handset cord into the base of the phone 3 While on hook enter the Headset Off feature co
495. olume NEXT or PREVIOUS button The name and number are displayed for each location e Use the Executive or Professional Display or the Model 8560 phone menu Use the menu buttons to select the desired Speed Dial location When the name is displayed press EB or ACCEPT to view the number 2 After viewing the number press the Speaker button EJ or EM to exit or wait for the display to return to date and time Dialing Station Speed Dial Numbers To dial a Station Speed Dial number at a single line endpoint 1 Liftthe handset Inter Tel endpoints can remain on hook 2 If placing an outside call select an outgoing trunk or use ARS If placing an intercom call or if the outside number contains a trunk access code skip this step 3 Hookflash and enter the Station Speed Dial feature code 382 You hear a confirmation tone Then dial the location code 0 9 The number is dialed Page 226 Viewing Station Speed Dial Numbers System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 To dial a Station Speed Dial number at a non display endpoint 1 Lift the handset or remain on hook 2 If placing an outside call select an outgoing trunk or use ARS If placing an intercom call or if the outside number contains a trunk access code skip this step 3 Inter Tel endpoint with a Speed Dial button Press the Speed Dial button of the desired number The number is dialed Inter Tel endpoint without a S
496. om Always 224 424 4496 WR ERRERER S bee ed eee codes tees She tees 175 Handsfree Enables Disable iuo i exse AREE RRREERREERISRA RI RE deousk age 176 Endpoint To Endpoint Calling elleleeeeeeee enn eae 176 Receiving Intercom Calls 3cicacdceeebavecavihereiaieeatancerebatacaies 176 Placing Intercom Calls ian se APER REN ERO SHER eRe eS oe kee eee 177 Intercom Camp On and Queue Callback sese 178 Camp On PP 178 Busy Endpoint Callback Queue 2 coscceniceh seg REX EA RRERR EE EE EE ds 179 Station to Station Messages c c eeeeeeeeeeee ee hern 180 Leaving NosSaBOS e ree d ertbkERCRRP Ere RORE ER DR PERETE E E URP E RES 181 Silent NOSSdPOS cquepP ERE LE RUCERPR RE B REP PRU RENGE EENET E E 181 Canceling a Message Waiting Indication 0 0 0 0 cee eee ee eee 181 Responding to Messages i ceo sexcnevosendeees se edge RE RARO REC ED donee sat 182 Viewing Waiting Messages coe ehe ESAE REC RA rA PE RED eI CERES 182 Answering Messages ine pa e RR DERE RE Gd ERE Ip RU Ea qas aeg 182 Canceling a Waiting Message 22 4 cuu eo de us Roy Edu REa T E REEEx A ah 183 Alternate Message SOULCB cveoxe da Yeewen Suge eee e dea scs T d px Ries ace ae 183 Off Hook Voice Announce OHVA eeeeeeeeeeeees nhe 184 Outside Calls iaassconke ates REREEXE T EEREERRRERA eC ORARE AER REA A E REN 186 Placing Outside 1alls 4o bm x ex EXER REESE EVE Ee Ee de eyed ES 186 Re eiving Ouiside ls sss sre code EVER D EA n
497. ompted say or enter the extension number of the application to be pro grammed For example if users dial 2000 to reach voice mail enter 2000 to assign the voice mail greeting 5 Select the mode for the recording e Say Day or press Kl for day mode e Say Night or press EM for night mode e Say Cancel or press to return to the previous step 6 Say or enter the desired recording number 001 500 If a recording already exists it is played You have the following options e Say Yes or press E to accept the recording e Say No or press EJ to go back to step 4 If no recording exists the system informs you but assigns the record NOTE ing number to the application For instructions on how to make a cus tom recording refer to Creating Audiotex Recordings on page 65 7 Hang up or press to return to the previous menu Recording Custom Voice Mail Prompts The voice mail prompts consist of two sets of prerecorded options and instructions One set of prompts is for applications and mailboxes that have Automatic Speech Recognition ASR enabled The other set is for applications and mailboxes that do not use ASR The prompts that use ASR give the caller the option to issue a spoken command or press a dialpad digit to com plete a task The prompts that do not use ASR prompt the caller to press a dialpad digit only Most of the prerecorded voice mail prompts can be customized using the Voice Mail Adminis trator
498. on Warning Messages The field shows WRN The condition requires attention because it may affect system performance Severe Messages The field shows SVR The condition requires attention because it has affected or will affect system performance Realm This field does not appear for Alarm messages This two character field indi cates the realm responsible for the message The field will contain one of the following abbreviations DB indicates that the message applies to the system database These problems can often be fixed with appropriate database programming HW indicates the messages concerns the system hardware Typically these prob lems are corrected by adjusting or replacing the affected hardware EG is indicative of a software error which will most likely require the interven tion or attention of an Inter Tel software engineer Source This field does not appear for Alarm messages This two character field indi cates the software source responsible for the message CP indicates that Call Processing is the source OS refers to the Operating System SS refers to the System Software AL refers to a Voice Processing System link Text The Text field holds a text message that identifies the particular fault indicated by the record This field is at least 40 characters in length and may extend onto subsequent lines if necessary to present adequate information about the fault The infor
499. on number or pilot number do one of the following Press a Mini DSS button Dial the extension number or pilot number to receive the calls Dial 0 to forward to your Attendant Inter Tel endpoint users only Press the IEEE button or MESSAGE CENTER menu button to forward calls to your message center Executive Display Profes sional Display and Model 8560 endpoint users only Press the VOICE MAIL button to forward to your mailbox Executive Display Professional Display and Model 8560 endpoint users only Press the IC DIRECTORY menu button to look up and select a number If you dialed an invalid extension number your display shows FOR WARD TO INVALID NUMBER you hear reorder tones and must try NOTE again If you dialed an endpoint that is in Do Not Disturb the display shows DESTINATION IN DND you hear reorder tones and you must enter a new destination If forwarding to an outside phone number do one of the following Dial a trunk access code 8 or 92001 92208 The display shows ENTER PHONE Dial the desired phone number Inter Tel endpoint users only Press a trunk access button IUSTI ARS trunk group button or trunk button The display shows ENTER PHONE Dial the desired phone number Executive Display Professional Display and Model 8560 endpoint users only Press the OUTSIDE PHONE menu button The dis play shows ENTER PHONE Dial speed dial or redial the desired phone num ber or press the OUTSIDE DIR
500. on page 45 to program System Speed Dial locations Standard Alternate Keymap Switching In Database Programming each Inter Tel endpoint is assigned a standard keymap and can also have an alternate keymap The user can switch keymaps by entering a feature code Having two keymaps provides the user with access to more features or trunks In most situa tions the user would have one button programmed with the Switch Keymap feature code 399 in each keymap so that it would be easy to change the keymap If the user programmed button has a lamp the lamp is lit when the alternate keymap is active When keymaps are switched any user programmable buttons in the maps retain their user pro grammed values they are not returned to default during the switch However if the keymaps do not have the same user programmable buttons in the same positions the location of individ ual buttons may change when the keymaps change If a user switches keymaps during an outside call the call will appear on the appropriate trunk or Call button for that keymap The button assignment may not be the same for both keymaps Standard Alternate Keymap Switching Page 169 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 For example it could appear under a Call button on one map and an individual trunk button on the other If a button is not available in the currently active keymap when a call rings in the user will still s
501. only press three For announce only say Announce or press three 520 Who should say is calling N A 521 To replay the announcement press one To replay the announcement say Replay or press one 522 To send this call to Voice Mail press two To send this call to voice mail say Voice Mail or press two 523 To forward this call to another extension press To forward this call to another extension say three Forward or press three 524 To accept this call press pound To accept this call say Accept or press pound 525 To refuse this call press star To refuse this call say Refuse or press star 526 You have a call from N A Page 337 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 527 To change the time and date press five N A 528 The current time is N A 529 To accept the current time press pound N A 530 To enter a new time use two digits for the N A hour and two digits for the minutes 531 The current date is N A 532 To accept the current date press pound N A 533 To enter a new date use two digits for the N A month two digits for the day and two digits for the year 534 Invalid date N A 535 Please enter the extension number Please say or enter the extension number 536 Not used N A
502. operating instructions because improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal opera tion e Ifthe product has been dropped or the chassis has been damaged e Ifthe product exhibits a distinct change in performance 14 Avoid using a telephone other than a cordless type during an electrical storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning 15 Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS NOTICE An exclamation point within a triangle such as the one silk screened on the front of the equipment cabinet or chassis is intended to alert the user to a haz ard that may result in bodily harm To promote safe operation maintenance and servicing of equipment pay attention to the hazards identified in the litera ture accompanying the product Be sure to read and follow all of the instructions included in this manual and other applicable literature NOTICE The equipment contains no operator access areas and is certified only for installation in a restricted access location by trained personnel only UL 60950 1 Page xiii Network Security Statement INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Network Security Statement Page xiv Although no telecommunications system or data network is entirely secure as long as appro pria
503. opy or press one 880 To record a new speech recognition greeting To record a new speech recognition greeting press three say New or press three 881 fi pronunciation en yay N A 882 I m sorry This system prompt is not available N A for replacement 883 The following message could not be delivered N A to 884 To disable Speech Recognition mailbox com To disable Speech Recognition mailbox com mands for this call press eight mands for this call say Disable or press eight 885 Speech Recognition disabled N A 886 could not create a secure connection to your N A remote server You will be redirected to the local voice mail view 887 Please contact your system administrator N A 888 E mail Reader was unable to retrieve your N A Page 354 faxes from your e mail server due to a login failure Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 889 E mail Reader was unable to retrieve your e N A mails from your e mail server due to a login failure 890 Please enter your e mail account password Please spell or enter your e mail account This is case sensitive Using the keypad you password This is case sensitive You can can scroll through symbols numbers and let speak symbols numbers and letters Fo
504. or when daylight saving time British summer time is implemented Any System Administrator can change the date and time that appears on all display phones and that appears in the SMDR reports in the network The day of the week is automatically calculated and set by the system when the date is entered Placing Network Nodes in Day or Night Mode Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 To set the network date and time If you make a mistake press to backspace or press or CANCEL to leave it unchanged and start over While on hook enter the Set Network Date and Time feature code 9810 Your display shows DATE current date If you do not need to change the date press Kl or ACCEPT to skip to the TIME XX XX prompt Use the dialpad buttons to enter the month day and year For example press 020301 for February 3 2001 When finished the display shows TIME current time If using a phone programmed for the Japanese language enter the date NOTE as year month day For example 050203 for February 3 2005 If you entered the date incorrectly the display shows INVALID DATE and you are prompted to enter a new date If you do not need to change the time press E or ACCEPT twice to exit The display shows SYSTEM DATE AND TIME UPDATED Use the dialpad buttons to enter the time in hours and minutes For example enter 0900 for 9 00 If using a phone programme
505. orrect recording press pound If this is the correct recording say Yes or press pound 244 Warning no recording has been made N A 245 Invalid application entered N A 246 is not a valid recording number N A 247 Not used N A 248 Not used N A 249 Not used N A 250 Not used N A 251 Not used N A Page 324 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 252 Not used N A 253 This is a return receipt verifying the message N A sent has been heard 254 I m sorry Private messages cannot be for N A warded 255 This is the message center calling for N A 256 If you are the correct person press pound If you are the correct person say Yes or press pound 257 One N A 258 Two N A 259 Three N A 260 Four N A 261 Five N A 262 Six N A 263 Seven N A 264 Eight N A 265 Nine N A 266 Ten N A 267 Eleven N A 268 Twelve N A 269 Thirteen N A 270 Fourteen N A 271 Fifteen N A 272 Sixteen N A 273 Seventeen N A Page 325 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued
506. osoren es wisai 242 Huokllash B Bell 2o auk es x RR EIPEGWAWEERA TTA ERI RAE DERE bad RR Ree VV ew 243 Reminder Messages 4 352542 23 E RRREGAREEZADEGATENRAYERERR Ra ERR ER ARR a RR ER 244 Record Keeping and Maintenance Features ccc cece cece cece eere 245 Call Cost ABDOUHEUIS 2562 eden d bep SqUAMRES Pe E RES CHO EK ous ene e dae hd 245 For Estimating Purposes Only sseeeeeeeeeeee ee 245 Multicative Factor Adjustment 2 0 0 cece cece ee 246 Station Message Detail Recording 62 dex dd c4 bx RPLRPSA UE RCRRREA EST ER 246 System Error Message Print 1 as aou achp dcm RR CRI CR RACER URGERE CRCACUR ed 249 Power Pail Bypass Capability 24 un 044444245544 RH Sie oe eee Gass en eaanees 252 Customized System Programming Reports 252 Audio Diagnostics 5 556 558 5404 eR OSS EES BEES SRS 6 ORNS SS wees Eser Edo PESTS 252 Audio Problems 9 aere tdv re Sie aS oh wpa Ow dtd Gn e Os d SR UP eae ru pes 253 Specifying Audio Direction 2444 ese vu tenaces ac ere da P esae uda end acra 253 Using Record A Call for Diagnostics 0 0 0 cece ee 253 Collecting Audio Diagnostics Data lleleeeeee e 253 Using the Audio Diagnostics Feature 1 22 22 odeur RE RES ede niedases 254 Responding to the Audio Diagnostics Feature 00 255 Phantom Devices 4 ckocs a hee dence es eR CRUCERO been Rae C on ad e RR Cra 255 Page 116 Introduction System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1
507. ostic Dump System Diagnostics 9933 9133 Allow a System Administrator to dump system diagnostic information to Message Print Diagnostic Heap Dump Diagnostic Heap Statistics 9943 9143 9947 9147 This is used by Inter Tel software developers and cannot be used in Beta or Production software This feature code outputs miscellaneous heap information to Message Print as well as put ting up a message on the endpoint that indi cates the percentage of available dynamic heap memory This feature code is useful in determining if the system is losing heap mem ory and how quickly the system may be losing it Page 128 Diagnostics Feature Codes System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 21 Diagnostics Feature Code Definitions Continued FEATURE NAME CODE US EUROPE DEFINITION Diagnostic ISDN View 9948 9148 This feature code is toggles through the three different ISDN view output modes Entering the feature code the first time puts the ISDN view feature into headers only mode In this mode the system outputs all ISDN messages to message print in header format i e it does not contain any ISDN information elements Entering the feature code the second time puts the ISDN view feature into full mode In this mode the system outputs all ISDN mes sage to message print in full format i e each ISDN information elemen
508. ou hear reorder tones and must try again Enter a complete number Enter the extension number using your dialpad When the circuit information is displayed press E again to continue Enter a partial number Enter a partial extension number then press EM the high end of the Volume button or the ACCEPT menu button The display shows the extension number username and circuit number of the phone that most closely matches the partial extension number Press Ei or ACCEPT to program the displayed phone or scroll to another phone as described below Scroll through the numbers To scroll through the extension number list press the high end of the Volume button or NEXT to scroll forward or press the low end of the Volume button or PREVIOUS to scroll backward When the desired extension number is displayed press EM or ACCEPT to continue The display shows ENTER ENDPOINT OPTION Select one of the following a Endpoint Flags This option allows you to set the Administrator phone Attendant and House Phone flags To select it press illl or the ENDPOINT FLAGS menu but ton Three flags can be programmed Administrator Attendant and House Phone However you cannot program the Administrator flag for your own phone or for a single line phone To program the flags do the following 1 To scroll to the desired flag Press the high end of the Volume button or NEXT to scroll forward or press the low end of the Volume button or PREVI OUS to scrol
509. ough disconnection or a power outage the phone becomes inoperable and cannot be recovered In that event the phone must be returned to Inter Tel for repair Automated Boot Code Update Hardware and Endpoints INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Features Common to IP and Digital Inter Tel Endpoints Although their basic technologies and network connecting methods differ IP and digital Inter Tel endpoints share both some physical characteristics and software features For example both types of endpoint possess similar LCD windows Call buttons and feature buttons They share a common data structure data entry fields in DB Programming and call processing fea tures The following sections describe important similarities of IP and digital Inter Tel end points Model 8614 Mini Direct Station Select Unit The Mini DSS Unit is programmable and provides one button access to 16 extension numbers and or feature buttons or resources The Mini DSS attaches to an IP Model 8660 or to digital models 8520 or 8560 and does not require a PCDPM or an AC transformer Mini DSS buttons contain LEDs that light or flash depending on the status of a station or the button s program ming For details about the LEDs refer to IP Phone Flashing Light Indicators on page 87 Phone Display Screens Several IP SIP and digital phone models are equipped with liquid crystal display LCD screens that show caller and feature
510. oups 150 Major Alarm 53 Major Alarms 51 249 Manual Call Forwarding and System Forwarding 214 Manual Forwarding to Public Network 219 MDPM 107 Media Gateway Control Protocol See MGCP 84 Media Gateway Control Protocol MGCP Gateway 15 Message Center 180 hunt group as 136 Message Envelope Contents 62 Message Lamp 117 Message Notification 281 Associated 281 multiple mailboxes 281 Non Associated 281 stations 281 Message Notification Message Flags All Messages 282 Call for Each New Message 282 Priority Only 282 Message Notification Retrieval 20 Message Notification Retrieval 279 Message Record Fields 251 Page 365 Index INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Messages alternate message source 183 answering 182 canceling 181 endpoint to endpoint 180 indications 180 mailboxes 180 reminder 244 viewing 182 MGCP Media Gateway Control Protocol AudioCodes MP 104 84 Microphone Mute 125 195 358 Microsoft Outlook Exchange 285 Minor Alarm 52 Minor Alarms 51 249 Model 8520 Endpoint LCD 95 Model 8690 83 Modem 56 Modem Data Port Module 107 MSG Button 180 Multi Language Feature on Network Operation 174 Multilingual Capability 172 alphanumeric mode 28 Do Not Disturb 34 reminder messages 34 set system date and time 26 27 System Speed Dial 221 Multiple Attendant Operation 132 Multi Protocol endpoints Model 8600 83 Model 8620 8622 83 Model 8662 83 Model 8690 83 Music On Hold 109 171 backgrou
511. outside number say Outside or press two 343 Not used 344 Please enter the digits for your digital pager Please say or enter the digits for your digital and wait for further instructions pager and wait for further instructions 345 The new pager number is N A 346 Mailbox Number N A 347 New Message Count N A 348 Pause N A 349 You must program a telephone number first N A 350 You have chosen not to have a pager number N A 351 Cascade Level N A 352 You did not enter a valid document number N A 353 This document is currently unavailable N A 354 is not a valid document number N A 355 You have already selected that document N A 356 To cancel this message press star To cancel this message say Cancel or press star 357 You have selected the maximum number of N A documents allowed 358 To send your fax press pound To send your fax say Send or press pound Page 329 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 359 You have selected one document N A 360 You haven t selected any documents yet N A 361 You may select one more document during N A this call 362 You may select up to N A 363 more documents during this call N A 364 Selections cancelled N A 365 The number that will appear on your fax cover
512. p are user programmable or undefined they can be changed by the phone user Up to 250 different keymap groups can exist Each node contains its own keymap programming Each Inter Tel phone is assigned a standard keymap and can also have an alternate keymap For information about switching between standard and alternate keymaps refer to page 169 When the system is in the default state all phones are assigned to default Keymap 01 There are no individual preprogrammed keymaps for each of the specific phone types And the default Speaker WEJ and buttons are not programmable As part of the installation procedure the installer must make sure the buttons are labeled to match their functions Keymaps Keymaps Hardware and Endpoints INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 The buttons in each keymap can be assigned the following functions Accept Button Not required for digital phones When using numeric mode digital phone users press on both arrows of the Volume button at once to accept an entry Cancel Button No further programming is necessary This button is used to cancel a feature or cancel an entry when in numeric mode Call Button Up to 10 Call buttons can be assigned in each keymap These buttons are used for call access They are not associated with specific trunks Instead they are assigned to calls in the order that the calls are placed or received In the following example the user h
513. peed Dial button Enter the Station Speed Dial feature code 382 You hear a confirmation tone Then enter the location code 0 9 The number is dialed To dial a Station Speed Dial number at a display endpoint 1 Lift the handset or remain on hook 2 If placing an outside call select an outgoing trunk or use ARS If placing an intercom call or if the outside number contains a trunk access code skip this step 3 Inter Tel endpoint with a Speed Dial button Press the Speed Dial button of the desired number The number is dialed Display endpoints show the number Inter Tel endpoint without a Speed Dial button Enter the Station Speed Dial feature code 382 Then do one of the following to dial the number Usealocation code Dial the desired Speed Dial location code 0 9 e Scroll through the displayed numbers Scroll to the desired number by pressing the Volume NEXT or PREVIOUS button Use the Executive or Professional Display or the Model 8560 phone menu Use the menu buttons to select the desired Speed Dial location Intercom Speed Dial and Feature Code Directories NOTE Single line phones do not support the Directory feature The Directory feature enables display endpoint users to look up intercom extension numbers and usernames System Speed Dial numbers and names or system feature codes Once the desired information has been displayed the user may automatically dial the number store the number i
514. phone to be programmed using one of the following methods If you enter an invalid extension number you hear reorder tones and must try again Enter a complete number Enter the extension number using your dialpad When a valid number is entered the circuit information is displayed Press Ei again to continue Enter a partial number Enter a partial extension number then press EM the high end of the Volume button or the ACCEPT menu button The display shows the extension number username and circuit number of the phone that most closely matches the partial extension number Press EB or ACCEPT to program the displayed phone or scroll to another phone as described on the following page Scroll through the numbers To scroll through the extension number list press the high end of the Volume button or the NEXT menu button to scroll forward or press the low end of the Volume button or the PREVIOUS menu button to scroll backward When the desired extension number is displayed press EB or ACCEPT to continue The display shows CHANGE X number TO EXTENSION Enter the new extension number for the phone If you enter an invalid number you hear reorder tones and must try again f you entered an extension number that is already assigned the display shows CONFLICTING EXTENSION and you hear reorder tones When the display returns to ENTER ENDPOINT EXTEN SION you must start over and select a new extension number System Programming System
515. pires the system sends reorder tones Message Lamp Introduction Inter Tel IP endpoints have a Message Lamp located on the upper right hand corner This lamp is programmable and is defaulted to the Message feature code 365 If you change the feature code associated with this lamp it flashes when the feature is active For example if you pro gram the lamp for Individual Hold 336 the lamp flashes when a call is held at the endpoint Page 117 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Speaker Buttons On all Inter Tel endpoints except the Model 8000 Series endpoints handsfree mode is con trolled by a Speaker RGI button On the Model 8600 8620 8660 or 8662 endpoint an illustration of a speaker 4 represents the Speaker button Hold Buttons On all Inter Tel endpoints except the Model 8000 Series endpoints the Hold feature is con trolled by a Hold AEJ button On Models 8600 8620 8622 8660 or 8662 endpoints the international hold illustration represents the Hold button Dialpad Hot Buttons vs SPCL Key Required for Feature Code Entry Flag Unless programmed to use the Special button when entering a feature code all Inter Tel end points have dialpad hot buttons that allow dialing of feature codes extension numbers and trunk access codes without pressing the Special button or lifting the handset As soon as a dial pad digit is pressed the digit is
516. play endpoints will show AGENT HELP REJECTED To respond to an Agent Help request at a display endpoint System Forwarding When you receive a private call from an Agent Help request you will see a display that shows name REQUESTS HELP You can do one of the following To accept the call Answer as usual or press the ANSWER menu button You hear the Agent Help Tone if enabled Your display shows AGENT HELP IN PROGRESS To reject the call Enter the Agent Help Reject feature code 376 or press the REJECT HELP menu button You hear confirmation tone To place your endpoint in Do Not Disturb to block the call Enter the Do Not Disturb feature code 370 or press the DITE button or the IC CALL TO DND menu button System forwarding is a standard feature that provides the ability to program the system so that calls ringing at an endpoint will follow a database programmed forwarding path that routes the call based on the type of call and the status of the intended endpoint The Call Forwarding endpoint feature can be used to override System Forwarding Several terms will be used to describe this feature including Principal Station Original endpoint being called Forwarding Point A destination endpoint hunt group or off node device to which the system forwarded call is directed Each forwarding path can contain up to four for warding points Forwarding Path The sequence of forwarding points to which the call will be sent
517. ppear in the SMDR call record When pro gramming ARS you can use preset dial rules or create new dial rules that add up to 16 digits each The preprogrammed dial rules are Dial Rule 1 Echo Equal Access This non programmable dial rule includes the equal access digits 1OXXX or 101X XXX in the number if dialed Answer Feature Code Page 155 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 156 Dial Rule 2 Echo Toll Field The toll field 1 0 01 or 011 is included in the number if dialed This dial rule is non programmable Dial Rule 3 Echo 3 Digits After Toll Field With this non programmable dial rule the three digits after the toll field are included in the number These digits are usually the area code or country code Dial Rule 4 Echo Local Address This non programmable dial rule allows ARS to dial the phone number that was dialed by the user Dial Rule 5 Add Account Code This non programmable dial rule causes the system to dial the account code that is associated with the call when it is avail able The account code can be entered using any of the account code types includ ing All Calls Following as long as the system receives the account code before the end of dialing To use an optional account code the code must be entered before the number is dialed Dial Rule 6 Add Extension Number This non progra
518. press El to erase and re record the greeting e Say Cancel or press to exit without changing the greeting Hang up or press to return to the previous menu To change the recorded directory name for a mailbox i 2 Access the Voice Mail Administrator s mailbox and menu Refer to page 58 Say Mailbox Maintenance or press KZ to access the Mailbox Group List Maintenance option Say or enter the mailbox or extension ID to be accessed You hear the Personal Options Menu Change Procedures for Mailbox Personal Options Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 4 Say Name or press KM The recorded name is played You have the following options e Say Accept or press EM to accept the recorded name e Say Replay or press Mf to replay the recorded name Say Append or press Ellto add to the name e Say Erase or press Eto erase and re record the name 5 Hang up or press EJ to return to the previous menu To change a password 1 Access the Voice Mail Administrator s mailbox and menu Refer to page 58 2 Say Mailbox Maintenance or press El to access the Mailbox Group List Maintenance option 3 Say or enter the mailbox or extension ID to be accessed You hear the Personal Options Menu 4 Say Password or press EJ 5 Ifyou want a password enter a new password using digits 0 9 up to 12 digits and press EB when you are done Voice mail pl
519. press Ell or the NO menu button to disable it Then press Edi or ACCEPT to continue Trunk List To program the list of trunks for the trunk group press E or the TRUNK LIST menu button When the display shows ENTER TRUNK EXTEN SION enter trunks into the list as follows 1 Enter a trunk extension using one of the methods described on page 39 2 The display shows the extension number and a Yes No prompt Press Ef or the YES menu button followed by EM to include the trunk in the list Or press El or the NO menu button followed by EM to exclude the trunk from the list 3 When the display returns to ENTER TRUNK EXTENSION select another extension number Or if finished programming the trunk list press EB or ACCEPT to continue C To exit press EM or ACCEPT to move backward through the prompts until you reach the ENTER DATABASE OPTION prompt 6 When finished with all programming press EM while the ENTER DATABASE OPTION prompt is displayed This ends the programming session Trunk Programming Page 41 Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 7 Ifa system reset is required the display shows ENTER SYS RESET OPTION Do one of the following Delayed Reset Press Kll or the DELAYED menu button to delay the reset The dis play shows DELAYED RESET SCHEDULED The system will be reset at the pre programmed time Immediate Reset Press Kl or the IMMEDIATE menu button t
520. problems by pressing specific dialpad buttons Based on those answers the system generates Alarm 128 on the Administrator endpoint For details refer to Managing System and Network Alarms on page 49 The Audio Diagnostics feature can be accessed when the endpoint is idle or when the user is on an active call The amount of diagnostics information that the endpoint provides to the sys tem depends on the state of the endpoint when the feature is accessed An active call produces more diagnostic information than an endpoint in an idle state If users do not want to access the Audio Diagnostics feature while on a call they can access the feature immediately after they hang up In the following scenarios the diagnostics information is not captured e Ifthe user accesses the Audio Diagnostics feature but does not respond to the prompts on the display the feature times out after 30 seconds e If either the user or the other party terminates the call before completing the diagnos tics the feature is terminated Power Fail Bypass Capability System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Audio Problems When the Audio Diagnostics feature code 320 is entered the system prompts users to select a characteristic of the audio problem Users with 6 line display endpoints can either press the menu button that corresponds to the displayed audio problem or enter the numeric codes for the audio problem on t
521. programmed for wrap up indications Enabling the Send Camp On Notifications to Members in DND Flag Page 151 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Because the button is programmed with the ACD Agent Wrap Up Terminate feature agents can also press the button to be removed from wrap up mode When the agent terminates the wrap up time the lamp turns off Trunk Features This section explains the trunk functions and programmable features Possible trunk misuse While this system is designed to be reasonably secure against CO trunk misuse by outside callers there is no implied warranty that it is not vulnerable to unauthorized intrusions and toll fraud If the central office does not provide supervision it will not disconnect the call when one party hangs up it is possible for a caller to remain connected to a CO trunk circuit If this happens and the caller begins dialing the call could be placed through the system and would then be billed to the system s owner The system cannot check this type of call for toll restriction and may not register the call in SMDR This problem could arise when a call is connected to an endpoint or when a call is in an unsu pervised conference Caller ID DNIS and ANI NOTE The standard Advanced CO Interfaces feature is required to use the following features The system supports Caller ID ANI and DNIS to data about the source of the call
522. ption 3 Say or enter the Group List number to be accessed The current name is played 4 After the tone record the name for the selected list and then press EM You have the following options e Say Accept or press E to accept the name e Say Replay or press HI to replay the name you just recorded Say Erase or press Ei to erase and re record the name 5 Hang up or press EM to return to the previous menu Importing Fax Documents Page 64 If your voice mail system has fax enabled you can use the Voice Mail Administrator s mailbox to import fax documents Imported documents can then be requested by callers who use a Call Routing Announcement application programmed to provide the Fax On Demand service It is recommended that you re record system prompt number 672 refer to page 344 to let callers requesting faxes know what the valid time window is for fax requests and when they should expect the fax to be delivered if their request falls outside of the valid time window NOTE To import a fax document 1 Using a fax machine after you obtain dial tone dial the voice mail access number 2 Access the Voice Mail Administrator s mailbox and menu Refer to page 58 3 Say import fax or press El to select the Import Fax option If the system does not have a fax license this option is not accepted The system may prompt you with one of the following messages f not continue to the next step
523. ption of data and to clarify the Inter Tel Inc position on certain technical or business issues Potentially harmful situations are identified in boxes labeled with internationally recognized safety graphics according to the degree of hazard exposure Typically a technician is exposed to all the identified hazards while an administrator is exposed only to data corruption hazards In addition the identification of safety hazards relevant Inter Tel Inc policies important infor mation and notes are set apart from the flow of the text in boxes with attention getting labels This section explains the conventions used and their meanings Hazard Identification Methods WARNING Three hazard identification methods appear in this manual as described in the following para graphs WARNING A WARNING identifies a hazard that if not heeded could cause definite personal injury Possible electrical shock Use the LCD panel to shut down the system then turn OFF the AC POWER before working on the external voice processing PC CAUTION with Triangle A CAUTION with the A symbol identifies a hazard that if not heeded could cause minor personal injury Possible pinch hazard Keep fingers clear of the edges of the faceplate when inserting a trunk module into the chassis CAUTION without Triangle A CAUTION without the A symbol identifies a hazard that if not heeded could cause dam age to equipment or corruption
524. ptions per minute IPM Table 13 Flashing Light Indicators for IP and Multi Protocol Phones IP Phone Flashing Light Indicators BUTTON STEADY SLOW MEDIUM FAST FLUTTER 0 IPM 30 IPM 120 IPM 240 IPM 60 960 IPM Models 8620 and 8662 Intercom ANSWER recall con ference camped on or trans ferred call is ringing in Call is Call is Call or Call is on active recalling queue call hold at the from hold or back is ring user s transfer ing in or phone or CALL camped on the user waiting has entered a transfer feature code The LED Conference A confer flashes for is recalling ence party 2 5 sec your phone is on con onds and ference wait CNF then goes hold out when the confer ence is estab lished Phone is in DND Do Not Dis turb Page 87 Hardware and Endpoints INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 88 Table 13 Flashing Light Indicators for IP and Multi Protocol Phones Continued BUTTON STEADY SLOW MEDIUM FAST FLUTTER 0 IPM 30 IPM 120 IPM 240 IPM 60 960 IPM The fea FEATURE ture is in use Calls are FWD being for warded All stations Hunt group HUNT in hunt has a call GROUP group are camped on unavail able Intercom Recalling Intercom callis An intercom call is in intercom camped on call is on hold progress call is waiting at the user s camped on phone or the IC waiting user has en
525. r If a retry is in progress it will place the call to the number on the cascade table that would have received the retry call as described below For example if the voice processing system was on level 3 of a cascade attempting retries it will not start over again at level 1 It will place the call to level 3 e Ifthe Call For Each New Message flag is disabled new messages will not generate a remote notification attempt until the Subscriber has logged on and listened to the wait ing message s However retry calls will be attempted if the applicable retry timer expires as described below Retry Call Attempts The mailbox can be programmed to retry notification calls when it encounters a busy trunk or trunk group Each cascade level can be programmed with a Number of Call Attempts value of 1 1000 calls If the mailbox user accesses the mailbox between the time the message is received and when remote notification is successful the system will stop attempting remote notification It is assumed that the mailbox user listened to the message when the mailbox was accessed How Primary and Alternate Notification Voice Processing Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 ever the ICI button at the endpoint will remain lit if there are any messages that have not been heard Each level also has a Number Called Busy timer and a Pager Notification Retry timer or Per sonal Number No Answer timer T
526. r Tel endpoint or hookflash twice single line phone To try another endpoint Press the button or press the Special button and enter the Transfer to Ring feature code 345 Then dial another extension number Transfer to Connect Endpoint Flag System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 To transfer the call to hold when calling an endpoint Inter Tel phones only Press the button or the TRANSFER TO HOLD menu button Or press the Special button and enter the Individual Hold feature code 336 The call will not ring or send Call Waiting signals until the Hold timer expires Transfer to Hold A call transferred to hold at a phone does not ring or send a display message while holding After the Hold timer expires the phone rings or sends Call Waiting signals Also calls trans ferred to Hold do not recall to the transferring party s phone Rather they recall to the receiv ing party s Attendant if unanswered after the Hold and Recall timers expire Besides the procedure listed below Inter Tel phone users have an alternative method for transferring calls to hold refer to step 4 in the previous procedure To transfer a call to Hold 1 Model 8660 or 8662 While on a call press the TRANSFER TO HOLD menu button The display shows TRANSFER CALL TO EXTENSION Other Inter Tel endpoints While on a call press the Special button and enter the Transfer To Hold feature code 346 The display shows
527. r ters both lower and upper case upper case letters say upper followed by the letter 891 Using the keys on your telephone please spell Please say the last name of the person you the last name of the person Then press are trying to reach Otherwise using the keys pound For the letter Q press seven For the on your telephone please spell the last name letter Z press nine of the person then press pound For the letter Q press seven For the letter Z press nine 892 You have no voice mails N A 893 You have no e mails N A 894 You have no faxes N A 895 Network extension N A 896 To enable Speech Recognition mailbox com To enable Speech Recognition mailbox com mands for this call press eight mands for this call say Enable or press eight 897 There was an error accessing your messages N A you will be returned to the main menu 898 Network Mailbox N A 899 N A think you said delete If this is correct please press 1 if this is not correct please press 2 900 Speech Recognition enabled N A 901 No days selected No days selected 902 On On 903 Off Off 904 N A N A 905 N A N A 906 N A N A 907 Message dated Message dated 908 E mail Reader was unable to retrieve your E mail Reader was unable to retrieve your faxes and e mails from your e mail server due faxes and e mails from your e mail server due to a login failure to a login failure Page 355 Voice Processing Prompts INTE
528. r any programmed system forwarding e Ifthe user who enters the Agent Help feature code is on a four party conference call the system will send reorder tones to signal that the Agent Help Extension cannot be added There can be a maximum of four parties in a conference attempting to add the Agent Help Extension would exceed the maximum e Ifthere are no conference circuits available when the user enters the Agent Help feature code the user will hear reorder tones and must try again later when circuits are avail able If the call is being monitored by a hunt group supervisor the monitoring feature is terminated when the Agent Help Extension joins the call an Agent Help conference call cannot be moni tored e To use the Agent Help feature with an Inter Tel endpoint While on a call press the Special button and then enter the Agent Help feature code 375 Users of Executive and Professional Display phones and Model 8560 phones can press the AGENT HELP menu button a If you hear reorder tone the Agent Help feature is not available at your station you already have four parties in your call no conference circuit is currently avail able or the Agent Help Extension is in Do Not Disturb b Depending on programming you may be prompted to enter an extension number If so enter the extension number of the station you want to call for help If you do not enter a valid extension number you hear reorder tones and must start over The di
529. r is started If the endpoint does not have an Attendant the call continues to recall at the endpoint that placed it on hold If the call Placing Calls On Hold Page 193 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 is not answered before the Abandoned Call timer expires the call is disconnected by the sys tem For users convenience the system has two Hold timers Hold and Hold Alternate In the default state the Alternate timer is set for a longer time period than the Hold timer However both timers are programmable The Alternate Hold Timer endpoint flag determines which timer each endpoint will use If the flag is disabled the endpoint uses the Hold timer If it is enabled the endpoint uses the Alternate timer Inter Tel endpoint users can avoid the Hold timer by muting the microphone dur NOTE ing a call instead of placing the call on hold If this is done the caller will not hear Music On Hold and will not recall the endpoint Individual Hold To place an intercom or outside call on individual hold 1 While on the call Inter Tel endpoints Press the Hold button or press the Special button and enter the Individual Hold feature code 336 You hear intercom dial tone and the Call button individual trunk button or button flutters Single line endpoints Hookflash and enter the Individual Hold feature code 336 You hear intercom dial tone 2 Hang up or place another ca
530. r the DTMF menu button or press Ell or the PULSE menu button Then press EM or ACCEPT to continue Trunk Group Number To assign the trunk to a trunk group press Ell or the TRUNK GROUP menu button When the display shows ENTER TRUNK GRP EXTEN SION enter the desired trunk group number using one of the methods described on page 39 Busy Trunk To temporarily remove the trunk from service press Ell or the BUSY TRUNK menu button When the display shows MARK TRUNK BUSY press EE or the ON menu button or press Kl or the OFF menu button Then press EM or ACCEPT to continue To exit press EM or ACCEPT to move backward through the prompts until you reach the ENTER DATABASE OPTION prompt 5 To Program A Trunk Group Press Ell or the TRUNK GROUP menu button Then program the trunk group as follows a The display shows ENTER TRUNK GRP EXTENSION Enter the extension num ber of the trunk group to be programmed using one of the methods described on page 39 The display shows ENTER TRUNK GROUP OPTION Select one of the following options To view the last three options on a display phone press the arrow or gt gt menu button at the bottom of the display Answer Access For Day Or Night Mode To program the endpoint s that will have answer access for this trunk group for day mode press Hf or the ANS ACCESS DAY menu button To program for night mode press Ell or the ANS ACCESS NIGHT menu button When the display shows ENTER ENDPOI
531. rd Display e Associate Display e Axxess Basic Digital e Eclipse Basic Digital These phones can be programmed in individual endpoint programming to be allowed to use system resources for standard and enhanced speakerphones Enhanced mode allows for full duplex operation over a limited volume range the range depends on trunk characteristics typi cally the range is 1 3 Enhanced speakerphones are explained below If a user presses the Speaker button while on hook the standard switched speakerphone func tion is activated and the speakerphone resource is assigned to that endpoint for the length of the call If a user requests the speakerphone function when speakerphone resources are not available the user will hear reorder tones and the display will show NO SPKRPHN AVAIL STAY OFF HOOK If the user attempts to change to the speakerphone and hangs up during a call when speaker phones are unavailable the user will be forced into a monitor only mode The user will be able to hear the other party but will not be allowed to transmit to them In this mode the user s button will be lit and the display shows NO SPKRPHN AVAIL COME OFF HOOK Pressing the lit button will result in a burst of reorder tone lift the handset to speak On certain handsfree to handsfree intercom calls voice volume levels may cause feedback to occur If this happens one station user should pick up the handset Two display phones cannot be in enhanced mode while on a
532. re System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 chart on the previous page to determine which trunk is selected The saved phone num ber is dialed Single line endpoints While on a call or after selecting a trunk hookflash and then enter the Redial feature code 380 Refer to the chart on the previous page to deter mine which trunk is selected The saved phone number is dialed Using the Last Number Dialed Feature Use the following procedure to redial numbers at stations that are programmed to use the Last Number Dialed feature To redial a number last number dialed Redirect Call Inter Tel endpoints While on or off hook press the button or press the Spe cial button and enter the Redial feature code 380 Refer to the chart on the previous page to determine which trunk is selected and which digits are dialed Single line endpoints Lift the handset or hookflash Then enter the Redial feature code 380 Refer to the chart on the previous page to determine which trunk is selected and which digits are dialed The Redirect Call feature code is located under System Devices and Feature Codes Feature Codes The Redirect Call Feature feature code 331 allows Inter Tel endpoint users to route ringing outside intercom and camped on calls to another station hunt group or outside num ber Routing of the redirected call is still subject to trunk and toll restrictions This feature pro
533. re associated with specific trunk group access codes and are used for placing outgoing calls on trunks in the selected trunk group If assigned to a button with a lamp the lamp will be lit if all trunks in the trunk group are in use Undefined Button Any button can be left undefined if it will not be needed It can be programmed like a user programmable button as described above If the phone user or programmer returns the phone to default values the button will return to being unde fined Up Button Not required for digital phones When the phone is idle the Up button can be used for adjusting volume in place of the Volume button Digital phones use the Volume button for scrolling forward through displays Keymaps Hardware and Endpoints INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Secondary Extension Appearances The Secondary Extension Appearances feature allows calls ringing or on individual hold at one primary phone to appear on a secondary extension button at another phone For example a secretary or assistant can have a secondary extension button for a supervisor s phone or one phone can have several secondary extension buttons each associated with a different primary phone The primary phone and the secondary phone must reside on the same node A secondary extension button functions as follows e When a call is ringing or holding on any Call button at the primary phone pressing the seco
534. re code 380 performs the Redial function and is programmed under the button Page 231 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Nondisplay System Speed Dial numbers cannot be redialed at a display endpoint Table 32 Redial Interactions code and phone number that was dialed EMI When Endpoint Programmed for Endpoint Progrmmed for aoe Last Number Saved Last Number Dialed Activiates Redial Idle Saves the last trunk access A trunk is selected using the same trunk access code as used to place last outside call and the last phone number is dialed Intercom dial tone on or off hook Saves the last trunk access code and phone number that was dialed A trunk is selected using the same trunk access code as used to place last outside call and the last phone number is dialed On an intercom call After selecting a trunk but before dialing Releases the current call seizes a trunk using the saved trunk access code and dials the saved phone number Redials the saved phone num ber on the currently selected trunk instead of the saved trunk access Releases the current call seizes a trunk using the access code used on the last outside call and dials the last phone number dialed Redials the last phone number dialed using the currently selected trunk After selecting a trunk and dialing one or more digits Releases the current call seizes
535. res INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 122 Table 19 Endpoint Feature Code Definitions Continued FEATURE NAME CODE DEFINITION Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb Cancel Do Not Disturb On Off 370 371 372 The Do Not Disturb feature code halts all intercom calls transferred calls and pages to the endpoint The Cancel code returns the endpoint to normal operation The on off code can be used to turn Do Not Disturb on or off Inter Tel endpoints use the DND button Do Not Disturb Override 373 Not used on single line endpoints If enabled in the database allows the endpoint user to break through another endpoint s Do Not Dis turb mode when placing an intercom call Enhanced Speakerphone Enable 310 Digital endpoints only When entered at a digital phone this feature code enables the enhanced speakerphone as described in Dis play and Nondisplay Digital Phones on page 102 Digital endpoints can also use the Special button Speaker buttons Feature Key Default 395 Not used on single line endpoints endpoints have user programmable feature buttons that can be set to enter feature codes This code returns the user programmable buttons to the database default values Group Listen 312 Not used on single line endpoints Allows a user to transmit a conversation over the end point speaker while in handset or headset mode Handsfree
536. ress 1 132 Your message envelope will play all options 133 is turned on to call you at 134 AM 135 PM 136 Extension ID number 137 Every day 138 Monday through Friday 139 Sunday 140 Monday 141 Tuesday 142 Wednesday 143 Thursday 144 Friday 145 Saturday 146 To turn this number on or off press 1 147 To change the telephone number press 2 148 To change times of day press 2 149 To change days of the week press 3 150 For pager notification press 1 Page 299 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 300 Table 42 Voice Prompts BVM EM and VPU Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT 151 For personal phone notification press 2 152 For notification of all new messages press 1 153 For priority only press 2 154 Please enter the destination telephone number and wait for further instruc tions 155 The new number is 156 Please enter the start time 157 Please enter the stop time 158 I m sorry You must program a telephone number first 159 Invalid time 160 For AM press 1 161 Please select the days of the week on which you wish to be notified 162 Not used 163 Please enter your mailbox number 164 Today 165 Yesterday 166 January 167 February 168 March 169 April 170 May 171 June 172 July 173 August 174 September
537. ress 3 or TOLL RESTRICTION Select flag to program Press 1 or Press 2 or ON menu button OFF menu button to enable to disable TOLL RESTRICTION OPTION menu button menu button for day mode NIGHT menu button for night mode v v Press 1 or Press 2 or Press 1 or COS Press 2 or COS ATTENDANT USERNAME DAY menu button Enter Attendant s extension Enter new username AT ANY LEVEL ming up one display level AS FOLLOWS Press or the Speaker button to cancel any un saved changes and back up to exit program Press or ACCEPT to save changes and back INFORMATION IN THIS CHART IS SHOWN YOUR INPUT Endpoint Database Programming Flowchart SET DAY NIGHT COS XX 4 4 s to program by scrolling y v If necessary select COS number v Press 1 or ON menu button to enable COS Press 2 or OFF menu button to disable COS If desired select another COS number to program by scrolling Page 31 Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 System Programming You can use your Administrator phone to program the following system wide information Define Do Not Disturb DND messages The messages for the Do Not Disturb fea ture can be reprogrammed through an Administrator s phone Adm
538. revious say Previous or press Eg and Next say Next or press JR options The directory lists are circular That is when the end of the list is reached the next name played will be the first name in the directory When the correct name is played the caller says Yes or presses Eq to select it If the caller is a subscriber using a display endpoint the names match ing the search are displayed and the caller can select a name by pressing the corresponding menu button If the system locates more than 10 matches the caller can either browse the list using the options mentioned above or filter the list by responding to the filtering questions generated by the system To narrow the search the system prompts the caller to indicate whether the name is the first or last name After the caller has responded the system returns a list of names that cor responds to the caller s filter parameters If the system cannot locate an exact match it returns the closest match found Additional Information After the caller accepts a name from the directory he or she has the option of requesting additional information by saying More or by pressing EM When requested the system plays the mailbox number extension number and name if they have not been disallowed To perform a directory search 1 Dial the voice mail number 2 Say Directory or press EJ 3 Say the last name of the person you are searching for or press the appropriate
539. ri cian to replace your obsolete outlet Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding type plug Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord Do not locate this product where the cord will be abused by persons walking on it Do not use an extension cord with this product s AC power cord The AC outlet for this product should not be used for any other electrical equipment Safety Regulations INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 11 Never push objects of any kind into this product through chassis slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or electric shock Never spill liquid of any kind on the product 12 To reduce the risk of electric shock do not disassemble this product but take it to a qualified serviceman when some service or repair work is required Opening or remov ing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks Incorrect reassembly can cause electric shock when the product is subsequently used 13 Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service person nel under the following conditions e When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed e If liquid has been spilled into the product e Ifthe product has been exposed to rain or water e Ifthe product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions Adjust only those controls that are covered by the
540. rive 053 You have N A 054 You have one new message N A 055 hew messages N A 056 of which is priority N A 057 You have no new messages N A 058 You have one saved message N A 059 Saved messages N A 060 Remote messaging is currently enabled N A 061 To listen to new messages press one To listen to new messages say New or press one 062 To record a message press two To record a message say Record or press two 063 To listen to saved messages press three To listen to saved messages say Saved or press three 064 For personal options press four For personal options say Personal or press four Page 315 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 065 To setup remote messaging press five To setup remote messaging say Remote or press five 066 For your primary setup press one For your primary setup say Primary or press one 067 For your alternate setup press two For your alternate setup say Alternate or press two 068 If this is the correct destination press pound If this is the correct destination say Yes or press pound 069 To send this message now press pound To send this message now say Send or press pound 070 For special delivery options press nine For special delivery op
541. ro is not a valid entry To spell a name please press the associated number on the phone dialpad with the desired letter of the person s name you are entering For the letter A press the number 2 button once for the letter B press it twice and for the letter C three times When you are finished press POUND 325 Please select the days of the week 326 To select individual week days press 3 327 Service is set for Monday through Friday 328 Service is set for each day of the week 329 Recording canceled 330 The system was busy and could not deliver message notification at the speci fied time 331 The system was unable to deliver message notification due to a programming error 332 Extension ID 333 the operator 334 the operator 335 Remote Messaging will call 336 To change a cascade level press 1 337 To select a message notification category press 4 338 Please enter the cascade level you wish to program 339 With a pager number of 340 To change the pager dial string press 3 341 To call an internal extension press 1 342 To call an outside number press 2 343 Not used 344 Please enter the digits for your digital pager and wait for further instructions 345 The new pager number is 346 Mailbox Number 347 New Message Count 348 Pause 349 You must program a telephone number first Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Ta
542. rogramming 1 If calling from an outside endpoint access the system through a DISA line Enter the DISA security code if applicable You hear a confirmation tone If programming from another endpoint lift the handset or press the Speaker button Enter the Remote Programming feature code 359 You hear a confirmation tone If you have a display it shows ENTER EXTENSION Users of Executive and Profes sional Display phones and Model 8560 phones can press the IC DIR button to use the intercom directory to look up a number Enter the extension to be programmed You hear a confirmation tone If you have a dis play it shows ENTER PASSWORD If you entered an invalid extension number you will hear reorder tones and can try again Enter the extension s password followed by EM You hear a confirmation tone If you enter an incorrect password the display will show INVALID PASSWORD Outside callers will be returned to dial tone and stations will return to the idle state Enter the Program Station Password feature code 392 You hear a confirmation tone If you have a display it Shows NEW PASSWORD Enter the new password followed by EM You hear a confirmation tone Enter the new password again for verification followed by You hear a confirmation tone If you have a display it shows PASSWORD SAVED Outside callers will hear dial tone and endpoint return to the idle state Remote Do Not Disturb Programming Page 240 To place
543. roll backward 5 Do one of the following e To store the selected number in a Station Speed Dial location Press the desired Speed Dial button You hear confirmation tone when the number is accepted e To automatically dial a displayed extension number Press EM the but ton or the ACCEPT button If an intercom call is camped on and the but ton is lit pressing the button answers the waiting call and terminates the Directory feature e To dial a displayed outside number Press EM the CALL menu button or a Call button The system automatically dials the number using your programmed outgo ing access code e To dial a displayed feature code Press E or the ACCEPT button The system automatically dials the feature code e To search for another name or number Repeat the procedure starting at step 3 Intercom Speed Dial and Feature Code Directories Page 229 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 House Phone Page 230 This feature provides users with the ability to place a predesignated intercom or outside call simply by lifting the handset or pressing the Speaker button if using an Inter Tel endpoint on a designated House Phone In a network the House Phone can be programmed to dial an off node device Several applications for this feature include Courtesy paging endpoint Visitors hear pages instructing them to pick up the house phone such as the paging endpoints used
544. rompts the user recorded mailbox greeting will be heard in the language in which it was recorded when the call is for warded When using a Call Routing Announcement application with digit translation the individual voice processing system applications assigned to the digits can be programmed to override the device language and provide prompts in one language only Using this method you can pro gram a Call Routing Announcement tree that offers callers a choice between languages For example e The Call Routing Announcement application could have a greeting that says Thank you for calling For English prompts press 1 NIHONGO WA 2 WO OSHITE KUDA SAI for Japanese press 2 e The digit translation for digit 1 would lead to an application that overrides the calling device s programming and uses only American English prompts e The digit translation for digit 2 would lead to an application that overrides the calling device s programming and uses only Japanese prompts In the example above the digit translations could be nodes that lead to various other American English only or Japanese only applications Or the first level can give more choices such as English Voice Mail or Automated Attendant and Japanese Voice Mail and Automated Atten dant Either way the individual applications or nodes can be programmed to play only one lan guage or they can use the device s language as needed Multi Language Feature on Network Operation
545. rst name If it is say Yes press El say the first name or spell the first name After the list has been filtered by first or last name a smaller list of names is returned You can then browse the list and select the appropriate name see step 4 To use the dialpad buttons to spell a name When prompted press the appropriate dialpad buttons to spell the name The number of times a button is pressed determines which character is entered as shown in the digit map table below When adjoining characters are under the same button press MAJ to advance to the next character For example 5666 66337777 enters Jones Table 40 Dialpad Alphanumeric Coding Layout NUMBER OF TIMES BUTTON IS PRESSED BUTTON 1 2 3 4 5 1 amp 1 2 A B C i 2 3 D E F 3 4 G H 4 5 J K L 5 6 M N O 6 7 P Q R S 7 8 T U V 8 9 W X Y Z 9 0 0 Outside caller search method Outside callers must use the Quick Spell method of search ing the directory if ASR is not enabled When an outside caller accesses the voice mail direc tory he or she is prompted to press the digits on the dialpad that correspond to the name they are searching for For example dialpad button El corresponds to ABC button If corresponds to DEF etc To enter the name Jones the caller would press EB GH IE EN EA The system finds the closest match based on the caller s entry NOTE Press for
546. rty call When the request for help call rings the Agent Help Extension can choose to join the call or reject the request The Agent Help Extension can be a supervisor or other endpoint an extension list or a hunt group In Database Programming an endpoint has two entries that can affect how this feature oper ates e The Agent Help Extension field determines the endpoint that is called when the Agent Help feature code is entered at the endpoint This field can be set to any valid extension number for an endpoint extension list or hunt group or it can be set to None Page 208 Agent Help Agent Help System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 e The User Keyed Extension flag if enabled allows the user to select the endpoint that will receive the Agent Help request even if a default Agent Help Extension is pro grammed as described in the item above Table 26 Agent Help Extension and User Keyed Extension Fields AGENT HELP USER KEYED EXTENSION EXTENSION Ext number Disabled The Agent Help Extension is called when the fea ture code is entered RESULT Ext number Enabled The user is prompted to enter the desired number after the feature code is entered If a number is not entered before the dialing timer expires the programmed Agent Help Extension number is dialed automatically None Enabled The user is prompted to enter the desired number after t
547. ry The display shows OUTSIDE NAME e For Feature Directory Press Kl or the FEATURE DIR menu button to select the feature code directory The display shows FEATURE NAME 3 Enter alpha and or numeric characters for the number code or user feature name up to 10 characters for intercom directory 16 for outside or feature directory If searching for a name the whole name does not have to be entered You may switch between modes by pressing the WEJ button or the USE NUMERIC MODE USE ALPHA MODE menu button If necessary press to cancel the search a In numeric mode IE button unlit Press the dialpad buttons to enter a valid feature extension or Speed Dial location number Press to backspace if necessary Press the SEARCH menu button or press MEJ to change to alphanu meric mode and then press EM to begin the search b In alphanumeric mode IE button lit Press the dialpad buttons to enter the desired characters Refer to the chart above Press once to advance or twice to leave a space Press to backspace Press EM or the SEARCH menu button to begin the search The closest match will be displayed Executive Dis play Professional Display and Model 8560 endpoint users can return to the initial entry by pressing the START OVER menu button 4 fdesired press the high end of the Volume button or the NEXT button to scroll forward alphabetically through the directory or press the low end of the Volume button or the PREVIOUS button to sc
548. ry to look up the desired extension The caller then has the following options Dial an endpoint extension number If an extension number is dialed the call is trans ferred to the selected endpoint If ringback tones are enabled the caller hears ringing while the call is being transferred If ringback is not enabled the caller hears music If the called endpoint is forwarded the call follows the programmed forward e Diala hunt group number When a hunt group number is dialed the call is transferred to the selected hunt group The call rings or circulates according to how the hunt group is programmed linear or distributed If ringback tones are enabled the caller hears ringing while the call is being transferred Page 259 Voice Processing Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 e Dial the Voice Mail application s extension number The caller can reach the Voice Mail main greeting by dialing the application extension number access number assigned to the Voice Mail feature The caller can then leave a message as a non sub scriber or access any of the Voice Mail subscriber features See page 279 for Voice Mail information e Use the directory If the caller does not know the extension or mailbox number of the desired party he or she can spell the name using the dialpad buttons and look up the number in the directory This option can be disabled in the database Or if there are
549. s Clear Network Alarm 9851 This feature code clears network wide alarms on every node in the network but will not affect system alarms The Clear Network Alarm fea ture code may be entered on any node in the network but the Send Network Alarms flag must be set for you to clear alarms on other nodes in the network Clear System Alarm 9850 This feature code clears all local and network wide sys tem alarm displays on your node After you enter the feature code the display shows SYSTEM or NETWORK ALARM CLEARED and the highest priority alarm is cleared If another alarm is active the display shows that alarm Enter the feature code again to clear the next alarm in the queue only one alarm is cleared at a time When all alarms are cleared next highest priority alarm is displayed To use menu buttons to clear alarms EITHER Press CLEAR ALARM to clear the currently displayed alarm The display shows SYSTEM or NETWORK ALARM CLEARED and the next highest priority alarm is displayed If there are no more alarms the display shows the idle menu OR Press CLEAR ALL ALARMS to clear all alarms The display shows ALL ALARMS CLEARED and the idle menu is shown You can press IDLE MENU at any time to view the idle menu instead of the clear NOTE alarm menu Alarm Queue The Alarm Queue feature prioritizes system and network alarms based on severity and allows System Administrators to view and handle critical alarms before a
550. s Ef to erase and re record your message If you exceed the maximum allotted time for recording length a prompt will notify you and allow you to re record or save the recording If the voice processing system PC disk is full a prompt will notify you that it cannot accept the recording Hang up and try again later When finished recording select one of the following options e Say Replay or press E to replay the message e Say Append or press Zl to add to the message e Say Erase or press Kl to erase and re record the message e Say Accept or press EM to accept To create an ASR recording choose one of the following options e Say Copy or press El to copy the standard non ASR greeting e Say Speech Recognition or press Kl to record an ASR greeting When finished select one of the following options e Say Replay or press i to replay the message e Say Append or press EM to add to the message e Say Erase or press EJ to erase and re record the message e Say Accept or press EM to accept To assign custom audiotex recordings to specific application extension numbers 1 2 3 Page 66 Access the Voice Mail Administrator s mailbox and menu Refer to page 58 Say Options or press Kl for recording options Say Select or press E to select a recording Creating Audiotex Recordings Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 4 When pr
551. s f and 4 represent higher and lower volume levels Press the f end of the button to lower the volume and the ii end of the button to raise the volume On the Executive Standard and Axxess Basic Phones an illustration on the button that looks like this 4 mE represents higher and lower volume levels Press the lower end in place of the down arrow and the higher end in place of the up arrow On the Professional Associate and Eclipse Basic Phones arrows on the key represents higher and lower volume levels The other Inter Tel endpoints have separate VOL UP and VOL DOWN keys The volume adjustment button on the digital endpoints also can be used Note for scrolling through displays To change volumes on an Inter Tel endpoint Press the appropriate button to raise or lower the volume using one of the procedures listed below A confirmation tone will alert you when you have reached the highest or lowest possi ble volume On display endpoints the display shows VOLUME LEVEL X The X repre sents the level and changes as the volume is raised or lowered To change handset intercom voice volume Adjust the volume while on an off hook handset intercom call To change handsfree intercom voice and paging volume Adjust the volume while on an on hook speakerphone intercom call To change handset outside call voice volume Adjust the volume while on an off hook handset outside call To change handsfree outs
552. s menu buttons for easy use of outside call features If you dialed an invalid or restricted phone number you hear reorder tones and the display shows INVALID OUTSIDE NUMBER or RESTRICTED OUTSIDE NUM BER To use the speakerphone if equipped f off hook speak handsfree when the party answers If on hook press the Speaker button and hang up To change from speakerphone to handset Lift the handset and speak The Speaker button goes off You may later transfer back to the speakerphone by pressing the Speaker button and hanging up To terminate the call Zf on hook disconnect by pressing the Speaker button If off hook hang up To place a call using automatic route selection 1 Placing Outside Calls Inter Tel endpoints While on or off hook enter the Automatic Route Selection fea ture code 92000 or press the ARS button You hear dial tone Single line endpoints Lift the handset and enter the Automatic Route Selection fea ture code 92000 You hear a single progress tone followed by dial tone If required enter a forced account code using the dialpad or a pre pro grammed Speed Dial button see page 191 Display endpoints show ENTER ACCOUNT CODE and the digits as they are entered You hear a progress tone when the code is accepted NOTE Page 187 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 2 Dial the phone number Use the button to backspace if you make a mist
553. s state is the default programming for all endpoints e The endpoint can be programmed with a default mailbox but with the option of select ing a different mailbox If the user chooses to not enter a mailbox number the system automatically selects the default mailbox In a network setting the Record A Call destination does not have to be on the same node as the endpoint but the voice processing system must be programmed with a mailbox for that endpoint When the requesting user hangs up all parties are automatically disconnected If all parties on the call hang up except the requesting user an intercom call will remain connected between the requesting endpoint and the Record A Call application This allows the user to make additional comments before ending the recording When the user turns off Record A Call or ends the call being recorded the system delivers the message to the mailbox The associated endpoint will receive Message Waiting indications as usual A monitored endpoint can initiate a Record A Call session without terminating call monitor ing Hunt group supervisors however cannot initiate a Record A Call while monitoring an endpoint and an endpoint using Record A Call cannot be monitored In other words to use Record A Call and station monitoring simultaneously the supervisor must first be monitoring the endpoint and the endpoint not the supervisor must initiate the recording The Record A Call feature code can be
554. s they should not match the endpoint s extension number or consist of one digit repeated several times The default password should be changed the first time the user logs in NOTE Once a password has been set up and the name recorded the extension owner may access Extension ID Options which allows the associated directory name and password to be modi fied If an Extension ID has not been created for a endpoint callers using Automated Attendant can not be transferred to that destination Instead these callers will receive a system recording noti fying them of an invalid entry and are routed back to Automated Attendant s main menu Individual extension IDs can be programmed as Private in Database Programming A Private number is included in the directory and can be dialed if the caller knows the number but the extension number information is not available to the caller only the name is played Extension ID Voice Processing Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Extension IDs can also be programmed as Unlisted That means that the number will not be included in the directory but can be dialed if the caller knows the extension number Calls transferred from the Automated Attendant or a Call Routing Announcement application to endpoints with extension IDs can be screened announced or unannounced Programming flags determine the methods used for transferring calls to endpoints with Ex
555. s Feature Page 255 Voice Processing Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Voice Processing Features CONTENTS PAGE IntPodHeli00 sesio 9942 40609RPO 9xeReOTY era TEROPEEOARE RN EOPRCO REESE RT 259 Automated Attendant sisse 0 00 6 vine y eR C EP RS OC I E V RRWEKCEC RE E ERE ER YE E TR RS 259 Automated Attendant Applications 626 c eee eee eee ee eee eens 260 Automated Attendant Recall Destination llle 260 Automated Attendant Custom Audiotex Recordings lellleleeleees 261 Call Screening Options uvae e ssns RR 4 wre ER om cere epo E RO e ac PRU ean E 261 Extension ID 2isaakeswbk a khi e bad Ra ERA YAdR CA ds eed eee need RE eR eR bs 262 Automatic Fax Detection oi4e33 o3 tx X ERYICRYTEARPTA EVERY STPY VET Ce TE 263 Fax E mail Reguitemetils 22 92 suws x GO x px dE AERE RE SEEN ER eda in 263 Fax Card Requiremsuis 232 cvssuntenxexirhebre a m e su eu ke Gues iat ened da 263 Fax E mail Message Format 22ci2 ede eben pb ERR RARE ARE ERE A ERREdd Ee 263 Automatic Speech Recognition 5 1 2 6 6x55 6 Ve X EPEVESEREEERCEREERE E ERR iene 264 Call Routing Announcement eeeeeeeeeeeee ehh h hn rn nn 265 Automated Attendant Custom Audiotex Recordings lllelleeeess 265 Call Screening llo ekees e bre RR RES DERE EER E E EA RUE LER E IDEE 266 Digit Trans avon we o 4 3 rinek RAPERE ERA ee hee P eRIEERRA REPRE CERCA SEER ES 266 Digit Translatio
556. s On Off 9825 Diagnostic View Displays 9983 9183 Program System Speed Dial 9801 Program Database 9932 9132 Set Network Date Time 9810 Seize Device 9973 9173 Set Time Date 9800 System History Freeze 9993 9193 Synchronize Network Time 9811 System History Unfreeze 9998 9198 Page 358 Index INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Index A Abbreviations list 8 Absorbed digits 158 Accept Button 98 Accepting a Name 270 Access to the Features 117 Account Codes 191 all calls following 192 forced 191 on outside calls 187 standard 191 Account Codes for All Calls Following 192 ACD Agent Agent IDs 144 agent wrap up 147 login logout 145 Wrap Up Timer 147 ACD Hunt Group Flags ACD Agent ID automatic connect 148 Restart ACD Idle Time Upon Login 147 Wrap Up Mode for ACD Calls 147 ACD Hunt Groups 143 agents 145 146 balanced count 144 call circulation 144 login logout 145 longest idle 144 members 145 spanning network nodes 149 using extension lists 144 Acronyms list 8 Adjusting LCD Contrast 96 Administrator endpoint programming 29 feature codes 125 358 freeze unfreeze 59 network alarms 51 Night Mode 25 night mode 25 programming 29 Administrator Continued setting time and date 26 Speed Dial programming 47 Administrator Continued system alarms 51 Administrator endpoint programming capability 28 Advanced CO Interfaces 40 Agent Help 140 208 Alarms alarm messa
557. s account code type the user must enter an account code before placing an outside call The code is not checked against any lists and the call is allowed as soon as the code is entered Endpoints with this account code type cannot forward calls to outside phone numbers e Forced Local Toll Calls Validated This account code type requires the user to enter an account code after dialing a local toll call number a toll call within the local area codes or a long distance call when using ARS If the code matches one of the pre pro grammed forced account codes in the database the call is allowed If the code does not match the call is blocked Endpoints with this account code type cannot forward calls to outside phone numbers e Forced Local Toll Calls Non Validated This account code type requires the user to enter an account code after dialing a local toll call number a toll call within the local area codes or a long distance call when using ARS The code is not checked against any lists and the call is allowed as soon as the code is entered Endpoints with this account code type cannot forward calls to outside phone numbers e Forced Long Distance Toll Calls Validated When this account code type is enabled the user only has to enter an account code if the system detects that a long dis tance call a toll call outside of the local area codes has been dialed when ARS is used If the code matches one of the pre programmed forced account c
558. s endpoints are also referred to as wireless phones And analog single line endpoints are also referred to as single line phones or single line sets In the manual and in Database DB Programming a phone may also be called a NOTE station when reference to the phone and its environment are intended Or it may be called device in the most general sense Computer Science Roots Document Overview INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Changes to Issue 1 1 In addition to the content of Issue 1 0 of the Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 Communication Servers Administrator Guide Issue 1 1 contains new information and related instructions and identi fied errors have been corrected Information and related instructions about the following hardware and software features have been added Intended Audience Digital Expansion Interface DET equipment Digital Endpoint Module DEM 16 Digital phones Single Line Adapters SLA each of which supports two single line analog phones or analog endpoints such as fax machines or recording machines Four trunk Loop Start Module LSM 4 Basic Rate Module BRM S that supports Basic Rate Interface BRI trunk capabilities Modem Data Port Module MDPM Personal Computer Data Port Module PCDPM Network Address Translation NAT traversal Off Hook Voice Announce This guide provides information and procedures for carrying out typical System Administrator and V
559. s mailbox For prompts that cannot be replaced you will hear a message informing you of the status To keep the system prompts consistent when you customize the non ASR ver sion of a prompt you should customize the ASR version also if one exists If the Multilingual feature is enabled you can change either the Primary or Secondary Lan guage prompts To change primary language prompts the phone must be in the primary lan guage mode likewise for secondary language prompts A list of all US English prerecorded prompts is provided beginning on page 293 If you change the text of the prompts keep the content similar to the default text NOTES Otherwise the prompts will not make sense to the listeners when played by voice mail You must record custom recordings using the Voice Mail Administrator phone s handset EM v1 0 does not support importing wav files to use as custom record ings To record custom system prompts or restore system prompts 1 Access the Voice Mail Administrator s mailbox and menu Refer to page 58 2 Say Replacement or press Kl to select the System Prompt Replacement option 3 Sayorenter the desired prompt number 001 907 If the number is not valid you hear an error message and must choose another prompt number 4 Ifthe prompt is available in standard format only go to the next step If the prompt is available in two formats select one of the following e Say Standard or press Ell
560. s of the Administrator Guide 0 cece cece cece cece eee ee eees 4 Multicultural English References eeeeeeeee eee enhn nnn 5 Document Navigation Aids cceeeeeeeeeeee ee eer 5 Inter Tel Reference Documents ccc cece cece cece cece ence eh hn 6 Hazard Identification and Supplemental Information eese 7 Abbreviations and AcronymS sssessssssececessecesesesesescecocseseoeo 8 Product Description 11 Introd cti n ia sce b 9c ODORE RO I CREER SOC RU EEEE E ER RC EO DR 12 Summary of Hardware and Software Features eere 13 Licensing vus ke V ERUCPEKP CIC PY NUR ED CEST EERE ERRARE ERE Ene Ea d ERE Ek qus 14 USB Security Key scso sides 6555606 60055 6069804604 650 SERERE ERV ERES Y RE ED 14 Inter Tel 8 5200 u is iab ha RR bees EAR RAO ERR ER da e a ER aas RORIS EORR 15 Inter Tel 4 55400 been asse e RR ERR EORR CERAN E ICON RR UEICA n ORC eS 15 Digital Expansion Interface cceeeeeeeeeee e ehh n 15 System Capacities uasa kieoa ERR RE RYdR E RREEARERAYASASKU ERREUR ERR E REA 15 System Network Capacities c ceeeeeeeeeeeeeee ehh 16 Voice Processing Systems 65466664 08050666 e Rer HER CE NEES ORO ERS 16 Voice Processing System ApplicationS ccc cece cece wee e cece eee eeeees 17 Voice Mail Networking oven eR PS eee eee ee FERAS OSEE RR RR RE ERA eS 20 Page v Contents INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMI
561. s pound 011 For the previous name in the directory press For the previous name say Previous or one press one 012 To hear additional information press two To hear additional information say More or press two 013 To hear the next directory name press three To hear the next name say Next or press three 014 To spell a new name press four To spell a new name say New or press four 015 Extension number N A 016 Not Used Not Used 017 is not a valid choice N A 018 Please try again N A 019 After the tone please record your message N A When finished you may hang up to deliver the message or press pound for more options 020 Message delivered N A 021 To replay press one To replay say Replay or press one 022 To erase and re record press three To erase and re record say Erase or press three 023 To append this recording press two To append this recording say Append or press two 024 To accept press pound To accept say Accept or press pound 025 Please record after the tone To end press N A pound 026 Recording erased N A 027 Recording stopped N A 028 Please begin speaking after the tone N A Page 313 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 029 Message play stopped To continue press Mes
562. s ringing or recalling at a endpoint or a hunt group can be picked up at any other endpoint using this feature Calls on hold can also be picked up from endpoints A user can reverse transfer a call from a endpoint or a hunt group on another node If more than one call is ringing or holding at the endpoint or hunt group a priority list deter mines which call is reverse transferred Calls are selected in the following order and if more than one call of the same type is at the endpoint the calls are picked up in the order they were received 1 Ringing calls 2 Camped on calls 3 Holding outside calls 4 Holding intercom calls If a call is reverse transferred from a hunt group announcement or overflow endpoint and an endpoint in the hunt group becomes available the call will be disconnected from your endpoint immediately when answered by the hunt group endpoint Group Call Pick up When the Group Call Pick Up feature is enabled a call ringing in to a hunt group or one of its endpoints can be picked up at any other endpoint Users can enter the Reverse Transfer feature code 4 and dial a hunt group s pilot number to pick up a call that is ringing in to the hunt group s pilot number or to any endpoint within that hunt group See page 148 for details about the Group Call Pick Up feature Group Call Pick up does not affect DSS lamp status any differently than standard NOTE rar hand group calls or individual calls There is a programmab
563. s specified in the mailbox s E mail Address field Once the e mail message is sent the original mes sage will be deleted from the mailbox If the e mail message cannot be delivered to the specified address it will be stored as a Voice Mail message in the mailbox and will not be deleted Mailboxes programmed for FORWARD ONLY cannot use the Remote Notification feature Because all messages are automatically sent to the E mail Address there is no Voice Mail message to trigger the Remote notifi cation NOTE If the mailbox s E mail field is programmed to COPY amp FORWARD the Voice Mail or Record A Call message will be stored in the mailbox and the voice processing system will convert the file to WAV attach it to an e mail message and deliver the e mail mes sage to the address specified in the mailbox s E mail Address field Due to the nature of network connections voice processing system soft ware is designed to handle a network failure gracefully If the network link from the voice processing system to the e mail server is down the voice processing system will store the messages in a queue If the network does NOTE not come back up in 15 minutes the voice processing system will deliver all pending messages in the queue back to the Voice Mailboxes and tem porarily disable the e mail queue until the network is available This means that new messages will remain in the mailboxes and will not be converted to e mail messages u
564. sage play stopped To continue say pound Resume or press pound 030 Enter the destination mailbox or group list Say or enter the destination mailbox or group number list number 031 Logon canceled N A 032 Enter your password Then press pound Say or enter your password 033 There have been three invalid attempts to log N A onto your mailbox 034 Invalid password N A 035 Thank you for calling Good bye N A 036 To access mailbox features you must change N A your system assigned password 037 You have not finished setting up your mail box N A 038 Subscriber access denied N A 039 Because this is the first time you are entering N A your mailbox you must record your name for the company directory 040 Since you are entering your mailbox for the Since you are entering your mailbox for the first time you should be aware of a few stan first time you should be aware of a few stan dard features To cancel an option you have dard features To cancel an option you have accessed and return to the previous menu accessed and return to the previous menu press star To accept your recording or dialing say Cancel or press star To accept your sequence or to advance to your next mes recording or dialing sequence or to advance sage press pound For help you may press to your next message say Accept or press zero at any time you are at a menu and the pound For help say Help or press zero to system will replay the current me
565. sage until it is canceled a non display endpoint receives tones only If the station is busy the user still hears the tones and the message displays for 10 sec onds during the call then the display returns after the user hangs up Reminder displays inter rupt but do not affect programming Table 35 Default Reminder Messages 01 MEETING 11 CALL ENGINEERING 02 STAFF MEETING 12CALLMARKETING 03 SALES MEETING 13 CALL ACCOUNTING 04 CANCEL MEETING 14 CANCEL DND 05 APPOINTMENT 15 CANCEL CALL FWD 06 PLACE CALL 16 TAKE MEDICATION 07 CALL CLIENT 17 MAKE RESERVATION 08 CALL CUSTOMER 18 REVIEW SCHEDULE 09 CALL HOME 19 LUNCH 10 CALL CORPORATE 20 REMINDER In a network each node has a list of reminder messages that can be used only on that node The system has default reminder messages in both the Primary and Secondary Languages However messages using Japanese characters can be reprogrammed only through an adminis trator s station Refer to System Programming on page 32 The language of the messages seen by the station user is determined by the station s pro grammed language That is if a station is programmed for Japanese the user will see only Jap anese messages when programing a reminder message Only digital display endpoints will display Japanese prompts Other Inter Tel end NOTE points do not support Japanese prompts To request reminder messages NOTE Lift and replace
566. se Agent IDs it will have a list of end points and will send calls to the endpoints where agents are logged in For optimum system performance there should not be more than 1000 Agent NOTE IDs in any hunt group and no more than 2000 Agent ID entries in all hunt groups combined ACD Agent IDs can be included in Extension Lists which allow several ACD Agents to receive a call at once When a call camps on to an ACD hunt group that uses Agent IDs only the agents currently logged in to the hunt group will receive camp on indications ACD hunt group supervisors will receive visual camp on displays if they are programmed as members of the hunt group and have the ACD Agent Logout feature enabled ACD Agent Log In and Log Out ACD hunt group members are referred to as agents Agents can log in to and out of the ACD hunt group at any time While logged in the agent will receive calls through the ACD hunt group When the agent is logged out calls to that ACD hunt group will bypass the endpoint The Hunt Group Remove Replace feature described on page 136 does not have any effect on ACD hunt group calls when entered by an ACD agent However placing the agent s endpoint in Do Not Disturb will halt all ACD and non ACD hunt group calls The following diagram illustrates how the Agent ID is used to log in or log out Figure 8 ACD Hunt Group Agent Log In and Log Out AGENT ID IN UCD ACD HUNT GROUP HUNT
567. ser does not succeed within the determined number of attempts the call will be discon nected if the security code is invalid or transferred to the primary Attendant if the extension number is invalid Using DISA If DTMF decoders are unavailable when a DISA call is received the incoming E DISA call is automatically sent to the primary Attendant To use DISA 1 From a DTMF endpoint dial the phone number of the DISA trunk When the call is answered by the system you hear system intercom dial tone If you hear a single progress tone enter the appropriate day or night DISA security code followed by pound 2 Dialan extension number or a hunt group pilot number To call the primary Attendant dial 0 You hear music or ringing until the call is answered Figure 13 DISA Example DISA Inter Tel VAS CS 5200 5400 Communication Server Caller dials DISA number hears dial tone and enters passworg Caller can dial a voice i if required processing system station or hunt group extension number Security Codes Page 165 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Inter Tel Endpoint Features Volume Controls Page 166 The following sections describe how to use Inter Tel endpoint features On Inter Tel endpoints volume is controlled in the following ways On Model 8600 8620 8622 and 8660 endpoints illustrations of speaker
568. sic Voice Mail features and optional external Voice Mail options For further details turn to the section Or if viewing the PDF version of the manual go directly to the section by clicking Voice Processing Features For reference the guide also provides a comprehensive list of Voice Processing Prompts to aid in the development of custom messages and a table that summarizes Default Feature Codes Multicultural English References This guide supports the requirements of administrators in the United States of America US and in the Inter Tel Europe market which includes the United Kingdom UK Because of this dual support dual references are made to industry features standards and jargon as appropri ate throughout the guide For the purposes of this guide British English technical terms are assumed to apply to other English speaking European cultures as well For example the US telecom industry refers to a communication line between a public switch ing system and a private switching system as a central office CO trunk In the UK this same type of line is called a local exchange trunk Applying the dual reference guideline would result in the following statements e During system installation the technician connects CO trunks local exchange trunks to the LSM 2 modules e To turn the Diagnostics Mode on or off at an Administrator phone the System Admin istrator enters 9900 9100 in Europe However this guide does not
569. splay shows REQUESTING AGENT HELP c dfthe Agent Help Extension accepts the call you will hear the Agent Help tone if enabled Display endpoints show AGENT HELP IN PROGRESS When the Agent Help Extension hangs up your display shows AGENT HELP TERMI NATED Agent Help System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 d If the Agent Help Extension rejects the call you will hear a confirmation tone Display endpoints will show AGENT HELP REJECTED To use the Agent Help feature with a single line endpoint While on a call hookflash and then enter the Agent Help feature code 375 a If you hear reorder tone the Agent Help feature is not available at your endpoint you already have four parties in your call no conference circuit is currently avail able or the Agent Help Extension is in Do Not Disturb Depending on programming you may be prompted to enter an extension number If so enter the extension number of the endpoint you want to call for help If you do not enter a valid extension number you hear reorder tones and must start over The display shows REQUESTING AGENT HELP If the Agent Help Extension accepts the call you will hear the Agent Help tone if enabled Display endpoints show AGENT HELP IN PROGRESS When the Agent Help Extension hangs up your display shows AGENT HELP TERMI NATED If the Agent Help Extension rejects the call you will hear a confirmation tone Dis
570. splays more quickly after a message is left by the endpoint user or after a call is transferred This endpoint option cannot be programmed by the user It is a database programmable flag Selectable Ring Tone Page 167 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 DKTS Alternate Transient Display Timer Endpoint Flag and Timer As an alternative to or in addition to disabling the call transfer and message transient dis plays as previously described the programmer can use a combination of an endpoint flag and a timer to control all of the endpoints transient displays not just the call transfer and message displays The DKTS Alternate Transient Display Timer endpoint flag if enabled allows all transient displays to be controlled by the DKTS Alternate Transient Display timer The DKTS Alternate Transient Display timer can be set to 1 255 tenths of a second 0 1 25 5 seconds The default value is 10 tenths of a second 1 second This timer affects only those Inter Tel endpoints with the DKTS Alternate Transient Display Timer flag enabled Transient Call Indication On Call Answer Endpoint Flag This programmable endpoint flag determines whether the endpoint user sees a call display when answering a call by pressing a secondary extension button or by reverse transferring If enabled the display shows if the call was ringing recalling transferred or holding at the o
571. ss the Special button once for an asterisk twice for a pound three times for a hookflash F or four times for a pause P Executive Display Professional Display or Model 8560 phone users can press the El EG FLASH or PAUSE menu buttons to enter special characters You cannot exceed 48 digits Press EG or ACCEPT to save the number You hear a single progress tone when the number is accepted Your display shows SYS SPD BIN XXX UPDATED Programming System Speed Dial Numbers Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 To erase System Speed Dial names or numbers 1 While on hook enter the Program System Speed Dial feature code 9801 Display phones show PROGRAM SYS SPD 000 999 2 Enter the Speed Dial location code 000 999 The display shows ENTER NAME current name 3 You may erase the name and or number To erase the name Press repeatedly until the name is erased or press CLEAR To erase the number Press EJ or ACCEPT to display the ENTER NUMBER prompt then press repeatedly until the number is erased or press CLEAR 4 Press EM or ACCEPT to exit You hear a single progress tone when accepted Your dis play shows SYS SPD BIN XXX UPDATED Programming and Using Mini DSS Buttons Direct Station Select DSS buttons located on a Mini DSS unit or on an Inter Tel phone pro vide one button access to extension numbers If the button is equipped with a lamp
572. ss the desired button If calling an Inter Tel phone with handsfree answering enabled you are immediately connected If placing a private call calling a hunt group calling a single line phone or calling an Inter Tel phone with the Handsfree feature disabled you hear repeating double tones until the call is answered If the called OHVA enabled phone is busy and your phone is enabled for immediate OHVA transmit do not hang up when calling a busy phone Press the Mini DSS button again If the phone s secondary voice path is available you are immediately connected for an off hook voice announce call and may speak Transferring calls to stations 1 While on a call press the desired Mini DSS button The call is placed on transfer hold a Transfer to a station that is forwarded to Voice Mail You hear repeating double tones and the display shows DEST FORWARDED TO VOICE MAIL b Transfer to Voice Mail The system waits for you to enter the mailbox number The display shows ENTER MAILBOX Enter the desired mailbox number If you do not enter a mailbox number before you hang up the caller will be connected to the Voice Mail unit and must enter the mailbox number after listening to the introductory prompts If desired wait for an answer and announce the call If you are calling a device that does not accept handsfree calls such as Automated Attendant location the display shows HANG UP TO FINISH TRANSFER You have the following op
573. st in the hunt group receives the next incoming call If the receiving endpoint is busy or all endpoints in the exten Hunt Groups System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 sion list are busy or if there is no answer before the No Answer Advance timer expires the call goes to the next endpoint or extension list on the hunt group list NOTE If an extension list is included in a hunt group a call will ring all endpoints on the extension list when it reaches that point in the hunt group list Therefore to create an all ring type of hunt group you can pro 1st call begins here EXT 1000 gram the hunt group as either linear or dis tributed and then assign an extension list as 4th call begins here EXT 1003 the only hunt group member See ACD Hunt Groups on page 143 for information on the additional distribution types available in ACD hunt groups DISTRIBUTED HUNT GROUP CALL PROCESSING Hunt group pilot number 2000 called 2nd call begins here EXT 1001 3rd call begins here EXT 1002 Hunt Group Call Processing Hunt group endpoints receive the following indications when a call is ringing in e Ifan outside call is ringing the endpoint designated to receive the call first shows ring flash on the associated individual trunk button if it has one or a Call button until the call is answered or the No Answer Advance timer expires and the call
574. stem Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 20 Administrator Feature Code Definitions Continued FEATURE NAME CODE US EUROPE DEFINITION Diagnostics On Off 9900 9100 Enables or disables system diagnostics mode to perform diagnostics functions such as freezing unfreezing the database print ing message logs and seizing a device for troubleshooting purposes NOTE Because diagnostics mode affects System performance it is recommended that you run the diagnostics program when the System is idle Enable Network Day 9862 Places any or all remote nodes into day mode you are prompted for the node num ber Enable Network Night 9861 Places any or all remote nodes into night mode you are prompted for the node num ber Modem Disable 9867 Disables the internal modem used in con junction with the assigned extension num ber of the modem Modem Enable Modem Reset Night Ring On Off 9866 9869 9860 Enables the internal modem used in con junction with the assigned extension num ber of the modem Resets the internal modem used when the modem fails to answer an incoming call or to synchronize with an external modem CAUTION Database corruption could occur if the modem is reset during a database programming session Inter Tel recom mends that you assign the modem exten sion to a Speed Dial button Places syste
575. stination saved N A 569 Fax destination erased N A 570 To cancel unheard sent voice mail messages To cancel unheard sent voice mail messages press one say Unheard or press one 571 All sent messages have been heard N A 572 Enter the destination mailbox Say or enter the destination mailbox 573 This mailbox has one unheard message N A 574 unheard messages N A 575 To append to the message press two To append the message say Append or press two 576 To leave a Voice Mail message press one To leave a Voice Mail message say Voice Mail or press one 577 To make a return call press two To make a return call say Call Back or press two 578 Please hold while your call is being transferred N A to an outside number 579 Enter the number of the remote mailbox Say or enter the number of the remote mail box 580 followed by pound N A 581 has just listened to the original message N A 582 This mailbox has N A 583 Not Used Not Used 584 Not Used Not Used 585 Not Used Not Used 586 Not Used Not Used 587 To hear the recipients press three To hear the recipients say Hear or press three 588 Not used N A Page 340 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 589 Not used N A 590 Not used N A 591 Not used N A 592
576. swer timer expires If forward all calls is enabled display endpoints show the call forwarding status and destina tion until the request is canceled If one of the conditional forwards is enabled no answer busy or no answer busy display endpoints show the forward status for five seconds and then return to normal If the endpoint receiving the forward is equipped with a display endpoint it shows EXT XXXX FWD FROM EXT XXXX for each forwarded call received Users can chain Forwards from endpoint to endpoint provided that the Forwards do not form a logical loop and the chain does not include more than 10 endpoints The conditional Forward features if busy if no answer if busy no answer may form a loop that the system cannot detect until a call is placed to the forwarding endpoint For example if two users forward their calls to each other using the Forward If Busy feature the system accepts the requests How ever if a call rings in while both endpoints are busy the forwards create an illegal loop In this case the call camps on to the called endpoint and that endpoint s display shows INVALID FORWARD PATH If more than one endpoint has ring in for a trunk group direct ring in calls on that trunk group will forward to extension numbers but not outside numbers or Voice Mail ports The display of the endpoint receiving the forwarded call will show it as a forwarded call and the Call button or individual trunk button flashes to show ring in
577. system database so that they can analyze system activity for the time period preceding the alarm To freeze or unfreeze system history NOTE Do not perform this procedure unless directed to do so by service personnel 1 While on hook enter the Diagnostics Mode feature code 9900 9100 to turn on diag nostics mode The display shows DIAGNOSTICS ON 2 Enter the Freeze System History feature code 9993 or 9193 in Europe or Unfreeze System History feature code 9998 or 9198 in Eruope The display shows HISTORY FROZEN or UNFROZEN If you attempt changing the state of the system history to its current status the display shows HISTORY ALREADY FROZEN or UNFRO ZEN 3 Enter the Diagnostics Mode feature code 9900 9100 to turn off diagnostics mode The display shows DIAGNOSTICS OFF Freezing Unfreezing the Network History Page 56 Administrators can freeze or unfreeze the fault history for any node in the network Service personnel can then pull the information from each node for troubleshooting purposes Nodes are assigned to freeze zones by the database programmer to allow selective freezes You must know which zone to freeze unfreeze and then enter the freeze feature code followed by the zone number A node can be in more than one freeze zone If you freeze a zone that contains a node that is already frozen the display will show SOME NODES ALREADY FROZEN and the node will remain frozen If you unfreeze a zone with unfro
578. t Entering the feature code one more time turns this feature off Diagnostic Major Reset 9962 9162 This is used by Inter Tel software developers and cannot be used in Beta or Production software Diagnostic Mark As Leaks 9945 9145 This is used by Inter Tel software developers and cannot be used in Beta or Production software Diagnostic Mark As Quiescent 9946 9146 This is used by Inter Tel software developers and cannot be used in Beta or Production software Diagnostic Minor Reset 9964 9164 This is used by Inter Tel software developers and cannot be used in Beta or Production software Diagnostic Network Freeze Zone System Histories Diagnostic Network Unfreeze Zone System Histories 9939 9139 9989 9189 The system fault history for any freeze zone in the network can be halted frozen or re enabled using these feature codes when diagnostics mode is enabled The fault history can then be extracted from each zone and used by service personnel when troubleshoot ing the system Diagnostic Network Groups 9963 9163 Allows an administrator to verify that the Net work Groups on the local node are pro grammed properly When 9963 is entered at an administrator s endpoint the telephone System initiates pings from each Inter Tel IP device on the local node and determines if the other devices respond to the ping If a device does not respond to the ping or if a
579. t In the sample above the toll field would be suppressed so that only 89 10288 602 961 9000 prints Any combination of the above can be used If all three fields are suppressed only 602 961 9000 will print The service technician can also suppress or allow call information in the SMDR report Dialed Digits field The following options are available e Suppress Outside Party Number Caller information that is received through ANI or Caller ID will not appear if this option is selected e Suppress Trunk Number Information received through DID or DNIS will not be included in the report if this option is selected Station Message Detail Recording Page 247 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 The service technician can determine which equipped station s and or trunks will be included in the report and whether off node devices will be included in reports However for incoming calls DISA calls conference calls and or ring in diagnostics all calls are recorded even when they involve stations not in the programmed station list SMDR can be programmed to record the elapsed time of calls in seconds S XXXXXX or hours and minutes HH MM If programmed to record elapsed time in seconds the ELAPSED TIME field will show S XXXXXX XXXXXX represents the number of seconds for calls up to 999999 seconds long For calls lasting longer than 999999 seconds ELAPSED TIME will show HH
580. t and or press the flashing individual trunk button flashing Call button or button Model 8660 or 8662 phone users who have a programmed Voice Mail extension can press the SEND TO V MAIL menu button to transfer the call to Voice Mail The individual trunk or Call button flashes slowly during the call Display endpoints show trunk name RINGING IN Intercom call or page announcing a call and a Call button or individual trunk but ton is flashing at the fast rate A call has been transferred to your endpoint Lift the handset and or press the flashing individual trunk button flashing Call button or button Model 8660 or 8662 endpoint users that have a programmed Voice Mail extension can press the SEND TO V MAIL menu button to transfer the call to Voice Mail The individual trunk or Call button flashes slowly during the call Display end points show TG XXXX or group name TFER FROM EX XXXX or username An individual trunk button is flashing at the fast rate there is no ring signal and you have allowed answer for the trunk You may hear ringing on another end point Press the fast flashing individual trunk button as described above or enter the Automatic Trunk Answer feature code 350 The button cannot be used to answer these calls To receive a call on a single line endpoint You hear a page announcing a transfer and or repeating long double tones A call is ringing in Lift the handset you are connected to the caller You hear a
581. t application s extension number when the system is in day and or night mode Automated Attendant Recall Destination Page 260 When an endpoint receives a call that has been routed through Automated Attendant the call is handled as a transferred call and the display shows TFR FROM description If the call is not answered the call recalls Automated Attendant s recall destination The recall destination is usually the Automated Attendant Recall Destination application which announces that the called endpoint is unavailable and allows the caller to choose to leave a message if the end point has an associated mailbox or dial another extension number CALL TO AUTOMATED ATTENDANT Automated Attendant answers and transfers the call to the destination selected by the caller Y The party receiving the transfer does not answer before the Transfer Voice Processing timers expires Call goes to the Automated Attendant Recall Desti nation where caller selects option Y Y Call is sent to station s Call is sent to endpoint associated mailbox hunt group Voice Mail or operator destination Automated Attendant Applications Voice Processing Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 If the Recall Destination fails to answer a call it is automatically sent to the recall destination s programmed Attendant If the call is not answered there it is disconnected
582. t is in SIP mode Diagnostic SIP View 9987 9187 Allows the user to change the system wide SIP output value Options include No Output Headers and Full Output Diagnostic Spare 1 3 9910 9912 This is used by Inter Tel software developers 9110 9112 and cannot be used in Beta or Production software Diagnostic System 9974 9174 This is used by Inter Tel software developers History and cannot be used in Beta or Production software Diagnostic View 9983 9183 This is used by Inter Tel software developers Displays and cannot be used in Beta or Production software Program Database 9932 9132 Can be used for programming endpoint sys tem and trunk parameters Seize Device 9973 9173 Used during troubleshooting to seize a spe cific trunk or endpoint by indicating the board number port number and device number System History Freeze 9993 9193 The system fault history can be halted fro zen or re enabled using these feature codes System History 9998 9198 when diagnostics mode is enabled Fault his Unfreeze tory is used by service personnel when trou bleshooting the system Diagnostics Feature Codes System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Extension Numbers Extension numbers are recognized as feature codes by the system When the system is in the default state the extension numbers are assigned as follows Table 22 Default Extension Numbers
583. t need to change the date press E or ACCEPT to skip to the TIME XX XX prompt 3 Use the dialpad buttons to enter the month day and year For example press 020301 for February 3 2001 When finished the display shows TIME current time If you entered the date incorrectly the display shows INVALID DATE and you are prompted to enter a new date If using a phone programmed for the Japanese language enter the date Konz as year month day For example 050203 for February 3 2005 If you do not need to change the time press Ell or ACCEPT twice to exit The display shows SYSTEM DATE AND TIME UPDATED 4 Use the dialpad buttons to enter the time in hours and minutes For example enter 0900 for 9 00 If you entered the time incorrectly the display shows INVALID TIME and you are prompted to enter a new time 5 If the system is set for 12 hour display format the display shows SELECT AM OR PM AM 1 PM 2 Press Kll or the AM menu button for AM or press EM or the PM menu button for PM The display shows SYSTEM DATE AND TIME UPDATED If you press any button other than 1 or 2 the display shows INVALID TIME and you are prompted to enter a new time If using a phone programmed for the Japanese language the prompts will DTE be reversed and you will set the AM or PM before the hour and minutes Setting Network Date and Time Page 24 Occasionally the network time or date needs to be reset such as when the system is defaulted
584. t new messages remain in the mailboxes and are not converted to e mail messages until the network link is restored NOTE Integrated solution is a one way feature That is the user cannot reply to the sender of a voice mail message using e mail If a user attempts to reply the message will be sent to the Administrator s E mail Address instead of to the sender of the voice mail message The user should forward the message or send a new message instead of replying In Outlook Client based solution the user can reply to any message from Mous another mailbox using the Outlook Exchange Reply or Reply to All options E mail messages containing wav files can be forwarded to other e mail addresses or stored on the computer s local drive just like any other e mail message Or the wav file can be detached from the message and stored on the computer The e mail message sent by voice mail has the following components e To Contains the recipient s e mail address e From Contains the e mail address of the EM unit If an E mail Real Name has been programmed for the EM unit it will also be shown on this line e Subject Contains the line lt length of message gt Message for MB lt number gt from lt source gt If the message is marked priority the subject line will be preceded by the word PRIORITY The source of the voice mail message will appear as one of the fol lowing MB number x
585. t of the HG queue if the assigned agent station goes into Do Not Disturb DND mode If the flag is not enabled the calling party will continue to ring until the No Answer Advance timer expires or the agent removes DND from the station and answers the call e A system wide flag titled Single Idle Time for All Hunt Groups This feature invokes an Automatic Call Distribution ACD algorithm that sends an incoming call to the agent station with the longest idle time in all the HG queues a station belongs to For agent stations belonging to multiple HGs this feature allows calls to be distributed to other stations having the longest idle time regardless of a station s idle time status in an individual HG Hunt Group Call Distribution Page 134 When an intercom or outside call is transferred or rings in to the pilot number it circulates through the hunt group in linear or distributed order until answered as described below e Linear order Incoming calls always start circulating by LINEAR HUNT GROUP CALL PROCESSING A Hunt group pilot ringing at the first phone or number 2000 called extension list on the hunt group list that is stored in the DITS alls will always database begin search here gt amidi SUR MEMBERS EXT 1001 EXT 1002 EXT 1003 Distributed order To even out the call load distributed order shifts the starting point of each call When an phone user receives a call the next endpoint or extension li
586. t solidly when the Agent Help Extension is in the conference When the requesting user hangs up all parties are automatically disconnected The Agent Help Extension can leave the call at any time without affecting the other parties by hanging up If the other party or parties hangs up first the requesting station and the Agent Help Extension remain connected in an intercom call The requesting station can cancel the request or remove the Agent Help Extension from the call by re entering the Agent Help feature code thereby terminating the feature If necessary the requesting endpoint in an Agent Help call can use the Hold Transfer Record A Call or other features during the call while the Agent Help Extension is connected How ever if any inside party has enhanced speakerphones enabled the enhanced mode will be dis abled when the Agent Help conference begins and must be re enabled if still desired The Agent Help feature will not function in the following cases e Jf the feature is not enabled in Premium Features any user attempting to enter the Agent Help feature code will hear reorder tones and if at a display endpoint see a RESERVED FEATURE display e The Agent Help Extension cannot be in Do Not Disturb mode or have call forwarding enabled If so the requesting user will hear reorder tones after entering the Agent Help feature code or entering the desired extension number The Agent Help request will not follow the forward o
587. t to Private Certified Messages If the Voice Mail message is marked for certified delivery the Track Option on the Options tab is checked Version 2 3 Description For EM Unified Messaging is available in two configurations as an Integrated Solution and as an Outlook client based solution By default EM includes 25 UM licenses that allow users to customize features based on the solution chosen Unified Messaging features allow users to e Receive voice mail messages via e mail e Receive inbound faxes via e mail Send voice mail messages via e mail Outlook client based solution only e Send outbound faxes via e mail Outlook client based solution only NOTE UM v2 3 is available only for systems using Enterprise Messaging Integrated Solution The Integrated Solution also known as Level 1 in previous versions allows users to receive voice mail messages and faxes as e mail messages with attachments An integrated fax port in the EM unit is used for fax functionality The voice mail attachment is in the form of a wav file that can be played on most multimedia computers equipped with a sound card and speak ers The fax attachment is in the form of a tif file that can be viewed using most graphics software Users can choose to receive the messages as voice mail and e mail Forward amp Copy or as e mail only Forward Only The following diagram shows an example of the Integrated Solution installation
588. tabase or using an Administrator endpoint Default Do Not Disturb messages are programmed as shown in the following table Table 33 Do Not Disturb Messages 01 DO NOT DISTURB 11 OUT OF TOWN TIL 02 LEAVE A MESSAGE 12 OUT OF OFFICE 03 IN MEETING UNTIL 13 OUT UNTIL 04 IN MEETING 14 WITH A CLIENT 05 ON VACATION TIL 15 WITH A GUEST 06 ON VACATION 07 CALL ME AT 16 UNAVAILABLE 17 IN CONFERENCE 08 AT THE DOCTOR 18 AWAY FROM DESK 09 ON A TRIP 19 GONE HOME 10 ON BREAK 20 OUT TO LUNCH Do Not Disturb works as follows in a network setting e Each node has a list of Do Not Disturb messages that can be used only on that node e An Intercom caller sees other users Do Not Disturb status when calling across nodes e The network allows DND override across nodes The system has default Do Not Disturb messages in both the Primary and Secondary Lan guage However messages that use Japanese characters can be reprogrammed only through a Model 8660 endpoint designated as an Administrator endpoint Refer to System Programming on page 32 The language of the messages seen by the station user both when programming his or her sta tion and when calling another station that is in Do Not Disturb is determined by the station s programmed language That is if a station is programmed for Japanese the user will see only Japanese messages when programing a Do Not Disturb message If th
589. tate this flag is enabled The system provides the user with advanced displays for direct ring in calls if the endpoint has both of the following endpoint flags enabled Expanded CO Call Information on Displays and Outside Party Call Information Has Priority A typical direct ring in display would look like the following TRNK GRP 1 RINGING IN However with the enhanced displays the system will attempt to display the name of the out side caller on line 1 and the number of the outside caller on line 2 When a CO call rings into the system the system uses the following criteria to determine the name that will appear on the display endpoints The criteria are listed from highest priority to lowest priority Display Line 1 The following criteria are used to display the name on the top line of the ring in display This assumes that all of the necessary endpoint flags are properly set and usernames are correctly filled in or left blank at the programmer s discretion for Call Routing Tables and Trunk Group Names 1 Outside Party Name provided by the Desktop Application if available 2 Outside Party Name provided by Caller ID if enabled at the system wide flag level 3 Outside Party Name provided by System Speed Dial If the collected number matches a number in a Speed Dial bin the system uses the name of the corresponding Speed Dial bin 4 Outside Party Number provided by the Desktop Application 5 Outside Party Number pro
590. tation s mailbox because redirected calls will not follow forwarding If the call is redirected to an unreachable destination it will not be redirected and will ring back at the original station Using the Last Number Dialed Feature Page 233 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 e fan ARS trunk group or trunk number is entered the system will prompt the user to enter the destination phone number Calls may not be redirected to a node number but may be directed to a station on another node by entering the correct extension number e Jf the applicable Forwarding timer expires before the user completes the redirection process the system terminates the call Paging The Paging feature allows announcements to be made through endpoint internal speakers Optional external paging equipment amplifiers and paging speakers may also be installed There can be up to 10 paging zones When the system is in the default state all Inter Tel end points are assigned to paging zone 1 to provide an all page zone Inter Tel endpoints trunks and the external paging port s can be assigned to any all or none of the paging zones as desired Placing a large number of Inter Tel endpoints in a paging zone may affect system NOTE performance If system operation is affected when a page is placed to a particu lar page zone remove some Inter Tel endpoints from that zone or change to external paging
591. te security measures are put in place and properly maintained by both the customer and the installing company this architecture and its associated server based applications are substan tially secure against unauthorized access to the customer s data network via the telecommuni cations system Appropriate security measures include but are not limited to the proper implementation of user administrative accounts passwords firewalls Network Address Trans lation NAT access control lists virus protection security updates etc and the proper main tenance of access points programs and their respective accounts passwords Document Overview INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Document Overview CONTENTS PAGE Inlroductill 2 5359533 0EX 0 RREPOEREREDEETdUERRREE Y EEEE EEE eens PIE 2 Endpoints and Phones loose oo eru hme ER ET yarn rante yn sS 2 Computer Science Roots 222 22chacbibeecevduaei hese arebavebharboagan ae eas 2 sare m This Man al s siete re EE Ee IRE Boeke Ee SR p ER pees E RSS 2 Changes to Issue LT eecosa a RRRERARTECEERRQIRPERRTANE E NRESEEPAREREXEE EE anaemia 3 Intended Audience ea ven 3r d ERR E RE T XPRERERE ER ERR E REG RF RE SEG EN e e 3 System Administrator xz eeshercraerkek se erkri RAeEATARA RR ROenReutiaE ERTRPRE 3 Voice Mail Administrator eR A ek Stew SURE OO RG EXTA E AXE RU REA ER aD 4 Sections of the Administrator Guide 0 cc ccc c
592. te voice command e When you use the dialpad digits to complete a task you are sometimes prompted to press EM to indicate to the system that you have finished entering digits It is not neces sary to say Pound when using ASR The silence that follows your voice command replaces the EM digit e While you are recording a message ASR is temporarily disabled therefore you cannot issue spoken commands to access recording options like pause and erase If you attempt to issue a spoken command while you are recording your recording will include the command you issued To access recording options you must press the appropriate dial pad digits e You cannot use ASR to set up your e mail password For security reasons you must enter your e mail password characters by pressing the appropriate dialpad digits Enter ing passwords this way prevents others from overhearing your password e If the system cannot interpret your voice commands for three consecutive attempts ASR is temporarily disabled by the system for the current call You can still complete tasks using the dialpad digits however you will no longer be prompted to say a com mand e You can temporarily disable ASR for the current call by selecting option eight from the main menu Fax E mail Message Format Voice Processing Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Call Routing Announcement The Call Routing Announcement application can b
593. ted The digit translation node used for fax document selection should have a greeting that explains how to select documents For example it can say something like Welcome to Fax On Demand For a product list press 1 For a price list press 2 When you have made your selec tions press to continue Or to cancel your selections press Or you can use a series of digit translation nodes that break the document selection into categories and or allow callers to dial individual document numbers If fax delivery times are set to specific days or times the introductory recording should also include this information NOTE The Record A Call feature is required to use Record A Call If the voice processing system has a Record A Call application the users can enter a feature code to record ongoing calls in their designated Record A Call mailboxes Users can retrieve the recorded messages later just as they would any other mailbox message The Record A Call mailbox records the call as a Voice Mail message All parties will be included in the recording If desired the Record A Call mailbox can be programmed to play a message announcing that the Record A Call feature is in progress There can be separate mes sages for day and night modes A Record A Call tone can be programmed to alert callers at the beginning of the recording Also it can be programmed to beep periodically throughout the recording There are two ways an endpoint can
594. tempt to program a nonprogrammable button or enter an invalid code you hear repeat ing reorder tones and the feature code assigned to the button will remain unchanged Display phones show NON PROGRAMMABLE KEY or FEATURE CODE INVALID If you do not enter a feature code before the Long Interdigit timer expires the NOTE feature code assigned to the button is not changed 3 To program other buttons repeat the procedure Speed dial buttons are programmed using the procedure shown below Entering an extension number using the above instructions will create a DSS button for that extension number not a Speed Dial button even if the button was previously programmed as a Speed Dial button NOTE To create a Speed Dial location in a user programmable button 1 While on hook enter the Program Keys feature code 397 Display endpoints show PRESS THE KEY TO PROGRAM 2 Press the desired feature button The display shows the current feature user or speed dial location name and KEY VALUE feature or name 3 Enter the Station Speed Dial feature code 382 or the System Speed Dial feature code 381 The display shows SELECT STN SPEED or SELECT SYS SPEED 4 Enter the desired Speed Dial bin number 0 9 for endpoint 000 999 for system The display shows the current contents of that bin 5 To program a new number in a Station Speed Dial bin follow the instructions given on page 225 Administrators can use the procedures
595. tension IDs For details refer to Call Screening Options on page 261 Automatic Fax Detection This feature is only available when using an external voice processing system NOTE either EM or VPU With Automatic Fax Detection Call Routing Announcement applications and mailboxes can be programmed to automatically route incoming fax calls to a specified extension or to an e mail address If the feature is enabled the mailbox or Call Routing Announcement Application will automat ically listen for fax tone e A mailbox will listen for fax tones during the mailbox greeting and while a message is being recorded If the mailbox detects fax tones the call will be transferred to the speci fied extension or e mail address If the tones are detected after a recording has started the call will be disconnected e Call Routing Applications will be able to detect fax tones during the greeting and up to time out The fax tone detection will also be disabled if the caller performs an action that removes them from the Call Routing Announcement transferring to an extension transferring to a mailbox etc If the fax card is busy when an incoming fax call is received the call will be disconnected Fax E mail Requirements To send faxes to an e mail address using the Fax On Demand feature the Unified Messaging feature described on page 284 must also be enabled Fax Card Requirements To send and receive faxes the voice processin
596. ter calling the forwarded endpoint the message indication appears at the original endpoint instead of the one that received the forwarded call Station to Station Messages System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Leaving Messages To leave a message waiting indication 1 When calling an endpoint if you hear a busy signal Do Not Disturb signal repeating signal of four fast tones and a pause or the call is not answered Inter Tel endpoints Press the MEJE button Or press the Special button and enter the Message feature code 365 The endpoint receives a Message Waiting indication The display shows HANG UP OR WAIT FOR MESSAGE CENTER Single line endpoints Hookflash and enter the Message feature code 365 2 Tohave the called party call you Hang up or press a trunk button or the but ton to disconnect before the Message Wait timer expires The display shows MES SAGE LEFT FOR username To leave the message with the called party s message center Do not hang up When the Message Wait timer expires a private call is automatically placed to the called party s message center If the message center is a Voice Mail hunt group the called party s mailbox is automat ically dialed after the Voice Mail unit answers the call Leave your message with the message center and hang up The called endpoint receives message waiting indications If the message center does not answer the call
597. ter the Default Endpoint feature code 394 If off hook hang up The display shows ENDPOINT DEFAULTED Entering this feature code also cancels Do Not Disturb manual call forwarding background music ring intercom always all calls following account code head set mode and queue requests and restores handsfree mode pages hunt group calls and system forwarding NOTE Selectable Ring Tone The tone of the endpoint ring signals all tones except call waiting can be changed by the user to create distinctive ringing If endpoints are placed close together changing the tone makes each endpoint s ring easier to recognize On all Inter Tel endpoints the tone is changed by entering a feature code and a code as described below There are ten ring tone options 0 9 Selection 0 will turn off the ring signals To change endpoint ring tone 1 While on hook enter the Program Ring Tone feature code 398 The display shows SELECT RING TYPE 0 9 OR SCROLL 2 To select a specific ring tone Enter a number 1 9 for the desired ring tone The dis play shows RING TYPE X SELECTED To scroll through the tones Press the low end of the Volume button or the PREVI OUS button to scroll backward through the tones Press the high end of the Volume button or the NEXT button to scroll forward You cannot scroll to selection 0 you must enter it as described below The display shows RING TYPE X SELECTED To turn off ringing Enter ll or press t
598. tered a transfer fea ture code The pro The pro The pro Continuous grammed grammed grammed flutter indi endpoint in phone is in phone has a cates that 2 busy or DND call ringing the pro Mini DSS unplugged in grammed phone was left off hook Phone is in Message is MSG alphanu waiting meric mode Micro MUTE phone is muted Speaker Model 8600 phone is on Intercom or ready for recall con use Or ference SPEAKER endpoint camped on program or trans ming is in ferred call is progress ringing in Desig Desig Designated Continuous nated end nated end endpoint has flutter indi point is point is in a call ring cates that SPEED busy or DND ing in the desig DIAL unplugged nated phone was left off hook IP Phone Flashing Light Indicators Hardware and Endpoints INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 13 Flashing Light Indicators for IP and Multi Protocol Phones Continued BUTTON STEADY SLOW MEDIUM FAST FLUTTER 0 IPM 30 IPM 120 IPM 240 IPM 60 960 IPM Trunk is in Trunk is in Trunk is Trunk is ring Trunk is on use at use at your recalling ing in hold another endpoint from hold or camped on endpoint in transfer waiting or TRUNK a confer in busy trunk ence at callback your end queue to point or it your end is point unplugged For transfers the IC or CALL button LED goes out when the user hangs up
599. the all calls following account code for that call only All subsequent calls will be associated with the all calls following account code To cancel this feature the feature code is entered without an account code just press EM to ter minate programming To enter an account code and use it for all following calls 1 Inter Tel endpoints Enter the Account Code For All Calls Following feature code 391 Display endpoints show ENTER ACCT CODE Single line endpoints Lift the handset and enter the Account Code For All Calls Fol lowing feature code 391 Enter the account code using the dialpad Inter Tel endpoint users may press a Speed Dial button to enter an account code number that has been stored in that Speed Dial number location f an account code is entered that has fewer than the programmed maximum number of digits press EM to terminate the code Display endpoints show numbers You hear a single progress tone when the code is accepted To cancel the account code for all calls following feature 1 Inter Tel phones Enter the Account Code For All Calls Following feature code 391 Display endpoints show ENTER ACCT CODE Single line phones Lift the handset and enter the Account Code For All Calls Follow ing feature code 391 If on hook lift and replace the handset or press EM to exit If off hook hang up Placing Calls On Hold There are several ways to place intercom and outside calls on hold While o
600. the Background Music On Off feature code 313 or press the analog endpoint s MUSIC button 7f off hook hang up The display shows BACK GROUND MUSIC ON or OFF Music On Hold and Background Music Page 171 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Multilingual Capability Endpoints Page 172 This feature requires O feature units but it is installer programmable to prevent NOTE unintentional language changes by users in an all English system The system provides a choice between American English British English Spanish and Japa nese prompts and displays The system selects the language to use for each call as determined by the trunk endpoint and voice processing system programming as described below Japa nese prompts can be viewed only on the digital display phones Other Inter Tel phones do not support Japanese displays Language Selection The system can be programmed to use a Primary Language and a Secondary Language The available languages are American English British English Mexican Spanish and Japanese An endpoint flag in Database Programming determines the language that will be used by each endpoint For example if the endpoint is programmed for American English all Inter Tel endpoint dis plays will appear in American English Also when the endpoint is used for calling a voice pro cessing system application the voice prompts will be in American English u
601. the Inter Tel Station Speed Dial buttons create a busy lamp field that indicates the status of the endpoints programmed under the buttons as summarized in Table 13 Flashing Light Indica tors for IP and Multi Protocol Phones on page 87 Speed Dial buttons can contain outside phone numbers feature codes extension numbers or hunt group pilot numbers Station Speed Dial codes can be stored in user programmable buttons to create Speed Dial but tons Programming Station Speed Dial Numbers and Names When entering the outside phone numbers use one of the following methods e Use the dialpad to manually dial the number e Onan Inter Tel endpoint press the button to enter the last number up to the first 16 digits dialed or saved at the endpoint e On an Inter Tel endpoint press the R button and enter the System Speed Dial location code 000 999 to store one of the System Speed Dial numbers in a Station Speed Dial location If the number is over 16 digits only the first 16 digits are stored Non display System Speed Dial numbers cannot be stored in Station Speed Dial loca tions If desired outside phone numbers can be preceded with a trunk access code to allow one but ton dialing of outside phone numbers For example a button programmed with 89619000 would select a trunk using the Outgoing Calls feature code 8 then dial 961 9000 An endpoint extension number can be preceded with a pound to always speed dial privat
602. the Overflow timer expires the call is picked up by an overflow station The overflow station is a playback device that answers the call and plays a message Meanwhile the call continues circulating through the hunt group unless it was sent to a voice processing system application and then transferred to a endpoint If the call is answered by an available hunt group endpoint while the overflow station is connected to the call the call will leave the overflow station The Overflow timer restarts each time the unanswered call leaves the endpoint at the overflow station An unanswered call will return to the overflow station each time the Overflow timer expires until the call is answered by a hunt group station or it is sent to the recall destination station The following table shows the path that an incoming hunt group call follows for possible com binations of announcement and overflow stations Table 23 Incoming Hunt Group Call Paths ANNOUNCEMENT OVERFLOW STATION STATION CALE RATE No No Call remains in hunt group Call goes to announcement endpoint Yes No only once after Announcement timer expires Call goes to overflow endpoint after No Yes Som each expiration of Overflow timer Call goes to announcement endpoint once after Announcement timer Yes Yes expires then goes to overflow endpoint after each expiration of Overflow timer If an announcement or overflow station has Call Forward enabled
603. the alarm information 2 While on hook clear the alarm by entering the Clear System Alarm feature code 9850 or the Clear Network Alarm feature code 9851 The display shows SYSTEM or NETWORK ALARM CLEARED 3 Take the appropriate action as indicated in Table 8 Table 8 System Alarms ALARM TEXT DESCRIPTION AND ACTION REQUIRED SYS ALARM 10 XNNNN OFF HOOK A phone has remained off hook and inactive past the expiration of the Inactivity Alarm timer The display and the SMDR indicate which phone is off hook The lamps in the button for that phone on Mini DSS units and on the Speed Dial buttons of other phones flutter continuously Locate the phone and replace the handset in the cradle Calls being transmitted over the secondary voice path are not affected or interrupted by an off hook alarm condition SYS ALARM 11 XNNNN EMERGENCY A user has dialed the Emergency Call feature code The system has seized a trunk and dialed the emergency phone number that will bring responders to the location where the system chassis is installed The default Emergency Call code for US systems is 911 and the default code for UK systems is 999 Emergency dial sequences such as 112 for some European localities can be programmed for the location where the system chassis is installed However if an appropriate emergency phone number is dialed from a remote location to ensure response to that location no alarm will appear at the Adm
604. the associ ated station Mini DSS buttons cannot be changed by the station user Feature Button Programmed with feature codes The feature code appears in the same button location on all phones assigned to the keymap and cannot be changed by the phone user Forward Button Can be programmed with any of the Call Forwarding feature codes The forwarding code used by the button can be changed by the phone user Hunt Group Button Like Mini DSS buttons this button dials a hunt group pilot num ber when pressed and if assigned to a button with a lamp will show the status of that hunt group Individual Trunk Button This button is associated with one trunk It can be used for placing outgoing calls and for picking up calls on hold and answering incoming calls on that trunk Intercom IC Button The button allows access to intercom channels for plac ing and answering calls If an button is not assigned an intercom call will appear under a Call button Page 97 Hardware and Endpoints INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 98 Next Button Not required for digital phones Digital phones use the Volume button for scrolling forward through displays Page Zone Button A page zone button is programmed with one of the page access codes 9600 9609 or 9600 9649 depending on the software version for quick access to page zones 0 9 or 0 49 respectively Previous Button Not required for digital p
605. the button or the Call or individual trunk button or button The automatic call access options outlined below can be programmed at Inter Tel endpoints only Single line endpoints are designed to automatically answer ringing intercom and outside calls by lifting the handset and cannot be changed Automatic Call Access System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 To program outside call access To change the current outside call access option to its opposite toggle on or off enter the Automatic Trunk Access On Off feature code 360 You hear a confirmation tone The display shows AUTO TRNK ACCESS ON or OFF To program intercom call access To change the current intercom access option to its opposite toggle on or off enter the Automatic Intercom Access On Off feature code 361 You hear a confirmation tone The display shows AUTO IC ACCESS ON or OFF Music On Hold and Background Music The Music On Hold feature not only makes waiting on hold as pleasant as possible but it assures the holding party that the call is still connected Endpoint users can listen to background music by entering the Background Music feature code 313 The system can be equipped with one optional external music sources for the Music On Hold feature The music source can be a customer provided radio tape player or other device con nected to the Music On Hold MOH jack on the back of the Inter Tel CS 52
606. the call to other endpoints without the call being pulled back into the hunt group when a hunt group endpoint becomes available and answers the call However if the caller does not dial a valid digit translation option the call will be pulled back if a hunt group member answers Automated Attendant Custom Audiotex Recordings When accessed the Call Routing Announcement application will play a custom audiotex recording and then hang up Call Routing Announcement Page 265 Voice Processing Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Call routing announcements are recorded using the Voice Mail Administrator s mailbox as described on Creating Audiotex Recordings on page 65 Each announcement is assigned to use a custom greeting number in Database Programming Recordings for fax documents should include all dialing instructions The recording should state whether documents can be selected by number and or list all options If fax delivery times are set to specific days or times the recording should also include this information Call Screening Calls transferred from the Automated Attendant or a Call Routing Announcement application can be screened announced or unannounced Separate programming flags determine the methods used for transferring calls to endpoints with mailboxes endpoints with extension IDs and extensions without mailboxes or IDs For details refer to Call Screening Options
607. the handset to stop the process without selecting a message 1 While on hook enter the Reminder Message feature code 305 Display endpoints show SELECT REMINDER MSG 01 20 2 To select a specific message Enter the two digit message code 01 20 Display end points show the selected message and SCROLL OR ACCEPT To scroll through the messages View the available messages by pressing the high end of the Volume button or the NEXT button to scroll forward or pressing the low end of the Volume button or the PREVIOUS button to scroll backward Each message dis plays for 0 5 seconds before another can be selected When the desired message is dis played press EB or ACCEPT Page 244 Reminder Messages System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 3 Enter the time that you want to receive the message If using a station programmed for Japanese these prompts will be reversed and you will set the AM PM before the hour and minutes a Enter the hour and minutes using four digits e g 0900 for 9 00 b If the system is set for 12 hour display format the display shows SELECT AM OR PM Press Kl or the AM button for AM or press Ell or the PM button for PM You hear a progress tone when it is accepted and the display momentarily shows the selected reminder message and time If an invalid time is entered you hear reorder tones and must enter NOTE the time again Display endpoints show INVA
608. the phone is in ITP mode it cannot connect to another vendor s switch Multi protocol phones are configured to use ITP by default To support multi protocol phones in ITP mode a Call Processing software license is required Session Initiation Protocol Mode When the multi protocol phones are in SIP mode the phones use SIP to connect to the Inter Tel SIP Server v1 1 or later The advantage of running in SIP mode on an Inter Tel advanced communications platform is the use of the Shared Extension feature A shared extension allows up to five SIP phones to use the same extension number on the same system Incoming calls to a shared extension are sent to SIP phones simultaneously Once one of the endpoints answers the call the SIP Server cancels the call to all other end points This provides you with mobility so that you do not miss any calls when you are away from your main desk Another advantage of SIP mode is that the endpoint can run on another vendor s switch that supports SIP The disadvantage of SIP mode on an Inter Tel advanced communications platform is the reduced feature set IP and SIP Emergency Calls From A Remote Site Page 80 To locate and quickly respond to a caller needing help emergency response services depend on accurate information from Caller ID or in Europe Calling Line ID CLID features Because of this reliance on Caller ID and CLID data emergency responders can be misdirected or delayed if the Caller ID or CL
609. ther endpoint User Programmable Feature Buttons Page 168 NOTE This feature does not apply to single line endpoints Individual Inter Tel endpoint buttons can be designated user programmable in the keymaps during database programming The installer can program the default feature codes and the endpoint user can reprogram the feature codes as desired Default endpoint feature codes are shown on page 357 Up to 35 user programmable endpoint buttons can be programmed to enter any of the general feature codes Inter Tel display endpoints have a special key if the buttons are in the default state however it can be programmed to use any of the Forward feature codes When the but ton is pressed the display shows a menu of call forwarding options The user must then select the desired option by pressing the corresponding button next to the display If the but ton is programmed to use any other Forward feature code 355 358 the forwarding options will not be displayed when the button is pressed Any Inter Tel endpoint user can make any user programmable button a button that uses any one of the forwarding feature codes 355 358 Secondary extension buttons described on page 98 can be assigned to user programmable but tons during keymap programming If so the endpoint user can determine the primary endpoint that is associated with the secondary extension button by using the feature button programming procedures given below To
610. ther mailboxes Say Accept or press to accept the entry or say Erase or press to erase and re enter your password The system prompts you to record your directory name After the tone record your first and last names Freezing Unfreezing the Network History Page 57 Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 8 When prompted do one of the following e Say Accept or press EM again to accept the name e Say Replay or press i to replay the name you just recorded e Say Append or press El to add to your name e Say Re record or press EJ to erase and re record your name Once you have initialized your mailbox you can access it and the Voice Mail Administrator s menu as indicated below To access the Voice Mail Administrator s mailbox and menu 1 Dialthe voice mail access number 2 Say Login or press to identify yourself as a subscriber 3 Sayorenter the Voice Mail Administrator s mailbox number 4 Enter the password and then press ES 5 Say Nine or press El to reach the Voice Mail Administrator menu No prompt is given for entering the E Recording a Broadcast Messages You have the ability to make a single recorded message and send it to all Standard and Receive Only mailboxes Extension IDs do not receive Broadcast Messages To record a broadcast message 1 Access the Voice Mail Administrator s mailbox and menu 2 Say Broadcast Messag
611. tiat ing trunk s number The extension number of the trunk used during the call is shown For an IP network call using the networking IPR Application this field shows the extension number of the IP con nection used for the call For an outgoing call The first 28 digits of the telephone number are shown if ARS was used to place the call the modified number not the dialed digits are shown A gt at the end of the number indicates that more than 28 digits were dialed SMDR Report Format System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Figure 11 SMDR Report Format Continued START ELAPSED COST ACCOUNT CODE Some digits may be suppressed see the previous page for an explanation For a conference call this field shows the endpoint that brought the trunk into the conference unless the confer ence ends as a call with only one endpoint and one trunk or if all conference parties are put on individual hold in which case the field shows the last party to handle the call For an incoming call This field is determined by the service type of the trunk that was used for the call and whether the digits are being suppressed If the information is not suppressed it is included in the report as follows Table 37 SMDR Report Format SERVICE TYPE CALL RECORD SHOWS RING IN RECORD SHOWS DID DNIS or DNIS not DISA ring in Trunk DID or DNIS Informa tion Ri
612. timer expires at the last forwarding point If the principal endpoint does not have an Attendant the call contin ues to ring at the last forwarding rings principal endpoint until the Recall timer expires Then it recalls the principal endpoint s Attendant If a conditional forwarding is enabled rings principal endpoint until the Sys tem Forward Initiate timer expires Then it recalls the principal end point s Attendant point until the Abandoned Call timer expires If the principal endpoint does not have an Attendant the call continues to ring at the principal endpoint until the Abandoned Call timer expires With Call Forward a user can route incoming intercom and outside calls including direct ring in calls to another endpoint to a hunt group or to an outside phone number if allowed by toll and trunk restrictions In a network setting the network allows the user to forward calls to end points or hunt groups on another node See also page 240 The four forwarding options are e Forward all calls All incoming calls are immediately forwarded e Forward if no answer Incoming calls are forwarded if they are not answered before the Forward No Answer timer expires e Forward if busy Incoming calls are immediately forwarded if the endpoint is busy e Forward if no answer or busy Incoming calls are forwarded immediately if the end point is busy or if calls are not answered before the Forward No An
613. tions To complete the transfer Hang up or press another Call button The display shows CALL TRANSFERRED TO username Programming and Using Mini DSS Buttons Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 To transfer the call to hold Press the Hold button or press ESSI and enter the Indi vidual Hold feature code 336 The call will not ring or send call waiting signals until the Hold timer expires To try another station Press another Mini DSS button To return to the caller Press the lit Call button trunk button or button Reverse transferring picking up a call ringing or holding at another extension EITHER enter the Reverse Transfer feature code 4 and then press the DSS BLF but ton of the station where the call is ringing OR press the desired Mini DSS button and then press BEJ and enter the Reverse Transfer feature code 4 Managing System and Network Alarms To allow one Administrator to monitor multiple nodes the system provides both system alarms and network wide alarms System Alarms The system s Alarm Reporting feature detects equipment failures If there is a system failure that affects service a major alarm is displayed at all affected phones When a minor equipment failure occurs a minor alarm is generated and appears on the pri mary Attendant s display and if enabled at Administrators phones If enabled in the Message Print programming th
614. tions say Options or press nine 071 To return to the previous menu press star To return to the previous menu say Cancel or press star 072 Message canceled N A 073 To mark this message private press one To mark this message private say Private or press one 074 To mark this message for certified delivery To mark this message for certified delivery say press two Certified or press two 075 To mark this message priority press three To mark this message priority say Priority or press three 076 Message marked private N A 077 Message marked certified N A 078 Message marked priority N A 079 To send this message to additional mail boxes To send this message to additional mail boxes press pound say Yes or press pound 080 To rewind your message or recording press To rewind your message or recording say one Backup or press one 081 To pause at any time press two To pause at any time say Pause or press two 082 To fast forward your message or recording To fast forward your message or recording say press three Forward or press three 083 To lower the volume press four To lower the volume say Lower or press four 084 To raise the volume press six To raise the volume say Higher or press six Page 316 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued
615. to record a standard non ASR prompt Recording Custom Voice Mail Prompts Page 67 Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 e Say Speech Recognition or press Kl to record an ASR prompt 5 The current prompt is played You have the following options e Say Replay or press lll to replay the prompt e Say Replace or press Kl to replace the system prompt with a custom prompt Record the prompt and then press EB e Say System or press J to reinstate the system prompt e Say Cancel or press gto leave the prompt unchanged If the voice processing system PC disk is full a prompt will notify you that it cannot accept the recording Hang up and try again later If the newly created prompt is to be available in two formats repeat step 5 to record the other format 6 When finished recording you have the following options e Say Replay or press Kl to replay the recording e Say Append or press El to add to the message e Say Erase or press Kl to erase and re record the message e Say Accept or press EM to accept Page 68 Recording Custom Voice Mail Prompts Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Administrator Programming Planning Sheets The following program planning sheets are designed to help you plan your site s system and voice mail programming Custom Audiotex Recordings If you customize Audiotex r
616. tons to enter the desired number Use the pound button EJ for a hyphen and the asterisk button E for a colon Inter Tel endpoint users can press the button once to leave a space or press the button to backspace b Change to alphanumeric mode Inter Tel endpoints only Press the FIER but ton the button lights or the USE ALPHA MODE menu button then enter the desired characters Refer to the chart above Inter Tel endpoint users can press the button once to advance or twice to leave a space or press the but ton to backspace c Use Speed Dial and or redial numbers Inter Tel endpoints only In either numeric or alphanumeric mode you can speed dial a number using the Speed Dial button or feature code In numeric mode you can press the button to enter the stored characters You may chain Speed Dial and or redial numbers together Terminate programming Inter Tel endpoints Press the Speaker or the ACCEPT button or lift and replace the handset The EEN button lights Display endpoints show selected message Date and time appear on the second line if there is no customized message Single line endpoints Hang up To cancel Do Not Disturb Model 8660 or 8662 While on hook press the lit EENDE button The button goes off and the display shows DO NOT DISTURB OFF Other Inter Tel endpoints While on hook press the lit DITE button or enter the Cancel Do Not Disturb feature code 371 or Do Not Disturb On Off feature c
617. tor ability If desired one endpoint can be assigned as the supervisor for more than one hunt group To monitor a hunt group member s call the supervisor enters the Station Monitor feature code 321 and dials an extension number The supervisor is then connected to the call and can hear both parties but cannot be heard by either one If the monitored call is terminated transferred or placed on hold by the hunt group member the monitor function is terminated In the associated hunt group the supervisor may monitor any active intercom or CO to inter com call both hunting and non hunting including incoming outgoing and DISA to intercom calls Conference calls and calls that do not involve hunt group members cannot be monitored If the supervisor attempts to monitor a endpoint that is not on an active call that allows moni toring the system sends reorder tones and the supervisor must enter the feature code again to try another number If the supervisor attempts to monitor a non hunt group or an idle endpoint in the hunt group the system sends reorder tones and cancels the Endpoint Call Monitor fea ture Station monitoring requires conferencing circuits If resources are not available when a super visor attempts to monitor a endpoint the supervisor s display will show NO CNF CIRCUITS AVAILABLE and the monitor will not be allowed Multiple supervisors can monitor the same endpoint providing that a conference circuit is available for e
618. ts associated hardware and software provides digital capability Dimensions of the DEI are the same as the Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 Commu nication Servers chassis Refer to Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 Communication Servers Chassis Dimensions on page 77 Digital Endpoint Module Each Digital Endpoint Module DEM 16 provides 16 circuits for connecting Executive Pro fessional Standard and Associate Display phones Axxess and Eclipse Basic Digital phones Model 8500 8520 and 8560 phones or Single Line Adapters SLA to the system Digital Expansion Interface Unit Modules Hardware and Endpoints INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Each DEM 16 is also equipped with a single Digital Signal Processor DSP to provide the fol lowing module and or system resources e Shared speakerphones for Axxess and Eclipse Basic Standard and Associate Display and Models 8500 8520 and 8560 phones e Tone generating circuit for providing system tones busy reorder Do Not Disturb etc to the phones connected to the module if necessary It is available in case there are no voice channels available in the system to issue tones e Switching matrix to allow access to any available time slot on the module s PCM highway bus This is provided since the module may need up to 32 simultaneous voice channel connections With the Inter Tel 5000 Network Communications Solutions platform IP phones and end points conne
619. two loop start trunks to provide direct connection to CO local exchange trunk dial tone IMPORTANT Under normal operating conditions the circuits can be programmed and used the same as any loop start local exchange trunks or single line circuits However when system power fails the circuits automat ically connect regardless of any reprogramming that may have been done e One RCA socket for connection of an external paging system e One 1 8 inch coaxial stereo socket for connection to a local music source for imple menting Music On Hold and or Background Music e One DB 15 socket for connection to an external Voice Processing Unit or Enterprise Messaging Unit e One 10 100Base T Ethernet socket on the Processor Module PM 1 Three bays for inserting trunk circuit modules The trunk module bays can be equipped with any suitable combination of loop start CO local exchange trunks T1 T1 PRI or E1 PRI multi channel trunks or BRM S trunks Each LSM 2 module supports two loop start trunks each LSM 4 module supports four loop start trunks each T1 E1 PRI mod ule supports one span and each BRM S supports two BRI trunks One power cord socket Digital Expansion Interface Page 78 Installing the following hardware on the Inter Tel 5000 platform incorporates digital capability into the Internet Protocol IP based Inter Tel 5000 platform Digital Expansion Interface Unit Each Digital Expansion Interface DEI unit and i
620. twork Group Diagnostics feature code by default 9963 or 9163 in Europe The display shows NET GRP CHECK YES 1 NO 2 3 When prompted press 1 or ACCEPT to start the diagnostics feature The display shows NET GROUP DIAG IN PROGRESS When the diagnostics is complete the phone displays one of the following messages NET GROUP CHECK COMPLETED Indicates that all IP devices within the Network Groups are capable of communicating via P2P audio NET GROUP CHECK ERRORS FOUND Indicates that either some of the IP devices are offline or there are NATs firewalls located between the devices Check Message Print to determine which errors occurred Seizing a Device For troubleshooting purposes the Seize Device feature code allows an Administrator to enable diagnostics mode and then seize a specific trunk or extension by entering the module circuit and device number The Seize Device is affected by trunk restriction The Administrator s phone must have outgo ing access permission for the trunk to seize it Toll restriction is applied to any calls placed after the trunk is seized To seize a device 1 While on hook enter the Diagnostics Mode feature code 9900 or 9100 in Europe to turn on diagnostics mode The display shows DIAGNOSTICS ON 2 Press the Special button and enter the Seize Device feature code 9973 or 9173 in Europe The display shows ENTER MODULE Using the Network Group Diagnostics Feature Page 55 Administrator
621. twork Night is 9861 The default feature code for Disable Network Night is 9862 The Night Ring On Off feature code 9860 affects only the node on which the NOTE Administrator resides For a complete explanation of System Administrator fea tures refer to page 23 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA is a programmable feature that allows an outside party to dial into the system from an external DTMF endpoint and then dial extension numbers hunt group pilot numbers and off node device extensions DISA callers do not have access to outgoing trunks or page zones Any of the trunk groups can be programmed to receive incoming DISA calls in day and or night mode When not in use for DISA the trunk group can be used for placing outgoing calls by endpoints with outgoing access permission Due to the natural characteristics of the trunk the volume level of DTMF tones transmitted over the trunk may be substantially reduced before reaching the sys tem This natural degradation in tone volume may adversely affect the reliability NOTE of the DISA feature Other factors which can affect DISA performance are trunk noise and the quality and strength of the DTMF tones generated by the off pre mises endpoint itself If the system cannot recognize a DTMF digit the call is automatically sent to the primary Attendant When a DISA user calls an extension number the call rings as a direct ring in call even if the called endpoint is busy or
622. u may want to cancel a Message Waiting indication that you left on their endpoint If the message was left with the person s message center you cannot cancel the Message Waiting indication only the message center can cancel that message Use the following procedure to cancel a message that you left on an endpoint To cancel a message you left 1 Executive Display Professional Display and Model 8660 or 8662 While on hook press the WEM button Then press the CANCEL MESSAGE menu button The display shows CANCEL MESSAGE ON EXT If desired you can press the IC DIRECTORY Leaving Messages Page 181 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 menu button to use the intercom directory to look up a number Refer to page 227 for instructions Other Inter Tel endpoints While on or off hook at your endpoint enter the Cancel Message feature code 366 The display shows CANCEL MESSAGE ON EXT Single line endpoints Lift the handset and enter the Cancel Message feature code 366 2 Enter the extension number of the endpoint that has the message indication that you want to cancel You hear intercom dial tone if off hook or confirmation tone if on hook The display shows MESSAGE CANCELED FOR username If a message was not present at the called endpoint you hear reorder tones and the display shows NO MESSAGES TO CANCEL Responding to Messages Viewing Waiting Messages To view received m
623. ue RP REX REE4 PE PNR eae ESE ea OSE eRe SS 127 Extension Numbers 3au adora babes wea end en eke SACRE AG EXE EUR do COR IR de da 131 Attendant PholS i400 664eo d RxG cA RR Ee OR RR TR RR RO RR RR TR CR Rc 132 Network and Local Primary Attendants lleeeeeeee eee 152 One Attendant or Multiple Attendant Operation lslseeeeeeeeeees 132 Attendant IRGC MEN ET RT EET TETTE TIER EE ae gee D TIT a 133 Hunt Groups oe 4 6s 5688 yn wx xs x yh ENGST ES ERTS CRS EFRON VC ERR RON RR 134 Hunt Group Call Distributions 2 2k Ex RR TRERE eed RERCATO M RREKEEEDURRESE ES 134 H nt Group Call Processing us vxacesx reese dps sed ex ES Pedo e eux ge 135 Hunt Groups and Call Forwarding leleeeeeeeee e 136 Hunt Group Remove Replace and Do Not Disturb lslleees eese 136 EC D bunt Groups Loa RT ened ed eR Wt ECPRA coo REPRE RE EC IE d nS 137 Announcement and Overflow Stations 0 0 cece cee eee eee nes 137 Voice Processing System Applications as Announcement Overflow Stations 138 UCD Hunt Group Priority List iussus su ce eek eee ase nege dase ee duc eu ATTE 139 UCD Hunt Group Supervisors and Station Monitoring 000 140 Supervisor Batee Ini iiiv seca ka xeka wa RR wear ac RE GR a be wen ede GG RR een ees 141 Station Monitor Enhancements 0 0 ee eee eens 141 Accessing the Barge In Features x essa du exe due AA eke twee at EATER 141 ACD Hunt OFOUDS is zin us ERU ER Ra REY RC
624. ump 9928 9128 Diagnostic Show Version 9947 9147 Diagnostic Heap Statistics 9987 9187 Diagnostic SIP View 9948 9148 Diagnostic ISDN View 9910 9912 Diagnostic Spare 1 3 9110 9112 9962 9162 Diagnostic Major Reset 9974 9174 Diagnostic System History 9945 9145 Diagnostic Mark as Leaks 9983 9183 Diagnostic View Displays 9946 9146 Diagnostic Mark as Quiescent 9973 9173 Seize Device 9964 9164 Diagnostic Minor Reset 9993 9133 System History Freeze 9939 9139 Diagnostic Network Freeze Zone 9998 9198 System History Unfreeze System Histories 9989 9189 Diagnostic Network Unfreeze Zone Part Number 580 8001 d INTER TZL CS 5200 5400 COMMUNICATION SERVERS ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 lnter Tel Inc August 2005 printed in the USA NOTICE This Inter Tel CS 5200 5400 Communication Servers Administrator Guide is released by Inter Tel Inc as a guide for system and voice mail administrators It provides information necessary to properly administer the system The contents of this guide which reflect current Inter Tel standards are subject to revision or change without notice Some features or applications mentioned may require a future release and are not avail able in the initial release Future product features and applications are subject to availability and cost Some features or applications may require additional hardware and or specific software
625. unk access code and a pause if necessary Once the House Phone status has been programmed the Speed Dial number can only be changed while on hook if it is an Inter Tel endpoint or through individual endpoint informa tion special purpose endpoint programming because lifting the handset will cause the end point to dial the designated number Incoming calls take precedence over outgoing calls If using a single line endpoint or an Inter Tel endpoint that is programmed for automatic trunk access see page 170 any ringing call is automatically answered when the handset is lifted or the Speaker button is pressed The House Phone Mode flag determines whether a single line House Phone returns dial tone or does not return dial tone after the called party disconnects At the System level of program ming all House Phones may be set in either Normal mode or Restricted mode At the individ ual Endpoint level of programming a House Phone must be programmed to dial specific digits as soon as the handset is taken off hook The programmed digits may ring a specific endpoint or a Hunt Group that rings multiple endpoints Normal mode allows the user to enter a feature code or place a call after the automatically called number hangs up Restricted mode prevents the user from performing any operation other than placing a House Phone call The System default state is Normal House Phone Redial Redial System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400
626. ur fax server N A 776 If you have changed your password press If you have changed your password say one Password or press one 777 To continue without these messages press To continue without these messages say Continue or press 778 dash N A 779 ampersand N A 780 at N A 781 left parenthesis N A Page 349 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 782 right parenthesis N A 783 underscore N A 784 space N A 785 Tilde N A 786 a N A 787 b N A 788 c N A 789 apostrophe N A 790 lower A N A 791 lower B N A 792 lower C N A 793 d N A 794 e N A 795 F N A 796 exclamation point N A 797 lower D N A 798 lower E N A 799 lower F N A 800 g N A 801 h N A 802 N A 803 star N A Page 350 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 804 lower G N A 805 lower H N A 806 lower N A 807 j N A 808 k N A 809 N A 810 pound N A 811 lower J N A 812 lower K N A 813 lower L N A 814 m N A 815 n N A 816 o N A 818 lower M N A 819 lo
627. urce When a message is left on the voice mail unit for an user who has an assigned mailbox the called endpoint receives the Message Waiting indications If it is a display phone the dis play shows MESSAGE RECEIVED FROM alternate message source rather than from the voice mail circuit When the user retrieves the message an intercom call is placed to the alter nate message source An endpoint s message center or alternate message source does not need to be on the same node as the endpoint It can be a phone hunt group Voice Processing application or any off node device Canceling a Waiting Message Page 183 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Off Hook Voice Announce OHVA Page 184 The Off Hook Voice Announce OHVA feature allows an intercom caller either single line or Inter Tel phone to establish voice contact with the called Inter Tel phone user even though the user already has a call in progress on the handset The called party can then talk freely on both connections using the handset for the original call and the speakerphone for the OHVA intercom call The caller on the handset call will be able to hear the OHVA call In a network intercom callers can establish OHVA calls to Inter Tel phones on other nodes A PC Data Port Module PCDPM must be installed on a digital display phone to provide the secondary voice path needed for the OHVA feature NOTE IP and
628. urce 136 as message center 136 average wait time 139 call circulation 134 call distribution 134 call forwarding 136 call processing 135 campon 135 capacity 134 DISA calls 165 distributed 134 Do Not Disturb 235 forwarding points 213 Hunt Group Button 98 incoming call paths 138 keymap buttons 98 linear 134 pilot number 134 queue position 139 remove replace 136 ringin 135 station lists 134 supervisor 140 system forwarding point 213 using extension lists 135 Hybrid Balance 40 IC Button 98 IC Key 98 Importing Fax Documents 67 Individual Endpoint Forwarding Points 213 Page 364 Individual Hold 193 194 Individual Trunk Buttons 98 Individual Trunk Keys 98 Information Messages 250 Integrated Solution 287 Intercom feature code directory 227 number display 166 Speed Dial 227 Intercom Calls 175 automatic answer 170 callback queue 178 campon 178 messages 180 off hook voice announce 184 placing calls 177 private 175 receiving calls 176 Intercom Camp On and Queue Callback 178 Internal Modem enable disable 56 reset 57 Internet Protocol see IP 91 Inter Tel Endpoints 103 Inter Tel Protocol ITP Mode 82 Supported Features 85 IP 89 IP Internet Protocol endpoints 91 IP device limitations 92 IP Devices 15 MGCP trunk gateway 84 IP and SIP endpoints 91 Feature Exceptions 88 IPSLA 91 peer to peer P2P 92 IP and SIP Features 91 IP endpoints IP PhonePlus 84 IP Single Line Adapter SLA 85 Model 8601 SoftPhone for Pock
629. ust 2005 IP Resources This guide refers frequently to the term IP resources which has an important meaning in computer telephony CT jargon In common English usage the word resources refers to a supply that can be drawn on when needed Computing resources constitute the needed supply to run CT applications and different applications require different amounts of resources The supply of computing resources that is not actually in use is available to run applications A resource might be understood as an abstract way to describe the amount of computing capability that voice processing software and hardware need to work together Resources are used to describe an interface of a physical device used for call processing such as a phone as seen by a software application Examples of such interfaces include a fax processing resource voice recognition resource or text to speech resource The communication server installed Inter Tel CS 5200 or CS 5400 determines the amount of IP resources the Inter Tel 5000 can supply to support voice processing tasks Internet Protocol Resource Application The Internet Protocol Resource Application IPRA supplies IP functionality for the system and communicates to the IP phones IP trunk gateways and other IP endpoints across 10 100Base T Ethernet Inter Tel 5000 IP Resource Usage On the Inter Tel 5000 IP resources are used to provide the following call processing capabili ties e IP endpoi
630. utton the fixed button will always light when the endpoint is forwarded However the user programmable button will be lit only when the forwarding option activated by that but ton has been selected For example if the user has the Forward AII Calls feature programmed under a user programmable button that button will light if either the fixed or programmable button is used to select that feature However if the fixed button or a feature code is used to set the Forward If Busy feature only the fixed button will light Forward to an Outside Number Page 218 When programming an endpoint for call forward to an outside phone number a trunk access code is programmed before the phone number If the endpoint is called while the selected trunk group is busy the call will not be forwarded Calls will ring at the forwarded endpoint until the call is answered or the caller hangs up The forwarded endpoint s display shows FORWARD TO BUSY TRUNK The forwarded endpoint s not the intercom caller s trunk and toll restrictions are checked when an intercom call is forwarded to an outside number FWD Button System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 When an outside call is forwarded to an outside number the Unsupervised CO timer is acti vated When the timer expires the call recalls the Attendant If the Attendant does not answer the recall before the Abandoned Call timer expires the call is disconnected
631. ve the COS programming The display shows DATABASE UPDATED and then returns to the TOLL RESTRICTION OPTION prompt Press EM again to exit to the ENTER ENDPOINT OPTION prompt When the display shows ENTER ENDPOINT OPTION press EM again to exit to the ENTER ENDPOINT EXTENSION prompt You can then program another endpoint by repeating these steps or press jj or ACCEPT once more to exit to the ENTER DATA BASE OPTION prompt When finished with all programming press EM while the ENTER DATABASE OPTION prompt is displayed This ends the programming session Page 29 Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 8 Ifa system reset is required the display shows ENTER SYS RESET OPTION Do one of the following Delayed Reset Press Kill or the DELAYED menu button to delay the reset The dis play shows DELAYED RESET SCHEDULED The system will be reset at the pre programmed time Immediate Reset Press Ell or the IMMEDIATE menu button to reset the system now NOTE A system reset will drop all calls in progress Page 30 Station Programming Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Figure 1 Endpoint Database Programming Flowchart Enter Program Database feature code 9932 Press 1 or ENDPOINT menu button Press 1 or ENDPOINT FLAGS menu button menu button P
632. ves Using a cascade a series of up to nine telephone numbers Voice Mail calls each number until it successfully connects to a device such as a pager answering machine etc If for some reason Voice Mail is not able to use remote notification the mailbox receiveS a message stating that notification could not be completed For more informa tion about Remote Messaging options refer to the applicable Inter Tel phone user guide Mailbox and Extension ID Personal Options Page 59 Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 60 Fax Destination Number If an endpoint is programmed to receive incoming faxes the user can program the fax destination number that will receive the faxes that are sent to the mailbox Message Search Order This option allows the user to determine how to retrieve saved or new messages based on the date and time they were received The message search order can be the earliest received messages first First In First Out or the latest received messages first Last In First Out Transfer Method The Transfer Method personal option determines how the system will handle incoming calls that Enterprise Messaging EM may execute For example calls may be transferred to a mailbox or Extension ID by voice mail reply a Call Rout ing Application Automated Attendant operator transfer etc Transfer Method options include Unannounced Announce Only and Screened
633. vice commission or corporation commission for informa tion If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify the customer in advance that service may be temporarily discontinued But if advance notice is not practical the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible Also the customer will be advised of the right to file a complaint with the FCC if necessary Page ix FCC Regulations INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures which may affect the operation of this equipment If so the customer shall be given advance notice so that any necessary modifications can be made in order to maintain uninterrupted service If trouble is experienced with this equipment contact a local authorized factory service representative for repairs and or warranty information The customer users and unau thorized technicians should not repair make adjustments to or attempt to service this equipment in any way In the event of trouble with the telephone line s this equipment must be disconnected from the telephone line s If trouble ceases the equipment must be repaired by an authorized factory service representative If the trouble continues to occur with the equipment disconnected the telephone company should be notified that they have a problem If this is the case
634. vided by Caller ID if enabled at the system wide flag level 6 Outside Party Number provided by ANI service if enabled at the system wide flag level 7 Call Routing Table Name if the name is not blank 8 Trunk Group Name if the name is not blank 9 Default Trunk Group Name TG XXXXX Display Line 2 The following criteria are used to display the number on the bottom line of the ring in display This assumes that all of the necessary flags are properly set 1 Outside Party Number provided by the Desktop Application if available 2 Outside Party Number provided by Caller ID if enabled at the system wide flag level 3 Outside Party Number provided by ANI service if enabled at the system wide flag level Inter Tel Endpoint Displays Page 153 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 4 Number Absence Reason such as Caller ID OUT OF AREA or PRIVATE blocked message 5 RINGING IN display ANI and Caller ID information is also sent to the Voice Mail application to provide the caller s phone number as part of the message envelope Single Line Endpoint Displays Caller ID to single line endpoints uses the calling party information that the system receives from the central office CO Once programmed on hook single line endpoints display the calling party s phone number after the first ring when they receive an incoming CO call The Caller ID information is also displaye
635. ward No Answer timer is restarted if the transferring endpoint completes the transfer before the timer expires the transferred call will then be forwarded when the timer expires Agent Help Request calls queue callbacks and recalls do not forward except that a recall at an Attendant s endpoint will forward to another endpoint Some Inter Tel endpoints use a combination of the default key and forwarding menu keys When the default key is pressed the display shows a menu of call forwarding options The user must then select the desired option by pressing the corresponding key next to the display If the key is programmed to use any other Forward feature code 355 358 the forwarding options will not be displayed when the key is pressed the Inter Tel endpoint will operate the same as any other Inter Tel endpoint Any Inter Tel endpoint user can make any user programmable button a button that uses one of the forwarding feature codes 355 358 Refer to the procedures on page 168 for pro gramming user programmable buttons A user programmed button is lit only when the endpoint is programmed for the call forwarding condition enabled by that button For example if a user programmed but ton is set to forward calls when the endpoint is busy the button will be lit when the Forward If Busy feature is enabled but not if the Forward If No Answer feature is enabled If an Inter Tel endpoint user has both a fixed button and a user programmable b
636. warded 255 This is the message center calling for 256 If you are the correct person press POUND 257 One 258 TWO 259 Three 260 Four 261 Five 262 Six 263 Seven 264 Eight 265 Nine 266 Ien 267 Eleven 268 Twelve 269 Thirteen Page 303 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 42 Voice Prompts BVM EM and VPU Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT 270 Fourteen 271 Fifteen 272 Sixteen 273 Seventeen 274 Eighteen 275 Nineteen 276 Iwenty 277 Thirty 278 Forty 279 Fifty 280 Sixty 281 Seventy 282 Eighty 283 Ninety 284 Hundred 285 This mailbox is currently full and cannot receive new messages 286 Oh 287 of which are priority 288 Priority message received 289 Otherwise press STAR 290 When you are finished entering mailbox numbers press POUND 291 Otherwise press POUND 292 For PM press 2 293 For Sunday press 1 294 For Monday press 2 295 For Tuesday press 3 296 For Wednesday press 4 297 For Thursday press 5 298 For Friday press 6 Page 304 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 42 Voice Prompts BVM EM and VPU Continued
637. wav file builds an e mail message attaches the wav file and sends the e mail message to the address specified in the mailbox s E mail Address field When the e mail message is sent the original message is deleted from the mailbox If the e mail message cannot be delivered to the specified address it is stored as a voice mail mes sage in the mailbox and is not deleted Mailboxes programmed for Forward Only cannot use the Remote Notifi NOTE cation feature Because all messages are automatically sent to the E mail Address no voice mail message exists to trigger the Remote notification Page 288 Integrated Solution Installation Example Voice Processing Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 e Forward amp Copy The voice mail or Record A Call message is stored in the mailbox and the EM unit converts the file to wav attaches it to an e mail message and deliv ers the e mail message to the address specified in the mailbox s E mail Address field Due to the nature of network connections the voice messaging software is designed to handle a network failure gracefully If the network link from the EM unit to the e mail server is down the EM unit stores the messages in a queue If the network is not up in 15 minutes the EM unit delivers all pending messages in the queue back to the voice mailboxes and tempo rarily disables the e mail queue until the network is available This means tha
638. wer N N A 820 lower O N A 821 p N A 822 q N A 823 r N A 824 s N A 825 lower P N A 826 lower Q N A Page 351 Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued Page 352 PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 827 lower R N A 828 lower S N A 829 T N A 830 u N A 831 V N A 832 question mark N A 833 lower T N A 834 lower U N A 835 lower V N A 836 w N A 837 x N A 838 Y N A 839 z N A 840 lower W N A 841 lower X N A 842 lower Y N A 843 lower Z N A 844 colon N A 845 period N A 846 comma N A 847 forward slash N A 848 backward slash N A Voice Processing Prompts INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Table 43 Voice Prompts Non ASR and ASR Continued PROMPT ID CONTENT NON ASR CONTENT ASR 849 plus sign N A 850 Please hold while check your e mail N A 851 one unreadable message N A 852 unreadable messages N A 853 You have no unreadable messages N A 854 To manage unreadable messages press six N A 855 unreadable message N A 856 If you are finish please press pound Other N A wise press the next key to continue spelling 857 Your quota grace limit has been reached N A 858 please hold while check your messages N A 85
639. wers the transfer the application plays the caller s name and completes the transfer e Screened The caller is asked to state his or her name Then the call is transferred to the associated extension number When the endpoint user answers the transfer the applica tion plays the caller s name The endpoint user has the options of replaying the name sending the call to Voice Mail if the extension has a mailbox transferring the call to another extension accepting the call or rejecting the call e Unannounced The call is transferred to the associated extension number after the Voice Processing Unit checks the endpoint to determine its status busy available ring ing etc This is the default method In a network setting an external voice processing system can provide call screening for a desti nation extension on another node However the node where the external voice processing sys tem is connected must have an off node device programmed for the destination extension and access to the remote node To receive an Announce Only Screened or Unannounced transferred call Depending on the Transfer Method programmed for the mailbox or extension ID one of the following will occur when a transferred call is received from the automated attendant or a Call Routing Announcement application e Announce Only Calls When the caller enters your extension number the system asks the caller to record his or her name The Voice Proc
640. xtensions An extension number can be relocated swapped to another end point To swap extensions the two affected endpoints must meet the following criteria Both devices must reside on the same node as the Administrator performing the swap Both devices must be the same type i e both digital both Inter Tel Protocol ITP mode both SIP mode or both single line phones Neither device can be the Administrator phone performing the swap The System Wide Database Programming process is summarized in the flowchart shown on page 37 For a Program Planning Sheet turn to page 69 If necessary you can press or the Speaker button to cancel programming and discard any unsaved changes at any time during the following procedure To program the system database System Programming NOTE If you want to change the Japanese DND or reminder message settings make sure your phone is set in Japanese mode For an explanation of the Change Language feature refer to Secondary Language Selection on page 172 While on hook enter the Program Database feature code 9932 or 9132 in Europe If a password is required the display shows ENTER PASSWORD Use the dialpad to enter your 1 8 digit password and press EM If you enter an incorrect password the dis play shows INVALID PASSWORD If a password is not required skip this step The display shows ENTER DATABASE OPTION Display phones show the options ENDPOINT SYSTEM and TRUNK Press
641. y not answering it or by entering the Agent Help Reject feature code 376 The call appears under the button or a Call button if there is no button e Non Display endpoints and single line endpoints The Agent Help Request private call rings just as any private intercom call would there is no way to distinguish it If the Agent Help Extension is an extension list or hunt group the private call circulates as usual until it is answered If an Agent Help request is not answered before the Forward No Answer timer expires the request is considered rejected To signal to the other parties that the Agent Help Extension has joined the call a system wide Agent Help Tone flag can be enabled during database programming If the flag is disabled there will be no alerting tone A timer called the Agent Help Tone Interval timer determines how often this tone is generated If the timer is set to 0 the tone is generated only when the Agent Help Extension enters the call a party is added to the call or the call is placed on hold and retrieved Page 209 System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Page 210 If the Agent Help feature code is assigned to an Inter Tel endpoint feature button with a lamp the lamp status shows the following e The lamp flashes when the Agent Help Extension is being called e The lamp goes off if the Agent Help request is rejected or the feature is terminated e Thelampis li
642. you hear reorder tones and the display shows PAGE ZONE NOT PROGRAMMED there are no stations in the selected page zone If the display shows PAGE ZONE BUSY TRY AGAIN LATER the necessary system resources are busy or the paging zone is being used by another station Users cannot camp on to or queue the paging system 5 Hang up Page 234 Paging System Features INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Remove from Paging An Inter Tel endpoint user can prevent the endpoint from receiving pages or allow it to receive pages again using these feature codes If the endpoint is assigned to more than one page zone all zones are removed or replaced the user cannot toggle individual zones To halt or enable zone pages 1 While on or off hook enter the Page Receive On Off feature code 325 to prevent the endpoint from receiving pages You hear a confirmation tone and the display shows PAGE RECEIVE ON or OFF 2 foff hook hang up Do Not Disturb Placing a phone in Do Not Disturb mode halts all pages incoming intercom calls camped on calls and transferred calls to that station Queue callbacks recalls and direct ring in calls are not blocked Another user calling the station while it is in Do Not Disturb hears a repeating signal of four fast tones and a pause Display phones show the Do Not Disturb message The user cannot Camp On but can queue or leave a message at the station NOTE Direct ring
643. ystem Forward Calls 216 Voice Mail Networks Feature Devices 21 Tables Audio Diagnostics audio problem numbers 253 Default Extension Numbers 131 Text Message Record Field 251 TFTP Server 93 Time Display 26 166 Time Display Network 26 Time Message Record Field 251 Toll Restriction absorbed digits 158 call forwarding 218 programming 29 Speed Dal override 221 Toll restriction controlling with ARS 156 COS override for Emergency Calls 158 overridden when dialing an Emergency Number 162 Speed Dial Override 158 Trunk Groups subject to toll restriction 157 using endpoint COS 158 utilizing Trunk Group COS 158 Voice Processor 158 Tone Generator 81 Index INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 Transfer 197 attendant transfer timer 133 conference 202 conference to voice mail 197 DSS BLF Unit 50 methods 200 261 266 recall 199 to a system forward 197 to hold 101 197 toring 101 197 198 to voice mail 50 198 voice processor timer 260 Transfer Recall 199 Transfer to Hold 199 Transfer to Ring 198 Transferring Conference Calls 197 Transfers and Outside Calls 197 Transfer to Connect Allowed Endpoint Flag 198 Transient Call Indication 168 Transient Call Indication on Call Answer 100 168 201 Trunk 40 Trunk Camp On 190 Trunk Camp On and Busy Trunk Callback Queue 190 Trunk Features 152 Trunk Group Buttons 99 Trunk Group Keys 98 Trunk Groups allowed answer 154 outgoing access 154 private 155 progr
644. ystem to select the desired route for ARS placing a call as programmed in the database Trunk Group Access 1 208 92001 Selects an available trunk from a programmed 92208 group of trunks for placing an outside call Emergency Call 911 Entering this feature code selects an outgoing 999 oras trunk and automatically dials the programmed applicable Emergency Call number which is routed by default out Trunk Group 1 CAUTION IP and SIP endpoints at remote sites require gateway trunks gateways and appropri ate programming to reach their local emergency responders Outgoing Call 8 Selects an outgoing trunk according to the pro grammed outgoing access mode for that end point Inter Tel endpoints use the OUTGOING button or a Call button Endpoint Feature Codes The following pages list the general feature codes When a default feature button can be used in place of the feature code it is indicated at the end of the explanation Refer to page 95 for a listing of the default endpoint feature buttons Table 19 Endpoint Feature Code Definitions FEATURE NAME CODE DEFINITION ing Account Code All Calls Follow 391 Allows the endpoint user to enter a forced or optional account code that will apply to all calls following the entry of this feature code and will appear in the SMDR To disable the All Calls Following feature the feature code is entered again without an account code Account Code
645. zen nodes in it the display shows SOME NODES ALREADY UNFROZEN To determine the individual freeze status of the nodes check the message print output NOTE Do not perform this procedure unless directed to do so by service personnel Freezing Unfreezing the System History Administrator Procedures INTER TEL CS 5200 5400 ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE ISSUE 1 1 August 2005 To freeze or unfreeze network history 1 While on hook enter the Diagnostics Mode feature code 9900 9100 to turn on diag nostics mode The display shows DIAGNOSTICS ON Enter the Network Freeze Zone System Histories feature code 9939 9139 or Network Unfreeze Zone System Histories feature code 9989 9189 Display shows SELECT FRZ ZONE 0 9 Enter the number of the zone you want to freeze or unfreeze The display shows FREEZE ZONE XX IS FROZEN or UNFROZEN If you attempt change the state of the system history to its current status the display shows FREEZE ZONE XX ALREADY FROZEN or UNFROZEN Enter the Diagnostics Mode feature code 9900 9100 to turn off diagnostics mode The display shows DIAGNOSTICS OFF Voice Mail Administrator Procedures If your phone has been programmed as the Voice Mail Administrator you can use special fea tures that are not provided to other voice mailbox owners The Voice Mail Administrator mail box has all the end user mailbox features plus the ability to do the following Record a broadcast message Perform m

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

FR-SX    

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file